Models
7155/7165/7255/7272
JANUARY 2004
CSM-7155/7165/7255/7272
1 OUTLINE
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING LIST OF DIFFERENCE for 7155/7165 and
. . . . .S-1 7255/7272.....................................................................1
ITEMS
EXPLANATION
WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . .S-1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................1-2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CENTRAL CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW ....................1-4
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-2 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM ......................................1-5
[1] Fixing/Web Drive Section ...........................1-5
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-10
[2] Drum Drive Section ....................................1-6
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . S-10 [3] Developing Drive Section ...........................1-6
2 UNIT
[4] Paper Feed/Vertical Conveyance/Tray Up
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 Drive Section ..............................................1-7
[5] Bypass Paper Feed/ADU Pre-registration
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . .S-13
Drive Section ..............................................1-8
[6] Charging and Transfer/Separation Wire
Cleaning Drive Section...............................1-9
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[7] ADU Conveyance Drive Section ..............1-10
[8] Paper Exit Drive Section ..........................1-11
[9] Toner Supply Drive Section......................1-11
[10] Optics Drive Section.................................1-12
2. UNIT EXPLANATION
EXTERNAL SECTION........................................... 2-A-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-A-1
DRIVE SECTION................................................... 2-B-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-B-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-B-1
[3] M2 (Drum) Control.................................. 2-B-2
[4] M4 (Fixing) Control................................. 2-B-3
SCANNER SECTION ............................................2-C-1
[1] Composition ...........................................2-C-1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-C-1
[3] M11 (Scanner) Control ...........................2-C-2
[4] Exposure control ....................................2-C-5
[5] Original Read Control.............................2-C-5
[6] APS Control............................................2-C-6
[7] AE Control ..............................................2-C-7
WRITE UNIT..........................................................2-D-1
[1] Composition ...........................................2-D-1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-D-1
[3] M15 (Polygon) Control ...........................2-D-2
[4] Image Write Control ...............................2-D-3
DRUM UNIT........................................................... 2-E-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-E-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-E-1
[3] Separation Claw Control ........................ 2-E-2
[4] Paper Guide Plate Control ..................... 2-E-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION..................................... 2-F-1
[1] Composition ........................................... 2-F-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-F-1
[3] Charging Control .................................... 2-F-2
[4] Transfer/Separation Control ................... 2-F-3
[5] M14 (Charger Cleaning) Control ............ 2-F-4
[9] FM4 (Developing Suction) Control ........ 2-G-8 [4] Fixing Temperature Control ...................2-O-4
TONER SUPPLY UNIT..........................................2-H-1 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL ............................. 2-P-1
[1] Composition............................................2-H-1 [1] Parts Energized when SW1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-H-1 (Main Power) is OFF ............................. 2-P-1
[3] Toner Level Detection Control................2-H-2 [2] Parts that Operate when SW1 (Main
[4] M12 (Toner Supply) Control ...................2-H-3 Power)/SW2 (Sub Power) is ON ............ 2-P-2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT .................... 2-I-1 [3] Cooling Fan Control ............................... 2-P-3
[1] Composition............................................. 2-I-1 [4] Operation Panel Control......................... 2-P-6
[2] Mechanisms ............................................ 2-I-1 [5] Counter Control...................................... 2-P-8
[3] TGR (Toner Guide Roller) Control........... 2-I-2 [6] Option Control ........................................ 2-P-9
[4] Other Control........................................... 2-I-2
TRAY 1/2 (7155, 7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) 3. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED UNIT............................................... 2-J-1 EXTERNAL SECTION........................................... 3-A-1
[1] Composition............................................ 2-J-1 [1] Replacing the Ozone Filter..................... 3-A-1
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-J-1 [2] Replacing the Developing Suction
[3] First Paper Feed Control ........................ 2-J-3 Filter .................................................... 3-A-1-1
[4] Paper Up Drive Control .......................... 2-J-5 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the External
[5] Paper Size Detection Control ................. 2-J-6 Covers.................................................... 3-A-2
[6] No paper detection control ..................... 2-J-7 [4] Changing the Operation Panel Attachment
TRAY 1/2 PAPER FEED UNIT (7255/7272).......... 2-J-8 Angle and Removing/Reinstalling .......... 3-A-4
[1] Composition............................................ 2-J-8 [5] Resetting the Circuit Breaker ................. 3-A-6
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-J-8 DRIVE SECTION................................................... 3-B-1
[3] First Paper Feed Control ...................... 2-J-10 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum
[4] Horizontal Conveyance Control (Tray 1) .... 2-J-12 Motor(M2)............................................... 3-B-1
[5] Paper Up Drive Control ........................ 2-J-14 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
[6] No paper detection control ................... 2-J-15 Input Gear .............................................. 3-B-2
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165).............2-K-1 SCANNER SECTION............................................3-C-1
[1] Composition............................................2-K-1 [1] Screws that Must not be Removed ........3-C-1
[2] Mechanisms ...........................................2-K-1 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the
[3] First Paper Feed Control ........................2-K-3 CCD Unit ................................................3-C-1
[4] Paper Up Drive Control ..........................2-K-5 [3] Replacing the Exposure Lamp ...............3-C-2
[5] Paper Size Detection Control .................2-K-6 [4] Removing and Reinstalling
[6] No paper detection control .....................2-K-7 the Exposure Unit...................................3-C-3
BY-PASS TRAY..................................................... 2-L-1 [5] Installing the Optics Wire ....................... 3-C-4
[1] Composition............................................ 2-L-1 [6] Cleaning the Slit Glass
[2] Mechanisms ........................................... 2-L-1 and Platen Glass....................................3-C-6
[3] First Paper Feed Control ........................ 2-L-2 [7] Replacing the Scanner Motor (M11) ......3-C-6
[4] Paper Up/Down Control.......................... 2-L-3 WRITE SECTION..................................................3-D-1
[5] Paper Size Detection Control ................. 2-L-4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling
[6] No paper detection control ..................... 2-L-5 the Write Unit .........................................3-D-1
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ................. 2-M-1 [2] Cleaning the Dust-proof Glass ...............3-D-2
[1] Composition........................................... 2-M-1 DRUM UNIT .......................................................... 3-E-1
[2] Mechanisms .......................................... 2-M-1 [1] Removing and Reinstalling
[3] Vertical Conveyance Control................. 2-M-2 the Drum Unit ......................................... 3-E-1
1 OUTLINE
[2] Installing the Coupling ............................3-E-2 PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2
[3] Removing, Cleaning, and Reinstalling (7255/7272) ............................................................3-J-7
the Drum.................................................3-E-3 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Separation Feed Unit.................................................3-J-7
Claws and Separation Claw Solenoid.....3-E-4 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Feed Tray 1 .............................................3-J-7
EXPLANATION
Control Sensor Board .............................3-E-6 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Feed
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CORONA UNIT......................................................3-F-1 Tray 2 ......................................................3-J-8
[1] Screws that Must not be Removed.........3-F-1 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Charging Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber ......3-J-9
Corona Unit ............................................3-F-1 [5] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Charge Feed Prevention Roller Rubber.............3-J-10
2 UNIT
Control Plate...........................................3-F-2 [6] Replacing the Pre-registration and
[4] Replacing the Charging Wires................3-F-2 Feed Clutches (MCs) ............................3-J-11
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Charging [7] Replacing the Horizontal Conveyance MC/L
Wire Cleaning Unit.................................3-F-3 and/ R....................................................3-J-11
[6] Removing and Reinstalling the PCL.......3-F-3 [8] Replacing the Wires ..............................3-J-12
[7] Cleaning the Charging Corona PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)....... 3-K-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Unit/PCL .................................................3-F-4 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[8] Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer/ Feed Unit................................................ 3-K-1
Separation Corona Unit ..........................3-F-4 [2] Removing and Reinstalling
[9] Removing and Reinstalling the Plunger Paper Feed Tray 3 ................................. 3-K-1
Prevention Plate .....................................3-F-5 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[10] Replacing the Transfer/Separation Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber .... 3-K-2
Wires and Transfer/Separation Wire [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
Cleaning Block........................................3-F-5 Feed Prevention Roller Rubber.............. 3-K-2
[11] Removing and Reinstalling the TSL [5] Replacing the Pre-registration and
Unit .........................................................3-F-7 Feed Clutches (MCs) ............................. 3-K-3
DEVELOPING UNIT ............................................. 3-G-1 [6] Replacing the Wires ............................... 3-K-4
[1] Screws that must not be Removed........ 3-G-1 PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 AND 4
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the (7255/7272) ........................................................... 3-K-7
Developing Unit ..................................... 3-G-1 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[3] Replacing the Developer ....................... 3-G-2 Feed Unit................................................ 3-K-7
[4] Cleaning the Developing Unit [2] Removing and Reinstalling
Bias shaft............................................... 3-G-3 Paper Feed Tray 3and 4 ........................ 3-K-7
TONER SUPPLY UNIT......................................... 3-H-1 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
[1] Replacing and Cleaning Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber .... 3-K-8
the Toner Cartridge ............................... 3-H-1 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT..................... 3-I-1 Feed Prevention Roller Rubber.............. 3-K-8
[1] Removing and Reinstalling [5] Replacing the Pre-registration and
the Cleaning Blade .................................. 3-I-1 Feed Clutches (MCs) ............................. 3-K-9
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner [6] Replacing the Wires ............................... 3-K-9
Guide Roller (TGR).................................. 3-I-2 BY-PASS FEED TRAY.......................................... 3-L-1
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the by-pass
(7155/7165)............................................................ 3-J-1 Feed Tray .............................................. 3-L-1
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [2] Replacing the Paper Feed Roller/Paper
Feed Unit ................................................ 3-J-1 Feed Roller Rubber ................................ 3-L-1
[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [3] Replacing the Double Feed Prevention
Feed Trays 1 and 2 ................................ 3-J-1 Roller Rubber ......................................... 3-L-2
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION................. 3-M-1
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber...... 3-J-2 [1] Removing and Reinstalling the Vertical
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double Conveyance Section ............................. 3-M-1
Feed Prevention Roller Rubber .............. 3-J-2 [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Vertical
[5] Replacing the Pre-registration and Conveyance MC (MC11, MC12) ........... 3-M-1
Feed Clutches (MCs).............................. 3-J-3
[6] Replacing the Wires................................ 3-J-4
IMPORTANT NOTICE
4 Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this service manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this service
manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this service manual is intended.
Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
SAFETY WARNINGS
4 • Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
4 • Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
4 b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2.Installation Requirements
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
CAUTION: Ventilation
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
[4] CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore,
safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the
safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits [2] Protection by L2, L3 and L4 (Fixing
to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious acci-
Heater Lamps) Overheating Preven-
dents.
tion Circuit
[1] Overall protection circuit
[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamps) overheating TS2
DCPS
prevention circuit TS1
TH2
Control
[1] Overall Protection Circuit section L2
AC driver
section L3
CBR1
TH1
L4
NF
1. Protection by software
The output voltage from TH1 (fixing temperature
CBR2
sensor 1) is read by the CPU. If this voltage is
abnormal, L2 (fixing heater lamp 1), L3 (fixing
heater lamp 2), L4 (fixing heater lamp 3) and RL1
1. Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit
(main relay) are turned OFF.
breakers)
CAUTION:
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta- Do not change the gap between the roller
neously when an excessive current flows due to a and TH1. When replacing TH1, check the
short in the AC line. specified mounting dimensions. The RL1
CAUTION: function must not be deactivated under
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not any circumstances.
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from TH1 and TH2 (fixing
temperature sensors) are compared with the abnor-
mality judgment reference value in the comparator
circuit. If the output voltage from TH1 or TH2
exceeds the reference value, L2 (fixing heater lamp
1), L3 (fixing heater lamp 2), L4 (fixing heater
lamp 3) and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF in
hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH2 face contact-
ing the roller, and replace TH2 if any
abnormality is detected.
Since TH1 (fixing temperature sensor)
face does not contact the roller, check the
distance from the roller and the sensor
orientation if any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
under any circumstances.
3. Protection by TS1 (thermostat/U) and TS2
(thermostat/L)
When the temperature of the fixing roller (upper/
lower) exceeds the specified value, TSs are turned
OFF, thus interrupting the power to L2 (fixing
heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2), and L4
(fixing heater lamp/3) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2. Do not change
the distance between the roller and TS
(thermostat).
S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT
your finger into the
two RADF hinge WARNING
portions; This area generates
otherwise you may high voltage. If touched,
be injured. electrical shock may
occur. DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
VORSICHT
CAUTION PRECAUCION
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
CAUTION VORSICHT
High temperature!
Do not touch. Use care PRECAUCION
when clearing paper.
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
Temp rature lev e!
Risque de br lure. Soyez
prudent en retirant la CAUTION
feuille coinc e.
VORSICHT CAUTION
Hei§e OberflŠche!
Brandverletzungsgefahr.
Bei Beseitigung von
Papierstaus vorsichtig
vorgehen.
The fixing unit is
very hot. To avoide The conveyance fixing
CAUTION
PRECAUCION
ÁTemperatura alta! getting burned, DO unit is heavy. Use care DO NOT put your hand between
No tocar. Tener cuidado al
remover el papel.
NOT TOUCH. and draw it out gently; the main body and developing
ATTENZIONE
Alta temperatura!
Non toccare. Agire con otherwise you may be fixing unit; otherwise you may
prudenza nel rimuovere la
carta.
injured. be injured.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
In the case of the 7155/7165
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
To avoid injury, DO
NOT put your hand
on top of the
printed sheets.
Be sure to hold
both sides of the
printed sheets
when removing
them, and DO NOT
leave your hand on
the printed sheets
while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
(FS-111 Finisher)
7272sf007
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
7272sf004
WRITE UNIT
4 In the case of the 7155/7165
7272sf005
7272sf001
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-18
S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
<PZ Puncher with Z-folding>
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
Paper feed tray 500 copies x 2 500 copies x 2 1500 copies x 1 1500 copies x 1
1500 copies x 1 1500 copies x 1 1000 copies x 1 1000 copies x 1
550 copies x 2 550 copies x 2
Cooling for devel- Duct Duct Duct + develop- Duct + develop- Improvement in
oping section ing cooling fan ing cooling fan developing
suction
ADU drive board Exclusively for Exclusively for Common to Common to ADU linear
ADU Section
1 OUTLINE
1 OUTLINE
Blank page
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
In the case of the 7155/7165
4
PS3 option
Cover sheet feeder [PS-351]
[PI-110] Printer controller
[IP-511]
Expansion memory unit
[MU-404/405] Key counter
Hard disk
Punch kit Expansion memory unit [HD-105]
[PK-110/120] [MU-401/402]
Adapter for PZ
[PZ-108Akit] Finisher Paper
[FS-110] exit tray
Cover sheet feeder LCT
[PI-110] [LT-402]
PS3 option
Cover sheet feeder
[PS-351Type-A]
[PI-110]
Printer controller
[IP-511Type-A]
Expansion memory unit Key counter
[MU-404/405]
Hard disk
Punch kit [HD-105]
Expansion memory unit
[PK-110/120]
[MU-401/402]
Adapter for PZ
[PZ-108A-kit] Finisher Paper exit
[FS-110] tray
Cover sheet feeder LCT
[PI-110] [LT-402]
Finisher
[FS-111]
Shift tray
[SF-101]
7272ma1001
1 OUTLINE
[3] Applicable Copy Paper External dimensions:
Plain paper:
High-quality paper of 60 g/m2 or 17 lb to 90 g/
m2 or 24 lb
Special paper (bypass feed only):
1140
OHP film
Blueprint master paper
(both by-pass tray and stacked trays):
Tabs
Plain paper of 50 g/m2 or 13 lb to 59 g/m2 or
650 766
16lbs
Plain paper of 91 g/m2 or 24 lb to 200 g/m2 or
(mm)
45 lb
[4] Options 4 For 7272/7255 models, the shapes of the tray
LCT: LT-402, LT-412 are different.
Key counter
4 Expansion memory unit:
[6] Maintenance
Periodic maintenance: Every 250,000 copies
MU-401, MU-404 (64 MB)
MU-402, MU-405 (128 MB)
Paper exit tray 4 [7] Consumables
Hard disk: HD-105 Developer: Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272
4 Finisher: FS-110, FS-210, FS-111 Toner: Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272
4 Shift tray: SF-101 Drum: Common to 7155/7165/7255/7272
Cover sheet feeder: PI-110 (φ80)
Puncher: PK-110, PK-120 [8] Environmental Conditions
Puncher with Z-folding: PZ-108, PZ-109 Temperature: 50°F to 86°F
Adapter for PZ: PZ-108A-kit Humidity: 10% to 80% RH
4 Printer controller: IP-511, IP-511Type-A
4 Postscript 3: PS-351, PS-351Type-A Note: The information herein may be subject to
change for improvement without notice.
[5] Particulars of Machine
Power supply:
230 VAC -14% to 10.6% 50Hz/60Hz
120 VAC ±10% 60 Hz
Power consumption:
230 V Machine : 2300 W max. (full option)
120 V Machine : 1920 W max. (full option)
4 Weight:
Approximately 447 lb (7155/7165)
Approximately 475 lb (7255/7272)
Cleaning section
Image read section
Loop roller
Paper reverse exit section
Tray 1
TSL
Tray 3
ADU
Separation corona section
1-6
1-4
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
4 In the case of the 7255/7272
Cleaning section
Image read section
Tray 2
Tray 4
TSL ADU
Blank page
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
[1] Fixing/Web Drive Section
Web SD (SD2)
Ratchet
FRONT
1-9
1-5
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
Separation claw SD
(SD1)
Drum
Developing sleeve
Agitator screws
Developing motor (M3)
Agitator wheel
1-10
1-6
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[4] Paper Feed/Vertical Conveyance/Tray Up Drive Sections
In the case of the 7155/7165
Drive belt
Up/down plate
1-11
1-7
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
7272ma1003
Loop roller
ADU pre-registration roller
Loop roller motor (M6) Paper up/down
plate
Up/down motor/BP (M20)
1-14
1-8
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
[6] Charging and Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning Drive Section
1-15
1-9
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
7255/7272
Conveyance
support roller
Pre-transfer roller
Registration roller
Registration MC (MC1)
Conveyance belt
ADU conveyance
roller/2
Reverse/exit gate
Reverse/exit
motor (M8)
Reverse/exit roller
ADU gate
FRONT
Reverse/exit roller knob
7272ma1004
1 OUTLINE
[8] Paper Exit Drive Section
Toner bottle
motor (M13)
Toner supply motor (M12)
Toner supply screws
Toner supply screw
[Rear view]
[Front view]
1-17
1-11
MAIN BODY
1 OUTLINE
FRONT
V-mirror unit
1-18
1-12
2
UNIT EXPLANATION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
EXTERNAL SECTION
EXTERNAL SECTION
[1] Composition
In the case of the 7155/7165
Operation panel
Sub power switch (SW2) RADF
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Toner supply cover Right side cover (upper)
Tray 1
Bypass tray
Tray 2
Tray 3
Right side cover (lower rear)
Vertical conveyance door
Right side cover (lower middle)
Rear cover
Left side cover
2-A-1
EXTERNAL SECTION
Operation panel
Sub power switch (SW2) RADF
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Tray 1
Bypass tray
Tray 3
Right side cover (lower rear)
Tray 4
Vertical conveyance door
Tray 2 Right side cover (lower middle)
Rear cover
Left side cover
7272ma2001
DRIVE SECTION
[1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Drum motor (M2)
7272ma2002
DRUM CONT
DRUM CLK by 6.5% more or less than the motor speed
CW/CCW
DRUM EM specified value)
PRCB M2
[L]: Normal rotation
b. Output signals
MS1 MS2
24V2 (1) DRUM_CONT (PRCB to M2)
P.GND M2 (drum) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: M2 ON
DCPS
[H]: M2 OFF
(2) CW/CCW (PRCB to M4)
M2 (drum) rotational direction switchover signal
M2 (drum) is controlled by PRCB (printer control [L]: CW rotation
board) and the motor drive power is supplied [H]: CCW rotation
from DCPS (DC power supply unit). (3) DRUM_CLK (PRCB to M2)
M2 (drum) rotational speed control clock signal
1. Operation
M2 (drum) is a motor driven by 24 VDC. It drives
the drum, toner guide roller, toner conveyance
screw, and separation claw swing. The flywheel
mechanism adopted for M2 ensures accurate
and steady rotation.
M2 starts rotating when the START button is
pressed and stops when the specified time
lapses after completion of second paper feeding
of the last copy.
When either one of the front-left and front-right
doors of this machine opens, MS1 (interlock MS/
R) or MS2 (interlock MS/L) actuates to stop sup-
plying the DC power to the motor, causing M2 to
stop.
2-B-2
DRIVE SECTION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
MAINM CONT
MAINM CLK by 6.5% more or less than the motor speed
MAINM F/R
MAINM EM specified value)
PRCB M4
[L]: Normal rotation
b. Output signals
MS1 MS2
24V2
(1) MAINM_CONT (PRCB to M4)
P.GND M4 (fixing) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: M4 ON
DCPS [H]: M4 OFF
(2) MAINM_F/R (PRCB to M4)
M4 (fixing) rotational direction switchover signal
M4 (fixing) is controlled by PRCB (printer control [L]:CW rotation
board) and the motor drive power is supplied [H]:CCW rotation
from DCPS (DC power supply unit). (3) MAINM_EM (M4 to PRCB)
M4 (fixing) rotational speed control clock signal
1. Operation
M4 (fixing) is a motor driven by 24 VDC. It drives
the fixing roller.
M4 starts rotating when the START button is
pressed and stops when the last copied paper
has been ejected.
During the warm-up operation, M4 rotates to
rotate the fixing roller.
2-B-3
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
SCANNER SECTION
SCANNER SECTION
[1] Composition
Scanner HP PS (PS61)
Exposure unit
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
APS sensor 3 (PS65)
V-mirror unit
APS sensor 1 (PS63)
Scanner
cooling fan (FM9)
Scanner drive wire
Exposure lamp
(L1)
CCD unit
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Light source Xenon lamp
Exposure Light source moving slit exposure,
static exposure
Scanning Platen original scanning: 1st, 2nd,
and 3rd mirrors are shifted.
RADF original scanning: Original
is moved with light source held sta-
tionary.
Lamp power Lamp cord
supply
Scanner Cooling fan
cooling
2-C-1
SCANNER SECTION
SCAN CUR2
SCAN CUR3 S.GND ways depending on whether PS61 (scanner HP)
MODE1 SIG PS61 is ON or OFF.
MODE2 5V
MODE3 (1) When PS61 (scanner HP) is OFF
SCANHP PS
5V2
S.GND
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS SCDB
(2) When PS61 (scanner HP) is ON
1. Operation
a. Operation of M11 (scanner)
M11 (scanner) is a 3-phase stepping motor d. Read with shading correction
Shading correction is performed in different
driven by the 3-phase bipolar constant-current
ways depending on whether SW2 (sub power) is
drive method. The motor is turned ON/OFF by ON or the START button is ON. When shading
supplying/stopping clock pulses. correction starts, the exposure unit is at the
The rotational speed, direction, and amount of home position and PS61 (scanner HP) is OFF.
movement of M11 is determined by the incre- (1) When SW2 (sub power) is ON
ment of the driving step count. This count is reset L1 (exposure lamp) turns ON. Next, M11 (scan-
each time PS61 (scanner HP) is turned ON or ner) moves the exposure unit toward the paper
OFF by the exposure unit. exit side. After being driven by the specified num-
ber of steps, M11 stops, thus reading the light
b. Movement speed of the exposure unit
reflected by the white reference plate installed
Scanning speed underneath the glass stopper plate and perform-
4 Operation mode Movement speed ing the first white correction. Next, M11 moves
Scan (1:1) 320 mm/s (7155/7165) the exposure unit toward the paper exit side.
After being driven by the specified number of
357 mm/s (7255/7272) steps, M11 performs the second white correc-
Return 640 mm/s tion.
Then, L1 is turned OFF for black correction,
Home position search 247 mm/s
searching for the home position of the exposure
unit.
In each of the first and second shading correction
processes, the CCD 1 line data is read to com-
pare brightness levels between pixels. The
brighter data is used as white correction data.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Second
fied number of steps from the position where
white correction PS61 (scanner HP) was turned ON, it stops. This
Black correction position is the exposure position for ADF copy
operation.
Then, ADF copy operation is performed. After
completion of the ADF copy operation, L1 (expo-
sure lamp) is turned OFF to start searching for
Home position search
the exposure unit home position.
2-C-3
SCANNER SECTION
started by pressing the START button, AE scan- the exposure unit is detected.
ning is performed in the paper feed direction if [L]: The exposure unit is detected.
the AE mode has been selected. [H]: The exposure unit is not detected.
4 EE scanning distance is different between 7155/ b. PRCB output signal
7165 and 7255/7272. (1) SCAN_CLK (PRCB to SCDB)
7155/7165: For the original paper size M11 (scanner) clock signal
7255/7272: 30mm from the leading edge of an (2) SCAN_F/R (PRCB to SCDB)
original paper M11 (scanner) rotational direction switchover
Then, exposure scanning is performed at the signal
speed corresponding to the specified magnifica- [L]: The exposure unit is moved toward the
tion by the distance corresponding to the original paper exit side.
size, thus searching for the home position. [H]: The exposure unit is moved toward the
paper feed side.
(1) Operation with AE (3) MODE1 to 3 (PRCB to SCDB)
M11 (scanner) energize switchover signals
PS61 Platen APS
(4) SCAN_CUR1 to 3 (PRCB to SCDB)
read position
M11 (scanner) energize current switchover sig-
nals
First white correction c. SCDB output signals
Second (1) U, V, W (SCDB to M11)
white correction
M11 (scanner) drive control signals
AE scanning These signals are used to control rotation of M11
(scanner). By supplying and stopping clock
pulses, the motor is turned ON/OFF and the rota-
Exposure scanning tional direction is switched.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
CONT
LAMP.PG APR
ADRST
PDWN
GND
PRCB
TCK
/TCK
GND
5V2
S.GND RCK
/RCK
24V1
5V2 GND
S.GND LCLK1
P.GND /LCLK1
L.PG
GND
DCPS SCDB SCLK
/SEN
SDI CCD
SDO
TG ADB
L1 (exposure lamp) is driven by L1 INVB (L1 CLAMP
GND
inverter) and is controlled by PRCB (printer con- BCLAMP
GND
trol board) via SCDB (scanner drive board). D0
/D0
GND
1. Operation D1
/D1
L1 (exposure lamp) is a xenon lamp driven by the GND
D2
inverter circuit. The xenon lamp can emit a con- /D2
GND
stant light intensity and generates less heat than LCLK0
/LCLK0
other lamps, so it does not require the light inten- GND
5V2
sity control circuit that has been used in the exist- 5V2
GND
ing machines, requiring no thermal protector ICB
circuit. However, since L1 is held lit when the
exposure unit is stationary in the ADF mode,
FM9 (scanner cooling) is installed in the read
section.
2. Signals
a. Output signals
(1) EXP_CONT (PRCB to SCDB)
L1 (exposure lamp) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
(2) CONT (SCDB to L1 INVB)
L1 (exposure lamp) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
2-C-5
SCANNER SECTION
PRD_KEEP
GND
+LCLK
-LCLK
GND
-RCLK
+RCLK
GND
GND
+TCK
-TCK
GND
GND
SCLK
/SEN
SDI
SDO
GND
-AD_D0 CCD
+AD_D0
GND
-AD_D1 ADB
+AD_D1
GND
-AD_D2
+AD_D2
GND
-LVDSCLKO
+LVDSCLKO
GND
ADRST
APR
LVDS_PDWN
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
+12V
+12V
+12V
GND
ICB
7272ma2017
1. Operation
The light reflected by the exposed original is
input to the CCD sensor through the lens. The
analog voltage corresponding to the quantity of
the input light is A/D-converted in the ADB (A/D
converter board), being output to the ICB (image
control board).
a. Original read
The original read timing is as follows:
(1) Platen mode
After lapse of the specified interval since the
exposure unit turned PS61 (scanner HP) OFF.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
SCANNER SECTION
ICB
S.GND
APS.2 PS64
APS TIMING
SIZE PS L
APS 5V
S.GND
B5R z
SIZE PS S APS.3 PS65
SIZE ANA APS 5V B5
PRCB S.GND
SIZE PS L
5V
PS309 B4 z z z
24V1 S.GND
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
SIZE PS S
5V
PS310 A4R z z
A.GND
SIZE ANA VR301 A4
3.3V
DCPS SCDB
A3 z z z
8.5 x 11R z
The APS method used in the platen mode is dif- 8.5 x 11
ferent from that used in the ADF mode. The sig-
nal read by the APS sensor or RADF's original
8.5 x 14 z z z
size detection sensor is processed by ICB 11x 17 z z z
(image control board) via SCDB (scanner drive
board). z ON
OFF
1. Operation b. APS detection timing
a. APS detection The APS detection timing differs between the
(1) ADF mode platen mode and DF mode.
The paper size is detected according to the com- (1) ADF mode
bination of ON/OFF states of PS309 (original When the RADF mode is selected or an original
size/2) and PS310 (original size/1) of the RADF's is set on the RADF original feed tray, APS detec-
original feed tray and the resistance value of tion takes place using PS309 (original size/2),
VR301 (original paper size). PS310 (original size/1), and VR301 (original
(2) Platen mode size).
The paper size is detected according to the com- (2) Platen mode
bination of ON/OFF states of PS63 (APS/1), When the RADF is closed and PS51 (APS tim-
PS64 (APS/2), and PS65 (APS/3) and the signal ing) turns ON, L1 (exposure lamp) turns ON and
read by the CCD sensor. PS63 to PS65 are used the CCD detects the reflected light to detect the
to detect the original size in the sub-scanning original size in the main scanning direction.
direction and the CCD sensor is used to detect Since RADF is still open at this time, the black
the original size in the main scanning direction. level of the sky shot (outside the original) and the
white level of the original (inside the original) are
Paper exit side detected according to whether an original is
present. At this time, the original size in the sub-
scanning direction is detected using PS63 to
PS65 (APS/1 to APS/3). When the RADF is
closed completely and PS311 (ADF open/close)
PS65 turns ON, CCD reads the white level of the platen
PS63 PS64 cover and the black level in the original. Among
the two original sizes detected as discussed
above, the larger size is determined as the orig-
inal size in the main scanning direction.
Photo sensor
LED
2-C-8
2-C-6
SCANNER SECTION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: ADF is open. APR
ADRST
(2) APS.1/APS.1_SIG (PS63 to SCDB to ICB) PDWN
GND
Paper size detection signal TCK
/TCK
[L]: Paper is detected. GND
RCK
[H]: Paper is not detected. /RCK
(3) APS.2/APS.2_SIG (PS64 to SCDB to ICB) GND
LCLK1
Paper size detection signal /LCLK1
GND
[L]: Paper is detected. SCLK
/SEN
[H]: Paper is not detected. SDI CCD
SDO
(4) APS3/APS.3_SIG (PS65 to SCDB to ICB) TG ADB
CLAMP
Paper size detection signal GND
BCLAMP
[L]: Paper is detected. GND
D0
[H]: Paper is not detected. /D0
(5) SIZE_PS_L (PS309 to SCDB to ICB) GND
D1
Paper size detection signal /D1
GND
[L]: Paper is detected. D2
/D2
[H]: Paper is not detected. GND
LCLK0
(6) SIZE_PS_S (PS310 to SCDB to ICB) /LCLK0
GND
Paper size detection signal 5V2
5V2
[L]: Paper is detected. GND
ICB
[H]: Paper is not detected.
(7) SIZE_ANA (PS301 to SCDB to ICB)
Paper size detection signal
[L]: Paper is detected.
[H]: Paper is not detected.
(8) COVER_SIG (SCDB to ICB)
Same as APS TIM signal.
(9) APS_TIMING (SCDB to PRCB)
Same as APS TIM signal.
b. Output signals
(1) APS_CONT
This signal controls ON/OFF states of APS_5V
power for driving PS63, PS64, and PS65 (APS1
to APS3).
[L]: APS_5V OFF
[H]: APS_5V ON
2-C-9
2-C-7
SCANNER SECTION
PRD_KEEP
GND scanning that is carried out after depression of
+LCLK
-LCLK
the START button.
GND <AE sampling area>
-RCLK
+RCLK
4 1) Normal copy
GND
GND 10 mm inside the perimeter of the original
+TCK
-TCK detected by APS. (7155/7165)
GND
GND 10 mm inside the perimeter of the scanned area
SCLK
/SEN within 30mm from the leading edge of an original.
SDI
SDO (7255/7272)
GND
-AD_D0
2) Non-image area erasure mode
+AD_D0
CCD
GND
Entire original area detected during pre-scan-
-AD_D1 ADB ning.
+AD_D1
GND (2) ADF mode
-AD_D2
+AD_D2 The image at the leading edge of the original is
GND
-LVDSCLKO read when the PRINT button is pressed.
+LVDSCLKO
GND The read data is used to measure the image den-
ADRST
APR sity on the original.
LVDS_PDWN
GND
<AE sampling area>
+5V 1) Main scanning direction
+5V
+5V 10 mm area inside the original detected by APS
+5V
+5V 2) Sub-scanning direction
+5V
GND 2-to-4 mm area from the leading edge of the orig-
+12V
+12V inal.
+12V
GND
ICB
7272ma2018
WRITE UNIT
[1] Composition
Cylindrical lens 2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Collimator lens unit
Write mirror
Cylindrical lens 1
Polygon mirror
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Semiconductor laser
Write mirror
Scan*1 Polygon mirror
Light source*2 1-chip, 2-beam laser diode Collimator lens
(Power: 15 mW per beam)
Reference posi- Index sensor Cylindrical lens 1
tioning
P.GND
adjustment prism nor beam composition prism. POLM CONT
POLM CLK
POLM LOCK
M15
PMDB
PRCB
24V/1
5V/2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS
1. Operation
a. Explanation of operation
M15 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is
driven by the 3-phase bipolar method. The cur-
rent flowing through the coil is switched accord-
ing to the position of the rotor detected by the
position sensor (magnetic sensor) in the motor.
This motor rotates the polygon mirror to scan the
laser beams from LDB (laser driver board) in the
axial direction of the drum. Its rotation is held
constant by PLL control.
b. Rotational speed
M15 is powered by 24 VDC and its rotational
speed is as follows:
In the case of the 7155/7165
Rotational Linear
7155 7165
speed speed
37,795 rpm 320 mm/s - normal
33,070 rpm 280 mm/s normal -
21,850 rpm 185 mm/s thick paper
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
/INDPR
[L]: Synchronous (normal) GND
[H]: Asynchronous (abnormal) VIDEO2
/VIDEO2
GND
b. Output signals LPR5V
LD5V
LD5V
(1) POLM_CONT (PRCB to PMDB) GND
VIDEO1
This signal turns ON/OFF M15. /VIDEO1
GND LDB
/ENB1
[L]: M15 ON /S/H1
/ALM1
GND
[H]: M15 OFF /ENB2
/S/H2
(2) POLM_CLK (PRCB to PMDB) /ALM2
GND
DADI
This is a reference clock signal for PLL-control- DACLK
DALD
CCD
24V1
5V2 ADB
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS ICB
5V
GND
/IND
GND
/INDPR INDXSB
/ENB
/ALM1
/S/HB1
/S/H1
GND
LD+5V
LD+5V
+5VRN
GND
-VIDEO2
+VIDEO2 LDB
GND
LOAD
DACLK
DI
GND
/ALM2
/S/HB2
/S/H2
/ALMRST
GND
-VIDEO1
+VIDEO1
GND
24V1 CCD
5V2
S.GND ADB
P.GND
DCPS ICB
7272ma2019
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
WRITE UNIT
The IC on the ADB (A/D converter board) auto- LDB (laser driver board) automatically monitor
matically adjusts the analog offset voltage of the the laser drive current one line at a time, and con-
CCD sensor output so that it is at the lower limit trols it so that the light intensity remains the MPC
of the A/D converter level. value.
(2) AGC (Automatic Gain Control) (3) Write timing
During shading correction, the white reference a) Main scanning direction
plate is read to adjust the analog amplification Using INDEX signal (/IND) from INDXSB (index
factor of the CCD sensor output so that the read sensor board), the laser write reference position
level is at the upper limit of the A/D converter is determined for each scan in the drum rotation
level. direction, and the image is written onto the copy
(3) Shading correction paper according to the copy paper position
<Timing> detected by PS70 (paper mis-centering).
• When SW2 (sub power) is ON b) sub scanning direction
• At job start Specified interval after PS44 (registration)
(4) Brightness/density conversion detects the leading edge of the copy paper.
(5) AE processing
(6) Text/dot pattern judgment 2. Signals
(7) Filtering a. Input signals
(8) Magnification change processing (1) /IND (INDXSB to ICB)
(9) Copy gamma correction This is an index signal used to detect deviation of
(10) Skew correction main scanning.
(11) Error diffusion processing (2) /INDPR (INDXSB to ICB)
(12) Data compression/expansion processing This signal monitors the INDXSB (index sensor
(13) Write density control board) power supply.
b. Write [H]: Abnormal
The ICB (image control board) sends image data [L]: Normal
on a pixel basis to LDB (laser driver board) (3) /ALM1 (LDB to ICB)
according to the control signals from the PRCB This signal indicates the state of the laser 1 drive
(printer control board). current.
LDB causes the laser light to be emitted for a [H]: Normal
period corresponding to the image data. This [L]: Abnormal
laser light is radiated onto the drum surface. (4) LPR5V (LDB to ICB)
(1) MPC (Maximum Power Control) This signal monitors the LDB (laser driver board)
ICB (image control board) informs LDB (laser power supply.
driver board) of the maximum output value and [H]: Normal
sets that value for the laser beam emission. LDB [L]: Abnormal
store this value and maintain the laser beam level (5) /ALM2 (LDB to ICB)
using the APC (Auto Power Control). This signal indicates the state of the laser 2 drive
<MPC timing> current.
When SW2 (sub power switch) is turned ON [H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
2-D-6
2-D-4
WRITE UNIT
b. Output signals
(1) /S/H1 (ICB to LDB)
APC sampling signal for one line (for laser 1)
(2) /ENB1 (ICB to LDB)
Laser APC function ON/OFF control signal (for
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
laser 1)
Laser beam emission stops when it is OFF.
(3) /S/H2 (ICB to LDB)
APC sampling signal for one line (for laser 2)
(4) /ENB2 (ICB to LDB)
Laser APC function ON/OFF control signal (for
laser 2)
Laser beam emission stops when it is OFF.
(5) VIDEO1/VIDEO1 (ICB to LDB)
Image signal for laser 1
(6) VIDEO2/VIDEO2 (ICB to LDB)
Image signal for laser 2
(7) DACLK (ICB to LDB)
LDB (laser driver board) MPC value data trans-
mission clock signal
(8) DADI (ICB to LDB)
LDB (laser driver board) signal for MPC
(9) DALD (ICB to LDB)
LDB (laser driver board) MPC value memory
command signal
4 (10) /S/HB1 (ICB to LDB)
Sampling signal for laser bias current control
(for laser 1) (7255/7272 only)
4 (11) /S/HB2 (ICB to LDB)
Sampling signal for laser bias current control
(for laser 2) (7255/7272 only)
Blank page
DRUM UNIT
DRUM UNIT
[1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Separation
claw SD (SD1)
Separation
Developing unit claws
Toner guide roller (TGR)
Drum
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method Separation claw SD (SD1)
PCL/TSL LED
Auxiliary separa- Separation claws
tion *1
Transport assis- Ratchet wheel
tance *2
2-E-1
DRUM UNIT
MC24V 2 GP.CONT
SD1
SPSD DRV
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
GP
5V PRCB
HV
P.GND
DRUM CONT MS1 MS2
DRUM CLK 24V2
CW/CCW
DRUM EM P.GND
M2 DCPS
PRCB
MS1 MS2
24V2
To prevent toner from adhering to the paper
P.GND
DCPS guide plate, a constant voltage is applied to the
paper guide plate. This voltage is supplied from
HV (high voltage unit) and is controlled by PRCB
(printer control board).
Separation claws are driven by SD1 (separation
claw). Separation claws are swung by M2 1. Operation
(drum). SD1 is controlled by PRCB (printer con- a. ON/OFF timing
trol board). Turning ON/OFF in sync with M2 (drum)
b. Applied voltage
1. Operation -500 VDC
a. Separation claw ON/OFF control
SD1 (separation claw) is a pull-type solenoid 2. Signal
powered by 24 VDC. It turns ON to press sepa- a. Output signal
ration claws against the drum to help image-cop- (1) GP. CONT (PRCB to HV)
ied paper separate. This signal controls turning ON/OFF the voltage
(1) SD1 (separation claw) operation timing application to the paper guide plate.
SD1 turns ON after a lapse of specified time from [L]: Voltage applied
turning ON of PS43 (leading edge) of the second [H]: Voltage not applied
paper feed section. It turns OFF after a lapse of
the time set by PRCB (printer control board).
b. Separation claw swing control
Separation claws are swung by M2 (drum) via the
cam mechanism.
2. Signals
a. Output signal
(1) SPSD_DRV (PRCB to DCDB)
SD1 (separation claw) drive control signal
[L]: SD1 ON
[H]: SD1 OFF
2-E-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Charging control plate guide plate
Transfer
Charging corona wire corona
wire
Plunging prevention
plate (rear)
Separation
corona wire
PCL
Plunging prevention
plate (front)
Charging wire cleaning
motor (M14)
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Charging Scorotron (DC negative
corona discharge)
Discharging wire: Tungsten,
0.06 mm dia. (gold-plated skin
path, with automatic wire
cleaner)
Grid control: Gold-plated
stainless plate
Transfer DC positive corona discharge
Discharging wire: Oxide film
tungsten, 0.06 mm dia., with
automatic wire cleaner
Separation AC/DC corona discharge
Discharging wire: Oxide film
tungsten, 0.06 mm dia., with
automatic wire cleaner
2-F-1
CORONA UNIT SECTION
PRCB
HV (2) TXD (PRCB to HV)
MS1 MS2
24V2
Output level of each high voltage electrode.
P.GND Serial data signal for control
DCPS
(3) CLK (PRCB to HV)
Clock signal for TXD
The current output to the charging wire and the (4) LATCH (PRCB to HV)
voltage applied to the grid are supplied from HV Latch signal for TXD
(high voltage unit) and they are controlled by
PRCB (printer control board).
The levels of outputs to these are transmitted
using 8-bit serial data. This serial data includes
the level information for all outputs driven by HV,
excluding the ON/OFF control signal. Accord-
ingly, a separate signal line is provided to turn
ON/OFF only the charging wire output and the
grid output at the same time.
1. Operation
a. Charging
A Scorotron charging method is used. 24 VDC
supplied from DCPS is raised to a negative DC
voltage which is then discharged after being
applied to the charging wire.
Charge output range: -600 µA to -1200 µA
b. Grid voltage
The grid voltage is output from HV to the charg-
ing plate.
Grid voltage output range: -500 V to -1000 V
2. Signals
a. Input signal
(1) EM (C).SIG (HV to PRCB)
This signal indicates the leak or short state of the
charging corona unit.
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
2-F-2
CORONA UNIT SECTION
S.CONT
the transfer wire.
EM(S).SIG
TRANSFER [L]: Transfer voltage ON
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
TXD
CLK
LATCH
[H]: Transfer voltage OFF
HV
PRCB SEPARATION (2) S.CONT (PRCB to HV)
MS1 MS2 This signal turns ON/OFF the voltage applied to
24V2
the separation wire.
P.GND
DCPS [L]: Separation voltage ON
[H]: Separation voltage OFF
The voltages applied to the transfer wire and
separation wire is supplied from HV (high voltage
unit) and are controlled by PRCB (printer control
board). The levels of outputs to these wires are
transmitted using 8-bit serial data. This serial
data includes the level information for all outputs
driven by HV, excluding the ON/OFF control sig-
nal. Accordingly, a separate signal line is pro-
vided to turn ON/OFF only the transfer wire or
separation wire.
1. Operation
a. Transfer
Positive DC high voltage is used for transfer.
Transfer DC output range: 50 µA to 600 µA
b. Separation
AC high voltage and negative DC voltage are
used for separation.
Separation AC output range: 4kV to 5.7kV
Separation DC output range: 0 µA to -400 µA
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) EM (T) .SIG (HV to PRCB)
This signal indicates the leak or short state of the
transfer corona unit.
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
(2) EM (S) .SIG (HV to PRCB)
This signal indicates the leak or short state of the
separation corona unit.
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
2-F-3
CORONA UNIT SECTION
1. Operation
a. Purpose of driving
M14 (charger cleaning) is used to drive the
charging wire cleaning unit.
b. Operation timing
The charging wires are cleaned when SW2 (sub
power) is turned ON and when the fixing temper-
ature is lower than 122°F. They are also cleaned
after the specified copy count is reached.
* Changeable with the 25-mode DIP SW
c. Cleaning operation
Normally, the charging wire cleaning unit is on
the front side of the machine. It moves back and
forth to clean the charging wires. The movement
direction is changed by changing the rotational
direction of M14 (charge cleaning).
The rotational direction of M14 and the position
of the cleaner are detected by monitoring the cur-
rent value of M14 with PRCB (printer control
board).
2-F-4
CORONA UNIT SECTION
[6] M10 (Transfer/Separation Cleaning) 4 The rotational direction of M10 and the position
Control of the cleaner are detected by turning on/off the
PS52 (transfer/separation PS/F) and PS53
4
(transfer/separation PS/R). (7255/7272)
IO DTXD
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
IO DCLK
ADU LATCH 2. Signals
IO UCLK
REQ1 a. Input signals
IO URXD
ACK1 (1) IO_URXD (ADUDB to PRCB)
ERR OUT1
Serial data used to report the ADUDB (ADU
SEP CLM M A
M10 drive board) operation state to PRCB (printer
SEP CLM M B
PRCB control board)
(2) REQ1 (ADUDB to PRCB)
5V2 This signal indicates that sending data from
5V2 HP_PS_F PS52
S.GND SGND ADUDB (ADU drive board) to PRCB (printer con-
24V1 5V2
trol board) is requested.
5V2
S.GND
HP_PS_R
SGND
PS53 When ADUDB receives ACK1 and can send
P.GND
data, this signal stands at the [L] level.
(7255/7272)
(3) IO_UCLK (ADUDB to PRCB)
DCPS ADUDB Clock signal for IO_URXD signal
7272ma2003
4 (4) HP_PS_F (PS52 to ADUDB)
Home position detection signal of transfer/sepa-
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning) is a DC motor ration cleaning member
powered by 24 VDC and is controlled by PRCB It becomes L when transfer/separation cleaning
(printer control board) via ADUDB (ADU drive member reaches the home position.
board). Between PRCB and ADUDB, signals are 4 (5) HP_PS_R (PS53 to ADUDB)
exchanged using serial data. Reverse position detection signal of transfer/
separation cleaning member
1. Operation It becomes L when transfer/separation cleaning
a. Purpose of driving member reaches the reverse position.
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning) used to drive
the transfer/separation wire cleaning pads.
b. Operation timing
The transfer/separation wires are cleaned when
SW2 (sub power) is turned ON or when the fixing
temperature is lower than 122°F.
It is also carried out after the specified copy count
is reached.
* Changeable with the 25-mode DIP SW
c. Cleaning operation
Normally, the transfer/separation wire cleaning
pads are on the front side of the machine. They
move back and forth to clean the transfer and
separation wires. The movement direction is
changed by changing the rotational direction of
M10 (transfer/separation cleaning).
The rotational direction of M10 and the position
of the cleaner are detected by monitoring the cur-
rent value of M10 with PRCB (printer control
board). (7155/7165)
IO DCLK
cleaning) drive control signal ADU LATCH
IO UCLK
The drive direction of M10 is controlled by switch- REQ1
IO URXD
ACK1
ing between the drive current directions of two ERR OUT1
signals.
MC24V
PRCB TSL
Status SEP_CLM_MA SEP_CLM_MB TSL DR
(2) IO_DTXD (PRCB to ADUDB) LEDs are used for PCL (pre-charging exposure
Serial data used to report the machine operation lamp) and TSL (transfer synchronization lamp).
state understood by PRCB (printer control PCL is driven by the PRCB (printer control
board) to ADUDB (ADU drive board) board). TSL is driven by ADUDB (ADU drive
(3) IO_DCLK (PRCB to ADUDB) board). PCL and TSL are controlled by PRCB .
Clock signal for IO_DTXD signal
(4) ADU_LATCH (PRCB to ADUDB) 1. Operation
Latch signal for IO_DTXD signal PCL turns ON when the START button is
(5) ACK1 (PRCB to ADUDB) pressed. It is turned OFF after a lapse of the
Reception acknowledgment signal. It is sent specified time from turning ON of PS37 (paper
each time PRCB (printer control board) receives exit). TSL turns ON after a lapse of the specified
one-byte data from ADUDB (ADU drive board). time from turning ON of PS43 (leading edge) of
When PRCB receives REQ1 and can receive the second paper feed section. It turns OFF after
data, this signal stands at the [L] level. a lapse of the specified time from detection of the
(6) ERR_OUT1 (PRCB to ADUDB) trailing edge of copy paper.
This signal requires resending of data when
PRCB (printer control board) has failed in data 2. Signals
reception from ADUDB (ADU drive board) due to a. Output signals
an error. (1) PCL CONT (PRCB to PCL)
PCL ON/OFF control signal
[L]: PCL ON
[H]: PCL OFF
(2) TSL_DR (ADUDB to TSL)
TSL ON/OFF control signal
[L]: TSL ON
[H]: TSL OFF
2-F-6
DEVELOPING UNIT
DEVELOPING UNIT
[1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Developing
regulation plate
Agitator screws
Developing Agitator
Developing sleeve Developing wheel Agitator
sleeve
regulation plate screws
[2] Mechanisms
Splash prevention sheet (upper)
Mechanism Method
Developing 2-component developer Developing
regulation plate
Developing bias DC bias
Developer Main agitator
agitation Auxiliary agitator
1. Developing drive
The developing motor (M3) drives the following
parts via the gear unit at the back:
Agitator
• Developing sleeve Developing
wheel Agitator
• Agitator wheel sleeve
screws
• Agitator screws
2. Flow of developer
The developer inside the developing unit is sup-
plied to the developing sleeve by the agitator
wheel, and maintained at a constant thickness by
the developer regulation plate (bristle height reg-
ulation plate). The developer remaining on the
developing sleeve is returned to the agitator
screws.
2-G-1
DEVELOPING UNIT
2-G-2
DEVELOPING UNIT
TXD
CLK
LATCH
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
BIAS
PRCB
24V1
P.GND
DCPS HV
1. Operation
Application of the developing bias voltage starts
after a lapse of the specified time from turning
ON of the START button, and stops after a lapse
of the specified time from turning OFF of PS43
(leading edge) by the last copy paper.
Developing bias output range: -300 V to -700 V
2. Signals
a. Output signal
(1) B.CONT (PRCB to HV)
Developing bias output ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: Developing bias ON
[H]:Develpoing bias OFF
2-G-3
DEVELOPING UNIT
12V 5V
A.GND P.GND
DMLED CONT DRUM CONT
DM MONI EX DRUM CLK
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V
P.GND
DEVM CONT
DEVM CLK
DEVM CW/CCW
DEVM GAIN
DEVM EM
PRCB M3
12V2
S.GND
MS1 MS2
24V2
P.GND
DCPS
2-G-4
DEVELOPING UNIT
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) DM_SIG_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
Output voltage of Dmax detection sensor (PC1)
on TCSB (toner control sensor board)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Reference voltage: 2.5 V
(2) DM_MONI_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
This signal monitors the light reflected by the
drum surface (without toner).
The voltage applied to the Dmax detection LED
is corrected by TNLED_REF so that the output
voltage becomes 1.9 V (calibration).
Reference voltage: 1.9 V
<Timing>
Before Dmax correction
(3) DRUM_JSIG_EX (TCSB to PRCB)
This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrap-
ping around the drum. A jam is detected when
the voltage becomes 4.0 V or more.
(4) TEMP, 3.3V2 (TCSB to PRCB)
Drum temperature detection signal
b. Output signals
(1) DMLED CONT (PRCB to TCSB)
Dmax LED ON/OFF control signal
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
(2) TNLED_REF (PRCB to TCSB)
Power supply line for PD1 LED on TCSB.
The voltage is adjusted so that the Dmax MONI
signal becomes 1.9 V.
(3) DJLED_CONT (PRCB to TCSB)
JAM LED ON/OFF control signal
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
2-G-5
DEVELOPING UNIT
12V 5V
A.GND P.GND
DRUM CONT
G SIG EX DRUM CLK
LED CONT CW/CCW
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DRUM EM
TNLED REF
M2
TCSB
5V
P.GND
DEVM CONT
DEVM CLK
DEVM CW/CCW
DEVM GAIN
DEVM EM
PRCB M3
12V2
S.GND
MS1 MS2
24V2
P.GND
DCPS
2-G-6
DEVELOPING UNIT
12V TNSM24V
12V A.GND TNSM24V
A.GND DMLED CONT TNSM A M12
DM MONI EX TNSM AB
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
G SIG EX DJLED CONT TNSM B
LED CONT DM SIG EX TNSM BB
DRUM JSIG EX
TNLED REF
TNLED REF TEMP
3.3V2
TCSB
TCSB
PRCB
12V2
S.GND 24V1
5V2
S.GND
DCPS PRCB P.GND
DCPS
Dot diameter is detected by TCSB (toner control
sensor board) and is controlled by PRCB (printer
The density of toner is controlled by controlling
control board).
M12 (toner supply) from PRCB (printer control
board).
1. Operation
Dot diameter correction is performed to prevent
1. Operation
the 1-dot laser beam diameter from fluctuating
a. Toner density detection
due to the change in developing characteristics
The reference patch density is detected using
(caused by deteriorated developer) and soil in
the patch detection method of TCSB (toner con-
the write unit.
trol sensor board) and the corresponding analog
(1) Method
voltage signal is output to PRCB (printer control
Multiple dot pattern patches with the same con-
board), thus detecting the toner density.
densation are created to be read by the γ sensor
The PRCB compares the detected voltage with
(PD2). The laser power where the γ sensor out-
the reference value to determine whether toner
put reaches the reference voltage is used as the
must be added.
MPC value.
b. Toner supply operation
(2) Timing
Upon read of the patch, M12 (toner supply) is
a) Every 10,000 prints, upon completion of the
turned ON to supply toner. The time needed to
last job.
add toner depends on the paper size.
2. Signals
a. Output signals
(1) TNSM_A, AB (PRCB to M12)
A-phase drive signal of M12 (toner supply)
(2) TNSM_B, BB (PRCB to M12)
B-phase drive signal of M12 (toner supply)
2-G-7
DEVELOPING UNIT
SUCTFAN D
SFAN EM FM4
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
P.GND
PRCB
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS
1. Operation
a. ON timing
FM4 (developing suction) is turned ON when M2
(drum) is turned ON.
b. OFF timing
FM4 (developing suction) is turned OFF after a
lapse of the specified time from turning OFF of
M2 (drum).
2. Signals
a. Input signal
(1) FM2 EM (FM4 to PRCB)
FM4 (developing suction) abnormality detection
signal
[L]: FM4 is normal.
[H]: FM4 is abnormal.
b. Output signal
(1) SUCTFAN_D (ACDB to FM4)
FM4 (developing suction) drive signal
[L]: FM4 OFF
[H]: FM4 ON
2-G-8
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Toner cartridge
Toner bottle motor (M13)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Hopper
Toner level detection
Toner supply sensor (TLD)
motor (M12) Toner supply screws
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Toner supply Supply by screw Toner cartridge
*1 Toner agitation
Toner agitator plates are driven by the following
two motors through the gear unit:
Agitator plate
a) Toner supply motor (M12): Drives the toner
supply screws.
Toner supply
b) Toner bottle motor (M13): Drives the toner screws
cartrdge. Toner supply
motor (M12)
The agitator plates prevent toner from solidifying
and collecting on the toner level detection sensor
(TLD).
2-H-1
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
5V
toner flows out of the outlet into the agitation/con- P.GND
TONERM CONT
veyance section of the toner supply unit. TONERM CLK
TONERM CW/CCW
TONERM EM
M13
PRCB
Outlet
MS1 MS2
24V2
P.GND
DCPS
90
rotation
Toner level detection is controlled by the TLD
(toner level detection sensor) and the PRCB
(printer control board).
1. Operation
To agitation/conveyance block a. Toner level detection
of toner supply unit
A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD (toner
level detection sensor).
When the level of toner in the hopper becomes
low, the toner supply signal is output to PRCB
(printer control board). As a result, a message is
displayed on the LCD connected to OB1 (oper-
ation board/1).
b. Detection timing
The detection timing is as follows:
• Power-on
• When the front door opens or closes
• During copying
c. Toner supply to toner supply unit
When the no toner state is detected by TLD
(toner level detection sensor), M13 (toner bottle)
is turned ON to supply toner from the toner car-
tridge to the toner supply unit.
d. Detection of no toner state in toner cartridge
If the no toner state is detected by TLD (toner
level detection) after M13 has been held ON for
a specified period of time, the toner cartridge is
assumed to be empty.
2-H-2
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
TNSM B
ing a message on the LCD connected to OB1 TNSM BB
(operation board/1).
12V
(2) TONERM_EM (M13 to PRCB) A.GND
DMLED CONT
M13 (toner bottle) abnormality detection signal DM MONI EX
DJLED CONT
[L]: M13 is normal. DM SIG EX
DRUM JSIG EX
[H]: M13 is abnormal. TNLED REF
TCSB
b. Output signals
(1) T_SENSE_CONT (PRCB to TLD)
TLD (toner level detection sensor) power control
signal PRCB
The TLD is powered only when it is detecting the
24V1
toner level. 5V2
(2) TONERM_CONT (PRCB to M13) S.GND
P.GND
M13 (toner bottle) control signal
[L]: M13 ON DCPS
[H]: M13 OFF
(3) TONERM_CLK (PRCB to M13) M12 (toner supply) is controlled by the PRCB
M13 (toner bottle) rotation speed control clock (printer control board). Toner density is detected
signal by TCSB (toner control sensor board).
(4) TONERM_CW/CCW (PRCB to M13)
M13 (toner bottle) rotational direction indication 1. Operation
signal a. Toner density detection
[H]: CW direction rotation The Dmax sensor (PD1) on the TCSB (toner
[L]: CCW direction rotation control sensor board) detects the density of the
toner control patch developed on the drum sur-
face to output the signal corresponding to the
detected density to PRCB (printer control board).
2-H-3
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
b. Toner supply
When the voltage detected by TCSB (toner con-
trol sensor board) is below the specified value,
PRCB issues a control signal to drive M12 (toner
supply). The relationship between the paper size
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2-H-4
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Cleaning/toner recycle section
Cleaning blade
Scraper
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method HV Terminal
Drum cleaning Cleaning blade
Toner collection *1 Toner guide roller (TGR) Cleaning blade
*1 Toner collection
Toner removed by the cleaning blade is collected
by the toner guide roller (TGR) and removed by
the scraper, then conveyed by the toner convey-
ance screw to be reused. High pressure is
applied to the toner guide roller (TGR) to
Toner guide roller (TGR)
enhance the toner cleaning ability.
*2 Toner recycle
When the drum performs preliminary rotation as
warm-up, toner recycle MC (MC14) is turned
OFF, stopping the drive force from the toner con-
veyance screw. This prevents excessive recy-
cled toner from being conveyed to the developing
unit.
2-I-1
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT
PRCB
HV This mode will perform a task that is required
24V2
MS1 MS2 after blade replacement during maintenance,
P.GND
etc. When this mode is used, toner adheres on
DCPS the drum and then the blade cleans the drum,
preventing blade peeling.
To enhance the toner cleaning ability, voltage is 4 b. Black stripe creation control
applied to the TGR (toner guide roller). This volt- To improve durability of the blade (stabilize load
age is applied by HV (high voltage unit) under the and stabilize paper dust crushing), a black stripe
control of PRCB (printer control board). The out- of toner is adhered on the drum and then
put level of the applied voltage is transmitted cleaned.
using 8-bit serial data. This serial data includes 7155/7165: once every 10 copies
the level information for all outputs driven by the 7255/7272: once every 12 copies
HV unit excluding the ON/OFF control signal. * Changeable with the 25-mode DIP SW
Accordingly, a separate signal line is provided to
turn ON/OFF only the TGR.
1. Operation
a. ON/OFF timing
The TGR is turned ON/OFF in sync with M2
(drum).
b. TGR (toner guide roller) output range
0 to 50 µA
2. Signals
a. Output signal
(1) TGR.CONT (PRCB to HV)
TGR (toner guide roller) voltage ON/OFF control
signal
[L]: Voltage is applied.
[H]: Voltage is not applied.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Drive pulley (for wire C/D)
Tray up drive motor /1/2
(M16/17) Feed roller
Paper feed roller
Drive pulley
(for wire A/B)
End stopper
plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight. feed PS/2 (PS7) turning it ON. The feed and
paper feed rollers remain ON for a specified time
after the actuation of the paper feed PS/1 (PS1)
and PS/2 (PS7) causing a paper loop to form
Coupling gear
against the pre-registration rollers which are not
turning. In this way paper skew is corrected.
Rack gear
2-J-2
TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) PAPER FEED UNIT
24V1 MC24V_1
P.GND T1FEED_DRV MC3
5V2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
S.GND MC24V_1
T1PREMC_DRV MC4 Tray 1
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T1PRE_PS PS1
DCPS SGND
MS2
MC24V_1
C MC5
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
M1 FEEDM_F/E MC24_1
FEEDM_EM T2PREMC_DRV MC6 Tray 2
5V
P.GND 5V3
T2PRE_PS PS7
SGND
PRCB
The 1st paper feed from tray 1/2 takes place as 1. Operation
the result of the transmission of the drive force a. Operation of the MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2)
from M1 (paper feed) to each paper feed roller by (1) Start timing of printing of the first copy
MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) and MC4/6(pre-reg- MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) turns ON at the tim-
istration MC/1/2). The feed roller picks up paper ing that is determined by the P counter from
using its own weight. when copying starts, and turns OFF after a lapse
The above operations are controlled by the of the specified time from PS1/7 (paper feed/1/7)
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals turning OFF. Thus, paper skew is corrected by
are PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) and PS25/26 (verti- forming the loop before pre-registration roller.
cal conveyance/1/2) issued from the vertical con- (2) Start timing of printing of the second copy
veyance section. When the preceding paper turns OFF PS1/7.
(3) OFF timing
When PS1/7 is turned ON.
b. Operation of the MC4/6 (pre-registration
MC1/2)
(1) ON timing
After a specified time from MC3/5 (paper feed
MC/1/2) turning ON.
(2) OFF timing
When PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) is turned OFF.
2-J-3
TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) PAPER FEED UNIT
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) T1PRE_PS (PS1 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2-J-4
TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) PAPER FEED UNIT
24V1 5V3
P.GND TIUP_PS PS2
5V2 SGND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
S.GND
Tray 1
5V3
DCPS TIRM_PS PS4
SGND
5V3
T2UP_PS PS8
T1RISEM_24V SGND
M16 T1RISEM_D Tray 2
5V3
T2RM_PS PS10
SGND
T2RISEM_24
M17 T2RISEM_D
PRCB
2-J-5
TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) PAPER FEED UNIT
1. Operation
The length of paper is detected using PS5/6/11/
12 (paper size/1-1/2-1/1-2/2-2) . Variable resis-
tors (VR1/2) interlocked with the guide position
are installed at the bottom of the tray to detect the
width of paper.
The relationships between the sensors and
paper sizes (lengths) are as follows:
Paper size
8.5 x 11 A4R to F4 or
or less B5R larger
Sensor
PS5/11 OFF ON ON
PS6/12 OFF OFF ON
2-J-6
TRAY 1/2 (7155/7165), TRAY 3/4 (7255/7272) PAPER FEED UNIT
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Paper exists. T2_0PS PS9
SGND
(2) T1SIZE_L_PS (PS6 to PRCB)
Paper size detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Paper does not exist.
[H]: Paper exists.
(3) T2SIZE_L_PS (PS11 to PRCB)
5V2
Paper size detection signal (tray 2) S.GND
[L]: Paper does not exist. PRCB DCPS
[H]: Paper exists.
(4) T2SIZE_S_PS (PS12 to PRCB)
No paper in the tray is detected by PS3 (no
Paper size detection signal (tray 2)
paper/1) and PS9 (no paper/2) which are con-
[L]: Paper does not exist.
trolled by the PRCB (printer control board).
[H]: Paper exists.
(5) T1SIZE_VR (VR1 to PRCB)
1. Operation
Paper width detection signal (tray 1)
When the tray becomes empty, PS3/9 (no paper/
(6) T2SIZE_VR (VR2 to PRCB)
1/2) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
Paper width detection signal (tray 2)
LCD via OB1 (operation board/1).
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) T1_0PS (PS3 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Paper does not exist in tray.
[H]: Paper exists in tray.
(2) T2_0PS (PS9 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal (tray 2)
[L]: Paper does not exist in tray.
[H]: Paper exists in tray.
2-J-7
TRAY 1/2 PAPER FEED UNIT (7255/7272)
Side guide
Horizontal conveyance roller/L
Pre-registration roller Horizontal conveyance PS/L (PS5)
Horizontal conveyance PS/R (PS6)
Paper feed roller Horizontal conveyance section
Feed roller Horizontal conveyance
roller/R
b) Lowering of tray
When the paper feed tray is pulled out, the
coupling shaft of the tray is disengaged from
the coupling gear of the tray up drive motor on
the main body side, allowing the up/down
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight.
Coupling gear
7272ma2005
Pre-registration roller
Paper feed PS/1(PS1), /2 (PS2)
Feed roller
Paper feed roller
7272ma2006
24V1 MC24V_1
P.GND T1FEED_DRV MC3
5V2
S.GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
MC24V_1
T1PREMC_DRV MC4 Tray 1
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T1PRE_PS PS1
DCPS SGND
MS2
MC24V_1
C MC5
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
M1 FEEDM_F/E MC24_1
FEEDM_EM T2PREMC_DRV MC6 Tray 2
5V
P.GND 5V3
T2PRE_PS PS7
SGND
PRCB
7272ma2007
The 1st paper feed from tray 1/2 takes place as 1. Operation
the result of the transmission of the drive force a. Operation of the MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2)
from M1 (paper feed) to each paper feed roller by (1) Start timing of printing of the first copy
MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) and MC4/6(pre-reg- MC3/5 (paper feed MC/1/2) turns ON at the tim-
istration MC/1/2). The feed roller picks up paper ing that is determined by the P counter from
using its own weight. when copying starts, and turns OFF after a lapse
The above operations are controlled by the of the specified time from PS1/7 (paper feed/1/7)
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals turning OFF. Thus, paper skew is corrected by
are PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) and PS25/26 (verti- forming the loop before pre-registration roller.
cal conveyance/1/2) issued from the vertical con- (2) Start timing of printing of the second copy
veyance section. When the preceding paper turns OFF PS1/7.
(3) OFF timing
When PS1/7 is turned ON.
b. Operation of the MC4/6 (pre-registration
MC1/2)
(1) ON timing
After a specified time from MC3/5 (paper feed
MC/1/2) turning ON.
(2) OFF timing
When PS1/7 (paper feed/1/2) is turned OFF.
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) T1PRE_PS (PS1 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal (tray 1)
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Not detected.
(2) T2PRE_PS (PS7 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal (tray 2)
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
b. PRCB output signals
(1) T1FEED_DRV (PRCB to MC3)
MC3 drive control signal (tray 1)
[L]: MC3 ON
[H]: MC3 OFF
(2) T1PREMC_DRV (PRCB to MC4)
MC4 drive control signal (tray 1)
[L]: MC4 ON
[H]: MC4 OFF
(3) T2FEED_DRV (PRCB to MC5)
MC5 drive control signal (tray 2)
[L]: MC5 ON
[H]: MC5 OFF
(4) T2PREMC_DRV (PRCB to MC6)
MC6 drive control signal (tray 2)
[L]: MC6 ON
[H]: MC6 OFF
5V3
PS5 HFPS_L
S.GND
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V3
PS6 HFPS_R
S.GND IO DTXD MC24V
IO DCLK MC1
24V3 ADU LATCH 2ND MC
MC15 IO UCLK
HFMC_L REQ1
IO URXD 5V2
ACK1 2ND PS PS44
24V3 S.GND
ERR OUT1
MC16 2NDM CLK
HFMC_R
REG PS
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
FEEDM_F/E
FEEDM_EM
M1 5V
P.GND
MS1 PRCB
MS2 P.GND
5V2
24V2 24V1
S.GND
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
-5V1
DCPS ADUDB
7272ma2008
2. Signal
a. PRCB input signal
(1) HFPS_L (PS5 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Not detected
(2) HFPS_R (PS6 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected
b. PRCB output signal
(1) HFMC_L (PRCB to MC15)
MC15 drive control signal
[L]: MC15 ON
[H]: MC15 OFF
(2) HFMC_R (PRCB to MC16)
MC16 drive control signal
[L]: MC16 ON
[H]: MC16 OFF
24V1 5V3
TIUP_PS PS2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
P.GND
5V2 SGND
S.GND
Tray 1
5V3
DCPS TIRM_PS PS4
SGND
5V3
TIUP_PS PS8
T1RISEM_24V SGND
M16 T1RISEM_D Tray 2
5V3
TIRM_PS PS10
SGND
T2RISEM_24
M17 T2RISEM_D
PRCB
7272ma2009
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V3
[H]: Detected. T2_0PS PS9
(2) T1RM_PS (PS4 to PRCB) SGND
Blank page
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Double feed prevention roller
Side guide Side guide
Drive pulley
(for wire A/B)
End stopper
2-K-1
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
plate in the tray to fall down by its own weight. it ON. The feed and paper feed rollers remain
ON for a specified time after the actuation of the
paper feed PS/3 (PS13) causing a paper loop to
form against the pre-registration rollers which
Coupling gear
are not turning. In this way paper skew is cor-
rected.
Pre-registration roller
Paper feed PS/3 (PS13)
[Main body side] Feed roller
Paper feed roller
Coupler
[Tray side]
Rack gear
2-K-2
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
24V1 MC24V_1
P.GND T3FEED_DRV MC7
5V2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
S.GND MC24V_1
T3PREMC_DRV MC8 Tray 3
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T3PREM_PS PS13
DCPS SGND
MS2
FEEDM_CONT
FEEDM_CLK
M1 FEEDM_F/E
FEEDM_EM
5V
P.GND
PRCB
The 1st paper feed from tray 3 takes place as the 1. Operation
result of the transmission of the drive force from a. Operation of the MC7 (paper feed MC/3)
M1 (paper feed) to each paper feed roller by MC7 (1) Start timing of printing of the first copy
(paper feed MC/3) and MC8 (pre-registration MC7 (paper feed MC/3) turns ON at the timing
MC/3). The feed roller picks up paper using its that is determined by the P counter from when
own weight. copying starts, and turns OFF after a lapse of the
The above operations are controlled by the specified time from PS13 (paper feed/3) turning
PRCB (printer control board). Related signals OFF. Thus, paper skew is corrected by forming
are PS13 (paper feed/3) and PS27 (vertical con- the loop before pre-registration roller.
veyance/3) issued from the vertical conveyance (2) Start timing of printing of the second copy
section. When the preceding paper turns OFF PS13.
(3) OFF timing
When PS13 is turned ON.
b. Operating of the MC8 (pre-registration MC/3)
(1) ON timing
After a specified time from the MC7 (paper feed
MC/5).
(2) OFF timing
When PS13 (paper feed/3) is turned OFF.
2-K-3
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) T3PREM_PS (PS13 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal (tray 3)
[L]: Detected.
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2-K-4
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
24V1 5V3
P.GND TIUP_PS PS14
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V2 SGND
S.GND
Tray 3
5V3
DCPS TIRM_PS PS16
SGND
T3RISEM_24
M18 T3RISEM_D
PRCB
2-K-5
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
[H]: Detected.
5V2
b. PRCB output signals PRCB S.GND
(1) T3RISEM_24 (PRCB to M18) DCPS
M18 ON/OFF control signal
The paper size in tray 3 is detected using PS17
(paper size/1-3), PS18 (paper size/2-3), and
VR3 (paper size/3). Based on the detection sig-
nals, the PRCB (printer control board) judges the
paper size.
1. Operation
The length of paper is detected using PS17/18
(paper size/1-3/2-3). Variable resistor (VR3)
interlocked with the guide position is installed at
the bottom of the tray to detect the width of paper.
The relationships between the sensors and
paper sizes (lengths) are as follows:
Paper size
8.5 x 11 A4R to F4 or
or less B5R larger
Sensor
PS17 OFF ON ON
PS18 OFF OFF ON
2-K-6
TRAY 3 PAPER FEED UNIT (7155/7165)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Paper exists.
(2) T3SIZE_L_PS (PS18 to PRCB)
Paper size detection signal 5V2
S.GND
[L]: Paper does not exist. PRCB DCPS
[H]: Paper exists.
(3) T3SIZE_VR (VR3 to PRCB)
Paper width detection signal No paper in the tray is detected by PS15 (no
paper/3), and which is controlled by the PRCB
(printer control board).
1. Operation
When the tray becomes empty, PS15 (no paper/
3) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
LCD via OB1 (operation board/1).
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) PS15 (PS15 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal
[L]: Paper does not exist in tray.
[H]: Paper exists in tray.
2-K-7
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
BYPASS TRAY
BYPASS TRAY
[1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
By-pass double feed
prevention roller
Loop roller
By-pass tray
2-L-1
BYPASS TRAY
32)
B
/B
Paper size VR/BP (VR5)
5V3
LOOP_PS PS36
S.GND
5V2
2ND_PS
S.GND PS44
PRCB
Second paper
feed unit
Paper size PS/2-BP (PS32)
Paper size PS/1-BP (PS31) The first paper feed from the bypass tray takes
By-pass tray place as the result of the transmission of the drive
force from M6 (loop roller) to the paper feed
roller. M6 is controlled by PRCB (printer control
board). The related signal is PS36 (loop).
1. Operation
(1) When printing of the first copy starts
M6 (loop) is turned ON at the timing that is deter-
mined by the P counter (that starts when printing
starts), thus starting feed of paper.
M6 is stopped temporarily after lapse of a spec-
ified time from turning ON of PS44 (registration)
by the leading edge of paper, a loop is formed by
registration rollers, and the paper is fed to the
transfer unit.
(2) When printing of the second or subsequent copy
After lapse of the specified time from turning OFF
of PS44 (registration) by the trailing edge of the
preceding paper.
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) LOOP_PS (PS36 to PRCB)
Paper passage detection signal
[L]: Paper does not exist.
[H]: Paper exist.
(2) 2ND_PS (PS44 to PRCB)
Second paper feed reference timing detection
signal
[L]: Paper exists.
[H]: Paper does not exist.
2-L-2
BYPASS TRAY
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
5V3
PS35 BPDN_PS
5V2
SGND
S.GND
DCPS
PRCB
1. Operation
a. Paper up/down control
M20 (up/down motor/BP) is turned ON to push
up paper. When PS34 (tray upper limit/BP)
detects the paper upper limit and turns ON, M20
turns OFF to stop pushing up paper. When paper
is fed and consequently PS34 turns OFF, M20
turns ON again, maintaining the upper limit posi-
tion of paper.
b. Paper up timing
(1) ON timing
At start of copying
(2) OFF timing
M20 (up/down motor/BP) is turned OFF when
PS34 (tray upper limit /BP) is turned ON.
c. Paper down timing
(1) ON timing
When there is no paper or a paper jam occurs.
(2) OFF timing
M20 (up/down motor/BP) is turned OFF when
PS35 (tray lower limit/BP) is turned ON.
2-L-3
BYPASS TRAY
1. Operation
The length of paper is detected by PS31 (paper
size/1-BP) and PS32 (paper size/2-BP). The by-
pass tray is provided with a variable resistor
(VR5) interlocked with the guide position to judge
the paper width according to the change in the
resistance value.
The relationships between the sensors and
paper sizes (lengths) are as follows:
Paper size 8.5 x 11 A4R to F4 or
Sensor or less B5R larger
PS31 OFF ON ON
PS32 OFF OFF ON
2. Signals
a. PRCB input signals
(1) BPSIZE_S_PS (PS31 to PRCB)
Paper size detection signal
[L]: Paper does not exist.
[H]: Paper exists.
(2) BPSIZE_L_PS (PS32 to PRCB)
Paper size detection signal
[L]: Paper does not exist.
[H]: Paper exists.
(3) BPSIZE_VR (VR5 to PRCB)
Paper width detection signal
2-L-4
BYPASS TRAY
5V2 5V3
S.GND BP_OPS PS33
SGND
DCPS
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
PRCB
1. Operation
When the tray becomes empty, PS33 (no paper/
BP) is turned OFF, displaying a message on the
LCD via OB1 (operation board/1).
2. Signal
a. Input signal
(1) BP_0PS (PS33 to PRCB)
No paper detection signal
[L]: Paper does not exist.
[H]: Paper exists.
2-L-5
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Vertical conveyance MC/1 (MC11)
4 [2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Paper conveyance Rollers
Conveyance drive Vertical conveyance roller
(upper): Paper feed motor
(M1)
Vertical conveyance roller
(middle): Paper feed motor
(M1)
Vertical conveyance roller
(lower): Paper feed motor
(M1)
[3] Vertical Conveyance Control rotate all vertical conveyance rollers, thus feed-
ing paper to the second paper unit.
4
The paper feed standby position for tray 4 is set
24V1 MC24V_2
P.GND VFMC1_DRV MC11 to the position where the PS28 (vertical convey-
5V2
S.GND MC24V_2
ance /4) is turned ON. (7255/7272)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
VFMC2_DRV MC12
24V2
P.GND
5V3
MS1 T1PASS_PS PS25 2. Signals
DCPS S.GND
MS2 5V3
a. PRCB input signals
T2PASS_PS PS26 (1) T1PASS_PS (PS25 to PRCB)
S.GND
FEEDM_CONT
M1
FEEDM_CLK 5V3 Paper passage detection signal (for tray 1)
FEEDM_F/R T3PASS_PS PS27
FEEDM_EM
5V
S.GND [L]: Not detected.
5V3
P.GND T4PASS_PS PS28 [H]: Detected.
S.GND
5V3 (2) T2PASS_PS (PS26 to PRCB)
VF_DOOR_PS PS29 Paper passage detection signal (for tray 2)
S.GND
5V3
VF_DRT_PS PS12
[L]: Not detected.
S.GND
PRCB
[H]: Detected.
(3) T3PASS_PS (PS27 to PRCB)
7272ma2011
Paper passage detection signal (for tray 3)
[L]: Not detected.
4 In the vertical conveyance section, paper is fed [H]: Detected.
vertically by transmitting the drive force of M1
4 (4) T4PASS_PS (PS28 to PRCB)
(paper feed) to the vertical conveyance roller
Paper passage detection signal (for tray 4)
(upper) and vertical conveyance roller (middle)
[L]: Not detected.
via MC11 (vertical conveyance MC/1) and MC12
[H]: Detected.
(vertical conveyance MC/2). And, the vertical
(5) VF_DOOR_PS (PS29 to PRCB)
conveyance roller (lower) is driven by the vertical
Vertical conveyance section open/close detec-
conveyance roller (middle) via the timing belt.
tion signal
The above parts are controlled by PRCB (printer
[L]: Open
control board). Related signals are PS25 to
[H]: Closed
PS28 (vertical conveyance/1 to 3), PS29 (verti-
4 (6) VF_DRT_PS (PS12 to PRCB)
cal conveyance door open/close) and PS12 (ver-
tical conveyance door open/close /U). Vertical conveyance section open/close detec-
tion signal
[L]: Open
1. Operation
[H]: Closed
4 Paper fed from tray 1 (7155/7165) or tray 1 or 2
b. PRCB output signals
(7255/7272) is then fed to the second paper feed
(1) VFMC1_DRV (PRCB to MC11)
unit directly without passing through vertical con-
MC11 drive control signal
veyance rollers. When paper is fed from tray 2 or
[L]: MC11 ON
3 (7155/7165) or tray 3 or 4 (7255/7272), PS26
[H]: MC11 OFF
(vertical conveyance/2) is used to feed paper to
(2) VFMC2_DRV (PRCB to MC12)
the standby position. When PS26 is turned OFF
MC12 drive control signal
by the preceding paper, MC11 and MC12 (verti-
[L]: MC12 ON
cal conveyance MC/1 and MC/2) are turned ON
[H]: MC12 OFF
and the paper fed from tray 2 or 3 (7155/7165) or
tray 3 or 4 (7255/7272) is fed to the standby posi-
tion (where PS26 was turned ON) by the drive
force of M1 (paper feed). MC11 and MC12 are
turned ON after lapse of the specified time from
restart of registration of the preceding paper to
ADU
[1] Composition
4
7255/7272
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
ADU conveyance roller 2
Registration roller
Paper exit
conveyance roller
Reverse/exit gate
Paper exit fan/F (FM6) Reverse/exit roller rotation knob Conveyance motor (M5)
7155/7165 7255/7272
Registration MC
(MC1)
Mis-centering PS (PS70) Paper dust cleaning brush Paper dust cleaning brush
7272ma2012
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanisms Method
Second paper feed paper loop *1 Loop roller (trays 1-3/LCT), Feed roller (bypass tray), ADU
pre-registration roller (ADU)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2-N-2
ADU
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
roller for the prescribed time. The paper loop
mechanism differs between paper feed paths.
• Trays 1-3, LCT paper feed
Loop roller Registration roller
• Bypass tray
Bypass feed roller Loop roller
• ADU
ADU pre-registration roller
<By-pass tray>
Loop formation point
Feed roller
Registration roller
<ADU>
Registration roller
Loop formation point
2-N-3
ADU
and the mis-centering PS (PS70) is used to cor- *5 Reverse/exit paper path selection
rect the write position in the main scanning direc- The reverse/exit selection gate in the fixing unit
tion. determines whether the paper is to be ejected
*3 Second paper feed auxiliary mechanism straight or reversed and ejected. The paper gate
The distance between the registration roller and is operated by the reverse gate SD (SD7)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
the transfer and separation corona unit is made installed in the ADU.
long to achieve the time required for correcting Because paper is reversed in the reverse/exit
the image position. To assist conveyance of section in the ADU, the reverse/exit section is
paper between the registration roller and the provided with a reverse/exit gate to switch
image transfer and separation corona unit, a pre- between the forward and backward paper con-
transfer roller is provided just before the transfer veyance paths. This gate has no drive mecha-
and separation corona unit. nism and it is opened by the rigidity of the paper.
a. Reverse/exit operation
Leading edge PS Normally, the reverse/exit selection gate opens
(PS43) (rear)
Paper mis- when the reverse gate SD (SD7) is turned OFF.
centering PS The paper fed by the exit roller in the fixing unit is
(PS70) (front)
fed, through the path under the reverse/exit
selection gate, to the reverse/exit section in the
ADU by the decurler roller. Normally, the
Pre-transfer roller reverse/exit gate in the reverse/exit section is
closed. This gate is opened by the rigidity of the
Transfer and separation corona unit
fed paper, allowing the paper to be fed to the
Registration roller reverse/exit roller, ADU gate, and ADU reverse
roller sequentially. Normally, the ADU gate is
*4 Conveyance section paper suction mecha- closed and it has no drive mechanism; it is
nism opened by the rigidity of paper.
A paper suction duct is provided in the middle of When the paper reverse PS (PS42) detects the
the conveyance section and is led to the convey- trailing edge of paper and consequently turns
ance suction fan (FM3) installed in the ADU. To OFF, the reverse/exit roller and ADU reverse
improve transportability of the paper that passes roller start rotating in the opposite direction, feed-
through the conveyance section, the conveyance ing the paper back toward the fixing unit. How-
suction fan is used to provide suction for the ever, since the reverse/exit gate is closed, the
paper. paper is fed to the main body exit roller via the
path outside this gate. Thus, the paper is ejected
Conveyance suction fan (FM3) with the print side down.
Suction holes
Duct
Conveyance
section
2-N-4
ADU
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Fixing
roller
(lower)
Exit roller
Decurler roller Fixing roller (lower)
2-N-5
ADU
OFF. The paper is fed toward the reverse/exit rollers 3 and 4. The ADU conveyance MC
section. However, since the ADU gate is closed, (MC13) is turned ON/OFF only when the paper
the paper is fed to the ADU conveyance roller/1 length is 325 mm or longer. If the paper length is
through the path above this gate. Thus, the paper less than 325 mm, it stays ON during copying.
is reversed and fed to the ADU exit, without being
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Reverse/exit roller
ADU conveyance
roller/4 *8 Thick paper conveyance mechanism
To enhance reliability of thick paper copying, the
conveyance motor (M5), paper exit motor (M7),
reverse/exit motor (M8), and ADU reverse motor
(M9) are switched as shown below according to
the paper type selected in the key operator
Reverse/exit PS (PS46) mode.
4 Paper type Linear speed
ADU pre-registration roller
185 mm/s (7155/7165)
Thick paper
172.5 mm/s (7255/7272)
280 mm/s (7155/7255)
Others 320 mm/s (7165)
345 mm/s (7272)
24V
24V
A
/A M6
B
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
/B
5V3
LOOP PS PS36
S.GND
+5V
PGND
START/STOP
CLK
CW/CCW M5
IO DTXD LD
IO DCLK H/L
ADU LATCH PGND
IO UCLK +24V
REQ1
IO URXD MC24V
ACK1 MC1
ERR OUT1 2ND MC
2NDM CLK
REG PS 5V2
EDGE PS PS43
S.GND
5V2
2ND PS PS44
S.GND
PRCB 5V2
ADUEXT PS PS50
S.GND
The paper fed from each tray is fed to the second 1. Operation
paper feed section. The second paper feed takes a. Loop control
place as the result of the transmission of the drive After a lapse of the specified time from turning
force from M5 (conveyance) to the second paper ON of PS44 (registration) by the paper fed from
feed roller via MC1 (registration). The second each tray or the ADU at a high speed, M6 (loop
paper feed section is preceded by a loop roller roller) is turned OFF to form a paper loop in the
used to form a paper loop, and this conveyance registration section.
section is also used for the paper fed from the b. Second paper feed control
LCT. It is not used for the paper fed from the by- After formation of a paper loop under loop con-
pass tray or ADU. The loop roller is driven by M6 trol, MC1 (registration) is turned ON to transmit
(loop roller). The above parts are controlled by the drive force of M5 (conveyance) to the second
PRCB (printer control board) via ADUDB (ADU paper feed roller, starting the second paper feed.
drive board). M6 is driven by PRCB directly. c. Image position correction control
Related signals are PS36 (loop), PS43 (leading Mis-centering of the paper fed from each tray is
edge), PS44 (registration), and PS50 (ADU pre- detected by PS70 (paper mis-centering) and the
registration). paper leading edge timing is detected by PS43
(leading edge) and they are corrected at the time
of image write.
2-N-7
ADU
A contact image sensor is used as PS70 (paper (5) DEF_CLK (ADUDB to PS70)
mis-centering). The paper edge position is PS70 (paper mis-centering) drive clock signal
detected by paper mis-centering sensors. Based (6) DEF_LED (ADUDB to PS70)
on the edge position information, the image write PS70 (paper mis-centering) LED control signal
position is shifted to correct mis-centering and (7) CW/CCW (ADUDB to M5)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
leading edge timing at the time of image write. M5 (conveyance) rotational direction indication
PS70 operates after a lapse of the specified time signal
from turning ON of PS43 (leading edge). [L]: CCW
[H]: CW
2. Signals (8) H/L (ADUDB to M5)
a. Input signals M5 (conveyance) rotational speed indication sig-
(1) LOOP_PS (P36 to PRCB) nal
Loop formation reference timing detection sig- [L]: Low speed
nal. [H]: High speed
The leading edge or trailing edge of paper is (9) A, /A (PRCB to M6)
detected. M6 (loop roller) A-phase drive control pulse sig-
[L]: Detected. nal
[H]: Not detected. (10) B, /B (PRCB to M6)
(2) LD (M5 to ADUDB) M6 (loop roller) B-phase drive control pulse sig-
M5 fault detection signal nal
[L]: Normal
[H]: Abnormal
(3) DEF_VIDEO (PS70 to ADUDB)
PS70 (paper mis-centering) sensor output signal
(4) 2ND_PS (PS44 to ADUDB)
Second paper feed reference timing detection
signal
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
(5) EDGF_PS (PS43 to ADUDB)
Paper leading edge detection signal
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
(6) REG_PS (ADUDB to PRCB)
Paper leading edge detection signal.
[L]: Detected.
[H]: Not detected.
b. Output signals
(1) START/STOP (ADUDB to M5)
M5 (conveyance) drive control signal
[L]: M5 ON
[H]: M5 OFF
(2) 2NDM_CLK, CLK (PRCB to ADUDB to M5)
M5 (conveyance) clock signal
(3) 2ND_MC (ADUDB to MC1)
MC1 (registration) drive control signal
[L]: MC1 ON
[H]: MC1 OFF
(4) DEF_SI (ADUDB to PS70)
PS70 (paper mis-centering) start pulse
2-N-8
ADU
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
ADU LATCH
IO UCLK
REQ1
[L]: Detected.
IO URXD SUC FAN
ACK1
ERR OUT1 SUC EM FM3
[H]: Not detected.
2NDM CLK P.GND (2) SUC_EM (FM3 to ADUSDB)
PRCB
+5V
PGND FM3 (conveyance suction) fault detection signal
START/STOP
CLK
CW/CCW M5
[L]: FM3 is normal.
5V2
LD
24V1
S.GND H/L [H]: FM3 is abnormal.
PGND
MS1 MS2
24V2
+24V
b. Output signal
P.GND
24V1
5V2
(1) MAINEXIT_PS (ADUDB to FM3)
S.GND
P.GND FM3 (conveyance suction) drive signal
DCPS ADUDB
[L]: FM3 OFF
[H]: FM3 ON
The paper fed from the second paper feed sec-
tion is fed to the fixing unit by the pre-transfer
roller and conveyance belt driven by M5 (convey-
ance). In the conveyance section, paper suction
is provided by FM3 (conveyance suction)
through the duct installed on the back of the con-
veyance belt. M5 and FM3 are controlled by
PRCB (printer control board) via ADUDB (ADU
drive board).
1. Operation
a. M5 (conveyance) operation
M5 (conveyance) starts when the START button
is pressed, and it stops when the PS37 (paper
exit) turns OFF at detection of the trailing edge of
the last sheet of paper.
b. FM3 (conveyance suction) operation
FM3 is turned ON/OFF in sync with M2 (drum).
2-N-9
ADU
5V
P.GND
MAINM CONT
MAINM CLK M4
MAINM F/R
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
MAINM EM
24V
24V
A
/A M7
B
/B
5V2
FIXEXIT PS PS30
S.GND
5V
MAINEXIT PS PS37
S.GND
24V
24V
A
/A M8
B
IO DTXD /B
IO DCLK
ADU LATCH 24V
IO UCLK 24V
REQ1 A
IO URXD /A M9
ACK1 B
ERR OUT1 /B
2NDM CLK
5V2
DECUR PS PS42
S.GND
PRCB
5V2
ADU REV PS45
5V2 S.GND
24V1
S.GND 5V2
MS1 MS2 REV PS PS46
24V2 S.GND
P.GND
24V2
24V1
5V2 SD7
GATE DR
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS ADUDB
The reserve/exit selection gate in the fixing unit M4 and M7 are controlled by PRCB (printer con-
determines whether the paper fed from the fixing trol board) directly. M8, M9, and SD7 are con-
unit is to be ejected straight or reversed. trolled by PRCB (printer control board) via
The reverse/exit selection gate is driven by SD7 ADUDB (ADU drive board).
(reverse gate). The decurler roller is driven by M4 Related signals are PS30 (fixing exit), PS37
(fixing) and the reverse/exit roller is driven by M8 (paper exit), and PS42 (paper reverse).
(reverse/exit). The ADU reverse roller is driven by
M9 (ADU reverse). The exit conveyance roller
and main body exit roller are driven by M7 (paper
exit).
2-N-10
ADU
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
exit section in ADU. When paper is ejected OFF, M9 starts rotating in the forward direction at
straight, SD7 is turned ON to close the reverse/ a low speed. After a lapse of the specified time
exit selection gate. from detection of the trailing edge of paper by
When paper is ejected straight, SD7 is turned PS46 (reverse/exit), M8 (reverse/exit) starts
ON when the START button is pressed and it is rotating in the forward direction at a low speed,
turned OFF when PS37 (paper exit) turns OFF at proceeding to feed the next sheet of paper.
detection of the trailing edge of the last sheet of (2) ADU conveyance
paper. The operation performed from the moment PS30
b. M4 (fixing) control (fixing exit) turns OFF at detection of the trailing
M4 (fixing) starts when the START button is edge of paper to the moment M8 (reverse/exit)
pressed, and it stops when PS37 (paper exit) and M9 (ADU reverse) start rotating in the for-
turns OFF at detection of the training edge of the ward direction at a high speed, is the same as
last sheet of paper. that of reverse/exit.
(1) Straight paper exit When PS46 (reverse/exit) turns OFF at detection
Paper is fed to the paper exit section straight by of the trailing edge of paper, M8 starts rotating in
the paper exit roller driven by M4 (fixing) because the forward direction at a high speed, proceeding
SD7 (reverse gate) is turned ON to close the to feed the next sheet of paper.
reverse/exit selection gate. After a lapse of the specified time from detection
(2) Paper reverse/exit of the trailing edge of paper by PS46, M9 starts
Because SD7 (reverse gate) has been turned rotating in the opposite direction at a low speed,
OFF to open the reverse/exit selection gate, feeding paper to the ADU conveyance section.
paper is fed to the reverse/exit section in ADU by When PS45 (ADU paper reverse) detects the
the paper exit roller and decurler roller driven by trailing edge of paper and consequently turns
M4 (fixing). OFF, M9 starts rotating in the forward direction at
(3) ADU conveyance a low speed, proceeding to feed the next sheet of
Same as paper reverse/exit. paper.
c. Reverse control d. M7 (paper exit) control
M8 (reverse/exit) starts when the START button M7 (paper exit) turns ON when the START button
is pressed, and it stops when PS37 (paper exit) is pressed. The OFF timing is different between
turns OFF at detection of the trailing edge of the paper straight exit and reverse/exit.
last sheet of paper. Its rotational speed and (1) Paper straight exit
direction change when paper is ejected or The paper fed from the fixing unit by the exit roller
reversed, or is fed to ADU. is ejected by the main body exit roller driven by
(1) Paper reverse/exit M7 (paper exit). M7 is always rotating at a con-
The paper fed from the fixing unit is then fed to stant speed and it is turned OFF when PS37
the reverse/exit section via the reverse/exit (paper exit) turns OFF at detection of the trailing
selection gate. Normally, M8 and M9 are rotating edge of the last sheet of paper.
in the forward direction at a low speed, feeding (2) Paper reverse/exit
the paper to the ADU reverse section. The paper fed from the reverse/exit section in
When PS30 (fixing exit) detects the trailing edge ADU with it reversed, is ejected by the exit con-
of paper and consequently turns OFF, M8 and veyance roller and main body exit roller which are
M9 start rotating in the forward direction at a high driven by M7 (paper exit) rotating at a high
speed, feeding paper to the ADU reverse section speed. After a lapse of the specified time from
continuously. When PS42 (paper reverse) turning OFF of PS42 (paper reverse) at detection
detects the trailing edge of paper and conse- of the trailing edge of paper, M7 (paper exit)
2-N-11
ADU
2-N-12
ADU
24V
24V
A
/A M6
B
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
/B
+5V
PGND
START/STOP
CLK
CW/CCW M5
LD
H/L
PGND
+24V
5V2
ADU JAM PS41
S.GND
5V2
ADU REV PS45
IO DTXD S.GND
IO DCLK
ADU LATCH 5V2
IO UCLK REV PS PS46
REQ1 S.GND
IO URXD
ACK1
ERR OUT1 5V2
2NDM CLK HD PS PS47
S.GND
5V2
PRCB ADUCR PS PS48
S.GND
5V2
ADUDN PS PS49
S.GND
5V2
ADUEXIT PS PS50
S.GND
MC24V
SD9
LOCK SD
5V2 MC24V
24V1 MC2
S.GND ADUDN MC
MS1 MS2
24V2 MC24V
P.GND MC13
24V1 ADUCR MC
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS ADUDB
The paper fed from the ADU paper reversal sec- are PS41 (ADU conveyance/1), PS45 (ADU
tion is fed by transmitting the drive force of M5 paper reverse), PS46 (reverse/exit), PS48 (ADU
(conveyance) to ADU conveyance rollers 1 to 4. paper conveyance/2), PS49 (ADU deceleration),
Paper is then fed to the second paper feed sec- and PS50 (ADU pre-registration). SD9 (ADU
tion by the drive force of M6 (loop roller). In the lock) is provided to lock the handle of the ADU.
ADU conveyance section, pre-loop control is per-
formed to correct paper skew forcibly. To perform
this control, MC2 (ADU deceleration) and MC13
(ADU conveyance) are provided. Related signals
2-N-13
ADU
1. Operation 2. Signals
a. ADU conveyance control a. Input signals
The paper fed from the ADU paper reversal sec- (1) ADU_JAM (PS41 to ADUSDB)
tion is fed to ADU pre-registration rollers at a high Detection signal of paper passage from exit of
speed by transmitting the drive force of M5 (con- ADU conveyance roller 1
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2-N-14
FIXING UNIT
FIXING UNIT
[1] Composition
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Pressure roller Cleaning web unwinding shaft
Fixing claw unit (upper)
Fixing claw (upper)
Fixing unit cover (upper)
Cleaning web
[2] Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Fixing Pressure + Heat roller
Heat source *1 Heater lamp(Upper rollers: Two, Lower roller: One)
Cleaning *2 Upper roller: Cleaning web (containing silicon oil)
Upper roller Aluminum + Teflon coating
Lower roller Silicon rubber + PFA tube
Separation Separation claws (six upper and three lower claws)
Temperature detection Upper roller: - Noncontact type thermistor (for control) TH1
- Contact type thermistor (for fault detection) TH2
Overheat protection Upper roller: - Noncontact type thermostat (for fault detec-
tion) TS1
Lower roller: - Noncontact type thermostat (for fault detec-
tion) TS2
Neutralizing Neutralizing brush
Pressure release Pressure release shaft and spring
Exit path selection Reverse/exit selection gate
Decurler *3 Decurler roller + Restriction shaft
Jam detection *4 Jam detection plate + Actuator + Photosensor
2-O-1
FIXING UNIT
*4 Jam detection
When a jam occurs in the fixing exit section, the
paper exit guide plate (lower) is pressed down,
causing the fixing exit PS (PS30) to detect a jam
via the jam detection plate and actuator.
Cleaning web
Actuator
wind-up shaft Exit guide plate (lower)
Ratchet
2-O-2
FIXING UNIT
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
DCPS WEBSC_DRV SD2 [L]: Detected.
PRCB [H]: Not detected.
b. PRCB output signal
(1) WEBSC_DRV (PRCB to SD2)
SD2 (web) is controlled by PRCB (printer control SD2 (web) drive control signal
board). The related signal is PS30 (fixing exit). [L]: SD2 ON
[H]: SD2 OFF
1. Operation
When PS30 is turned ON by passage of paper,
SD2 is controlled by PRCB (printer control
board) according to the fixing web counter value.
The fixing web counter value is incremented
together with the total counter in exit section of
the main body. The relationship between the fix-
ing web counter values and SD2 (web) is as fol-
lows:
Fixing web counter
SD2 drive count
value
1 to 12,000 Once per copy
12,001 to 30,000 Once per copy *1
30,001 to 60,000 Once per copy *2
60,001 to 125,000 Once per 2 copies
125,0001 to 260,000 Once per 3 copies
260,001 or more Once per 6 copies
2-O-3
FIXING UNIT
L3 TRC2 FIXHT2_CONT
DCPS
TH1 TH1+
TH1-
TH2 TH2+
TH2-
PRCB
The fixing roller (upper) is heated by L2 (fixing The operating temperature of the thermostats
heater lamp 1) and L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) and are as follows:
the fixing roller (lower) is heated by L4 (fixing TS1: Opens at 356°F
heater lamp 3). The PRCB (printer control board) TS2: Opens at 230°F
detects the temperature of the fixing roller
(upper) using TH1 (fixing temperature sensor/1) 2. Signals
TH2 (fixing temperature sensor/2) and controls a. PRCB input signals
L2 and L3 via DCPS (DC power supply unit). (1) TH1+,- (TH1 to PRCB)
Fixing roller (upper) temperature detection sig-
1. Operation nal
a. Temperature control This signal is used to control the temperature of
The PRCB (printer control board) turns ON the the fixing roller (upper) and to detect abnormal
fixing heater lamp circuit in DCPS as soon as the temperature rise.
SW2 (sub power) is turned ON, holding L2 (fixing (2) TH2+,- (TH2 to PRCB)
heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2), and L4 Fixing roller (upper) temperature detection sig-
(fixing heater lamp/3) lit until the fixing roller nal
(upper) reaches the specified temperature. L2, This signal is used to detect the fixing roller
L3 and L4 are turned ON/OFF under the control (upper) abnormal temperature rise.
of the TRC1 (triac/1 ), TRC2 (triac/2) and TRC3
(triac/3).
b. Protection against abnormal temperature
rise
Thermostats are used to prevent the tempera-
ture of the fixing rollers from rising abnormally.
TS1 (thermostat/U) and TS2 (thermostat/L) are
used for the fixing roller (upper/lower). As these
thermostat are of the noncontact type, those do
not touch the fixing roller (upper/lower).
2-O-4
FIXING UNIT
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
(2) FIXHT2_CONT (PRCB to DCPS)
L3 drive control signal
[L]: L3 ON
[H]: L3 OFF
(3) FIXHT3_CONT (PRCB to DCPS)
L4 drive control signal
[L]: L4 ON
[H]: L4 OFF
2-O-5
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
Blank page
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL
SW1
CBR1 AC(L)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
RL2
NF COIL2 5V1
12V1
(Europe
only) DCPS
CBR2 COIL1 AC(N)
(Europe
only)
ICB
HTR1
HTR2
HTR3
TRANSFORMER OPTION
SW1
CBR1 AC(L)
SW3
RL2
NF
5V1
12V1
DCPS
CBR2 AC(N)
ACDB
ICB
HTR1
HTR2
HTR3
TRANSFORMER OPTION
7272ma2014
1. Operation
If the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet, the
following parts are energized regardless of
whether SW1 (main power) is ON or OFF:
a. CBR1/2 (circuit breaker/1/2)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL
[2] Parts That Operate When SW1 (Main Power)/SW2 (Sub Power) is ON
4 SW1
AC(L)
RL1 5VDC
-5VDC
12VDC
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
L2
L3
DCPS 5V1
AC(N) 12V1
SW2
REM/2
REM/3
AC OFF(IN)
5VDC IP-511
12VDC
-12VDC /IP-511Type-A
5VDC
12VDC HD-105
-12VDC
OB1 ICB
7272ma2020
2. Signals
a. Output signals
(1) REM/2, /3 (ICB to DCPS)
The DC voltage output from DCPS (DC power
supply unit) is controlled according to the com-
bination of levels of two signals.
REM/2 REM/3 Output
H H 5V1,12V1
5V1,12V1,5V2,12V2,
L H
24V1,-5V1
5V1,12V1,5V2,12V2,
L L
24V1,-5V1,24V2
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
WRFAN1 EM
WRFAN1 D
WRFAN1 HL FM2
P.GND
BINF_D CLFAN EM
FM12 CLNFAN D
BINFF_EM
CLFAN HL FM5
GND P.GND
(7255/7272)
FIXFAN D
FIXFAN3 EM FM6
P.GND
FIXFAN D
FIXFAN2 EM FM7
P.GND
FIXFAN D
FIXFAN1 EM FM8
P.GND
24V DRV SCANFAN CONT-18
FM9 EM SCANFAN EM
IO DTXD
P.GND IO DCLK
SCDB ADU LATCH
IO UCLK
REQ1
IO URXD
ACK1
ERR OUT1
PRCB
5V2
24V1 24V1
P.GND S.GND
ADU FAN/1
FAN1 24V1 ADUFAN EM/1 FM10
FM13 FAN2 P.GND
P.GND
FAN3
DCPS ADUDB
7272ma2015
4 FM4
Developing suction fan
FM9 Duct
Scanner cooling fan Duct (Lower side of developing unit)
FM1 FM5
Main body cooling fan 1 Cleaner cooling fan
FM3
Duct
FM8 Conveyance suction fan
Main body cooling fan 2 Duct
FM7
Paper exit fan/R
FM13
Power supply cooling fan
Duct
FM6
FM2
Paper exit fan/F
Write unit cooling fan FRONT
7272ma2016
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
[H]: Abnormality is detected. b. Output signals
(2) WRFAN1_EM (FM2 to PRCB) (1) MAINFAN_D (PRCB to FM1)
FM2 (writing section cooling) abnormality detec- FM1 (main body cooling/1) ON/OFF control signal
tion signal [L]: FM1 ON
[H]: Abnormality is detected. [H]: FM1 OFF
(3) CLFABN_EM (FM5 to PRCB) (2) MAINFAN_HL_20 (PRCB to FM1)
FM5 (cleaner cooling) abnormality detection sig- FM1 (main body cooling/1) rotational speed con-
nal trol signal
[H]: Abnormality is detected. [L]: Low speed
(4) FIXFAN3_EM (FM6 to PRCB) [H]: High speed
FM6 (paper exit/F) abnormality detection signal (3) WRFAN1_D (PRCB to FM2)
[L]: FM6 is normal. FM2 (writing section cooling) ON/OFF control
[H]: FM6 is abnormal signal
(5) FIXFAN2_EM (FM7 to PRCB) [L]: FM2 ON
FM7 (paper exit/R) abnormality detection signal [H]: FM2 OFF
[L]: FM7 is normal. (4) WRFAN1_HL (PRCB to FM2)
[H]: FM7 is abnormal. FM2 (write section cooling) rotational speed con-
(6) FIXFAN1_EM (FM8 to PRCB) trol signal
FM8 (main cooling/2) abnormality detection sig- [L]: Low speed
nal [H]: High speed
[L]: FM8 is normal. (5) CLNFAN_D (PRCB to FM5)
[H]: FM8 is abnormal. FM5 (cleaner cooling) ON/OFF control signal
(7) EM (FM9 to SCDB) [L]: FM5 ON
FM9 (scanner cooling) abnormality detection [H]: FM5 OFF
signal (6) CLFFAN_D (PRCB to FM5)
[L]: FM9 is normal. FM5 (cleaner cooling) rotational speed control
[H]: FM9 is abnormal. signal
(8) ADUFAN_EM/1 (FM10 to PRCB) [L]: Low speed
FM10 (ADU reverse motor cooling) abnormality [H]: High speed
detection signal (7) FIXFAN_D (PRCB to FM6)
[L]: FM10 is normal. FM6 (paper exit/F) rotational speed control sig-
[H]: FM10 is abnormal. nal
(9) FAN2 (FM13 to PRCB) [L]: Low speed
FM13 (power supply cooling) abnormality detec- [H]: High speed
tion signal (8) FIXFAN_D (PRCB to FM7)
[L]: FM13 is normal. FM7 (paper exit/R) ON/OFF control signal
[H]: FM13 is abnormal. [L]: FM7 ON
(10) SCANFAN_EM (SCDB to PRCB) [H]: FM7 OFF
FM9 (scanner cooling) abnormality detection (9) FIXFAN-D (PRCB to FM8)
signal FM8 (main cooling/2) ON/OFF control signal
[L]: FM9 is normal. [L]: FM8 ON
[H]: FM9 is abnormal. [H]: FM8 OFF
S OUT2
S IN2
/RTS2
/CTS2
/DTR2 PAKB
/DSR2
LCD
ICB
24V1
5V2 OB INVB
S.GND
P.GND
DCPS OB1
The operation panel consists of OB1 (operation b. LCD (indicator board) control
board 1), PAKB (panel key board), and LCD (indi- (1) LCD (indicator board) display operation
cator board). The LCD has a backlight which is The LCD (image control board) displays various
driven by OB IVNB (OB inverter) and touch information according to the 4-bit parallel data
switches which correspond to the display mes- from ICB (image control board) via OB1 (opera-
sages. tion board 1).
The operation panel is controlled by the OB1 (2) Backlight ON operation
based on the serial data output from the ICB The LCD (indicator board) has a backlight (cold
(image control board). cathode tube) to facilitate viewing. The backlight
is driven by OB INVB (OB inverter), and con-
1. Operation trolled by the OB1 (operation board/1).
a. LED ON operation (3) PAKB (panel key board) control
The LED on the OB1 (operation board/1) is con- The LCD (indicator board) has PAKB (panel key
trolled by sub CPU of OB1 at the command of board) to allow you to select an item displayed on
ICB (image control board). the LCD directly. PAKB is controlled by OB1
(operation board/1).
MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD
2-P-8
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 2-P-6 REPLACEMENT
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL
2. Signals
a. Input signals
(1) S_IN2 (OB1 to ICB)
Serial data which informs ICB (image control
board) of the operation state of OB1 (operation
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
board/1).
(2) /CTS2 (OB1 to ICB)
Signal which indicates that data can be sent from
OB1 (operation board/1) to ICB (image control
board)
When this signal is at the high level ([H]), ICB
stops sending the S_OUT2 signal.
(3) /DSR2 (OB1 to ICB)
Acknowledgment signal which is returned each
time OB1 (operation board/1) receives one-byte
data from ICB (image control board)
b. Output signals
(1) S_OUT2 (ICB to OB1)
Serial data which informs OB1 (operation board
/1) of the machine status that is known to ICB
(image control board).
(2) /RTS2 (ICB to OB1)
Signal which indicates that data can be sent from
ICB (image control board) to OB1 (operation
board/1).
When this signal is at the high level ([H]), OB1
stops sending the S_IN2 signal.
(3) /DTR2 (ICB to OB1)
Acknowledgment signal which is returned each
time ICB (image control board) receives one-
byte data from OB1 (operation board/1).
2-P-9
2-P-7
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL
MC24V 3
TC DRV C(T)
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
KEYC DRV
S.GND
KEYC SET C(K)
MC24V 3
5V
MAINEXIT PS PS37
S.GND
S OUT2
S IN2
/RTS2
/CTS2
/DTR2
/DSR2
ICB
24V1
5V2
S.GND
P.GND
PRCB DCPS OB1
2-P-10
2-P-8
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL
2 UNIT EXPLANATION
SF
(SF-101)
LCT
(LT-402/LT412)
IP-511
ICB HD-105
MODEM
24V1
CV P.GND
(COPY VENDOR) 5V2
S.GND
PRCB 12V1
DCPS
7272ma2021
1. Operation
FNS incorporates CB which exchanges only
control data with PRCB (printer control board) of
the main body. LCT, FNS, and HDD are powered
by the DCPS (DC power supply unit).
- -
35 3 C(K) GND Signal ground
C(K) DRIVE Key counter signal count up 100-ms L-signal output
4 -
after paper ejection
5 P. GND Power ground - -
Vendor Copy Copying signal Output from the moment Open collector
START PRINT button is 5V, 200 mA
1 pressed to the moment
paper ejection is com-
pleted.
Vendor FEED Paper feed signal Common to main body
tray. 100-ms L-signal
2
output in sync with paper
feed.
3 Paper size 0 Paper size signal Output when paper size
36 is changed.
4 Paper size 1
5 Paper size 2
6 Paper size 3
Vendor Double-sided copy selec- Output when ADU mode
7
screen tion signal is selected.
CPF SIG0 CPF mode selection signal Output when copy or
8
printer mode is selected.
9 CPF SIG1
10 P. GND Power ground - -
2-P-12
2-P-10
3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERNAL SECTION
[1] Replacing the Ozone Filter 4 In the case of the 7255/7272
In the case of the 7155/7165 Caution:
Caution: Be sure the power cord has been
Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
unplugged from the wall outlet.
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter /M and
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter, insert /S, insert it in the opening in the main
it in the opening in the main body as far body as far as it will go.
as it will go. b. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Loosen two screws to remove the ozone filter
(1) Loosen two screws to remove the ozone filter cover.
cover.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screw
Screw
Ozone filter cover
Ozone filter cover
Screw
Screw
Screw
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERNAL SECTION
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the (2) Remove seven screws to detach the left side
External Covers cover.
Option cover
Ozone filter cover
Screws
Screw Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Screws
Screws
3-A-4
3-A-2
EXTERNAL SECTION
(3) Loosen one screw and remove the developing (14) Remove the top cover (middle front) and top
suction filter cover. cover (middle rear).
(4) Loosen five screws and detach the right side
cover (upper). Original stopper plate (rear)
Shoulder screws
Caution: The developing suction filter cover Top cover
detaches together with the right side (middle rear)
Top cover (right)
cover (upper). Top cover (left)
Screws
(5) Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover
(lower front).
(6) Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover
(lower rear).
(7) Loosen two screws to detach the right side cover
(lower middle).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing suction filter cover
Top cover
Screws
Shoulder screws (middle front)
Platen glass
Original stopper plate (left)
Screws
Screws
3-A-5
3-A-3
EXTERNAL SECTION
(15) Open the front right door and front left door. [4] Changing the Operation Panel
(16) Remove one screw to remove the front open/ Attachment Angle and Removing/
close stopper. Reinstalling
(17) Remove two screws to remove the front right
door open/close hinge (lower) and front right Caution:
door. Be sure the power cord has been
(18) Remove two screws and remove the front left unplugged from the wall outlet.
door hinge (lower) and the front left door. a. Procedure
(1) Open the front left door and front right door.
(2) Remove two screws to remove the operation
Front open/close stopper
panel cover (middle).
Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Screws
3-A-6
3-A-4
EXTERNAL SECTION
(4) When changing the operation panel attachment (5) Remove the relay connectors (CN163, 164).
angle, align the operation panel stopper with the
Caution: Each relay connector consist of two
stopper hole at the front side on the bottom of the
male sides and one female side. Be
operation panel and fasten using two screws in
sure to remove only the male side
the operation cover attachment holes.
(shown below).
Caution1: To remove the operation panel, skip
(6) Remove the operation panel.
this step and proceed to step (5).
Caution2: When the attachment angle of the
operation panel is changed, the Relay connector (CN164)
operation panel cover and two
Relay connector
screws will become unnecessary. (CN163)
Stopper hole
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Operation panel stopper
Operation panel
Stopper hole Operation panel
Stopper hole
Screws
3-A-7
3-A-5
EXTERNAL SECTION
[5] Resetting the Circuit Breaker (3) Turn over the circuit breaker assemblies and
press the reset button at the center of each circuit
Caution:
breaker.
Be sure the power cord has been
(4) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
unplugged from the wall outlet.
steps in reverse.
Caution:
Connection of cables to circuit breaker 1
and 2 (CBR1, 2) must not be changed.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove two screws and loosen the circuit
breaker assembly.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws (2)
Faston (FT1:
wall outlet side/
black cable)
Circuit breaker
assembly
Circuit breaker 2
(CBR2)
Faston (FT2:
wall outlet side/
white cable)
Faston (FT4:
noise filter side/
white cable)
3-A-8
3-A-6
DRIVE SECTION
DRIVE SECTION
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum (5) Remove five screws at the rear and three screws
Motor (M2) on the right side and remove all connectors from
the image control board (ICB).
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Screws (3)
unplugged from the wall outlet.
Image control board (ICB)
Caution: Be sure to draw the drum unit out of
the main body before removing or
reinstalling the drum drive motor. If
you fail to draw out the drum unit, the
cleaning blade may be damaged
because the drum rotates when
installing or removing the flywheel or
gear. Screws (3)
a. Procedure
(1) Draw the drum unit out of the main body. (See
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the rear cover. (See "EXTERNAL SEC-
TION.")
(3) Remove the developing suction cover and right Screws (2)
cover (top). (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.") Image control board mounting board
(4) Remove twenty-one screws and remove the
image control board cover.
4 Caution: When removing CN110 ribbon cable,
Image control board cover
pull and recline the lock lever front-
Screws (7)
ward, release the lock, and then pull
out the ribbon cable.
Ribbon cable
Screws (5)
Screws (5)
Screws (4)
Lock lever
7272ma3002
When installing the ribbon cable, pull and recline (6) Remove each cable from wire guide.
the lock lever frontward, be sure to insert it fully (7) Remove one cable from the scanner board and
to the end of the connector so that the conductive two cables from the write unit, draw then through
surface of the ribbon cable is positioned in the the hole and open the image control board
opposite side. mounting plate.
Lock lever
Conductive surface
7272ma3003
Ribbon cable
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
DRIVE SECTION
(8) Remove three screws and remove the two fly- [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
wheels. Input Gear
Caution:
Flywheels (2)
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
(1) Open the image control bard mounting board.
(2) Remove six screws and remove the fixing motor
Screws (3) cover.
(3) Pull out the connector (CN304), remove four
screws to remove the fixing motor assembly.
Screws (2)
3-B-4
3-B-2
SCANNER SECTION
SCANNER SECTION
[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed [2] Removing and Reinstalling the CCD Unit
a. 14 screws securing the CCD unit
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
Screws that Screws that
must not be must not be removed unplugged from the wall outlet.
removed Caution1: Be sure to adjust the image after
installing the CCD unit (See
"ADJUSTMENT.")
Caution2: When disconnecting or reconnecting
connectors from / to the AD con-
verter board, be careful not to place
any stress on the board.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the right side cover (top), left side cover,
original stopper plates (left and rear), platen
Screws that glass and top cover (right, left, front center, and
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
must not be removed rear center). (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.")
(2) Remove eleven screws to remove the lens light
b. Read position adjusting plate screw (1 each) blocking cover.
Screws (11)
Read position adjusting plate
Screws that
(left rear)
Screws that must not be
must not be removed
removed
Screws that
CCD unit
must not be
removed
Connector (CN170)
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 When installing the ribbon cable, pull and recline
the lock lever frontward, be sure to insert it fully
CCD unit to the end of the connector so that the conductive
surface of the ribbon cable is positioned in the
opposite side.
Lock lever
Connector (CN170)
A/D converter board (ADB) 7272ma3005
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Lock lever
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER SECTION
(4) Remove two screws to remove the CCD unit. [3] Replacing the Exposure Lamp
Screws
Caution1:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
Caution2:
Do not touch the exposure lamp with bare
hands.
TION.")
(2) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main
Caution: Mark the place where the CCD unit is body frame on the paper exit side.
installed before removing it. (3) Remove the connector and two screws, then
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal remove the exposure lamp.
steps in reverse.
Screw
Exposure lamp
Connector
Screw
Exposure lamp
3-C-4
3-C-2
SCANNER SECTION
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the (6) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main
Exposure Unit body frame on the paper exit side.
(7) Remove two screws to detach the cord clamp
Caution:
(B).
Be sure the power cord has been
(8) Remove one screw to remove the ground termi-
unplugged from the wall outlet.
nal.
Caution1: When installing the exposure unit,
(9) Disconnect the connector (CN630).
use the optics unit positioning jig.
(10) Remove four screws to detach the exposure unit.
Caution2: Be sure to perform image adjust-
ment after installing the exposure
unit. (See "ADJUSTMENT.") Cord clamp (B)
a. Procedure Optical wire fastener Screws
(1) Remove the right side cover (top), left side cover,
original stopper plates (left and rear), platen Screws
Screw
glass and top cover (right, left, front center, and
Ground
rear center). (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.") terminal
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(2) Remove the operation panel. (See "EXTERNAL
SECTION.")
(3) Remove the relay connector (CN162).
Relay connector
(CN162)
3-C-5
3-C-3
SCANNER SECTION
3-C-6
3-C-4
SCANNER SECTION
Five turns
Five turns Metal bead
Metal bead Wire stopper
Pulley 1
Pulley 1
V-mirror pulley
Wire stopper
V-mirror unit
Exposure unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Pulley 3 mounting piece
Drive pulley
Wire stopper
Spring
Pulley 2
Pulley 2
4 Metal bead
Wire stopper
Caution: There are two grooves in the wire (6) Install the other wire following the same proce-
stopper. Ensure that the outer groove dure.
is at the rear and the inner groove is at (7) Loosen each screw that was tightened tempo-
the front. rarily, install the spring on the spring fixing plate,
(5) Reverse the inner wire at pulley 2, pass it along and tighten each screw.
the inside of the V-mirror pulley and pulley 3, then
attach the wire terminal to the spring fixing plate.
At this time, secure the spring fixing plate tem-
porarily with one screw.
3-C-7
3-C-5
SCANNER SECTION
[6] Cleaning the Slit Glass and Platen [7] Replacing the Scanner Motor (M11)
Glass Caution:
Caution: Be sure the power cord has been
Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
unplugged from the wall outlet. a. Procedure
(1) Remove the original stopper plates (left and (1) Remove the RADF unit, original stopper plates
rear), platen glass, and top cover (right, left, front (left and rear), platen glass, and top cover (right,
center, and rear center). (See "EXTERNAL SEC- left, front center, and rear center). (See "EXTER-
TION.") NAL SECTION.")
(2) Remove two screws to detach the slit glass. (2) Remove one connector (CN639) from the APS
(3) Place the removed slit glass and platen glass on timing PS (PS51).
a rag and clean with drum cleaner and cleaning
pad.
Connector(CN639)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screw
Slit glass
(5) Install the scanner motor (M11) and the scanner (7) Pull the spring scale upward, and tighten the
belt. Tighten the scanner motor loosely with four scanner motor (M11) tightly with the tension
screws. pressure of 2 ± 0.2kgf. (Use four screws)
Caution1: Make sure to install the belt in the
Caution: Make sure that the scanner motor
middle of two pulleys. Also make
moves up and down when confirming
sure that the belt is not placed on the
the tension pressure.
edges of pulleys, or that it is running
off from the pulleys.
Caution2: Tighten the motor by first tightening Spring scale
the screw and then give it one turn to Scanner motor (M11)
loosen slightly.
Scanner Belt
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
(8) Make sure that the belt is not slacked off after
marking an adjustment.
(9) Insert the connector to the scanner motor (M11).
Pulley (10) Follow the disassembly procedures in reverse
order to install.
(6) Hook the spring scale on the upper hole of the
scanner motor (M11).
Spring scale
Upper hole
Blank page
WRITE SECTION
WRITE SECTION
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Write
Unit
In the case of the 7155/7165
Warning:
(1) Do not energize the write unit when it is
not in the correct position.
(2) Never remove the write unit cover and
the polygon unit cover.
(3) Never look directly into the laser beam. It
can cause blindness.
(4) Never remove the write unit for at least
two minutes after turning OFF the main
switch.
Caution:
Fan holder assembly
Be sure the power cord has been
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
unplugged from the wall outlet. Relay connector (CN338)
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the left side cover. (See "EXTERNAL
SECTION.")
(2) Remove nine screws to detach the fan holder
assembly.
(3) Remove the relay connector (CN338).
Screws
Caution: Each relay connector consists of two Screws
Screws
male sides and one female side. Be
sure to remove only the male side
(shown below) of the CN338 connec- (4) Remove the three connectors (CN185, 187,
tor. 188).
(5) Loosen the screw to draw out and remove the
write unit.
Connector (CN187)
Connector (CN185)
Connector (CN188)
Screw
Write unit
3-D-1
WRITE SECTION
4 In the case of the 7255/7265 (4) Remove the three connectors (CN185, 187,
Warning: 188).
(1) Do not energize the write unit when it is (5) Loosen the screw to draw out and remove the
not in the correct position. write unit.
(2) Never remove the write unit cover and Relay connector(CN187)
the polygon unit cover. Relay connector(CN185)
(3) Never look directly into the laser beam. It
can cause blindness.
(4) Never remove the write unit for at least
two minutes after turning OFF the main
switch.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
b. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Relay connector
(CN338) Screws 7272ma3006
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
WRITE SECTION
Write unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Dust-proof glass
3-D-4
3-D-2
DRUM UNIT
DRUM UNIT
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum (5) Loosen the screw of the blade fixing component.
Unit
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
Caution1: Be sure to put a drum cover over the
removed drum unit and store the
drum unit in a dark place.
Caution2: When installing or removing the
drum unit, do not rotate it in the direc-
tion opposite to the specified one.
Rotating the drum unit in the oppo- Blade fixing component
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Release
drum unit, take care not to touch the
separation claw.
4 Caution4: When installing a new drum, be sure
to enter mode 25 and select "Copy
Count by Parts to be Replaced" to Screw
reset OPC drum counter.
a. Procedure
(1) Open the left and right front doors.
(2) While pressing the solenoid release lever on top (6) Remove the two screws securing the drum unit.
of the ADU rack to the left, flip the ADU rack pull- (7) Release the toner supply pipe in the direction of
out lever to the left. the arrow.
(3) Loosen three screws to remove the drum cover. (8) Remove the screw securing the coupling to
detach the drum shaft coupling and drum cou-
Drum cover Screws pling.
(9) Hold the two sections shown in the figure and pull
out the drum unit.
Screws
Toner supply pipe
Drum unit
Screw
Drum coupling
[2] Installing the Coupling (4) Turn the head of the drum coupling clockwise so
that the flange section on the drum shaft coupling
Caution:
is flush.
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
(1) Clean the outer surface of the drum coupling and
drum shaft coupling with drum cleaner and
cleaning pad.
(2) Insert the drum coupling aligning the protrusions
on the drum coupling with the notches in the
drum.
Drum coupling
Flange section
Drum notches
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Drum coupling
Protrusions
Drum coupling
Drum shaft
D cut section
3-E-2
DRUM UNIT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
blade regardless of whether the
parts are new or old.
Caution4: After applying setting powder to the
drum, perform the following before
installing the drum unit in the main
body. Hold here
1) With the charging corona unit and
developing unit removed, turn the
drum once (to prevent setting (5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
powder from scattering onto the steps in reverse.
charging corona unit, and to pre-
vent image defects).
2) When installing a new drum, be
sure to enter mode 25 and select
"Copy Count by Parts to be
Replaced" to reset drum counter.
(See "ADJUSTMENT.")
3-E-3
DRUM UNIT
[4] Removing and Reinstalling the (5) Remove the stop ring, slide the shaft, and
Separation Claws and Separation remove the three separation claws.
Claw Solenoid Caution1: Clean the shaft with drum cleaner
and a cleaning pad when installing.
Caution: The separator claws cannot move
Be sure the power cord has been smoothly if they are installed with
unplugged from the wall outlet. toner remaining on the shaft.
Caution1: Take care not to damage the drum Caution2: When installing, insert the retaining
when removing the separation ring between the ribs.
claws. Caution3: After installing the separation claws,
Caution2: Note the orientation and position of check that they move smoothly.
the separation claws when reinstall-
ing them.
Caution3: Do not touch the cleaning blade and
drum with bare hands.
a. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. Separation claws
(2) Remove the drum.
Stop ring
(3) Remove the connector (CN363) and separation
swing spring.
(4) Remove two screws and detach the separation
guide plate assembly.
Shaft
Screws
Separation claw Rib
Connector (CN363)
Screws
3-E-4
DRUM UNIT
Screws
Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(8) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Drum unit
steps in reverse.
Pin
Guide hole
3-E-5
DRUM UNIT
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Caution: When installing the toner control sen-
Control Sensor Board sor board, tighten the screws pulling it
up until stoppers.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum.
(3) Remove the separator claw solenoid assembly.
(4) Remove the connector (CN362).
(5) Remove three screws and remove the toner con-
trol sensor board.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Connector (CN362)
Toner control sensor board (TCSB)
3-E-6
CORONA UNIT
CORONA UNIT
[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed [2] Removing and Reinstalling the
a. Five screws securing the transfer entrance Charging Corona Unit
guide plate
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
Screws that must not be removed
unplugged from the wall outlet.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Charging corona unit
Connector
(CN364)
Connector (CN365)
3-F-1
CORONA UNIT
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the (3) Remove the spark arrester plates (front and
Charge Control Plate rear).
Charging
wire
3-F-2
CORONA UNIT
[5] Removing and Reinstalling the [6] Removing and Reinstalling the PCL
Charging Wire Cleaning Unit Caution:
Caution: Be sure the power cord has been
Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.
unplugged from the wall outlet. a. Procedure
a. Procedure (1) Remove the charging corona unit.
(1) Remove the charging wire. (2) Disconnect the wire binding band at two loca-
(2) Remove the stop ring and remove the charging tions.
wire cleaning pad. (3) Release the lock and remove the PCL.
Caution1: When removing the charging wire
cleaning pad, be careful not to drop PCL
the two collars.
Stop ring 2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
1
Lock
Collar PCL
Collar
3-F-3
CORONA UNIT
Urethane sheet
7272ma3008
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
CORONA UNIT
[7] Cleaning the Charging Corona Unit/ [8] Removing and Reinstalling the
PCL Transfer/Separation Corona Unit
Caution: Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet. unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the charging corona unit. (1) Draw the ADU frame from the main body. (See
(2) Remove the charge control plate and PCL. "ADU UNIT.")
(3) Place the charge control plate on a flat surface (2) Loosen two screws to remove the transfer/sep-
and clean by gently tapping with a cleaning pad aration corona unit.
moistened with drum cleaner. Next, remove any
remaining dirt with a blower brush.
PCL
Transfer/separation
corona unit
Screw
3-F-6
3-F-4
CORONA UNIT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Spark arrester plate (rear)
plunger prevention
Spark arrester plate (front)
plate (rear)
Lock
Lock
Lock
(Same as on the opposite side)
(5) Remove the springs of wires (one each).
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse. Caution: When installing the springs, bend the
edge of each spring inside.
3-F-7
3-F-5
CORONA UNIT
(6) Release and remove three wires from each (7) Turn the transfer/separation corona unit upside
cleaning block. down, remove the stop rings, and remove the
transfer wire cleaning block and separation wire
Caution: Be careful not to drop and lose the
cleaning block from the front side.
support rubber when removing the
wire. Stop rings
Coupling
Transfer wire
Spring
Transfer wire
Separation wire cleaning block
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Separation wire
cleaning block
Transfer wire
(8) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Support rubber
steps in reverse.
3-F-8
3-F-6
CORONA UNIT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit.
4 TSL unit Relay connector
(CN463)
Screws 7272ma3034
Blank page
DEVELOPING UNIT
DEVELOPING UNIT
[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed [2] Removing and Reinstalling the
a. Procedure Developing Unit
(1) Two screws securing the toner transfer regula-
Caution:
tion plate.
Be sure the power cord has been
(2) One screw securing the magnet angle adjusting
unplugged from the wall outlet.
knob.
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the drum unit from the main body. (See
Screws that must not be removed "DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Release the toner supply pipe.
(3) Release the developing unit push pressure lever.
(4) Supporting the developing unit at the positions
shown below with both hands, remove it from the
drum unit.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing unit
3-G-1
DEVELOPING UNIT
[3] Replacing the Developer (4) Tilt the developing unit about 45° and rotate the
Caution1: When replacing the developer in the developing gear counterclockwise to discharge
developing unit, take care not to all of the developer adhering to the inside of the
allow dirt to get into it. developing unit and magnet roller.
Caution2: To rotate the developing sleeve,
rotate the developing gear counter-
clockwise.
Caution3: Never rotate the developing gear
clockwise.
4 Caution4: When installing a new developer, be
sure to enter mode 25 and select
"Copy Count by Parts to be 45˚
Replaced" to reset developer
counter.
Developing gear
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing gear
Developer
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the drum unit from the main body. (See
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
(3) Release the hook of the developing unit cover
and remove it upward.
Hooks
(Same as
on the
opposite
side)
Hooks
(8) Rotate the developing gear counterclockwise to [4] Cleaning the Developing Unit Bias
check that the developer bristles along the entire Shaft
length of the developing sleeve.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
Developing sleeve
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
Developing unit
stopper roller
(1) Draw out the drum unit from the main body. (See
"DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
(3) Wipe the dirt on the developing unit bias shaft
with cleaning pad.
Developing gear
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Developing gear
3-G-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Toner supply unit
Toner cartridge
Cartridge
insertion hole
3-H-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
drum and cleaning blade are new or cleaning blade.
old.
Caution4: When you have applied setting pow- Cleaning blade
der to the drum, perform the follow-
ing before installing the drum unit on
the main body:
1) To ensure accurate toner concentration, wipe
scattered setting powder off the γ sensor and
Dmax/JAM sensor on the toner control sen-
sor board with a rag moistened with alcohol.
2) With the charging corona unit and developing
unit removed, turn the drum once (to prevent
setting powder from scattering onto the
charging corona unit, and to prevent image
defects).
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit. (See "DRUM UNIT.")
(2) Remove the charging corona unit. (See
"CHARGING CORONA UNIT.")
Blade support bearing
(3) Remove the developing unit. (See "DEVELOP-
ING UNIT.")
(4) Remove two screws to remove the cleaner cover. (7) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Screws
Caution: After replacing the cleaning blade, be
sure to perform Blade Setting Mode
Adjustment in the 36 mode. (To pre-
vent the blade from peeling.)
Cleaner cover
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
In the case of the 7155/7165
Positioning part
Screw
Blank page
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Paper feed unit
Screw Screws
(4) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Tray 1,2
steps in reverse.
3-J-1
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [4] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber Prevention Roller Rubber
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the two stop rings and slide the two (2) Remove the paper feed roller unit.
bearings outward. (3) Remove the stop ring to detach the double feed
(3) Release the feed roller axis from the holder slit to prevention roller.
detach the paper feed roller unit. (4) Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
from the roller.
Slit
Paint mark
Stop ring
Double feed
prevention roller
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Double feed
Bearing prevention roller
rubber
Bearing
Stop ring
(4) Remove the two stop rings from the paper feed
roller unit to detach the paper feed roller and feed Stop ring
roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller.
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Paint mark
steps in reverse.
Caution1: When reinstalling the double feed
Paper feed roller prevention roller, pay attention to
their orientation.
Paper feed roller Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
rubber remains on the double feed preven-
tion roller.
Feed roller
Feed roller rubber Stop rings
3-J-2
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)
Detent Connector
(CN810, 830)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Stop ring
Feed MC/1/2
(MC3/5)
Stop ring
Pre-registration MC/1/2
(MC4/6)
Connector
(CN811, 831)
3-J-3
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)
3-J-4
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)
(3) Remove the front and rear wires according to steps 1 to 7 below.
Pulley E-ring
E-ring
3. Remove wire C.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Wire C (black) 6. Remove drive pulley holder
and E-ring and pull out the
drive pulley.
Wire D (White) Wire B Wire A
(white) (black)
5. Remove wire D. Drive pulley holder
Wire A (black)
Up/down plate
Wire B (white)
3-J-5
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7155/7165)
Wire Lengths
182.8±1 mm (Tray 1, 2)
Wire A, C
473.1±1 mm (Tray 1, 2)
Wire B, D
Installing Wires
2. Install the pulley, pass 4. Install the pulley, pass 5. Install the wires C and D from
wire D through the pulley, wires C and D, and install inside the drive shaft hole, push in
and install the wire the wire restraining cover the drive pulley, and secure with
restraining cover and and retaining ring. Wire D E-ring.
E-ring. must be inside. Wires must
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
not cross.
Wire restraining cover Wire D
(white) Wire C
(black)
Wire C
Wire D (black)
(white)
Pulley
E-ring
E-ring
3. Pass wire C
through the up/down
plate.
Wire A
Wire B (black)
Wire D (white)
(white)
1. Pass wire D Drive pulley holder
through the
up/down plate. Wire A
(black)
Up/down plate
Wire B (white)
3-J-6
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 1 AND 2 (7255/7272)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
LCT cover /L
Screws
7272ma3010
(4) Remove five screws to detach the tray 1 by lifting. 4 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Feed Tray 2
Screws
Warning:
When removing the tray, stand in a proper
position so that you do not hurt your back
and waist. If the tray contains paper,
remove all paper before removing the tray.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out paper feed tray 2.
(2) Remove the paper feed unit.
Screws Tray 1 (3) Remove five screws and remove the LCT cover
7272ma3011 /R.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
LCT cover /R
Screws
7272ma3012
(4) Remove five screws to detach the tray 2 by lifting. 4 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber
Screws a. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the two stop rings and slide the two
bearings outward.
(3) Release the feed roller axis from the holder slit to
detach the paper feed roller unit.
Slit
Stop ring
Screws Tray 2
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
7272ma3013
Bearing
Stop ring
(4) Remove the two stop rings from the paper feed
roller unit to detach the paper feed roller and feed
roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller. 4 [5] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
Prevention Roller Rubber
The contents here shall be in accordance with
Paper feed roller rubber Paint mark
the "[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
Feed Prevention Roller Rubber" of PAPER FEED
UNITS OF TRAY 1 AND 2 (7155/7165).
Arrow mark
7272ma3014
4 [6] Replacing the Pre-Registration and 4 [7] Replacing the Horizontal Conveyance
Feed Clutches (MCs) MC/L and /R
The contents here shall be in accordance with a. Procedure
the "[5] Replacing the Pre-registration and Feed (1) Remove the vertical conveyance section. (See
Clutches (MCs)" of PAPER FEED UNITS OF "VERTICAL CONVEYNACE SECTION")
TRAY 1 and 2 (7155/7165). (2) Draw out the horizontal conveyance section and
tray 2.
(3) Remove two relay connectors (CN902, 903).
(4) Remove a screw to detach the sensor mounting
plate.
(5) Remove a stop ring for each, detach the horizon-
tal conveyance MC/L (MC15) and horizontal con-
veyance MC/R (MC16).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Horizontal
conveyance
Horizontal conveyance MC/R (MC16)
Sensor
MC/L (MC15)
mounting
Detent plate
Screws
Wire cover (rear)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(3) Remove the wires A and B according to steps 1 to 10 of the figure below.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
to release the wire A (black) and B(white).
Wire B (White)
Wire A (Black) E-ring
Drive pulley Drive shaft
7272ma3017
1. Remove the E-ring, slide the drive pulley inward, 5. Remove the E-ring, slide the drive pulley outward,
and remove the wire C (black) from the drive shaft. and remove the wire D (white) from the drive shaft.
7272ma3018
Wire Lengths
294.8 1mm(Tray 1)
232.4 1mm(Tray 2)
Wire A, C
391.7 1mm(Tray 1)
329.2 1mm(Tray 2)
Wire B, D 7272ma3019
<Installing Wires>
Reinstall the wires following the removal steps in
reverse.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Paper feed unit
Screws
Screw
3-K-1
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper [4] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber Prevention Roller Rubber
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit. (1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove two stop rings and slide the two bear- (2) Remove the paper feed roller unit.
ings outward. (3) Remove the stop ring to detach the double feed
(3) Release the feed roller axis from the holder slit to prevention roller.
detach the paper feed roller unit. (4) Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber
from the roller.
Slit
Paint mark
Stop ring
Double feed
prevention roller
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Double feed
Bearing prevention roller
rubber
Bearing
Stop ring
(4) Remove two stop rings from the paper feed roller
unit to detach the paper feed roller and feed Stop ring
roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller.
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Paint mark
steps in reverse.
Caution1: When reinstalling the double feed
Paper feed roller prevention roller, pay attention to
their orientation.
Paper feed roller Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
rubber remains on the double feed preven-
tion roller.
Feed roller
Feed roller rubber Stop rings
3-K-2
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)
Detent Connector
(CN810, 830)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Stop ring
Feed MC/1/2
(MC3/5)
Stop ring
Pre-registration MC/1/2
(MC4/6)
Connector
(CN811, 831)
3-K-3
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)
Screws
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3-K-4
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)
(5) Remove the front and rear wires according to steps 1 to 7 below.
2, 4 Remove the E-ring to detach 1 Remove two E-rings to slide out the
the wire restraining cover drive pulley.
and pulley. Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Wire restraining cover E-ring
E-ring
Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Pulley
E-ring Drive pulley
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove wire C.
Wire B (white)
Wire A (black)
5. Remove wire D. E-ring
Wire A (black) E-ring
Up/down plate
E-ring
Wire B (white)
Drive pulley
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5
to remove wire A and wire B.
3-K-5
PAPER FEED UNIT OF TRAY 3 (7155/7165)
Wire Lengths
298.9±1 mm (Tray 3)
Wire A, C
589.2±1 mm (Tray 3)
Wire B, D
Installing Wires
2. Install the pulley, pass 4. Install the pulley, pass 5. Install the wires C and D from
wire D through the pulley, wires C and D, and install inside the drive shaft hole, push in
and install the wire the wire restraining cover the drive pulley, and secure with
restraining cover and and retaining ring. Wire D E-rings.
must be inside. Wires must
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
E-ring.
not cross. Wire D (white)
Wire C (black)
Wire restraining cover
E-ring
E-ring
Wire D Wire C
(white) (black)
Pulley
E-ring Drive pulley
Drive pulley
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install
wire A and wire B.
3-K-6
PAPER FEED UNITS OF TRAYS 3 AND 4 (7255/7272)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws
Screws
Tray 3
Screws
7272ma3020
4 [3] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper 4 [4] Removing and Reinstalling the DF
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber Prevention Roller Rubber
The contents here shall be in accordance with The contents here shall be in accordance with
the "[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper the "[4] Removing and Reinstalling the Double
Feed Roller and Feed Roller Rubber" of PAPER Feed Prevention Roller Rubber" of PAPER FEED
FEED UNITS OF TRAY 1 AND 2 (7255/7272). UNITS OF TRAY 1 AND 2 (7155/7165).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
BYPASS FEED TRAY
Shaft
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screws (2) Paper feed roller rubber
Paper feed roller
Gear
Screw
Bearing
[3] Replacing the DF Prevention Roller (6) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Rubber steps in reverse.
a. Procedure Caution1: Check that the orientation of the dou-
(1) Remove the bypass feed tray and place the tray ble feed prevention roller is correct
upside down. when installing.
(2) Remove two screws to remove the bottom plate Caution2: Check that no grease or the like
assembly. remains on the double feed preven-
(3) Remove the spring. tion roller.
Caution3: There are three spring holes. Insert
Screws (2) the spring in the middle hole.
Bottom plate
assembly
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Spring
Spring hole
Paint mark
Double feed prevention
roller rubber
Double feed
prevention roller
Shaft
3-L-2
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(CN881)
Spacer axis
Vertical
Vertical conveyance
conveyance MC/1(MC11)
section
Gear
Connector (CN882)
Vertical
Screws (11) Spacer axis conveyance
Connector (CN880)
MC/2(MC12)
Detent
3-M-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
ADU UNIT
ADU UNIT
[1] Drawing Out and Reinstalling the 4 [2] Cleaning the Paper Dust Removing
ADU Stand Brush
In the case of the 7155/7165
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when Caution:
the front right or left door opens or closes Be sure the power cord has been
should never be turned ON forcibly with unplugged from the wall outlet.
the ADU stand drawn out. a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
Caution:
(2) Release the left and right lock levers, lift the
Be sure the power cord has been
brush handles by the handles to remove the
unplugged from the wall outlet.
paper dust removing brush.
a. Procedure
(1) Open the front right and left doors.
(2) With the solenoid release lever on the ADU stand Brush handles
Lock lever
pushed to the left, turn down the ADU drawing
lever to the left.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(3) Grip the ADU stand drawing lever and draw out
the ADU stand.
ADU stand
Projections
Lock lever
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 (3) Using a blower brush, clean the paper dust
removing brush.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Paper dust removing brush
unplugged from the wall outlet.
b. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Push two projections for each to release the lock
and remove the paper dust removing brush.
Cleaning area
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
7272ma3023
7272ma3022
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ADU UNIT
[3] Cleaning the Paper Mis-Centering PS [4] Removing and Reinstalling the
(PS70)/Leading Edge PS (PS43) Registration MC (MC1)
Warning: Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when The interlock which is turned OFF when
the front right or left door opens or closes the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with should never be turned ON forcibly with
the ADU stand drawn out. the ADU stand drawn out.
Caution: Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet. unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body. (1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Open the pre-transfer jam handler. Clean the (2) Remove one screw to remove the ADU stand
sensor of the paper mis-centering PS (PS70) drawing lever.
and leading edge PS (PS43) at the rear of the
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Leading edge
PS (PS43) ADU stand drawing lever
Paper mis-centering PS (PS70) Screw
Pre-transfer jam
handler
(3) Remove three screws to remove the ADU cover.
(3) Reinstall the above parts following the removal ADU cover
steps in reverse.
Screws
3-N-4
3-N-2
ADU UNIT
(4) Remove one screw and remove the registration 4 (8) Detach the registration MC (MC1).
roller rotation knob.
Caution: When reinstalling, be sure the detent
4 of the clutch is in the clutch cover
groove.
Screw
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Clutch fixing member
Hexagon socket head screws 7272ma3027
Registration roller rotation knob (9) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
7272ma3026
Registration MC (MC1)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ADU UNIT
(4) Remove five screws to remove the second paper [6] Cleaning the Registration PS (PS44)
feed unit.
Warning:
Screws The interlock which is turned OFF when
Screws
the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with
the ADU stand drawn out.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Detach the ADU cover.
(3) Remove the second paper feed unit
(4) Turn the second paper feed unit upside down and
clean the registration PS (PS44) with a blower
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Reinstall the above parts following the removal Registration PS (PS44)
steps in reverse.
3-N-8
3-N-4
ADU UNIT
4 [7] Removing and Reinstalling the (6) Remove the two E-rings (one at the left and the
Registration Roller other at the right) and one bearing from the reg-
In the case of the 7155/7165 istration roller.
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when Bearing
the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with
the ADU stand drawn out.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been E-ring
unplugged from the wall outlet.
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Detach the ADU cover.
(3) Remove the second paper feed unit
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(4) Remove the registration MC (MC1).
Registration roller
(5) Turn the second paper feed unit upside down and
Front side
remove the E-ring on the front of the registration
roller.
E-ring
Bearing
E-ring
2
Registration roller
4 In the case of the 7255/7272 (8) Slide the registration roller to the front, then
remove it by lifting the rear end.
Warning:
(9) Remove the bearing from the registration roller.
The interlock which is turned OFF when
the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with
the ADU stand drawn out.
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
b. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Detach the ADU cover.
(3) Remove the second paper feed unit.
(4) Remove the registration MC (MC1).
(5) Turn the second paper feed unit upside down and
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the two E-rings on the front of the regis- Registration roller Bearing
tration roller. 7272ma3029
(6) Remove the two E-rings at the rear of the regis-
tration roller. (10) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
(7) Remove the two bearings (one at the left and the steps in reverse.
other at the right) from the registration roller.
Bearing
Registration E-ring
roller
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
ADU UNIT
[8] Removing and Reinstalling the (4) Remove the E-ring to remove the pre-transfer
Pre-Transfer Roller roller from the shaft.
E-ring
Springs
3-N-12
3-N-6
ADU UNIT
[9] Cleaning the ADU Paper Reverse PS (7) Remove two screws to remove the ADU reverse
(PS45)/Reverse/Exit PS (PS46) guide assembly.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Remove the open/close spring from the paper
exit side open/close wire.
Open/close
Screws wire assembly
Holes
ADU bottom plate assembly
Open/close
wire
Projections
Open/close
ADU reverse guide spring
assembly
Ground plate
Screw
3-N-13
3-N-7
ADU UNIT
(8) Remove the nine screws illustrated from the bot- (10) Lower the ADU bottom plate assembly straight
tom of the ADU stand. down and remove the ADU guide cover.
Front
Screws
Screws
Paper
exit side
(9) Remove one screw while holding the ADU bot- (11) Clean the ADU paper reverse PS (PS45) and
tom plate assembly to remove the paper feed reverse/exit PS (PS46) with a blower brush.
side open/close wire.
Reverse/exit PS (PS46)
Caution: Be sure to hold ADU bottom plate
assembly when removing the screws
because the ADU bottom plate
assembly becomes free when the
paper feed side open/close wire is
removed.
Screws
Open/close wire
3-N-14
3-N-8
ADU UNIT
[10] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU (9) Slide the ADU reverse roller to the upper side
Reverse Roller and then to the lower side to slide it out.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(5) Remove the screw to remove two wiring har-
nesses.
(6) Remove E-ring (1) to remove the paper eject Wiring
reverse gear (1) and pin. Screws harnesses
(7) Remove E-ring (2) to remove the rear side bear-
ing.
(8) Remove E-ring (3) to remove the front side bear- ADU reverse
ing. roller
Bearing
E-ring (3)
3-N-15
3-N-9
ADU UNIT
[11] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU (8) Disconnect the three relay connectors (CN445,
Stand 446, 447).
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Remove the fixing unit. (See "FIXING UNIT.") Relay
Relay connector
(3) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit. connector
(CN445)
(See "CORONA UNIT.") (CN447)
(4) Remove the second paper feed unit.
(5) Remove the front right door and the front left
door. (See "EXTERNAL SECTION.")
(9) Remove one screw to release the lock of the han- [12] Removing and Reinstalling the
dle(right). Pre-Registration Roller
(10) Remove the two screws securing the guide rails
Warning:
on the paper feed side and paper exit side.
The interlock which is turned OFF when
Caution: Do not mistake the screws securing the front right or left door opens or closes
the guide rails for screws(black) that should never be turned ON forcibly with
must not be removed. (Black screws the ADU stand drawn out.
must not be removed)
Warning:
(11) To remove the ADU stand, one person holds the
Removal and reinstallation of the ADU
handle(right) on the paper-feed side, and the
stand involve carrying a heavy load so it
other holds the the handle(left) on the fixing unit.
should be performed by two persons.
Then, they lift up the ADU stand.
Caution:
Screws Handle (left) Be sure the power cord has been
Handle (right) unplugged from the wall outlet.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the front and rear registration springs.
Guide rail
Screw
Handle
(right)
Screws
Both the left and right black screws
must not be removeed.
3-N-17
3-N-11
ADU UNIT
(6) Slide the ADU pre-registration roller back and [13] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU
forth to remove. Conveyance Roller 3 and 4
E-ring( / 8) Warning:
E-ring( / 6) The interlock which is turned OFF when
Registration Polyslider the front right or left door opens or closes
spring Spring should never be turned ON forcibly with
Pin
the ADU stand drawn out.
Warning:
Hook Removal and reinstallation of the ADU
stand involve carrying a heavy load so it
Cleaner
should be performed by two persons.
coupling Caution:
Bearing
Be sure the power cord has been
Pre-registration roller unplugged from the wall outlet.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Remove the fixing unit. (See "FIXING UNIT.")
(3) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit.
(See "CORONA UNIT SECTION.")
(4) Remove the second paper feed unit.
(5) Remove the ADU stand.
Bearing (6) Remove two screws to detach the conveyance
duct (rear assembly).
Registration
spring
Conveyance duct
Screws
Hook (rear assembly)
E-ring( / 8)
3-N-18
3-N-12
ADU UNIT
(7) Remove two screws to release the high voltage (11) Remove two screws to remove the harness
supply unit (1). guide plate (front).
(8) Disconnect the two connectors (CN460, 461).
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Relay
connector Screw Harness guide plate
(CN461) (front)
Relay connector Screw
(CN426)
Screw
3-N-19
3-N-13
ADU UNIT
(13) Remove the stop rings to remove the ADU decel- (18) Remove the front E-ring and bearing, and
eration MC (MC2) and ADU conveyance MC remove the ADU conveyance roller (3) and ADU
(MC13). conveyance roller (4) by sliding them back and
forth.
Pin
E-rings
Stop rings
E-ring E-rings
3-N-20
3-N-14
ADU UNIT
[14] Removing and Reinstalling the ADU (11) Disconnect the connector (CN415).
Conveyance Roller 1 and 2 (12) Remove three screws to detach the reverse
motor assembly.
Warning:
The interlock which is turned OFF when Screws
the front right or left door opens or closes
should never be turned ON forcibly with Reverse motor
assembly
the ADU stand drawn out.
Warning: Connector
Removal and reinstallation of the ADU (CN415)
Screw
stand involve carrying a heavy load so it
should be performed by two persons.
Connector cover
Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Remove the fixing unit. (See "FIXING UNIT.")
(3) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit.
(See "CORONA UNIT.")
(4) Remove the second paper feed unit.
(5) Remove the ADU stand. Screws
(6) Remove the conveyance unit.
(7) Remove the ADU conveyance MC(MC13). Connector
(8) Disconnect the connector (CN407). (CN407)
(9) Remove three screws to detach the reverse gate
solenoid assembly.
(10) Remove one screw to remove the connector
cover.
Reverse gate solenoid assembly
3-N-21
3-N-15
ADU UNIT
(13) Disconnect the two connectors (CN403, 404). (17) Remove the E-ring from ADU conveyance roller
(14) Disconnect the connector (CN417). (2) shaft.
(18) Remove the front E-ring, two belt holding collars,
Caution: Each relay connector consists of two
ADU conveyance belt (2), and two ADU convey-
male sides and one female side. Be
ance pulleys.
sure to remove only the male side
(19) Remove the pin from the shaft of each roller.
(shown below) of the connector.
(20) Remove the E-ring and bearing inside the ADU
(15) Remove one screw to remove the wiring harness
conveyance pulley.
for CN404.
(21) Remove the rear E-ring and bearing, and remove
(16) Remove eight screws (three front, five rear) and
the ADU conveyance roller (1) and ADU convey-
turn over the fixing attachment rail assembly to
ance roller (2) by sliding them back and forth.
the paper exit side.
E-ring, bearing Belt holding collars,
Screws ADU transport pulleys
Pin
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Pin
Relay connector
Wiring
(CN404) Bearing
harnesses Screw
E-rings
3-N-22
3-N-16
ADU UNIT
[15] Removing and Reinstalling the Paper (12) Remove the paper reverse/exit roller by sliding it
Reverse/Exit Roller back and forth.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand from the main body.
(2) Remove the fixing unit. (See "FIXING UNIT.")
(3) Remove the transfer/separation corona unit.
(See "CORONA UNIT.")
(4) Remove the second paper feed unit.
(5) Remove the ADU stand.
(6) Remove the conveyance unit.
(7) Remove the ADU conveyance roller (1).
(8) Remove the screw to remove the paper reverse/
exit roller rotation knob. Screw
(9) Remove the front E-ring and remove the bearing.
(10) Remove the rear E-ring to remove the paper exit
reverse gear (1) and pin. Bearing
(11) Remove the E-ring and remove the bearing.
3-N-23
3-N-17
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
FIXING UNIT
FIXING UNIT
[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing [2] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
Unit Unit (Top)
Caution:
Warning:
Before opening the fixing unit (top), check
Do not touch the fixing unit immediately
that the pressure release lever is turned
after turning OFF the main power switch
counterclockwise and the bottom roller
because it is very hot and you may suffer
pressure is released.
burns. Wait until the fixing unit has cooled
a. Procedure
down sufficiently before working on it.
(1) Remove the fixing unit.
Caution: (2) Remove one screw to detach the fixing unit front
Be sure the power cord has been cover.
unplugged from the wall outlet. (3) Remove two screws to open the fixing unit (top).
a. Procedure
(1) Draw out the ADU stand. (See "ADU UNIT.") Screw
(2) Turn the pressure release lever counterclock- Fixing unit front cover
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
wise to release the pressure.
Screw
(3) Remove two screws and remove the fixing unit
by lifting. Fixing unit (top)
Caution: Do not hold the connector socket.
Remove by holding the pressure
release lever and the holding end at
the far side.
7272ma3030
holding end
Pressure release
Fixing unit lever
3-O-1
FIXING UNIT
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Web [4] Removing and Reinstalling the
Cover Cleaning Web
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the fixing unit. (1) Draw out the ADU stand. (See "ADU UNIT.")
(2) Remove the fixing unit front cover. (2) Remove the web cover.
(3) Open the fixing separation claw (upper) unit and (3) Remove two screws to remove the cleaning web
remove two screws inside. unit.
(4) Remove two screws to detach the web cover.
Cleaning web unit
Fixing separation Screws (2)
claw (upper) unit Web cover
Screws (2)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Screw
3-O-2
FIXING UNIT
[5] Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamps (7) Remove the two Faston terminals of the far side
(L2, L3) lamp.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the fixing unit.
(2) Remove the fixing unit front cover.
(3) Remove the screw at the front to remove the
lamp fixing plate (front).
(4) Remove the front lamp harness from the harness
guide to remove the two Faston terminals.
Screw
Caution: When removing the Faston terminals,
be sure to hold the connector. Con-
nector cannot be removed by pulling
on the harness. Lamp fixing plate (rear)
(8) Pull out the fixing heater lamps (L2, L3) from the
front side of the fixing upper roller.
Faston terminals
(2)
Screw
3-O-3
FIXING UNIT
(9) Reinstall the above parts following the removal [6] Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamp
steps in reverse. (L4)
Caution: When installing the lamps, pay atten- Caution:
tion to their orientation. The size of the Do not touch the fixing heater lamp with
lamp terminal mounting hole in the bare hands.
front lamp fixing plate is different from Caution1: Install the heater lamp with the man-
that in the rear lamp fixing plate. The ufacturers mark facing the rear.
lamp cannot be installed properly if it Caution2: The heater lamp should not touch
is facing the opposite direction. the inner surface of the upper roller.
Caution3: When replacing the heater lamp, be
sure to insert the lamp end in the
lamp terminal securely. Also, check
that the Faston terminals are con-
nected properly.
a. Procedure
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Faston
terminal
3-O-4
FIXING UNIT
(4) Remove the rear lamp harness from the two har- [7] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
ness guide to remove the Faston terminal. Separation Claw (Upper) Unit and
Fixing Separation Claws (Upper)
a. Procedure
(1) Remove the fixing unit.
Harness guides (2) Remove the fixing unit front cover.
(3) Remove the web cover.
(4) Remove the screw to detach the fixture.
(5) Remove the fixing separation claw (upper) unit
Fixture
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Faston terminal
Lamp fixing plate (rear)
(5) Pull out the fixing heater lamp (L4) from the front
side of the fixing lower roller.
Separation claw
Fixing heater lamp (L4) Screw (upper) support shaft
Spring
3-O-5
FIXING UNIT
(9) Reinstall the above parts following the removal [8] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
steps in reverse. Separation Claw (Lower) Unit and
Caution: After installing the fixing separation Fixing Separation Claws (Lower)
claw (upper), move the upper claws a. Procedure
with your finger and check that they (1) Remove the fixing unit.
return with the force of the spring. (2) Open the fixing unit (upper).
(3) Remove two screws to detach the fixing separa-
tion claw (lower) assembly.
(4) Remove the three springs from the three fixing
separation claws (lower).
(5) Slide the frame holding the fixing separation
claws (lower) and remove the three claws.
Fixing separation
claws (lower) (3)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Spring
Screws(2)
Frame
Fixing
separation claw
(lower) assembly
3-O-6
FIXING UNIT
4 [9] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing (8) Reinstall the above parts following the removal
Upper Roller and Fixing Drive Gear steps in reverse.
a. Procedure Caution1: Before reinstalling the insulating
(1) Remove the fixing unit. sleeve, coat the inside with Tri-flow.
(2) Remove the fixing unit front cover. Caution2: Reinstall the bearings and insulating
(3) Remove the fixing separation claw (upper) unit. sleeves with the collars facing the
(4) Open the fixing unit (top). directions shown in the figure.
(5) Remove the fixing heater lamps (L2, L3). 4 Caution3: When reinstalling the fixing upper
4 (6) Remove the two C-rings, fixing drive gear, gear, roller, the Lot No. or the grooves
two bearings, two washers (7255/7272: one located on the circumference of the
washer) and two insulating sleeves from the fix- roller edge should be directed
ing upper roller. toward the front side.
(7) Remove the fixing upper roller from the frame. And, refer to the following list for
checking the type of the fixing upper
Bearing rollers.
Insulating sleeve
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Number of grooves on
the circumference of
C-ring the roller edge
Gear 7155/7255 2
Washer 7165/7272 None (only Lot No.)
4 Caution4: The fixing drive gear of 7155/7165 is
Fixing upper roller different from that of 7255/7272.
The fixing drive gear of 7255/7272 is
designated for periodical replace-
ment parts.
Fixing unit (upper)
Bearing Washer
(7155/7165 only)
Fixing drive gear
C-ring
Insulating sleeve
Collars Collars
7272ma3035
[10] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing [11] Removing and Reinstalling the
Lower Roller De-Curler Roller
a. Procedure a. Procedure
(1) Remove the fixing unit. (1) Remove the fixing unit.
(2) Remove two screws to remove the fixing (2) Open the fixing unit (top).
entrance guide plate (lower) (3) Lift the fixing exit guide plate (upper) and remove
two screws to remove the fixing exit guide plate
Fixing entrance guide plate (lower) (lower).
(4) Remove the screw to detach the jam handling
release knob.
4 (5) From the front side, remove one E-ring, one
gear, one E-ring, two washers, one screw, and
bearing in this order.
4 (6) From the rear side, remove one E-ring, two wash-
ers, one screw, and bearing in this order and then
remove the decurler roller from the frame.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Fixing exit
Screw Washer
guide plate (lower)
Screw Screw
Decurler roller
7272ma3036
(7) Reinstall the above parts following the removal [12] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing
steps in reverse. Temperature Sensors 1 and 2
Caution1: After reinstalling fixing temperature
Caution: When reinstalling, check that the gear
sensor 2, make sure that the sensor
is installed correctly.
touches the fixing upper roller.
Caution2: Make sure the sensor wires do not
touch the fixing upper roller.
Caution3: When reinstalling fixing temperature
sensor 1, adjust its position using the
positioning jig (7050K0010) and secure
it with screws. Be sure to apply screw
lock agent to the screws. This adjust-
ment should be made in a pressured
state.
a. Removal procedure
(1) Remove the fixing unit.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
(2) Remove the web cover.
(3) Remove the cleaning web.
(4) Disconnect the two relay connectors (fixing tem-
perature sensor 1, CN52; fixing temperature
sensor 2, CN53) and release the sensor wires
from the cable guides.
(5) Remove two screws to detach fixing temperature
sensor 1.
(6) Remove one screw to detach fixing temperature
sensor 2.
Screw
Screws (2)
Fixing Fixing
temperature temperature
sensor 1 sensor 2
(CN52) (CN53)
3-O-9
FIXING UNIT
b. Reinstallation procedure a) Set the distance "a" between the fixing tem-
(1) Secure fixing temperature sensor 2 to the fixing perature sensor 1 and fixing upper roller so
plate with a screw. that it is equal to the thickness of the position-
ing jig.
4 Caution: Be careful not to apply a pressure to
the sensor welding portion [A].
(2) Make sure that fixing temperature sensor 2 a
touches the fixing upper roller. If they do not
touch each other, be sure to bring the sensor in
contact with the roller.
(3) Set a fixing temperature sensor positioning jig Fixing temperature
sensor 1
between fixing temperature sensor 1 and fixing
upper roller, and secure fixing temperature sen-
sor 1 with two screws so that the distance Fixing upper roller
between the sensor and roller is equal to the
thickness of the jig.
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Positioning jig
(7050K0010)
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
should be made in a pressured state.
a. Removal procedure Positioning jig
(1) Remove the fixing unit. (00M8-1-00)
Thermostat/U (TS1)
(2) Remove the web cover.
(3) Remove the cleaning web.
(4) Remove one screw and two Faston terminals to
detach the thermostat/U. Fixing upper roller
3-O-11
FIXING UNIT
b) When making the adjustment, make sure that [14] Removing and Reinstalling the
the thermostat/U does not ride on the posi- Thermostat/L (TS2)
tioning jig (C).
Caution:
This is an important safety part. (P/N :
SP00-0010) Be sure to observe the follow-
(C)
ing cautions and steps when removing or
(B) reinstalling.
Caution1: After reinstalling the thermostat/L,
(A)
make sure that its wires do not touch
the fixing lower roller.
Caution2: When reinstalling the thermostat/L,
adjust its position using the position-
ing jig (56AEJG011) and secure it
(3) Apply screw lock agent to the screw securing the with screws. Be sure to apply screw
thermostat/U. lock agent to the screws. This adjust-
(4) Reverse the removal procedure to install other
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Faston
Screws
Thermostat/L
3-O-12
FIXING UNIT
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Faston terminal
(2) Apply screw lock agent to the two screws secur-
ing the thermostat/L.
(3) Reverse the removal procedure to reinstall other
parts.
Thermostat/L
(TS2)
3-O-13
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7155/7165/7255/7272
Service Section
JANUARY 2004
JANUARY 2004
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Minolta Business
Solutions U.S.A., Inc. strongly recommends that all
servicing be performed by Konica-trained service tech-
nicians only.
ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING 1. ADJUSTMENT
. . . . .S-1 HOW TO USE THIS SECTION .................................1-1
ITEMS
[1] Scope and Precautions ..............................1-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-1 ADJUSTMENTS MADE WHEN REPLACING
PARTS.......................................................................1-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS................................1-2
WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . .S-1
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
LCD ADJUSTMENT ..................................................1-4
[1] LCD Control Panel Adjustment ..................1-4
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-2 [2] LCD Panel Contrast/Key Sound
2 ISW
Adjustment .................................................1-4
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-10 SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS MADE WITH THE
P FUNCTION.............................................................1-4
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . .S-10
[1] Checking and Printing the P Function ........1-4
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 [2] Setting up the P Function ...........................1-4
MODE CHANGING MENU........................................1-5
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . .S-13 [1] Mode Selection...........................................1-5
25 MODE...................................................................1-6
[1] Setting the 25 Mode ...................................1-6
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] List of Adjustment Items for 25 Mode.........1-7
[3] Setting Software DIP Switches...................1-8
3 KRDS
[4] Setting the Paper Size.......................... 1-20-2
[5] PM Count Resetting .................................1-22
[6] Setting the PM Cycle................................1-22
[7] Collecting Data .........................................1-23
[8] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Fixed Parts).............................................1-38
[9] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced
(Optional Parts) ........................................1-43
[10] Setting Passwords....................................1-44
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[11] Setting the Telephone Number and/or
4 SERVICE
Fax Number of the Service Center...........1-45
[12] Setting the Serial Number ........................1-46
[13] Displaying the ROM Version ....................1-46
[14] KRDS Setting ....................................... 1-46-1
[15] ISW Setting .......................................... 1-46-1
[16] Setting Date.......................................... 1-46-1
36 MODE.................................................................1-47
[1] Setting Method .........................................1-47
[2] High Voltage Adjustment..........................1-47
PARTS LIST
[3] Charging Grid Voltage Adjustment...........1-48
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment ....................1-49
[5] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment (Manual).....1-55
[6] User Paper Setting ...................................1-55 5 ELECTRIC
[7] Recall Standard Data
(Process Adjustment) ...............................1-56
[8] Tray Adjustment .......................................1-56
[9] Magnification Adjustment .........................1-57
[10] Timing Adjustment....................................1-60
[11] RADF Adjustment.....................................1-64
[12] Centring Adjustment.................................1-66
[13] Distortion adjustment (Copier)..................1-69
[14] Non-image area erase check ...................1-69
[15] Recall standard data (Image adjustment) 1-70
[16] Running Test Mode ..................................1-71
[17] Test pattern output mode .........................1-71
[18] Test pattern density setting ......................1-78
[19] Finisher adjustment ................................. 1-78 [26] PK Adjusting the punch hole vertical position
[20] List Output Mode ..................................... 1-83 (PK-110).................................................1-130
47 MODE................................................................ 1-84 [26-1]Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge
[1] 47 Mode / Multi Mode Setting Method..... 1-84 sensor (PK-120) ..................................1-130-1
[2] Adjustment Data Display ......................... 1-86 [27] PI Centering Adjustment (PK-110)......1-130-2
[3] Hard Disk Check...................................... 1-86 [27-1]Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch
[4] Input checklist.......................................... 1-87 is used) (PK-110) ................................1-130-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5] Output checklist....................................... 1-92 [27-2]Sensitivity adjustment for the PZ paper edge
OTHER ADJUSTMENT .......................................... 1-97 sensor (PZ) .........................................1-130-4
2 ISW
[1] Centring Adjustment................................ 1-97 [28] FNS Stapler Driver Belt Position
[2] Skew adjustment (Main body) ............... 1-100 Adjustment (FS-110/210) .......................1-131
[3] Adjusting the LCT Paper Feed Roller [29] Adjusting the PZ Paper-Path Switching
Pressure (LT-412 only).......................... 1-100 Solenoid (PZ) .........................................1-132
[4] Paper up/down plate horizontal [30] Adjusting the Tension of the PZ Punch Shift
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) .......... 1-101 Timing Belt (PZ) .....................................1-133
[5] Skew adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) 1-103 [31] Adjusting the PZ 1st Folding Skew (PZ) 1-134
[6] Tray spring pressure adjustment........... 1-104 [32] Adjusting the Position of the PZ 2nd Folding
[7] Paper feed height (upper limit) Stopper (PZ)...........................................1-135
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) .......... 1-106 [33] Adjusting the PZ 2nd Folding Skew 2nd
[8] Pick-up release amount Stopper Assembly (PZ) ..........................1-136
3 KRDS
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) .......... 1-107 [34] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Conveyance
[9] RADF mounting position adjustment..... 1-108 Guide Plate B (FS-111)..........................1-137
[10] [35] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Conveyance
[11] RADF paper skew adjustment............... 1-110 Guide Plate C (FS-111)..........................1-138
[12] FNS Adjusting the magnets on the [36] FNS Adjusting the Sub-tray Paper Exit Gate
by-pass conveyance guide plate (FS-111) .................................................1-139
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-112 [37] FNS Adjusting the Paper-Path Switching Gate
[13] FNS adjusting the by-pass gate (FS-111) .................................................1-140
(FS-110/210) ......................................... 1-113 [38] FNS Adjusting the By-pass Gate
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
of the alignment plates / L (FS-210) ...... 1-119 the Paper Exit Arm (FS-111)..................1-147
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[19] FNS Adjusting the stapling position [44] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of
(Flat stapling) (FS-110/210)................... 1-120 the Upper Alignment Plates (FS-111) ....1-148
[20] FNS Adjusting the stapler vertical [45] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the Upper
positioning (FS-110/210) ....................... 1-121 Alignment Plate Drive Timing Belt
5 ELECTRIC
ADJUSTMENT
2. ISW 4. SERVICE
What's ISW? ............................................................. 2-1 SERVICE SCHEDULE ..............................................4-1
SETUP...................................................................... 2-2 [1] Service Schedule .......................................4-1
[1] ISW-compatible boards ............................. 2-2 [2] Maintenance Items .....................................4-2
[2] Data flow.................................................... 2-2 [3] Main Body Periodic Inspection Items .......4-11
[3] Prepare the copier to start an ISW [4] RADF [DF-316/DF-322]............................4-13
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
transfer ...................................................... 2-2 [5] FNS [FS-110] (Old type only)/
[4] Preparing the copier to transfer ................. 2-4 [FS-210] (Old type only) ...........................4-14
[5] Relationships between processing states [6] FNS [FS-111] ...........................................4-14
2 ISW
and operational LEDs ................................ 2-5 [7] LCT [LT-402/412] .....................................4-15
[6] Rewriting procedure after an error [8] PI [PI-110] ................................................4-16
interruption................................................. 2-5 [9] PZ [PZ-108/109] .......................................4-16
[6-1] Preparation when PZ is installed ............... 2-6 [10] Replacement parts list..............................4-17
[7] Connecting to the ISW connector.............. 2-6 [11] Important maintenance parts....................4-20
INTERNET ISW ........................................................ 2-8 COPY MATERIALS .................................................4-21
[1] What is the Internet ISW ?......................... 2-8 [1] Single unit supply .....................................4-21
[2] Operating environment .............................. 2-8 [2] Maintenance kit ........................................4-21
[3] Main features............................................. 2-8 SERVICE MATERIAL LIST .....................................4-22
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[4] Initial setting............................................... 2-9 CE TOOL LIST ........................................................4-23
[5] Mail Remote Notification System............. 2-16
3 KRDS
[6] Internet ISW using Web utility.................. 2-30 5. ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
[7] Internet ISW by operation panel .............. 2-33 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.....................................5-1
[8] Precautions for use.................................. 2-35 [1] 7155/7165/7255/7272 Parts Layout
Drawing ......................................................5-1
3. KRDS [2] DF-316/DF-322 Parts Layout Drawing .......5-9
[3] LT-402/LT-412 Parts Layout Drawing ......5-10
[4] FS-110/FS-210 Parts Layout Drawing .....5-11
[5] PI-110 Parts Layout Drawing ...................5-14
[6] PK-110/PK-120 Parts Layout Drawing .....5-15
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[7] PZ-108/PZ-109 Parts Layout Drawing...... 5-15-1
4 SERVICE
[8] FS-111 Parts Layout Drawing .............. 5-15-2
[9] SF-101 Parts Layout Drawing .............. 5-15-4
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING........................5-16
[1] 7155/7165/7255/7272 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-16
[2] LT-402/LT-412 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-20
[3] FS-110/FS-210 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-20
PARTS LIST
[4] PI-110 Connector Layout Drawing ...........5-21
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5] PK-110/PK-120 Connector Layout
Drawing ....................................................5-21
[6] PZ-108/PZ-109 Connector Layout
5 ELECTRIC
Drawing .................................................... 5-21-1
[7] FS-111 Connector Layout Drawing .......... 5-21-2
[8] SF-101 Connector Layout Drawing .......... 5-21-2
JAM CODE LIST......................................................5-22
ERROR CODE LIST................................................5-36
TIMING CHART.......................................................5-48
[1] 7165 Timing Chart (1) ..............................5-48
[2] 7165 Timing Chart (2) ..............................5-49
[3] 7272 Timing Chart (1) .......................... 5-49-1
[4] 7272 Timing Chart (2) .......................... 5-49-2
[5] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (1) .............5-50
[6] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (2) .............5-51
[7] LT-402/LT-412 Time Chart.......................5-52
APPENDIX
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram ........... A-1
[2] 7255/7272 Overall Wiring Diagram ........... A-2
[3] FS-110/FS-210 Overall Wiring Diagram.... A-3
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
4 SERVICEPARTS LIST
3 DIS./ASSEMBLY
5 ELECTRIC
IMPORTANT NOTICE
4 Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Solutions U.S.A., INC. (hereafter called the KMBS) strongly recommends
that all servicing be performed only by KMBS-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBS does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-
vicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
SAFETY WARNINGS
4 • Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBS. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-
der or similar object.
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
4 • Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBSKMBS. Using the dam-
aged power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
4 b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBS.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-
let.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2.Installation Requirements
• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Ventilation
• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
CAUTION: Ventilation
• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-
trode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-
fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-
inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
[4] CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-
keted in the United States.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety cir- [2] Protection by L2, L3 and L4 (fixing
cuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in seri-
heater lamps) overheating prevention
ous accidents.
circuit
[1] Overall protection circuit
[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamps) overheating TS2
DCPS
prevention circuit TS1
TH2
Control
[1] Overall Protection Circuit section L2
AC driver
section L3
CBR1
TH1
L4
NF
1. Protection by software
The output voltage from TH1 (fixing tempera-
CBR2
ture sensor 1) is read by the CPU. If this volt-
age is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater lamp 1), L3
(fixing heater lamp 2), L4 (fixing heater lamp 3)
1. Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit
and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF.
breakers)
CAUTION:
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta- Do not change the gap between the roller
neously when an excessive current flows due and TH1. When replacing TH1, check the
to a short in the AC line. specified mounting dimensions. The RL1
CAUTION: function must not be deactivated under
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not any circumstances.
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Protection by the hardware circuit
The output voltages from TH1 and TH2 (fixing
temperature sensors) are compared with the
abnormality judgment reference value in the
comparator circuit. If the output voltage from
TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value, L2
(fixing heater lamp 1), L3 (fixing heater lamp
2), L4 (fixing heater lamp 3) and RL1 (main
relay) are turned OFF in hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH2 face contact-
ing the roller, and replace TH2 if any
abnormality is detected.
Since TH1 (fixing temperature sensor)
face does not contact the roller, check the
distance from the roller and the sensor
orientation if any abnormality is detected.
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
under any circumstances.
3. Protection by TS1 (thermostat/U) and TS2
(thermostat/L)
When the temperature of the fixing roller
(upper/lower) exceeds the specified value, TSs
are turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to
L2 (fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater
lamp/2), and L4 (fixing heater lamp/3) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2. Do not change
the distance between the roller and TS
(thermostat).
S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT
your finger into the
two RADF hinge WARNING
portions; This area generates
otherwise you may high voltage. If touched,
be injured. electrical shock may
occur. DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
ATTENTION
VORSICHT
CAUTION PRECAUCION
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
CAUTION VORSICHT
High temperature!
Do not touch. Use care PRECAUCION
when clearing paper.
ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION
Temp rature lev e!
Risque de br lure. Soyez
prudent en retirant la CAUTION
feuille coinc e.
VORSICHT CAUTION
Hei§e OberflŠche!
Brandverletzungsgefahr.
Bei Beseitigung von
Papierstaus vorsichtig
vorgehen.
The fixing unit is
very hot. To avoide The conveyance fixing
CAUTION
PRECAUCION
ÁTemperatura alta! getting burned, DO unit is heavy. Use care DO NOT put your hand between
No tocar. Tener cuidado al
remover el papel.
NOT TOUCH. and draw it out gently; the main body and developing
ATTENZIONE
Alta temperatura!
Non toccare. Agire con otherwise you may be fixing unit; otherwise you may
prudenza nel rimuovere la
carta.
injured. be injured.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
In the case of the 7155/7165
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
To avoid injury, DO
NOT put your hand
on top of the
printed sheets.
Be sure to hold
both sides of the
printed sheets
when removing
them, and DO NOT
leave your hand on
the printed sheets
while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
(FS-111 Finisher)
7272sf007
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
7272sf004
<WRITE UNIT>
4 In the case of the 7155/7165
7272sf005
7272sf001
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-18
S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
<PZ Puncher with Z-folding>
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep your-
self away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
1 ADJUSTMENT
HOW TO USE THIS ADJUSTMENTS MADE
SECTION WHEN REPLACING
[1] Scope and Precautions PARTS
This section provides detailed information about Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not
adjustment items and procedures. Before addressing only required when a customer complaint about the
customer complaints, perform the following checks. copy image quality is received, but also after replacing
or reassembling parts.
1. Check whether the power supply voltage meets
[How to Read Tables]
the specifications.
2. Check whether the power supply is properly Components of the tables used in this section are as
grounded. follows:
3. Check whether this machine shares the power
supply with any other machine that draws large 1. Mode
current intermittently (e.g., elevator and air con- Adjustment mode to be selected.
ditioner that produce electrical noise). [P]: P mode
4. Check whether the installation environment is [25]: 25 mode
good. [36]: 36 mode
a. High temperature / High humidity, direct sun- [47]: 47 mode
light, ventilation, etc.
b. Level of installed location 2. Code
5. Check whether original has a problem that may Code and copy quantity setting button used in
cause defective images. each mode.
6. Check whether the selected density value is correct.
7. Check whether the platen glass, slit glass, etc. is 3. Page
soiled. Page in the "ADJUSTMENT" section.
8. Check whether correct paper is used for copying.
9. Check whether copying materials and parts 4. Circled numbers
(e.g., developer, drum, and cleaning blade) are 1 2 Indicate that adjustments (including
replenished and replaced when they reach the checks) must be made in order of pre-
end of their useful life. cedence.
10. Check whether toner remains. (Circle without numeric character):
Indicates that adjustments (including
When servicing the machine, observe the following checks) can be made independently.
precautions:
11. Only either side of the AC line is shut off when the
SW1 (main power) of this machine is turned off.
Always unplug the power cord before starting
service work. If it is necessary to service the
machine with the power on, take care not to be
caught in the scanning gear of the exposure unit.
12. Special care should be taken when handling the
fixing unit because it operates at extremely high
temperatures.
13. The developing unit has a strong magnetic field.
Keep watches and measuring equipment away
from it.
14. Take care not to damage the drum with tools and
so on.
15. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
1-1
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
1 ADJUSTMENT
Registration clutch
Tray up/down wire
Registration roller
Dust-proof glass
Adjustment Item
Registration unit
Memory board
Each tray unit
PK (PK-120)
PK (PK-110)
Stapler unit
Developer
Fixing unit
Write unit
CCD unit
ADU unit
Item No.
RADF
Mode
Drum
Page
FNS
LCT
PZ
PI
1 Process High voltage
Adjust- adjustment
Charging grid manual
adjustment 1-48 1 O
2 ment Drum Pecu- Blade setting mode 1-49 3 O
liarity Adjust-
3 ment Auto maximum density 1-49
adjustment 4 2 1 1 O
1 ADJUSTMENT
Mis-centering detection sensor
Classification by Adjustment
Registration clutch
Tray up/down wire
Registration roller
Dust-proof glass
Adjustment Item
Registration unit
Memory board
Each tray unit
PK (PK-120)
PK (PK-110)
Stapler unit
Developer
Fixing unit
Write unit
CCD unit
ADU unit
Item No.
RADF
Mode
Drum
Page
FNS
LCT
PZ
PI
35 Finisher Punch Adjust-
Adjust- ment
Punch vertical position
adjustment 1-81 O O O
ment Punch horizontal
36 position adjustment 36 1-81 O O O O
1-4
MODE CHANGING MENU
1 ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGING MENU
[1] Mode Selection
You can select a mode from the following [Mode chang-
ing menu: [Select mode] without turning OFF and ON
the power switch.
1 Basic screen
2 3-6 mode
3 2-5 mode
4 Key operation mode
5 4-7 mode
Step Operation
1 Turn on the SW2 (sub power).
Press P button and wait until [Enter pass-
2 word for mode selection] message
appears.
Enter the password 9272 and press the
Start button.(Note that this password is
3
fixed and cannot be changed.)The [Mode
changing menu] appears.
Enter the number to select the desired
4
mode.
To return to the [Mode changing menu],
5 press P button and wait until the menu
appears again.
Upon completion of the adjustment, press
6
EXIT key to return to the Basic screen.
1-5
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
[1] Setting the 25 Mode
This machine has an adjustment mode called the "25
Mode". Select this mode to rewrite data in the non-vol-
atile memory or make various settings.
1. Turn OFF the SW2 (sub power).
2. While pressing the copy quantity setting button 2
and 5, turn ON the SW2 (sub power).
The Memory setting mode menu Screen will
appear.
Now the machine is in the 25 mode, disabling
normal copy operations.
1-6
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[2] List of Adjustment Items for 25 Mode
Adjustment Item Menu Remarks
1 Software DIP SW setting See "list of Software DIP
Switches".
2 Paper size setting
3 PM count Resetting PM Count
Setting PM cycle
4 Data collection (7155/7165) 1 Total count of each paper size
2 Copy count of each paper size
3 Print count of each paper size
4 RADF count
5 Pixel ratio of each section
6 Pixel ratio ranking list
7 JAM data of time series
8 JAM count
9 Count of each copy mode
10 SC count
11 JAM count of each section
12 SC count of each section
4 Data collection (7255/7272) 1 Total count of each paper size
2 Copy count of each paper size
3 Print count of each paper size
4 RADF count
5 Scanner count
6 Pixel ratio of each section
7 Pixel ratio ranking list
8 JAM data of time series
9 JAM count
10 Count of each copy mode
11 SC count
12 JAM count of each section
SC count of each section
5 Parts counter 1 Count of special parts COUNT RESET
2 Count of each part COUNT RESET
Part name setting
P/N setting
Limit Setting
6 Password setting Key Operator password 4 digits
EKC master key code 8 digits
Weekly timer password 4 digits
HDD management password 4 digits
7 Telephone/Fax number set- Customer support telephone number 16 digits
ting Customer support FAX number 16 digits
1-8
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
< List of Software Switches >
Note: Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW Initial Value
Bit Function 0 1 Japan Inch Metric
No.
0
Condition for stopping copying after indica- 1 1 1
tion of toner supply
1 *1 *1 0 0 0
2
Method for stopping copying after indica- 1 1 1
tion of toner supply
3 *2 *2 0 0 0
DIPSW 1 Inhibition of copying when PM count is
4 reached Disabled Inhibited 0 0 0
5 Number of copies made before inhibition of 0 0 0
6 copying when PM count is reached *3 *3 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
0 Hard disk connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
1 Electrode cleaning cycle (when power is 0 0 0
2 turned ON, fixing temperature is 50ºC or * 4 *4 0 0 0
3 less) 0 0 0
DIPSW2 4 Electrode cleaning cycle (after power is 0 0 0
5 turned ON) *5 *5 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 - - - 0 0 0
1 SC latch Unlatched Latched 0 0 0
25, 36, 47 mode password request (pass-
2 word: 9272) Not requested Requested 0 0 0
DIPSW3 3 Charger cleaning function ON OFF 0 0 0
4 Transfer/separation cleaning function ON OFF 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
6 47 mode 15-01 data collection clearing Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
7 JobEditor connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
0 ADF automatic skew adjustment Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
1 Inhibition of postcard double sided copy Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
2 - - - 0 1 0
3 - - - 0 0 1
DIPSW4 4 Key counter removal recovery Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
5 Inhibition of magnified APS Enabled Disabled 0 1 0
Fixed magnification rate setting change in
6 key operator mode Enabled Disabled 1 0 0
Incremented by Incremented by
7 A3 (11x17) counting method 0 0 0
1 2
4 0 Image density selection (Toner concentra- 0 0 0
*7 *7
1 tion threshold) 0 0 0
2 Image density selection (laser PWM) for 1 1 1
*8 *8
3 copier 0 0 0
DIPSW5 -
4 - - 0 0 0
5 - - - 1 1 1
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 Transfer/separation output for plain paper * 9 *9 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Transfer/separation output for thick paper * 10 * 10 0 0 0
DIPSW 6 4 0 0 0
5 Transfer/separation output for thin paper * 11 * 11 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD
1-9
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-9 REPLACEMENT
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value
Bit Function 0 1 Japan Inch Metric
No.
4
Every 10 copies Every 50 copies
(7155/7165) (7155/7165)
0 Black stripe creation interval Every 12 copies Every 60 copies
0 0 0
(7255/7272) (7255/7272)
Coin vendor paper size signal switchover
A3 A3R 0 0 0
1 (7155/7165)
Shifting from A3 to A3R (7255/7272) Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW 12
2 - - - 0 0 0
3 Printer automatic centering correction Enable Disable 0 0 0
4 High voltage output in 36/47 mode Not output Output 1 1 1
5 Paper exit direction of booklet mode Face down Face up 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 Size detection 1 A5 5.5 x 8.5 0 1 0
1 Size detection 2 A4R 8.5 x 11R 0 1 0
2 Size detection 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 1
DIPSW 13 3 Size detection 4 * 21 * 21 0 0 0
4 0 1 0
5 F4 size detection * 22 * 22 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
0 Size detection 5 (main body) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
1 - - - 0 0 0
2 - - - 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
3 Size detection 5 (by-pass feed) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
DIPSW14 B4 : 11 x 17/
4 Size detection 5 (platen) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
5 Size detection 5 (ADF) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
B4 : 11 x 17/
6 Size detection 5 (PI) B5 : 8.5 x 11/B5R
8K/16K/16KR 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
0 KRDS type selection Telephone line E-mail 0 0 0
4
1 Maximum number of sheets to an be sta- * 23 * 23 0 0 0
2 pled 0 0 0
DIPSW15 3
4 FNS alarm stop SW * 24 * 24 0
0
0
0
0
0
5 KRDS connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0
6 Dmax. value in printer mode 1.43 1.35 0 0 0
7 Large-size table limit change (7255/7272) Not changed -20 copies 0 0 0
4
0 Remote diagnosis system selection (7255/7272) KRDS EP-NET 0 0 0
1 Copy Reserve Function Enabled Disabled 0 0 0
2 Index original + RADF double-sided Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW16 3 Key counter counting in printer mode Not counted Counted 0 0 0
4 TC start date indication (P mode) Indicated Not indicated 0 0 0
5 Non-original area automatic erasure mode * 25 * 25 0 0 0
6 judgement level 0 0 0
7 E-mail KRDS NIC selection IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 Weekly timer summer time setting * 26 * 26 1 1 1
2 1 1 1
3 0 0 0
DIPSW17 4 0 0 0
5 Density selection for scanning tab paper * 27 * 27 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 - - - 0 0 0
Note 3: When "Normal" is selected, the original size is compared with the copy paper size and the smaller
one is assumed to be the image area size. When "Original priority" is selected, the original size is
compared assumed to be the image area size only when the image shift mode is selected.
MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD
1-12
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-12 REPLACEMENT
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW Initial Value
Bit Function 0 1 Japan Inch Metric
No.
0 - - - 0 0 0
Operation when printer EKC password is Counted and Not output
4
not matched output to EKC (display it on
1 or other user the JOB list 0 0 0
domain that is not pro-
duced)
2 Image density selection (toner density * 31 * 31 0 0 0
DIPSW23 3 selection of developer) 0 0 0
4 - - - 0 0 0
Postcard face up ejection (7255/7272) Disabled Determined by
5 engine/IP set- 0 0 0
ting
Registration of by-pass special paper set- Prohibited Allowed
6 0 0 0
ting for JOB memory
7 Ejection of the thick paper 2 to sub-tray (IP) Face-down Face-up 0 0 0
Method of accessing Hard disk JOB Password Password +
4 0 0 0 0
file name
Job Editor image transfer method default Automatic Manual
1 0 0 0
setting
2 - - - 0 0 0
DIPSW24 Additional providing of platen-specific Disabled Enabled
3 0 0 0
machine
4 Maximum number of sheets with Z-folding 0 0 0
* 33 * 33
5 (main tray) 0 0 0
6 Maximum number of sheets with Z-folding 0 0 0
7 + stapling (main tray) * 34 * 34 0 0 0
4 0 IP scanner image format TIFF TIFF/PDF 0 0 0
1 - - - 0 0 0
2 Mixplex rotation control Each job Each page 0 0 0
3 - - - 0 0 0
CPF signal switching for user specified
4 paper when vendor (D-103) is used (7255/ Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
DIPSW25 7272)
When coin is When coin
5 Coin vendor reset timing 0 0 0
inserted runs out
Master Sub machine
6 Image shift on tandem sub machine (IP). 0 0 0
machine data data
7 Proof/wait with tandem mode (IP). Disabled Enabled 0 0 0
0 - - - - - -
4 Setting of document size to be defined Sub-scan: Sub-scan:
1 large-size by scanner count 0 0 0
338mm or more 391mm or more
2 - - - - - -
DIPSW26 3 - - - - - -
4 - - - - - -
5 - - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - - - - - -
1 ADJUSTMENT
0 - - - 0 0 0
25 mode collection data 7-12 for checking Display No display
1 0 0 0
restriction restriction
2 - - - 0 0 0
DIPSW30 3 - - - 1 1 1
4 - - - 0 0 0
5 - - - 0 0 0
6 - - - 0 0 0
7 Passwords to save/access hard disk JOB Not displayed Displayed 0 0 0
4 0 - - - - - -
1 - - - - - -
2 - - - - - -
Double-sided copy of non-standard size Disabled Enabled
3 papers 0 0 0
DIPSW32
4 - - - - - -
5 - - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - - - - - -
4 0 *37 *37 0 0 0
1 Fixing linear velocity adjustment 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
DIPSW33 4 - - - - - -
5 - - - - - -
6 - - - - - -
7 - - - - - -
Blank page
1 ADJUSTMENT
*1 Condition for stopping copying after indication of *5 Electrode cleaning cycle (after power is turned
toner supply request ON)
Mode 1-1 1-0 Mode 2-5 2-4
Stops after printing 1,500 copies 0 0 10,000 copies 0 0
Stops after printing 3,000 copies 0 1 20,000 copies 0 1
Stops after printing 4,000 copies 1 0 30,000 copies 1 0
Stops after printing 5,000 copies 1 1 40,000 copies 1 1
*8 Image density selection (laser PWM) for copier *10 Transfer/separation output for thick paper
These bits set image write laser PWM. Against This bit is used when "Thick" is selected for
exessive density of 100% black color, thick let- "Paper type/special size setting" in the key oper-
ters and lines, and excessive toner consumption, ator mode to change transfer/separation output,
the setting should be made by selecting “light.” linear speed, and fixing temperature.
In the opposite case, select “dark.” When "No specification" is selected, standard
Mode 5-3 5-2 data for 170g/m2 (45 lb) or heavier paper is used.
Darker (255) 0 0 • 170g/m2 (45 lb) or heavier (TSL OFF) : When
Normal (235) toner is scattered around the image.
0 1
• Plain paper : Transfer / separation data for
Lighter (215) 1 0 plain paper of each destination is used to set
Note: There are three DIP switches to change only the line speed and fixing temperature for
the image density : thick paper. This setting is applied when the
5-0/1(toner concentration threshold), fixing condition is insufficient even though
5-2/3 (laser PWM), and 23-2/3 (toner paper is not so thick.
density of developer). The priority of Mode 6-4 6-3
order of these adjustments are as follows: No specification 0 0
(1) Laser PWM 170 g/m2 (45 lb) or more (TSL OFF) 0 1
(2) Toner density of developer
Plain paper 1 0
(3) Toner concentration threshold
*11 Transfer/separation output for thin paper
*9 Transfer/separation output for plain paper This bit is used when "Thin" is selected for "Paper
These bits are used when "- - - -", "Normal", type/special size setting" in the key operator
"Color", "Special" or "Seal" is selected for "Paper mode.
type/special size setting" in the key operator When "No specification" is selected, the output
mode. data by destination (Japan: 52.4 g/m2 paper, Inch
When "User paper" is selected with this bit, the area: 16lb, paper, Metric area: 48g/m2 paper) is
transfer/separation output for the "user paper used.
setting" made in the 36 mode is applied.
Mode 6-6 6-5
When "No specification" is selected, the output
No specification 0 0
data by destination and paper size (metric or inch
system) (Japan/metric: 64g/m2 plain paper, 52.4 g/m2 (13 lb) paper 0 1
Inch: 20 lb plain paper, Inch area / Inch: 20 lb 64 g/m2 (16 lb) paper 1 0
plain paper, metric: 80g/m2 plain paper, Metric
area/metric: 80g/m2 plain paper, Inch: 20 lb plain *12 Toner guide roller current correction
paper) is used. When the room temperature causes defect
cleaning, the bias value of the toner guide roller
Mode 6-2 6-1 6-0
should be changed to +10 µA or +20 µA. If the
No specification 0 0 0
original setting value is changed without any
Not used 0 0 1 defective cleaning observed, the drum can be
Not used 0 1 0 damaged, or the toner may be spilled. In this
Not used 0 1 1 case, the use of copier is never recommended.
Recycled paper 1 (Japan) 1 0 0 Mode 7-1 7-0
Recycled paper 2 (Inch area) 1 0 1 Standard 0 0
Recycled paper 3 (Metric area) 1 1 0 Approx. +10 µA 0 1
User paper 1 1 1 Approx. +20 µA 1 0
No correction 1 1
1 ADJUSTMENT
*13 Transfer/separation output for recycled paper
These bits are used when "Recycle" is selected Mode 8-3 8-2
for "Paper type/special size setting" in the key Low temperature 0 0
operator mode. Low and normal temperature 0 1
When "User paper" is selected with these bits, Low, normal, and high tem-
the transfer/separation output for the user paper 1 0
peratures
setting made in the 36 mode is applied. When No initial rotation 1 1
"No specification" is selected, output data by
destination and paper size (metric or inch series)
*15 Fixing roller initial rotation time setting
(Japan/metric: 64 g/m2 recycled paper, Inch: 20
This bit sets the maximum time of initial rotation
lb recycled paper, Inch area/inch: 20 lb recycled
of the fixing roller.
paper, metric: 80g/m2 recycled paper, Metric
7155/7165
area/metric: 80g/m2 recycled paper, inch: 20 lb
recycled paper) is used. Mode 8-5 8-4
When humid paper causes uneven image, select 2 minutes (Japan) 0 0
“humid paper 1/2/3”. 3 minutes (Inch and Metric series) 0 1
Mode 7-7 7-6 7-5 4 minutes 1 0
No specification 0 0 0 10 minutes 1 1
64 g/m2 standard paper
0 0 1 4 7255/7272
(Japan)
20 lb standard paper (USA) 0 1 0 Mode 8-5 8-4
80g/m2 standard paper 80 seconds
0 1 1 (Japan, High temperature and
(Europe)
Humid paper 1 (Japan) 1 0 0 high humidity)
Humid paper 2 (USA) 100 seconds
1 0 1
(Japan, Except for high tempera-
Humid paper 3 (Europe) 1 1 0
ture and high humidity)
User paper 1 1 1 180 seconds 0 0
*14 Fixing roller initial rotation (Inch and Metric series, High tem-
Fixing may be insufficient if the temperature of perature and high humidity)
the place where the machine is installed is low. 150 seconds
To prevent this, increase the warm-up time (fix- (Inch and Metric series, Except for
ing roller initial rotation time) to allow the fixing high temperature and high humid-
roller to be evenly warmed up. This bit specifies ity)
the condition(s) under which initial rotation of the 2 minutes 0 1
fixing roller is required. 3 minutes 1 0
• Low temperature: Initial rotation of the fixing 4 minutes 1 1
roller is carried out only under the low temper-
ature condition. *16 Message switching
• Low and normal temperatures: Initial rotation Mode 9-3 9-2
of the fixing roller is carried out under low and Please insert key counter. 0 0
normal temperature conditions.
Please insert copy card. 0 1
• Low, normal, and high temperatures: Initial
rotation of the fixing roller is carried out under Please insert coin. 1 0
low, normal, and high temperature conditions. Please insert key counter. 1 1
*17 Copy count limit *20 Transfer/separation out put for high-quality
Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4 paper
No limit 0 0 0 0 These bits are used when “High-quality” is
1 copy 0 0 0 1 selected for “Paper type/special size setting” in
3 copies 0 0 1 0 the key operator mode.
When “No specification” is selected, output data
5 copies 0 0 1 1
by paper size (metric or inch system) (metric:
9 copies 0 1 0 0
64g/m2 standard paper, Inch: 20 lb standard
10 copies 0 1 0 1
paper) is used.
20 copies 0 1 1 0
30 copies 0 1 1 1 4 Mode 10-7 10-6 10-5 10-4
50 copies 1 0 0 0 No specification 0 0 0 0
99 copies 1 0 0 1 64 g/m2 (16 lb) paper
0 0 0 1
250 copies 1 0 1 0 for printing press
No limit 1 0 1 1 80g/m2 (20 lb) paper
No limit 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
for printing press
No limit 1 1 0 1 Copied backing
No limit 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
papers (7255/7272)
No limit 1 1 1 1
*21 Size detection 4
*18 Page memory allocation when powered
Destination Mode 13-4 13-3
Mode 10-1 10-0
Metric series A5R 0 0
No allocation 0 0
B6R 0 1
32 MB (default for DP65) 0 1
Inch series 5.5 x 8.5R 1 0
64 MB 1 0
*22 F4 size detection
*19 Page memory allocation when starts
When memory overflow occurs in a mode where Mode 13-6 13-5
page memory is used, this bit allocates page 8 x 13 0 0
memory at the start of job to print out copied 8.25 x 13 0 1
paper, the data of which was already read in the 8.125 x 13.25 1 0
memory. 8.5 x 13 1 1
Page memory quantity differs as in the following
table, according to the number of gradation. *23 Maximum number of sheets that can be stapled
1 bit ED 18 MB (11x17 x 2) Mode 15-2 15-1
2 bit ED 36 MB (11x17 x 2) 50 sheets 0 0
45 sheets 0 1
Mode 10-2
40 sheets 1 0
No allocation 0
35 sheets 1 1
Allocated 1
*24 FNS alarm stop SW
When “Allocated” is selected by DIP switch 10-0
Mode 15-4 15-3
or 10-1 with power supply ON, this setting has
priority. Stop immediately after detection 0 0
Stop at end of copy after detection 0 1
No alarm stop 1 0
No alarm stop 1 1
1 ADJUSTMENT
*25 Selection of area to be erased in non-original *28 Fixing temperature setting switch over
area automatic erasure This setting is performed to change fixing tem-
These bits are used to make a setting associated perature when fixing is insufficient or paper curl
with the non-original automatic erasure mode is excessive.
(application function). This setting is effective only when standard
Mode 16-6 16-5 paper is used. Therefore, it is not applied when
thick or thin paper is used or temperature is spec-
Standard 0 0
ified in power mode.
Dark original 0 1 • Standard Standard setting value
Coping with light interfer- • Standard+α Set when fixing is insufficient
1 0
ence • Standard-α Set when paper curl is excessive
Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1
*26 Weekly timer summer time setting
Standard 0 0 0
Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0
Standard+5°C 0 0 1
0 minute 0 0 0 0 Standard+10°C 0 1 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1 Standard+15°C 0 1 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0 Standard-5°C 1 0 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1 Standard-10°C 1 0 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0 Standard-15°C 1 1 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1 Standard+20°C 1 1 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
*29 IP scanner default resolution
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
Mode 19-7 19-6
80 minutes 1 0 0 0 400dpi 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1 600dpi 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0 200dpi 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1 300dpi 1 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
*30 Number of punched holes
130 minutes 1 1 0 1
Mode 22-2 22-1
140 minutes 1 1 1 0 2 holes (Japan) 0 0
150 minutes 1 1 1 1 3 holes or 2 and 3 holes
0 1
(Inch area)
*27 Density selection for scanning tab paper
The higher the brightness level, the higher the 4 holes or 2 and 4 holes
1 0
density. (Metric area)
*31 Image density selection (toner density selection *33 Maximum number of sheets with z-folding
of developer) (main tray)
These bits set the toner density of developer by
Mode 24-5 24-4
changing toner supply threshold and developing
Up to 50 sheets 0 0
sleeve rotation speed with image density
unchanged. Up to 40 sheets 0 1
Decrease toner density when the image is gray Up to 30 sheets 1 0
background or toner is scattered. Increase toner Up to 20 sheets 1 1
density when the image is unevenly transferred
or white spots occur. *34 Maximum number of sheets with z-folding + sta-
pling
Mode 23-3 23-2
Standard toner density 0 0 Mode 24-7 24-6
Approx. 0.75% up 0 1 Up to 5 sheets 0 0
Approx. 0.75% down 1 0 Up to 8 sheets 0 1
Approx. 1.5% down 1 1 Up to 10 sheets 1 0
Up to 3 sheets 1 1
Note: There are three DIP switches to change
the image density : 5-0/1 (toner concen- *35 Image density selection (laser PWM) for IP
tration threshold), 5-2/3 (lase PWM), and Mode 8-1 8-0
23-2/3 (toner density of developer). The Normal (235) 0 0
priority of order of these adjustment are
Dark (255) 0 1
as follows:
(1) Laser PWM Lighter (175) 1 0
(2) Toner density of developer Lightest (150) 1 1
(3) Toner concentration threshold
*36 Countermeasure for memory overflow during IP
printing
*32 Image's gray background control at power ON
When copier stops due to paper empty and so on
If an image's gray background problem occurs
during large amount printing from IP without
while making about 100 copies after power ON
reserved print, memory overflow will occur on
(the fixing temperature is 50°C or lower), set bits
copier, and then time out will occur on PC. When
0, 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7 of DIPSW27 to 1.
remaining capacity of E-RDH memory is
Note: When this setting is used, be sure to set reached to the specified amount, the transmis-
six bits to 1 all together. And never set bits sion speed from IP to E-RDH memory will be
2 and 4 of DIPSW27 to 1. delayed to gain time until memory overflow
4 7255/7272 models enable to set the control time occurs.
of DIPSW27-5/6 (turning-ON control of toner
Mode 29-2 29-1
recycle MC during drum/developer rotation).
No cuuntermeasure 0 0
Mode 27-6 27-5 Remaining capacity 10% 0 1
None 0 0
Remaining capacity 20% 1 0
30 seconds 0 1
Remaining capacity 30% 1 1
45 seconds 1 0
60 seconds 1 1
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 *37 Fixing linear velocity adjustment
To protect from transfer misalignment, the fixing
linear velocity can be adjusted to the convey-
ance linear velocity.
Mode 33-3 33-2 33-1 33-0
0% 0 0 0 0
-0.2% 0 0 0 1
-0.4% 0 0 1 0
-0.6% 0 0 1 1
-0.8% 0 1 0 0
-1.0% 0 1 0 1
-1.2% 0 1 1 0
-1.4% 0 1 1 1
-1.6% 1 0 0 0
+0.2% 1 0 0 1
+0.4% 1 0 1 0
+0.6% 1 0 1 1
+0.8% 1 1 0 1
+1.0% 1 1 0 1
+1.2% 1 1 1 0
+0.4% 1 1 1 1
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Setting the non-standard size 3. Setting the wide paper
Step Operation Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode. 1 Enter the 25 mode.
2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen] 2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
Select " 2 Tray Size Setting." Select " 2 Paper size setting."
4 3 [Paper size setting mode Screen] 4 3 [Paper size setting mode Screen]
Select necessary tray and press the Select necessary tray and press the
Non STD size key. Wide size paper key.
4 [Paper size input Screen] 4 [Paper size selecting Screen]
Press the key for specifying the main Press the or key to select a
(vertical) scanning direction to highlight
wide paper size.
it.
5 Input size key.
5 Press the or key or numeric
keys to enter the size in the main (verti- 6 [Paper size input Screen]
cal)scanning direction. Max. 314 mm Press the key for specifying the main
(vertical) scanning direction to highlight
6 Press the key for specifying the sub (hor-
it.
izontal) scanning direction to highlight it.
7 Press the or key or numeric
7 Press the or key or numeric
keys to enter the size in the main (verti-
keys to enter the size in the sub (hori-
cal) scanning direction. Max. 314 mm
zontal) scanning direction. Max. 223
mm(LT-402), 459mm(LT-412) 8 Press the button for specifying the sub
(horizontal) scanning direction to high-
8 Press the OK key to finish setting. light it.
To cancel the new setting, press the 9 Press the or key or numeric
CANCEL key.
keys to enter the size in the sub (hori-
Pressing either key will display the Mem- zontal) scanning direction. Max.
ory setting mode menu Screen again. 223mm(LT-402), 459mm(LT-412)
10 Press the OK key to finish setting.
To cancel the new setting, press the
CANCEL key.
Pressing either key will display the Mem-
ory setting mode menu Screen again.
Reference 1:
Each time the current tray size is changed on this
screen, the new setting will be written into the
non-volatile memory.
1-22
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[7] Collecting Data 4 In the case of the 7255/7272
This function allows you to view various data retained No. Data Type Pre-operation
by the machine. Total count of each
1
paper size
Reference: The above data can also be viewed
using the data collection function of Copy count of each
2
the KRDS. paper size
Print count of each
3
1. Data that can be Viewed paper size
In the case of the 7155/7165 4 RADF count
No. Data Type Pre-operation 5 Scanner count
Total count of Pixel ratio of each
1 6
each paper size section
Copy count of
2 7 Pixel ratio ranking list
each paper size
JAM data of time Enter the 25
Print count of 8
3 series mode, select " 1
each paper size
9 JAM count Software DIPSW
4 RADF count
Count of each copy Setting", and set
Pixel ratio of each 10
5 mode bit 1 of address
section 30-1 to 1. (Note 1)
11 SC count
6 Pixel ratio ranking list
JAM count of each
JAM data of time Enter the 25 12
7 section
series mode, select " 1
SC count of each sec-
8 JAM count Software DIPSW 13
tion
Setting", and set
Count of each copy
9 bit 1 of address
mode Note: When bit 1 of DIP switch 30-1 is set to 0,
30-1 to 1. (Note 1)
only collected data 1 to collected data 7
10 SC count
can be viewed.
JAM count of each
11
section
2. Viewing Collecting Data No.1 to No.6
SC count of each sec-
12 Step Operation
tion
1 Enter the 25 mode.
Note: When bit 1 of DIP switch 30-1 is set to 0, 2 [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
only collected data 1 to collected data 6 Select " 4 Data collection".
can be viewed.
3 [Collecting data menu Screen]
4 Select the collecting data you want to
view by pressing one of numeric keys
1 to 6 (7155/7165), 1 to 7
(7255/7272).
4 [Individual data view Screen]
View the selected data by scrolling the
screen using the and keys.
5 Press the RETURN key to return to the
Memory setting mode menu Screen.
1 ADJUSTMENT
4. Details on Display Data
(1) Collecting data No.1 to No.3: Total/copy/print counts of each paper size
4 KRDS parameter Destination
NO Maximum count Remarks
(B1, B6, B8) Japan Inch area Metric area
Not counted and 0 is
1 00 A2 17x22 A2
sent. (7255/7272)
2 01 A3 11x17 A3
3 02 B4 8.5x14 B4 (8K)
4 03 A4 8.5x11 A4
5 04 B5 5.5x8.5 B5 (16K)
6 05 A5 - A5
99999999
7 06 B6 - F4 All counters are
8 07 8.5x14 - - 8-digit counters.
9 08 8.5x11 A4 -
10 09 Special Special Special
11
(7255/ 0A Postcard - -
7272)
1. Each time a printed copy is ejected, the counter is incremented by 1 regardless of the paper size.
2. Any size other than paper sizes 1-9 is counted as Special size. (SEL/LEF are counted as the same size.)
1. The counter is incremented each time one original side has been scanned in each mode.
2. Counters 1 and 2 count original sides independently of counters 3-7.
4 (3) Collecting data No. 5 (7155/7165), No.6 (7255/7272): Pixel ratio of each section *1
This allows checking the average pixel ratio of 5000 prints for latest 30 data.
4 (4) Collecting data No. 6 (7155/7165), No.7 (7255/7272): Pixel ratio ranking list *1
This allows checking pixel ratio data, number of prints, transfer paper size, mode, and date for the top 15 job
data ranked from highest rates of pixel ratio.
The pixel ratio rank list is allowed to contain only those jobs which have five or more copies, so that jobs that
have made erroneous copies will be excluded from the list.
4 (5) Collecting data No. 7 (7155/7165), No.8 (7255/7272): JAM data of time series
A jam code, total count, date and time of occurrence, tray type, paper size, and magnification can be dis-
played for the latest 100 jams.
*1 This pixel ratio is the theoretical value obtained by converting the black dot area on the image data and
the area of the transfer paper, therefore it is different from the black ratio obtained by the actual printing.
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 (6) Collecting data No.8 (7155/7165), No.9 (7255/7272): JAM count / Collecting data No.11 (7155/7165), No.12
(7255/7272): JAM count of each section (can be reset)
Description of JAM Jam
KRDS Code displayed position
param- when display of display Maximum Counting
NO jam code is
eter Location of jam on oper- count condition
(J0) selected by ation
25DIPSW panel
1 00 By-pass paper feed 10-1 6
2 01 10-2 6
3 02 Tray 1 paper feed 11-1 1
4 03 11-2 1
5 04 Tray 2 paper feed 12-1 2
6 05 12-2 2
7 06 Tray 3 paper feed 13-1 3
8 07 13-2 3
9 08 Tray 4 paper feed 14-1 4
10 09 (7255/7272 only) 14-2 4
11 0A LCT paper feed 15-1 5
12 0B 15-2 5
Paper feed conveyance (com-
13 0C 17-1 9
mon to all trays)
14 0D Paper feed conveyance (tray 1) 17-2 7
Paper feed conveyance
15 0E 17-3 7
(tray 2/3/4)(7255/7272 only)
16 0F Paper feed conveyance (tray 2) 17-4 7
17 10 Paper feed conveyance (tray 3) 17-5 7
18 11 Paper feed conveyance (tray 4) 17-6 7 All counts are
999999
19 12 (7255/7272 only) 17-7 7 6-digit counters.
20 13 LCT 17-8 8
21 14 Drum 21-1 10
22 15 Second paper feed conveyance 31-1 9
23 16 31-2 10
24 17 32-1 11
25 18 32-2 11
26 19 Fixing / Exit 32-3 11
27 1A 32-4 11
28 1B 32-5 11
29 1C 92-1 12
30 1D 92-2 12
31 1E ADU 93-1 13
32 1F 94-1 13
33 20 94-2 13
34 21 Vertical conveyance door 19-1 -
35 22 LCT 19-2 -
36 23 Front door 51-1 -
37 24 FNS 71-1 -
38 25 71-2 -
1 ADJUSTMENT
Description of JAM Jam
KRDS Code displayed position
param- when display of display Maximum Counting
NO jam code is
eter Location of jam on oper- count condition
(J0) selected by ation
25DIPSW panel
86 55 72-49 17
87 56 PI 72-50 17
88 57 72-51 17
89 58 72-81 16
90 59 FNS 72-82 16
91 5A 72-83 16 All counts are
999999
92 5B 72-90 16 6-digit counters.
93 5C 72-60 20
94 5D 72-61 20
95 5E PZ 72-62 20
96 5F 72-63 20
97 60 71-3 -
1. When a jam occurs, the associated counter is incremented by 1 (Static jams are not counted.)
4 (7) Collecting Data No.7 (7155/7165), No.10 (7255/7272):Count of each copy mode
KRDS Maximum
NO parameter Item count Counting condition
(F1)
1 00 1-1 mode
2 01 1-2 mode
3 02 2-1 mode
4 03 2-2 mode
5 04 ADF1-1 mode
6 05 ADF1-2 mode
7 06 Mixed original mode
8 07 Index original
9 08 Z-folded original mode
10 09 LEF/portrait, SEF/landscape normal set
11 0A LEF/landscape, SEF/portrait normal set
12 0B LEF/portrait, SEF/landscape reverse set All counters are 8-digit
13 0C LEF/landscape, SEF/portrait reverse set counters.
14 0D Auto (text/photo)
15 0E Text
16 0F Photo
17 10 Pencil
18 11 Non STD size
19 12 1 staple (upper-left)
20 13 1 staple (upper-right)
21 14 2 staples (left side)
22 15 2 staples (top side)
Stapled at left (7155/7165), stapled at both sides
23 16 (7255/7272) 99999999
24 17 Stapled at right Not available (7255/7272)
25 18 Stapled on top All counters are 8-digit
26 19 Three-holding counters.
27 1A Stitch and fold
28 1B Folding
Main tray: Group Not counted at group sta-
29 1C pling (7255/7272)
30 1D Main tray: Sort All counters are 8-digit
31 1E Main tray: Non sort counters.
32 1F Sub-tray: Group (FACE DOWN)
33 20 Sub-tray: Group (FACE UP)
34 21 Sub-tray: Sort (FACE DOWN) Not available (7255/7272)
35 22 Sub-tray: Sort (FACE UP)
36 23 Sub-tray: Non sort (FACE DOWN) All counters are 8-digit
37 24 Sub-tray: Non sort (FACE UP) counters.
38 25 Cover sheet
39 26 Trimmer Not available (7255/7272)
40 27 Real size copy All counters are 8-digit
41 28 Preset magnification E4 counters.
42 29 Preset magnification E3
43 2A Preset magnification E2
44 2B Preset magnification E1
45 2C Preset magnification R4
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Maximum
NO parameter Item count Counting condition
(F1)
46 2D Preset magnification R3
47 2E Preset magnification R2
48 2F Preset magnification R1
49 30 User lens mode 1
50 31 User lens mode 2
51 32 User lens mode 3
52 33 ZOOM
53 34 Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54 35 Maximum ZOOM
55 36 Minimum ZOOM
56 37 APS
57 38 AMS
58 39 Auto density (EE)
59 3A User density level 1
60 3B User density level 2
61 3C Interrupted copy
62 3D Automatic image rotation cancellation
63 3E Inter sheet
64 3F Chapter control
65 40 Combination
66 41 Booklet copy
67 42 OHP interleave (copy)
68 43 OHP interleave (blank) All counters are 8-digit
99999999 counters.
69 44 Image insert
70 45 Dual Page
71 46 Program job
72 47 Non-image area erase
73 48 Reverse image
74 49 Auto repeat
75 4A Manual repeat
76 4B STD size repeat
77 4C Frame erasure
78 4D Fold erasure
79 4E Auto layout
80 4F Full-image Area
81 50 Image Shift
82 51 Reduction shift
83 52 Overlay
84 53 Water mark
85 54 Stamp
86 55 Date / Time
87 56 Page
88 57 Numbering
89 58 Set quantity 1
90 59 Set quantity 2-5
91 5A Set quantity 6-10
1-31
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Maximum
NO parameter Item count Counting condition
(F1)
Set quantity 11 or more All counters are 8-digit
92 5B counters.
Energized time of power condition 1 Total period of time during
which image control board
93 5C is energized. Total period
of time during the opera-
tion of CPU.
Energized time of power condition 2 Total period of time during
which remote power sup-
94 5D ply 2 is on.
1 is counted per minutes.
95 5E Unused
Energized time of power condition 4 Total period of time during
which remote power sup-
96 5F ply 3 is on.
1 is counted per minutes.
Time during low power mode Total period of time during
which low power mode is
97 60 selected. The count is
incremented by 1 per
minute.
Time during WUP Total period of time during
which fixing unit heater is
ON when the fixing is
98 61 UNREADY. The count is
incremented by 1 per sec-
ond. Data is output per
minute.
Time during front door open Total period of time during
99999999 which front door is open.
99 62 The count is incremented
by 1 per second. Data is
output per minute.
Ope. time in 1 side straight exit Total time from start to end
100 63 of printing. The count is
Ope. time in 1 side reverse exit incremented by 1 per sec-
101 64 ond. Data is output per
minute. (Halt time caused
Ope. time in 2 side print by JAM stop, etc. is not
102 65
included.)
Operation time in ADF mode Total operation time of
ADF. The count is incre-
103 66 mented by 1 per second.
Data is output per minute.
Morning Correction count The count is incremented
by 1 each time correction
104 67 is made before starting
work in the morning.
Time during APS sensor on Total period of time during
which APS sensor is ON.
105 68 The count is incremented
by 1 per second. Data is
output per minute.
106 69 N of main tray used jobs
107 6A N of sub tray used jobs
108 6B N of stapling folding used jobs Number of jobs
109 6C N of folding jobs
110 6D N of ADF NF occurred
1-32
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Maximum
4
NO parameter Item count Counting condition
(F1)
N of ADF special error 1 occurred Original size detection
111 6E error occurrence count
N of ADF special error 2 occurred Next original information
112 6F error occurrence count
N of ADF special error 3 occurred Mixed loading prohibited
113 70 original size error occur-
rence count
N of Scanner scanned The count is incremented by
114 71 1 each time Platen Mode
Copy button is pressed.
115 72 N of electrode cleaned
N of memory overflow When memory is insufficient
116 73 for No.124+125+126 +HDD
reading (7255/7272)
117 74 N of fixing alarm occurred
118 75 N of no toner stop occurred
119 76 N of AGC retry
120 77 N of sub scan beam correct error
121 78 N of mis-centering correct error
122 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error
123 7A N of ADF distortion data error
Compression memory overflow When memory is insuffi-
cient for scanner compres-
124 7B sion/printer compression
(7255/7272)
Page memory overflow (scan) When memory is insuffi-
125 7C cient for printer data
99999999 receiving (7255/7272)
Page memory overflow (print) When memory is insuffi-
126 7D cient for page expansion
(7255/7272)
127 7E FNS alarm (tray/trimming)
128 7F FNS alarm (staple)
129 80 Scanner count Not available (7255/7272)
130 81 N of ADF special error 4 occurred Ready-time out error
131 82 Store for HDD (Sync. with Copying)
132 83 Store for HDD (SRV mode scan-> HDD)
133 84 Store for PC (SRV mode scan-> HDD)
134 85 Store for PC (SRV mode HDD-> PC)
135 86 Recall from HDD (SRV mode HDD)
136 87 Recall from PC (SRV mode PC)
137 88 Image edit count by SRV
138 89 Wide paper count (A3W or 11x17W)
139 8A Wide paper count (A4W or 8.5x11W)
140 8B Wide paper count (A4RW or 8.5x11RW)
141 8C Wide paper count (A5W or 5.5x8.5W)
142 8D Wide paper count (Others)
143 8E Punch
144 8F Z-fold
145 90 Unused
146 91 Mixplex (1-sided)
147 92 Mixplex (2-sided)
4 (8) Collecting data No.10 (7155/7165), No.11 (7255/7272): SC count / Collecting data No.12 (7155/7165), No.13
(7255/7272): SC count of each section (can be reset)
KRDS Trouble Maximum
NO parameter code Description count Remarks
(E0)
1 00 13 1 Paper feed MT EM
2 01 13 2 LCT conveyance MT EM
3 02 18 10 Tray 1 up MT EM
4 03 18 11 Tray 1 up error
5 04 18 20 Tray 2 up MT EM error
6 05 18 21 Tray 2 up error
7 06 18 30 Tray 3 up MT EM error
8 07 18 31 Tray 3 up error
9 08 18 40 Tray 4 up MT EM error (7255/7272 only)
10 09 18 41 Tray 4 up error (7255/7272 only)
11 0A 18 50 LCT up/down MT EM
12 0B 18 51 LCT up/down error
13 0C 18 60 By-pass tray up error
14 0D 21 1 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 1
15 0E 21 2 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 2
16 0F 21 3 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 3
17 10 21 4 Charging corona unit cleaning MT error 4
Transfer/separation corona unit cleaning
18 11 21 5 MT error 1
Transfer/separation corona unit cleaning
19 12 21 6 MT error 2
Transfer/separation corona unit cleaning
20 13 21 7 MT error 3
Transfer/separation corona unit cleaning 9999 All counters are 4-
21 14 21 8 MT error 4 digit counters.
22 15 22 1 Developing suction fan lock
23 16 22 2 Cleaner cooling fan lock
24 17 23 1 Toner bottle MT EM
25 18 23 2 Developing MT EM
26 19 23 3 Drum MT error
27 1A 28 1 Charging EM
28 1B 28 2 Transfer EM
29 1C 28 3 Separation EM
30 1D 29 1 Maximum density correction error 1
31 1E 29 2 Maximum density correction error 2
32 1F 29 3 Maximum density correction error 3
33 20 29 4 γ correction error 1
34 21 29 5 γ correction error 2
35 22 29 6 γ correction error 3
36 23 29 7 Dot diameter correction error 1
37 24 29 8 Dot diameter correction error 2
38 25 32 1 Conveyance suction fan lock
Main cooling fan/2 lock (7155/7165)
39 26 32 2 Paper exit fan/F lock (7255/7272)
40 27 32 3 Paper exit fan/R lock
Paper exit fan/F lock (7155/7165)
41 28 32 4 Main cooling fan/2 lock (7255/7272)
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Trouble Maximum
NO parameter code Description count Remarks
(E0)
42 29 32 1 Second paper feed MT EM
Fixing upper roller high temperature error
43 2A 33 1 detection
Fixing upper roller high temperature error
44 2B 34 2 detection
Fixing upper roller low temperature error
45 2C 34 1 detection 1
Fixing upper roller low temperature error
46 2D 35 2 detection 2
Fixing upper roller low temperature error
47 2E 35 3 detection 3
48 2F 35 1 Fixing upper roller sensor error detection
49 30 36 2 Fixing lower roller sensor error detection
50 31 36 1 Scanner HP return error
51 32 41 2 Polygon MT error
52 33 41 1 Scanner cooling fan lock
53 34 42 2 Write section cooling fan lock
54 35 42 1 APC error
55 36 46 2 Scanner FIFO error
56 37 46 3 Printer FIFO error
57 38 46 5 Compressed input/output FIFO error
58 39 46 6 Expansion error
59 3A 46 8 Index sensor error
60 3B 46 10 No margin of scanner control All counters are 4-
9999 digit counters.
61 3C 46 11 No margin of printer control
62 3D 46 12 SVV length error
63 3E 46 13 Scanner time-out
64 3F 46 14 Printer time-out
65 40 46 15 Expansion device access error
66 41 46 16 Compression device access error
67 42 46 17 Filter factory error
68 43 46 19 Memory device access error on data flow
69 44 46 21 Data flow memory mode time-out
70 45 46 23 SVV off error
71 46 46 24 Black/white collection error
72 47 46 25 AOC/AOG Level adjustment error
73 48 46 26 Invalid correction data by resolution
Density conversion (γ curve generation
74 49 46 27 error)
75 4A 46 29 Calibration start error
76 4B 46 30 Calibration abend
77 4C 46 31 APC initial sampling error
78 4D 46 32 MPC error
79 4E 46 33 Sub-scan beam correction error
80 4F 46 34 Unfinished Calibration
81 50 46 35 Continuous copy page area error
1-36
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS Trouble Maximum
NO parameter code Description count Remarks
(E0)
124 7B 77 12 Stapler/R error
125 7C 77 13 Clincher/F driving error
126 7D 77 14 Clincher/F driving error
127 7E 77 21 Stopper motor drive error
128 7F 77 22 Alignment plate/L drive error
129 80 77 25 Folding knife motor drive error
130 81 77 26 Folding conveyance motor drive error
131 82 77 31 Trimmer conveyance drive error
132 83 77 32 Trimmer conveyance error
133 84 77 33 Trimmer rear end stopper drive error
134 85 77 34 Trimmer rear end release motor driving error
135 86 77 35 Trimmer press motor driving error
136 87 77 36 Trimmer pusher motor driving error
137 88 77 37 Trimmer holder motor driving error
138 89 77 41 Sheet feeder up motor driving error /L
139 8A 77 42 Sheet feeder up motor driving error /U
140 8B 77 43 Sheet feeder conveyance driving error
141 8C 77 52 Motor drive error for Z-fold stopper 1
142 8D 77 53 Motor drive error for Z-fold stopper 2
143 8E 77 54 Punch drive motor driving error
144 8F 77 81 Gate motor drive error
145 90 77 91 Sub-CPU reception error All counters are 4-
9999 digit counters.
146 91 77 92 Main CPU reception error
147 92 80 1 Printer control initial communication error
148 93 80 2 Printer control communication error
149 94 80 3 Operation panel communication error
150 95 80 1* Printer control ISW not written
151 96 80 21 VIF control ISW not written
152 97 80 30 ISW time-out error
153 98 80 31 ISW data error
154 99 80 32 ISW write error
155 9A 80 40 FNS with unwritten ISW
156 9B 80 41 ZU with unwritten ISW
157 9C 90 1 ADU drive serial input error 1
158 9D 90 2 ADU drive serial input error 2
159 9E 92 1 ADU cooling fan lock
160 9F 77 44 Punch shift motor driving error
161 A0 77 45 Unused
162 A1 77 46 Stacker fan driving error
Communication error between FNS and
163 A2 77 47 PK-120
164 A3 77 55 PZ punch shift motor driving error
165 A4 77 56 PZ conveyance motor fan driving error
166 A5 77 57 PZ punch motor driving error
1-37
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 KRDS
Trouble Maximum
NO parameter Description Remarks
code count
(E0)
PZ punch 2/3 (·4) hole switching motor
167 A6 77 58 driving error
All counters are 4-
9999
168 A7 22 3 Developer cooling fan lock (7255/7272 only) digit counters.
169 A8 23 4 PCL connection error (7255/7272 only)
Note: When DIP switch is set to 3-1-1, SC34, 35, are not counted
Maximum
NO KRDS parameter (F4) Description Remarks
count
Large size All counters are
1 01 99999999 8-digit counters.
1 ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
Blank page
*1. Caution: You must reset the counter when replace these parts, otherwise image failure may occur.
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS
4 Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
11 0A Trans./sep. cleaning 56AA-264 25DIPSW8-6
assembly =0: Count 1 per ejected paper for single sided, 2
12 0B Fixing upper roller 56AA5305 for double sided
13 0C Fixing lower roller 55AA5306 =1: For A3, 11x17, 8k, count 2 per ejected paper
(7155/7165) for single sided, 4 for double sided
56AA5306
(7255/7272)
14 0D Fixing upper claw 56AA5427
15 0E Fixing lower claw 25BA5333
(7155/7165)
56QA5320
(7255/7272)
16 0F Heat insulate sleeve 45405339
(upper)
17 10 Upper roller bearing 45407504
18 11 Cleaning roller (7155/7165) 56AA5308
19 12 Toner control board 56AA-910
unit
20 13 Trans./sep. corona 56AA-260
unit (7155/7165) 99999999
56QA-260
(7255/7272)
21 14 Separation cleaning 56AA-267
assembly
22 15 Charging wire 56AA2509
23 16 Upper roller error 56AA8804
detection sensor
24 17 Ozone filter (7155/7165) 56FA7301
Ozone filter/M (7255/7272)
56QA1059
25 18 Charging corona unit 56AA-250
(7155/7165)
56QA-250
(7255/7272)
26 19 PCL assembly (7155/7165) 56AA-256
27 1A Developer 56AA-300
(7155/7156)
56QA-300
(7255/7272)
28 1B TSL cover assembly 56AA-387
4 KRDS
Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
29 1C Tray 1 feed rubber 25AA4001 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
(7155/7165) ejected.
56AA-658
(7255/7272)
30 1D Tray 1 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber
31 1E Tray 1 feed clutch 56AA8201
32 1F Tray 1 convey clutch 56AA8201
33 20 Tray 1 feed count 56AA-400
(7155/7165)
56QA-400
(7255/7272)
34 21 Tray 2 feed rubber 25AA4001 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2 is
(7155/7165) ejected.
56AA-458
(7255/7272)
35 22 Tray 2 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber
99999999
36 23 Tray 2 feed clutch 56AA8201
37 24 Tray 2 convey clutch 56AA8201
38 25 Tray 2 feed count 56AA-400
(7155/7165)
56QA-400
(7255/7272)
39 26 Tray 3 feed rubber 25AA4001 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 is
(7155/7165) ejected.
56AA-458
(7255/7272)
40 27 Tray 3 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber
41 28 Tray 3 feed clutch 56AA8201
42 29 Tray 3 convey clutch 56AA8201
43 2A Tray 3 feed count 56AA-400
(7155/7165)
56QA-400
(7255/7272)
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 KRDS
Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
44 2B Tray 4 feed rubber 56AA-458 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 4 is
(7255/7272 only) ejected.
45 2C Tray 4 feed conv/rev 25SA4096
rubber (7255/7272 only)
46 2D Tray 4 feed clutch 56AA8201
(7255/7272 only)
47 2E Tray 4 convey clutch 56AA8201
(7255/7272 only)
48 2F Tray 4 feed count 56QA-400
(7255/7272 only)
49 30 By-pass feed roller 55FA4233 1 is counted each time the paper from by-pass
50 31 By-pass conveyance/ 54004056 tray is ejected.
reverse roller
51 32 By-pass count 56AA-460
(7155/7165)
56QA-460
(7255/7272)
52 33 LCT feed roller 55VA-484 1 is counted each time the paper from LCT is
53 34 LCT conveyance/ 55VA-483 ejected.
reverse roller
54 35 LCT feed clutch 56AA8201 99999999
55 36 LCT conveyance 56AA8201
clutch
56 37 LCT feed count 13RJ/RE-050
(7155/7165)
57 38 Loop roller 56AA4251 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1, tray
2, tray 3, tray 4 and LCT is ejected.
58 39 V-convey exit feed 56AA4408 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2, tray
roller 3 and tray 4 is ejected.
59 3A V-convey feed roller/ 56AA4408 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 and
M tray 4 is ejected.
60 3B V-convey feed roller/ 56AA4408 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 4 is
L ejected.
61 3C V-convey feed clutch 56AA8201 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 2, tray
1 3, and tray 4 is ejected.
62 3D V-convey feed clutch 56AA8201 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 3 and
2 tray 4 is ejected.
63 3E Web solenoid 55VA8252 Every operation
(7155/7165)
56QA8251
(7255/7272)
4 KRDS
Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
64 3F Registration clutch 56AA8201 1 is counted each time single side original is
ejected; 2 is counted each time double side
paper is ejected.
65 40 ADU preregistration 56AA8201 1 is counted each time double side paper is
clutch ejected (not counted for single side paper)
66 41 Resistration feed - 1 is counted each time single side original is
count ejected; 2 is counted each time double side orig-
inal is ejected.
67 42 Reverse exit count - 2 is counted each time single side paper is
ejected after being reversed. 0 is counted each
time single side paper is ejected straight. 1 is
counted each time bouble side paper is ejected.
68 43 ADU feed count - 1 is counted each time double side paper is
ejected (not counted for single side paper)
69 44 FNS up/down motor 129U8004 1 is counted each time the paper from FNS main
(FS-110/210 tray is ejected. 1 is counted each time a copy is
Old type/FS- ejected in stapling mode.
111)
56AA8001
(FS-110/
210 New
type)
70 45 FNS stapler/front 13QE4241 1 is counted each time a copy is ejected in sta-
99999999
(FS-110/210) pling front 1-point stapling, stapling 2-point sta-
13TQ4250 pling, or middle binding mode.
(FS-111)
71 46 FNS stapler/rear 12QE4241
(FS-110/210)
13TQ4250
(FS-111)
72 47 FNS shift motor 12QR-361 1 is counted each time even-numbered paper is
(FS-110/210) ejected.
13TR-356
(FS-111)
73 48 FNS exit opening 12QR-361 1 is counted each time large size stapling (A4R/
open/close motor 8.5x11R or larger) job starts. 1 is counted each
time paper is ejected from each section. 1 is
counted each time stitch and fold or folding job
starts.
74 49 FNS folding knife 120H8001 1 is counted each time one set of papers in sta-
motor pling/folding, folding, or three-holding mode is
ejected.
75 4A FNS By-pass SD 12QR-263 1 is counted each time one set of papers in DM
folding mode is ejected.
76 4B FNS DM gate SD 12QR-263 Counted each time one paper is ejected in three-
holding mode
1 ADJUSTMENT
KRDS
4 Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
77 4C PI sheet feed clutch/U 13QN8201 Counted each time are paper is fed into PI/U
78 4D PI feed roller unit/A 50BA-574
79 4E PI feed roller unit/B 50BA-575
80 4F PI reverse robber unit 13QN-443
81 50 PI torque limiter 13QN4073
82 51 PI sheet feed clutch/L 13QN8201 Counted each time one paper is fed into PI/L
83 52 PI feed roller unit/A 50BA-574
84 53 PI feed roller unit/B 50BA-575
85 54 PI reverse robber unit 13QN-443
86 55 PI torque limiter 13QN4073
87 56 Trimmer knife 13LH1026 1 is counted each time knife movement is made
57 Punched holes 13NK5001 Number of ejected papers with the punch mode
88
(2 holes) selected
58 Punched holes 13NL5001
89
(3 holes)
59 Punched holes 13NM5001
90
(4 holes)
91 5A - - Not used
92 5B ADF feed roller 13QA4127 Number of originals passes in all modes
93 5C ADF Separation roller 13QA4104
5D ADF double-feed pre- 13QA4045
94
vention robber
5E ADF double-feed pre- 13QA4001 99999999
95
vention roller
5F ADF paper exit sole- 12QV8251 1 is counted each time one original passes in the
noid (7155/7165) double side or the mixed mode
96
13QA-407
(7255/7272)
60 ADF feed clutch 56AA8201 single side: Number of originals passes in every
single side mode count
97
double side: Number of originals passes in every
double side mode x3 counts
61 ADF reverse solenoid 12QV8251 1 is counted each time one original passes in the
(7155/7165) double side or the mixed mode
98
13QA-407
(7255/7272)
62 ADF pressure roller 25SA8265 2 is counted each time one original passes in the
release solenoid (7155/7165) double side or the mixed mode
99
13QA-406
(7255/7272)
63 Exposure ON time 55TA8301 Unit
(7155/7165)
100
56AA8301
(7255/7272)
101 64 Sub power switch 55GA8602 1 is counted each time sub power is switched off.
102 65 Door switch 40AA8501 1 is counted each time front door is opened.
KRDS
4 Maximum
NO para- Part name Part No. Counting condition
meter
count
66 Drum separation claw 1 is counted each time a paper is ejected, 2 is
103 26NA8251
solenoid counted for double-sided.
67 Main power switch 1 is counted each time image control turns ON
(number of times CPU is activated from other
104 25AA8502
than sub power supply (SK/KRDS/SHUT OFF/
WT))
105 68 PI regist clutch 13QN8201 1 is counted each time PI sheet is ejected.
69 Punch motor Number of papers ejected when punch mode is
106 54008003
selected.
6A Ozone filter /S (7255/ 25DIPSW8-6
107 56QA1057
7272) =0: 1 is counted each time a paper is ejected for
6B Developer suction fil- single-sided, and 2 is counted for double-
ter (7255/7272) sided.
108 56QA7320 =1: For a3, 11x17, and 8K, 2 is counted each
time a paper is ejected for single-sided, and
4 is counted for double-sided.
6C Horizontal convey- 1 is counted each time the paper from tray 1 is
109 ance roller / right 56QA5705 ejected.
(7255/7272) 99999999
6D Horizontal convey-
110 ance roller / left (7255/ 56QA5706
7272)
6E Horizontal convey-
111 ance clutch / right 56AA8201
(7255/7272)
7F Horizontal convey-
112 ance clutch / right 56AA8201
(7255/7272)
70 Fixing decurler roller 25DIPSW8-6
113 56AA5307
(7255/7272) =0: 1 is counted each time a paper is ejected for
71 Fixing decurler bear- single-sided, and 2 is counted for double-
114 07AA7509 sided.
ing (7255/7272)
72 Fixing input gear =1: For a3, 11x17, and 8K, 2 is counted each
115 25BA7726 time a paper is ejected for single-sided, and
(7255/7272)
73 Fixing drive gear 4 is counted for double-sided.
116 56QA7721
(7255/7272)
124 7B
125 7C
126 7D
127 7E
128 7F
1 ADJUSTMENT
[9] Copy Count by Parts to be Replaced 2. Changing the data on the Copy Count by
(Optional Parts) Parts to be Replaced (Optional Parts)
This function allows you to change the limit value, part
This function allows you to make the following settings
number, or part name for the desired optional copy
for an optional part or data:
count by parts to be replaced (optional parts).
1. Copy count resetting
2. Limit value setting Step Operation
3. Part number setting 1 Enter the 25 mode.
4. Part name setting [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
The above settings can be made for 30 data numbers, 2
Select the " 5 Parts counter".
No.1 to No.30.
The copy count is incremented by 1 for each side irre- [Copy count of part menu Screen]
spective of the paper size. 3
Select the " 2 Count of each parts".
1. Resetting the Copy Count by Parts to be [Copy count of each part Screen]
Replaced (Optional Parts) Data numbers (No.), part names
This function allows you to reset the copy count (Name), part numbers (P/N), and count/
by parts to be replaced (optional parts). limit values are displayed in a list format.
4 Using and keys, select a data
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode. number.
[Memory setting mode menu Screen] To scroll the screen, use and
2
Select the " 5 Parts counter". keys.
[Copy count of part menu Screen] Press the Part Name Set, P/N Set, or
5
3 Limit Set key.
Select the " 2 Count of each parts".
[Data change screen by parts to be
[Copy count of each part Screen] replaced]
Data numbers (No.), part names
6 Press the Parts name , P/N set or
(Name), part numbers (P/N), and count/
limit values are displayed in a list format. Limit set key corresponding to the
4 Using and keys, select a part data you want to change.
name. Enter new data using alphabetic and
7
To scroll the screen, use and numeric keys.
keys. Perform steps 6 and 7 repeatedly to
8
change other data.
Press the COUNT RESET key to reset
5 Press the OK key to allow the new
the count value of the part highlighted.
data to take effect.
Press the RETURN key to return to the To cancel the new data, press the
6
Memory setting mode menu Screen. 9 CANCEL key.
Reference: If the copy count exceeds the limit, Pressing either key will display the Copy
the * mark appears to the left of the count by parts to be replaced (optional
limit value. parts) screen again.
[Data change screen by parts to be
replaced]
10
Press the RETURN key to return to
the Memory setting mode menu Screen.
1-43
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1-44
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Reference1: The digits entered in the data field [11] Setting the Telephone Number and/or
of each data item will be shifted to Fax Number of the Service Center
the left one after another.
This function allows you to set the telephone number
Reference2: When the number of entered digits and/or fax number of the service center displayed
exceeds 4 or 8, the leftmost char- when a service call occurs. The telephone number
acter will disappear. and/or fax number are/is also displayed as the basic
help topic "Contact Number of Service Center" on the
Reference3: Setting the key operator pass- user screen. This function is not related to the KRDS
word, weekly timer password, and functions; the telephone number and/or fax number
HDD management password to are/is just displayed on the screen.
"0000" allows you to use individual
Step Operation
modes without passwords. That
is, the menu screen of each mode 1 Enter the 25 mode.
appears directly without display- [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
ing the password input screen. 2 Select the " 7 Telephone number/FAX
number setting".
[Customer support TEL/FAX setting
Screen]
3 Select "Service center Telephone num-
ber (16 digits)" or "Service center Fax
number (16 digits)".
Enter the telephone or fax number using
4
numeric keys.
To set both telephone number and fax
5 numbers, perform steps 3 and 4 repeat-
edly.
1-45
25 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[12] Setting the Serial Number [13] Displaying the ROM Version
This function allows you to display, set, or change the This function allows you to display the versions of the
serial number of the main body or option. installed ROMs.
Serial number data can also be read from KRDS. Step Operation
Step Operation 1 Enter the 25 mode.
1 Enter the 25 mode. [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
[Memory setting mode menu Screen] 2 Select the " 9 Indication of ROM ver-
2
Select the " 8 Serial number setting". sion".
[Serial number setting mode Screen] [Indication of ROM Version Screen]
Press the key you want to change The versions of the ROMs installed in
3 among the Main body , Option tray , 3 the image control (I1 to I5), printer con-
trol (C1 to C5), finisher (N), and Punch
or Finisher key. (H) are displayed.
Enter the serial number using alphabetic Press the RETURN key to return to the
4 4
and numeric keys.
Memory setting mode menu Screen.
Perform steps 3 and 4 repeatedly to set
5
other serial numbers.
1 ADJUSTMENT
[14] KRDS setting
4 See the "KRDS Setup Manual".
Note:
Ends when the CANCEL key is pressed with-
out amending the entered date, and returns to
the Memory setting mode menu Screen.
Blank page
1 ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
[1] Setting Method [2] High Voltage Adjustment
This machine is provided with 36 Mode as an adjust- Adjusting the high voltage for charging, transfer, sepa-
ment mode. ration, and development.
This mode is used to perform various adjustments. 1. Select " 1 Process adjustment" in the Adjust-
1. Turn off SW2 (sub power). ment mode menu Screen to display the Process
2. Turn on SW2 while holding down both paper adjustment mode menu Screen.
quantity buttons 3 and 6. 2. Press " 1 High voltage adjustment" in the Pro-
The Adjustment mode menu Screen appears. cess adjustment mode menu Screen to display
At this point, you are in 36 mode and normal copy the High voltage adjustment mode menu.
operation is disabled. 3. High voltage adjustment consists of the following:
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 1 HV adjustment (Charge)
2 HV adjustment (Transfer)
3 HV adjustment (Separation AC)
4 HV adjustment (Separation DC)
5 HV adj. (Charging grid voltage)
6 HV adj. (Bias of development)
7 Transfer guide confirm
8 HV adjustment (TGR)
4. Press the number key corresponding to the item
3. Press the number key corresponding to the item to be adjusted.
to adjust. The adjustment screen of the selected item is dis-
The setting screen for each item is displayed. played.
4. Enter data in each adjustment screen. 5. When adjustment completes, the screen returns
5. If there are several adjustment items, press the to the High voltage adjustment mode menu
NEXT or BACK key to select the desired screen.
item. If there are more screens below, press the 6. Press the RETURN key in the High voltage
key displayed on screen to change screen. Adjustment mode menu Screen to return to the
6. Enter data and press the SET key if it is avail- Process adjustment mode menu Screen.
able, to confirm your entry.
7. Press the RETURN key to end adjustment.
8. Turn off the SW2 and exit the 36 mode.
9. The new adjustment values take effect after
restarting the machine.
1-47
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation
Check the adjustment value of the charg-
1
ing grid voltage on the durm flange.
Connect the V tester as shown below.
+: Grid pin
2
-: GND (Earth)
Range: DC1000V
3 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
4
Press " 1 Process adjustment".
[Process adjustment mode menu
5 Screen]
Press " 1 High voltage adjustment".
[High voltage adjustment mode menu
Screen]
6
Press " 5 HV adj. (Charging grid volt-
age)".
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment 1. Blade setting mode
Adjusting the blade set, maximum density (Dmax), dot In this mode, toner stuck on the drum surface
diameter, laser offset and gamma. during replacement of the cleaning blade or
1. Select " 1 Process adjustment" in the Adjust- drum is removed to prevent damage to the drum
ment mode menu Screen to display the Process and cleaning blade.
adjustment mode menu Screen. Preparation: Be sure the drum unit is set.
2. Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjustment" in the Apply setting powder to all the sur-
Process adjustment mode menu Screen to dis- face of the drum.
play the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
Step Operation
menu Screen.
3. Drum Peculiarity Adjustment consists of the fol- 1 Enter the 36 mode.
lowing: [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
1 Blade setting mode 2
Press " 1 Process adjustment".
2 Auto maximum density adj.
3 Auto dot diameter adjustment [Process adjustment mode menu
4 LD1 offset adjustment Screen]
3
5 LD2 offset adjustment Press " 2 Drum peculiarity adjust-
6 LD1 bias adjustment ment".
7 LD2 bias adjustment
[Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
8 Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot)
4 menu Screen]
9 Auto gamma adjustment (2 dot)
10 Cartridge set mode Press " 1 Blade setting mode".
4. Press the number key corresponding to the item [Blade setting mode Screen]
to be adjusted.
Press the Start key.
The adjustment screen of the selected item is 5
displayed. Adjustment completes in about 1 second
5. When adjustment completes, the screen returns and a complete message is displayed.
to the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu Press the RETURN key to return to the
Screen. 6 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
6. Press the RETURN key in the Drum peculiarity
menu Screen.
adjustment mode menu Screen to return to the
Process adjustment mode menu Screen.
1-49
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Press the RETURN key to return to the Press the RETURN key to return to
6 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode 6 the Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
menu Screen. menu Screen.
Reference: Reference:
If any one of the following error messages If either of the following error messages
appears during auto maximum density adjust- appears during auto dot diameter adjustment,
ment, clean the TSCB (toner control sensor clean the TSCB (toner control sensor board),
board), check its installation state, and retry check its installation state, and retry the auto
the auto maximum density adjustment. dot diameter adjustment.
<1> Error 1: The Dmax sensor dirt correction <1> Error 1: The γ sensor dirt correction has
has been corrected. been corrected.
<2>Error 2: Maximum density adjustment is <2>Error 2: Auto dot diameter adjustment has
not complete when the number of rotation ended with an abnormal value.
of developing sleeve reaches the speci-
fied value.
<3>Error 3: No signal is output from the Dmax
sensor. No control patch is output.
1-50
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 4. LD1 offset adjustment Check the test pattern.
This adjusts the place at which LD1 laser starts
writing. Specification: Check if two output pat-
This adjustment should be performed when the terns from laser are con-
drum or developer is replaced. sistent and the
In the case of the 7155/7165 beginning of the lower
The adjustment is performed at line speed of density part is aligned
320, 280 and 185 respectively. between the two lines as
In the case of the 7255/7272 illustrated below.
The adjustment is performed at line speed of
345, 280 and 172.5 respectively.
pleted.
Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 1 Process adjustment".
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
5 LS185 . (in the case of the 7155/7165) Press the RETURN key to return to the
Press any key of LS345 , LS280 or 12 Drum peculiarity adjustment mode
menu Screen.
LS172.5 . (in the case of the 7255/7272)
Reference:
6 Press the COPY SCREEN key. Select LS320 to adjust in normal mode (line
Select 11x17 size paper and press the speed 320mm/sec.), LS280 to adjust in
7 postcard mode (280mm/sec.) (Japan only), or
START button to output the test pattern.
LS185 to adjust in thick paper mode
(185mm/sec.).
1 ADJUSTMENT
6. LD1 bias adjustment Reference:
LD1 bias adjustment is inhibited in the field. If any one of the following error messages
appears during auto gamma adjustment,
7. LD1 bias adjustment clean the TSCB (toner control sensor board),
LD1 bias adjustment is inhibited in the field. check its installation state, and retry the auto
gamma adjustment.
8. Auto gamma adjustment (1 dot) <1>Error 1: The γ sensor dirt correction has
Performs gamma adjustment (1 dot) automati- been corrected.
cally. <2>Error 2: No signal is output from the γ sen-
This adjustment should be performed when the sor. No control patch is output.
drum, developer, write unit, or dust-proof glass is <3>Error 3: A recurrence error occurred dur-
replaced. ing γ curve calculation.
1-53
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[5] Drum Peculiarity Adjustment [6] User Paper Setting
(Manual) This adjustment is only performed when the user uses
4 1. Maxiumum density manual adjustment special copy paper and can not be adjusted using the
This adjustment must be performed under the standard adjustment process.
guidance of the authorized distributor. This setting is applied when "User" is selected for
Variable range: 0 to 41 "Paper type/Special size setting" in the key operator
mode or when "User paper" is selected for "Transfer/
4 2. Dot diameter manual adjustment separation output for plain paper" or "recycled paper"
This adjustment must be performed under the in 25 mode DIPSW.
guidance of the authorized distributor. The data for 16 lb. plain paper" is input as the default.
Variable range: 0 to 255 Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 1 Process adjustment".
[Process adjustment mode menu
3 Screen]
Select " 4 User paper setting".
Transfer/separation output screen
appears.
Enter data according to the user speci-
4
fied paper. Data should be input under
the guidance of the authorized distribu-
tor.
1 ADJUSTMENT
[9] Magnification Adjustment 1. Printer drum clock magnification adjust-
Adjusting the printer and copy vertical and horizontal ment
magnifications. Adjusting the printer vertical magnification.
1. Select " 2 Image adjustment" in the Adjust- Step Operation
ment mode menu Screen to display the Image 1 Enter the 36 mode.
adjustment mode menu Screen. [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2. Press " 2 Magnification adjustment" in the 2
Image adjustment mode menu Screen to display Press " 2 Image adjustment".
the Magnification adjustment mode menu [Image adjustment mode menu
Screen. Screen]
3
3. Magnification adjustment consists of the follow-
Select " 2 Magnification adjustment".
ing:
1 Printer drum clock adjustment [Magnification adjustment mode
2 Printer horizontal adjustment menu Screen]
3 Scanner drum clock adjustment
4
Press " 1 Printer drum clock adjust-
4 RADF drum clock adjustment ment".
4. Press the number key corresponding to the item
to be adjusted. [Printer drum clock adjustment
5 Screen]
5. After adjustment completes, return to the Mag-
nification adjustment menu Screen. Press the COPY SCREEN key.
6. Press the RETURN key on the Magnification Select 11x17 size paper and press the
adjustment menu Screen to return to the Image START button to output the test pattern
6
adjustment mode menu Screen. (No.16).
Caution: Check and adjust the printer vertical Measure the vertical magnification with
magnification adjustment during a ruler.
maintenance. Also adjust the printer Specification:
restart timing because it changes with ± 0.5% or less (100% magnification)
the printer vertical magnification Within ± 1mm with respect to 206mm.
adjustment 7
206 1
1-57
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
190±1
1-58
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
4. Scanner (RADF) drum clock magnifica-
Press the RETURN key to return to
tion adjustment
11 the Magnification adjustment mode Adjusting the vertical magnification during RADF
menu Screen. copy.
Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen]
Select " 2 Magnification adjustment".
[Magnification adjustment mode
menu Screen]
4
Press " 4 RADF drum clock adjust-
ment".
[RADF drum clock adjustment
Screen]
Press the NEXT or BACK key to
5
select the magnification to be adjusted.
The screen rotates from 100% to 50% to
200% to 400%.
Specification:
± 0.5% or less (100% magnification)
Within ± 1mm with respect to 190mm.
8
190±1
1-59
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1-60
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Printer restart timing adjustment Step Operation
4 This adjusts the printer restart timing (paper feed [Printer restart timing adjustment
timing). The adjustment is performed at line Screen]
speed of 320, 280 and 185 respectively. Enter a value with the numeric keys and
IIn the case of the 7155/7165 10
The adjustment is performed at line speed of press the SET key.
320, 280 and 185 respectively. Setting range: -30 to +60
In the case of the 7255/7272 1 step=0.1mm
The adjustment is performed at line speed of Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the specifica-
345, 280 and 172.5 respectively. 11
tion is satisfied.
Step Operation
Press the RETURN key to return to the
1 Enter the 36 mode. 12
Timing adjustment mode menu Screen.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen]
Press " 3 Timing adjustment".
[Timing adjustment mode menu
4 Screen]
Press " 1 Printer restart timing adj".
4
[Printer restart timing adjustment
Screen]
Press any key of LS320 , LS280 , or
5 LS185 . (in the case of the 7155/7165)
1 ADJUSTMENT
5. Scanner (platen) restart timing adjustment 6. RADF restart timing adjustment
Adjusting the scanner restart timing during platen Adjusting the scanner leading edge timing during
copy. RADF copy.
Caution: Printer restart timing adjustment must Caution: Printer restart timing adjustment must
be completed before performing this be completed before performing this
adjustment. adjustment.
Step Operation Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2 2
Press " 2 Image adjustment". Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Image adjustment mode menu [Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen] 3 Screen]
Press " 3 Timing adjustment". Press " 3 Timing adjustment".
[Timing adjustment mode menu [Timing adjustment mode menu
Screen] Screen]
4 4
Press " 5 Scanner restart timing adj.". Press " 6 RADF restart timing adjust-
ment".
[Scanner (platen) restart timing adj.
Screen] [RADF restart timing adj. Screen]
5
Press the COPY SCREEN key. Press the COPY SCREEN key and
5
then switch to double sided /single sided
Select 11x17-size paper, set a pyramid
copy mode.
6 chart on the original glass, and press the
START button. Select 11x17 size paper, set an adjustment
6
chart on RADF, and press the START button.
Check the restart timing.
7 Check the leading edge timing on front
Specification: Within 3mm
7 and back side.
If the leading edge timing is not appro-
Specification: Within 3mm
8 priate, press the C button while pressing
the P button. If the restart timing is not appropriate,
8 press the C button while pressing the P
[Scanner (platen) restart timing adj.
button.
Screen]
Enter a value with the numeric keys and [RADF restart timing adj. Screen]
9 Press the NEXT or BACK key to
press the SET key.
Setting range: -60 to +20 9 select the item to be adjusted.
1 step=0.1mm The screen changes from single side to dou-
ble-side (front), to double side (back) copy.
Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the leading
10 Enter a value with the numeric keys and
edge timing is within specification.
press the SET key.
Press the RETURN key to return to 10
11 Setting range: -60 to +50
the Timing adjustment mode menu
1 step=0.1mm
Screen.
Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the leading
11
edge timing is within specification.
1-63
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1-64
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. RADF density adjustment 2. RADF original size adjustment
When the original reader slit glass is replaced, Perform this adjustment when the RADF original
the density when reading originals with the size detection does not operate properly.
RADF must be adjusted.
Caution: RADF original size adjustment con-
Preparation: Wipe the original reader slit glass sists of A4 and A5R. Use the NEXT
clean. Check that the white chart
is not dirty or folded. or BACK key to select the desired
Step Operation adjustment item.
1 Enter the 36 mode. Step Operation
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 1 Enter the 36 mode.
2 [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
2
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen] [Image adjustment mode menu
Press " 4 RADF adjustment". 3 Screen]
Press " 4 RADF adjustment".
[RADF adjustment mode menu
4 Screen] [RADF adjustment mode menu
Press " 1 RADF density adjustment". Screen]
4
Press " 2 RADF original size adjust-
[RADF density adjustment Screen]
5 ment".
Set white chart on RADF (Caution 1).
[RADF original size adj. Screen]
Press the Start key.
Press the NEXT or BACK key to
6 RADF density is adjusted automatically.
5 select original size to adjust.
When adjustment completes, a mes-
sage appears on the screen. The screen changes between 8.5x11 to
5.5x8.5R.
If an error message is displayed, repeat
7 Set the original of the selected size on
steps 5 and 6 (Caution 2).
RADF and press the Start key.
Press the RETURN key to return to the 6
8 RADF original size is adjusted automat-
RADF adjustment mode menu Screen.
ically.
Caution1: Be sure to set the white chart in A4 Repeat steps 5 and 6 and adjust both
7
orientation. sizes.
Caution2: If the error message appears repeat-
Press the RETURN key to return to
edly, there is a possibility of scanner
8 the RADF adjustment mode menu
system mechanical, optical, or elec-
trical adjustment error or parts Screen.
defect.
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Printer Centring Adjustment 2. Scanner (platen) centring adjustment
Adjusting the printer centring. Adjusting the scanner (platen) centring.
Step Operation Preparation: Printer centring adjustment must
1 Enter the 36 mode. be completed before performing
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] this adjustment.
2 Step Operation
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Image adjustment mode menu
Screen] [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
3 2
Press " 5 Centring adjustment". Press " 2 Image adjustment".
1-67
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. RADF centring adjustment Enter a value with the numeric keys and
This adjusts centring for the RADF copy.
press the SET key.
There are six adjustment items as follows: 10
• Single sided small size Setting range: -30 to +30
• Double sided (front) small size 1 step=0.1mm
• Double sided (back) small size Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the centering
• Single sided large size 11
is within specification.
• Double sided (front) large size
• Double sided (back) large size Press the RETURN key to return to the
12 Centring adjustment mode menu
Step Operation
Screen.
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Image adjustment mode menu
3 Screen]
Press " 5 Centring adjustment".
[Centring adjustment mode menu
4 Screen]
Press " 3 RADF centring adjustment".
[RADF centring adj. Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key and
5
enter double sided / single sided copy
mode.
Load 11x17 size paper in the tray, place
6 small size or large size original on RADF,
and press the START button.
Fold 11x17 size paper in half in the short
edge (landscape) orientation and check
7 whether the lines on the left and right
overlap completely.
Specification: ± 1mm
If the offset is not within specification,
8 press the C button while pressing the P
button.
[RADF centring adj. Screen]
Press the NEXT or BACK key to
select the item to be adjusted.
The screen changes from single sided
9 small size to double sided (front) small
size to double sided (back) small size to
single sided large size to double sided
(front) large size to double sided (back)
large size.
1-68
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[13] Distortion adjustment (Copier) [14] Non-image area erase check
This is to correct distortion during platen/RADF copy- When this machine is installed in a place or is moved
ing. There are four adjustment items as follows: to another location, research should be conducted on
• Scanner (platen) distortion (main scan) the conditions under which the machine is placed.
• Scanner (platen) distortion (sub-scan)
Preparation: RADF must be opened.
• Scanner (RADF) distortion (main scan)
Nothing should be put on the orig-
• Scanner (RADF) distortion (sub-scan)
inal glass. The original glass must
Step Operation be clean and transparent.
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] Step Operation
2 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
[Image adjustment mode menu 2
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
3 Screen]
Press " 6 Warp adjustment (Copier)". [Image adjustment mode menu
Screen]
[Scanner warp adj. Screen] 3
4 Select " 7 Non-image area erase
Press the COPY SCREEN key.
check".
Select 11x17 size paper. To check the [Non-image area erase check Screen]
platen, set an adjustment chart on the
5 4 Open the RADF, and press the Start
original glass. To check RADF, set it on
RADF. key.
Check for platen copy distortion or Confirm that a message indicating that it
RADF copy distortion. operated normally is displayed in the
6 Specification: The difference in lengths message display. When a message
of two diagonals of a 200mm square indicating it did not operate properly is
5
must be within 1.4mm. displayed, refer to Reference 1 shown
below. Then, perform the non-original
If the platen copy distortion or RADF
automatic erasure installation research
copy distortion is not within specification,
7 again.
press the P button while pressing the P
button.
[Scanner warp Adj. Screen] Reference 1:
Here are measures to be taken when the fol-
8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to lowing error messages are indicated.
select the desired adjustment item. <Error message 1>
Enter a value with the numeric keys and Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many cases,
the Non-image-area-erase function will not
press the SET key.
9 operate correctly. Please confirm "adjustment"
Range of setting: -50 to +50 - "36 mode" columns of the Service Hand
1 step=0.05% book.
Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the distortion is <Countermeasure1>
10
within specification. If you use the non-original erasure function, or
copy originals that have a dark background
Press the RETURN key to return to the
11 using the non-original erasure method, rela-
Image adjustment mode menu Screen. tively infrequently, use the machine in its
present installation environment.
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
background fairly frequently, re-install the
1-69
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
machine in a dark location and facing a direc- [15] Recall standard data (Image adjust-
tion such that external light does not get into it, ment)
then carry out the installation survey once
Restoring image adjustment settings to standard val-
again.
ues (factory setting data).
<Error message2>
A datum with potentioal not to function non- Step Operation
image-area-erase is found. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 mode" col- [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
ums of the Service Hand book. 2
Press " 2 Image adjustment".
<Countermeasure2>
If you use the non-original erasure function rel- [Image adjustment mode menu
atively infrequently, you can use the machine 3 Screen]
in its present installation environment. Select " 8 Recall standard data".
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
background fairly frequently, re-install the [Recall standard data Screen]
machine in a dark location and facing a direc- Press the YES key.
4
tion such that external light does not get into it, Various data is restored to standard val-
then carry out the installation survey once ues.
again. In this case, if there is a bright light
source, such as a fluorescent light, directly Press the RETURN key to return to
above the machine, reconsider the installation 5 the Image adjustment mode menu
location and direction, or take steps to block off Screen.
the light from the light source (by using a cover,
for example), then carry out the installation
survey once again.
1-70
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[16] Running Test Mode [17] Test pattern output mode
Testing continuous copy operation. Output test pattern.
Select “ 3 Running test mode” in the Adjustment Select “ 4 Test pattern output mode” in the Adjust-
mode menu Screen. ment mode menu Screen to display the Test pattern
This adjustment consists of the following items: output mode screen.
1 Intermittent copy mode Caution: Do not touch any mode that is not spe-
In this mode, the machine goes into the copy cifically described.
ready state after completing a set number of Step Operation
copy operations, waits 0.5 sec, and then repeats
1 Enter the 36 mode.
the same operation.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2 Paperless running mode 2
Press " 4 Test pattern output mode".
In this mode, the machine goes into the copy
ready state after completing a set number of [Test pattern output mode Screen]
copy operations without performing paper detec- Use the numeric keys to enter the num-
tion or jam detection, waits 0.5 sec, and then 3 ber of the test pattern to output and press
repeats the same operation. the SET key.
3 Paperless mode
4 Press the COPY SCREEN key.
In this mode, the machine makes a set number
of copies at approximately the same timing as for [Copy Screen]
normal copy without performing paper detection 5 Select 11x17 size paper and press the
or jam detection. START button to output the test pattern.
4 Paperless endless mode To output another test pattern, press the
In this mode, the machine makes copies at 6 C button while pressing the P button and
approximately the same timing as for normal repeat steps 3 to 5.
copy without performing paper detection or jam 7 Press the RETURN key to end.
detection. The copy quantity is set to infinity
automatically.
5 Running mode
This mode consists of Paperless mode with
repetitive scanner scan and auto paper feed tray
change.
Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 3 Running test mode".
[Running test mode menu Screen]
3
Press mode keys 1 to 5 .
[Copy Screen]
4
Press the START button.
Check the copy operation and then
5
press the STOP button to stop.
6 Turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF.
1-71
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Check item
* The above density settings are typical values. See [18] "Test pattern density setting" for more
information on density setting.
Test patterns
1-72
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.2 Gradation pattern
Check item
If the test pattern is gray background or the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the
processing system or with γ correction. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being
normal, either the image processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.
Test patterns
1-73
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Check item
If the test pattern is abnormal, check whether the two lasers are emitting light normally.
Test patterns
1-74
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.5 Gradation pattern
Check item
If the test pattern is abnormal, check whether the two laser outputs are uniform.
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
1-75
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
Check item
If the test pattern is abnormal, check to see if position correction of the two laser beams is normal.
Test patterns
1-76
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern
Check item
Use this check pattern to determine whether the fault is with the scanner or the printer. The printer
horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt, and leading edge timing and etc, can be
checked. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality in the test pattern, the scanner is
at fault.
Test patterns
Edge of paper
31mm 237mm
Edge of paper
20mm
190mm
m
0m
28
206mm
28
0m
m
190mm
1-77
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
1. Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FS- 2. Folding stopper adjustment (FS-210 only)
210 only) Adjusting the folding position when stitch and
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold or folding mode.
fold mode. Step Operation
Step Operation 1 Enter the 36 mode.
1 Enter the 36 mode. [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
[Finisher adjustment mode menu
[Finisher adjustment mode menu 3 Screen]
3 Screen] Press " 2 Fold stopper adjustment".
Press " 1 Stitch and fold stopper adj.".
[Fold stopper adjustment Screen]
[Stitch and Fold stopper adj. Screen] 4
Press the COPY SCREEN key.
4
Press the COPY SCREEN key.
Set paper in the tray, set originals on
5
Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button.
5
RADF, and press the START button. Check the paper center and folding posi-
Check the paper center and stapling 6 tion.
6 position. Specification: ± 1mm
Specification: ± 1mm If the folding position is not within spec-
If the stapling position is not within spec- 7 ification, press the C button while press-
7 ification, press the C button while press- ing the P button.
ing the P button. [Fold stopper adjustment Screen]
[Stitch and Fold stopper adj. Screen] 8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to
8 Press the NEXT or BACK key to select a desired paper size.
select a desired paper size. Enter a value with numeric keys and
4
4 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the SET key.
press the SET key. Setting range: -128 to +127
Setting range: -128 to +127 9 1 step=0.1mm
9 1 step=0.1mm (in the case of the 7155/7165)
(in the case of the 7155/7165) 1 step = 0.15mm
1 step = 0.15mm (in the case of the 7255/7272)
(in the case of the 7255/7272) Repeat steps 4-9 until the folding posi-
10
Repeat steps 4-9 until the stapling posi- tion is within specification.
10
tion is within specification.
Press the RETURN key to return to
Press the RETURN key to return to 11 the Finisher adjustment mode menu
11 the Finisher adjustment mode menu Screen.
Screen.
1 ADJUSTMENT
(1) Punch vertical position adjustment (PK-120, (2) Punch horizontal position adjustment (PK-
PZ only) 110/120, PZ only)
Adjusting the punch vertical position. Adjusting the punch horizontal position.
Step Operation Step Operation
1 Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] [Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2 2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment". Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
[Finisher adjustment mode menu [Finisher adjustment mode menu
3 Screen] 3 Screen]
Press " 5 Punch adjustment". Press " 5 Punch adjustment".
Press the RETURN key to return to the Enter a value with numeric keys and
12
Punch adjustment menu Screen. press the SET key.
10
Setting range: -50 to +50
1 step=0.1mm
Repeat steps 5-9 until the punched posi-
11
tion is within the specification.
(3) Punch regist loop adjustment 5. 1st Z-folding position adjustment (PZ
Adjusting the registration loop amount for the only)
reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight Adjusting the positions at which the 1st Z-folding
exit) and cover sheet upper/lower. is performed.
Step Operation Step Operation
Enter the 36 mode. 1 Enter the 36 mode.
1
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
[Adjustment mode menu Screen] 2 Press "
6 Finisher adjustment".
2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment". [Finisher adjustment mode menu
4
Screen]
[Finisher adjustment mode menu
Press " 6 Z-folding position adjust-
3 Screen] 3 ment" in the case of the 7155/7165, and
Press " 5 Punch adjustment". press " 5 Z-folding position adjust-
ment" in the case of the 7255/7272.
4 [Punch adjustment mode Screen]
[Z-folding position adjustment menu
Press " 5 Punch regist loop adj." in the Screen]
4 case of the 7155/7165, and press 4
Press " 1 1st folding position adjust-
" 4 Punch regist loop adj." in the case ment".
of the 7255/7272. [1st Z-folding position adjustment
5 Screen]
Press " 1 Punch regist loop adj. (main Press the COPY SCREEN key.
5 body)" or " 2 Punch regist loop adj. Load papers in the tray, place the origi-
(PI)". 6 nal on RADF, and then press the START
button.
[Punch Regist Loop adj. Screen]
Check the 1st Z-folding position.
Press the NEXT or BACK key to
L1
6 select the item to be adjusted.
The screen changes as follows; Reverse
Paper eject → ADU Paper eject or Cover
sheet Upper → Cover sheet Lower.
7
7 Press the COPY SCREEN key. Specification
8 Press the START button to make a copy. 11 x 17 108
A3 105
Check the punch registration loop L1
9 8K 97
amount. (mm) B4 91
If the punch registration loop amount is 8.5 x 14 -
10 not appropriate, press the C button while If the 1st Z-folding position is not appro-
pressing the P button. 8 priate, press the C button while pressing
[Punch Regist Loop Adj. Screen] the P button.
Enter a value with numeric keys and [1st Z-folding position adjustment
Screen]
11 press the SET key. Enter a value with numeric keys and
Setting range: -20 to +20 9
press the SET key.
1 step=0.8mm Setting range: -128 to +127
Repeat steps 6-11 until the punch regis- 1 step=0.1mm
12 tration loop amount is within the specifi- Repeat steps 5-9 until the 1st Z-folding
cation. 10 position is appropriate.
Press the RETURN key to return to Press the RETURN key to return to
13 11 the Z-folding position adjustment menu
the Punch adjustment menu Screen.
Screen.
MODEL MANUAL REVISED EDITION DATE PAGE METHOD
7155/7165/7255/7272 SERVICE MANUAL 4 Dec. 2003 1-81-1 REPLACEMENT
36 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
6. 2nd Z-folding position adjustment (PZ Repeat steps 5-9 until the 2nd Z-folding
only) 10
position is appropriate.
Adjusting the positions at which the 2nd Z-folding
Press the RETURN key to return to
is performed.
11 the Z-folding position adjustment menu
Step Operation
Enter the 36 mode. Screen.
1
[Adjustment mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 6 Finisher adjustment".
4 [Finisher adjustment mode menu
Screen]
Press " 6 Z-folding position adjust-
3
ment" in the case of the 7155/7165, and
press " 5 Z-folding position adjust-
ment" in the case of the 7255/7272.
[Z-folding position adjustment menu
Screen]
4
Press " 2 2nd folding position adjust-
ment".
[2nd Z-folding position adjustment
5 Screen]
Press the COPY SCREEN key.
Load papers in the tray, place the origi-
6 nal on RADF, and then press the START
button.
Check the 2nd Z-folding position.
D
L2
7
Specification
L2 (mm) D (mm)
11 x 17 less than 215
A3 less than 209
35±1.5
8K less than 194
B4 less than 181
8.5 x 14 less than 261.6 -
If the 2nd Z-folding position is not appro-
8 priate, press the C button while pressing
the P button.
[2nd Z-folding position adjustment
Screen]
Enter a value with numeric keys and
9
press the SET key.
Setting range: -128 to +127
1 step=0.1mm
c A
a
6
A:120mm
b 6 (Standard)
1 ADJUSTMENT
[20] List Output Mode
Outputting various data.
1. Select " 7 List output mode" in the Adjustment
mode menu Screen to display the List output
mode menu Screen.
2. List output mode menu consists of the following:
1 Machine management list 1
2 Adjustment data list
3 Pixel ratio data list
4 Machine management list 2
5 Parameter list
6 Memory dump list
7 Font pattern
3. Press the number key corresponding to the item
to output.
The output setting screen for the selected item
appears.
4. After output completes, return to the List output
mode menu Screen.
5. Press the RETURN key in the List output
mode menu Screen to return to Adjustment
mode menu Screen.
47 MODE
[1] 47 Mode / Multi Mode Setting Method (4) Ending 47 mode
a. Press the stop button to cancel the operation.
1. 47 Mode
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions b. Turn off the main switch to exit the 47 mode.
(input/output check function) to check and adjust Step Operation
various signals and loads. Turn on the SW2 (sub power) while hold-
2. 47 mode operation 1 ing down 4 and 7 of the copy quantity
(1) Starting 47 mode button.
a. Turn off the SW2 (sub power). [I/O check Screen]
b. Turn the SW2 back on while holding down 4 and 2 Use the copy quantity button to enter the
7 of the copy quantity button. code.
c. Check that the 47 mode is started when message
Check the input signal check result dis-
"I/O check mode" appears in the first row of the
3 played after "IN:" in the second row of
message area.
the message area.
(2) Input/output check
a. Use the copy quantity button to enter the code To perform the output check, press the
4
(Refer to the I/O check code list.) for the desired Start button to check the output load.
signal sources (such as sensors). Press the Stop button to end output
b. The entered code appears enclosed in <> in the 5
check.
second row of the message area. To perform other checks, enter a new
c. The numbers are shifted left as they are dis- 6
code using the copy quantity button.
played.
Turn off the main switch to exit the 47
d. Check the status of the signal displayed as H or L 7
mode.
after "IN:" in the second row of the message dis-
play area. Note1: No data appears on the second row of
Caution: H and L indicate the level of the signal the message area when 47 mode is
input to PRCB (printer control board). entered. Message appears when a num-
Note the relationship between the sta- ber is entered.
tus of the input signal source and the
message display. Note2: Simply enter a new code to switch to
(3) Output check another code.
a. Use the copy quantity button to enter the code
(Refer to the I/O check code list.) for the desired Note3: A newly entered number is written over
output load. the previously entered number.
b. Press the Start button.
Depending on the output, a load will be activated
or a signal will be output.
Start button Code Description
Before pressing
Input Input signal level
indication
Output load opera-
After pressing Output
tion/signal
1-84
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
3. Multi mode Step Operation
This machine features Multi modes amongst the Enter the 47 mode.
1
47 Mode functions.
This enables multiple I/O checks using a single I/ [I/O check Screen]
O check code. 2 Use the copy quantity button and enter
the code.
4. Multi mode operation method
Start the 47 mode and proceed as follows: 3 Press the P button.
(1) To check the input Enter the multi number using the copy
a. Using the copy quantity button, enter the check 4
quantity button.
code for the desired I/O.
5 Press the P button.
b. The 47 mode code appears enclosed in <> in the
second row of the message area. Check the input signal check result dis-
c. Press the P button. 6 played after "IN:" in the second row of
d. Enter the desired multi number using the copy the message area.
quantity button. (Refer to the multi mode list.) To perform the output check, press the
7
e. The multi number will be displayed enclosed in Start button to check the output load.
<>, following the 47 mode code and "- ". Press the STOP button to end the output
8
check.
I/O check mode
< 10-01 > IN: -- OUT: -- Turn off the main switch to exit the 47
9
mode.
1-85
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[2] Adjustment Data Display (1) When the total capacity of the hard
Displaying a list of machine adjustment values disk is checked:
(factory-set values and current values). The total capacity of the hard disk is
No adjustment (data value change) can be made displayed after "OUT:" in the mes-
in this mode. sage display field.
Step Operation (2) When the remaining capacity of the
1 Enter the 47 mode. hard disk is checked:
The remaining capacity of the hard
[I/O check Screen]
disk is displayed after "OUT:" in the
Enter 94 with numeric keys.
2 message display field.
Make sure 94 is displayed in the mes-
sage display field. (3) When bad sectors on the hard disk
5 are checked and recovered:
3 Press the Start button.
"NOW" is displayed after "OUT:" in
[Adjustment data display Screen] the message display field and bad
4 Press the or button to display sector check and recovery start.
a desired adjustment item. Several minutes later, "OK" is dis-
played in the case of normal termi-
Press the End key to return to the I/ nation, "NG" is displayed in the case
5
O check mode screen. of abnormal termination.
When "NG" is displayed, retry bad
[3] Hard Disk Check sector check and recovery. If "NG"
This adjustment is to be performed when check- is displayed again, replace the hard
ing the total capacity and remaining capacity of disk.
the optional hard disk and when error codes Note1: Once the bad sector check and recov-
related to the hard disk occur. ery procedure start, it can not be can-
Step Operation celed. (The STOP button and mode
1 Enter the 47 mode. change key are ineffective.)
Note2: The hard disk is weak against vibration
2 Enter 99 with numeric keys.
and shock. When moving the copy
(1) Checking the total capacity of the machine, be sure to remove the hard
hard disk: Press the P button and disk in advance.
enter 1 with a numeric key. Make
sure 99-01 is displayed in the mes-
sage display field.
(2) Checking the remaining capacity of
the hard disk:
Press the P button and enter 2 with
3 a numeric key. Make sure 99-02 is
displayed in the message display
field.
(3) Checking and recovering bad sec-
tors on the hard disk:
Press the P button and enter 3 with
a numeric key. Make sure 99-03 is
displayed in the message display
field.
4 Press the START button.
1-86
47 MODE
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Input checklist
Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
001 TLD Remaining toner detection signal In Empty
002 VR301 ADF original size VR signal
0 to 255
Fixer upper roller temperature detection signal
Analog signal
003 TH1
004 Fixer upper roller temperature °C
005 Humidity sensor signal
006 Dmax MONI signal
007 Dmax signal 0 to 255
008 γ signal
009 Machine inside temperature signal
PS3 1 Tray 1 no paper detection signal
PS9 2 Tray 2 no paper detection signal
PS15 3 Tray 3 no paper detection signal
011
PS21 4 Tray 4 no paper detection signal
PS33 5 By-pass feed tray no paper detection signal
PS108 6 LCT no paper detection signal
PS4 1 Tray 1 remaining paper detection signal
PS10 2 Tray 2 remaining paper detection signal
PS16 3 Tray 3 remaining paper detection signal
PS22 4 Tray 4 remaining paper detection signal
012
PS102 5 LCT remaining paper detection signal 1
PS103 6 LCT remaining paper detection signal 2
ON OFF
PS104 7 LCT remaining paper detection signal 3
PS105 8 LCT remaining paper detection signal 4
4 PS5 1 Tray 1 paper size detection signal 1(7155/7165 only)
PS6 2 Tray 1 paper size detection signal 2(7155/7165 only)
PS11 3 Tray 2 paper size detection signal 1(7155/7165 only)
PS12 4 Tray 2 paper size detection signal 2(7155/7165 only)
Paper feed
Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
PS2 1 Tray 1 upper limit detection signal
PS8 2 Tray 2 upper limit detection signal
PS14 3 Tray 3 upper limit detection signal
- 4 -
016
PS34 5 By-pass feed tray upper limit detection signal
Paper feed
PS6 5
(in the case of the 7255/7272)
Tray 1 horizontal conveyance PS/L detection signal
PS5 6
(in the case of the 7255/7272)
022 PS106 1 LCT paper feed detection signal
PS43 1 Transfer paper leading edge detection signal
023 PS36 2 Loop detection signal
PS44 3 Second paper feed detection signal
PS30 1 Fixing exit detection signal
PS37 2 Main body paper exit detection signal
024
PS42 3 Paper reverse detection signal
PS46 4 Reversed paper exit detection signal
PS29 1 Vertical conveyance door open/close detection signal
PS39 2 Front door open/close detection signal (left front door)
Front door open/close detection signal (right front
PS38 3
door)
025 MS1 Open Close
4 Front door open/close detection SW signal
MS2
PS100 5 LCT top cover open/close detection signal
PS110 6 LCT jam access cover open/close detection signal
PS40 7 Toner supply door open/close detection signal
1 ADJUSTMENT
Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
030 PS61 1 Scanner home position detection signal
PS63 1 APS sensor 1 detection signal
PS64 2 APS sensor 2 detection signal
Scanner unit
060
PS301 7 Last original detection signal
PS302 8 Original setting detection signal
MS301 9 Cover open/close MS detection signal OFF ON
PS311 10 ADF open/close detection signal
PS307 11 Original skew detection signal/F ON OFF
PS308 12 Original skew detection signal/R
PS701 0 Sub tray paper exit detection signal OFF ON
PS702 1 Tray upper limit detection signal
ON OFF
PS703 2 Tray lower limit detection signal
PS704 3 FNS entrance detection signal OFF ON
PS705 4 Stacker entrance detection signal
ON OFF
PS706 5 Main tray paper exit detection signal
PS707 6 Stapler paper exit upper limit detection signal OFF ON
PS708 7 Alignment HP/U detection signal
PS709 8 Paper exit belt HP detection signal
PS713 9 Stapler rotation HP detection signal
PS711 10 Stapler movement HP detection signal
FS-110/ 076
210 PS712 11 Paper exit HP detection signal ON OFF
PS714 12 Clincher rotation HP detection signal
PS715 13 Counter reset HP detection signal
PS718 14 Shift HP detection signal
PS720 15 Stacker no paper detection signal
SW702 16 Staple/R SW detection signal
PS730 17 Stapler HP/R detection signal OFF ON
SW701 18 Cartridge/R detection signal
Other
M710 19 Clincher /R detection signal than Start
start
- 20 - - -
Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
PS732 21 Clincher HP/R detection signal OFF ON
PS719 22 Sub tray full detection signal
ON OFF
MS701 23 FNS interlock MS detection signal
SW704 24 Staple/F SW detection signal
PS731 25 Stapler HP/F detection signal OFF ON
SW703 26 Cartridge/F detection signal
Other
M715 27 Clincher /F detection signal than Start
start
- 28 - - -
FS-110/ M733 29 Clincher HP/F detection signal OFF ON
210 Other than
Controlled
M707 30 Paper exit motor lock detection signal controlled
speed
speed
Not
FNS 31 FNS connection signal Connected connected
PS722 32 Folding knife HP detection signal
ON OFF
PS723 33 Stopper HP detection signal
PS724 34 Alignment/L HP detection signal
PS725 35 Folding exit detection signal OFF ON
PS726 36 Folding passage detection signal
Other
PS729 37 Folding full detection signal than full Full
No With
PZ
speed
- 45 - - -
PS4 46 Punch shift HP ON OFF
PS2 47 2nd stopper HP
OFF ON
MS 48 Front door MS
PZ
than lock
- 58 - - -
Fold connecting detection- Not con-
- 59 nected
Connected
- 60 - - -
FS-110/
PS716 61 Gate HP detection signal ON OFF
210
1 ADJUSTMENT
Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
- 62 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 5) No With
PZ
connect Connect
- 80 -
- 81 - - -
- 82 -
PS801 83 Punch HP detection signal ON OFF
- 84 -
- -
- 85 -
PK
Paper Paper
91 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 4)
92 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 5)
PS803 93 Punch shift HP ON OFF
- 94 PK-120 detection
4 PS1 0 Sub-tray paper exit
PS2 1 Tray upper limit
PS3 2 Tray lower limit
PS4 3 FIN entrance passage
PS5 4 Stacker conveyance passage
PS6 5 Paper exit 1
PS7 6 Staple paper exit upper limit
FS-111
4 Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
PS20 16 Stacker no paper detection
- 17 -
- 18 -
- 19 -
OFF ON
- 20 -
- 21 -
- 22 -
- 23 -
- 24 -
- 25 -
- 26 -
- 27 - - -
- 28 -
- 29 -
- 30 -
FM1,2,3 31 Motor lock signal
Motor lock signal Orerat-
M1 32 Lock
ing
M7 33 Motor lock signal
- 34
- 35 - -
- 36
- 37 Folding unit No unit With unit
- 38 - -
- 39 PI-108 No unit With unit
FS-111
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 Display and
Classi- Multi
Code Symbol Name Signal Source
fication mode
H L
MS1 67 Interlock detection signal Open Close
- 68 -
- 69 -
- 70 -
- 71 -
- 72 -
- 73 -
- 74 -
- 75 -
M4 76 Punch motor error detection
MS2 76
MS 77 Front door MS
FS-111
PS5 78 Punch HP
PS3 79 1st foloding stopper HP - -
- 80 Paper edge PS (leading/trailing/side edge sensor 1)
- 81 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 2)
076 - 82 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 3)
- 83 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 4)
- 84 Paper edge PS (side edge sensor 5)
PS4 85 Punch shift HP
PS1 86 Passage
PS2 87 2nd foloding stopper HP
- 88 -
- 89 -
PS8 90 Exit
- 91 -
PS701 0 Conveyance paper detection signal No paper With paper
PS703 1 Tray upper limit detection signal ON OFF
SF-101
080 ON OFF
PS50 4 ADU pre-registration detection signal
PS47 5 ADU handle detection signal
PS41 6 ADU conveyance detection signal (7155/7165only)
MC4 1 Tray 1
MC6 2 Tray 2
022
MC8 3 Tray 3
MC10 4 Tray 4
MC102 5 LCT
Tray up motor /LCT UP/DOWN motor
M16 1 Tray 1
M17 2 Tray 2
M18 3 Tray 3
023 M19 4 Tray 4
5 LCT up
M100
6 LCT down
7 By-pass up
M20
8 By-pass down
025 MC1 Registration MC
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 Classi- Multi Cannot be set or
Code Symbol Name
fication mode changed in field
Loop roller motor
1 Loop motor H(470mm/s), forward
Loop motor L(7155/7165:320mm/s,
2
7255/7272:345mm/s), forward
3 Loop motor L(280mm/s), forward
Loop motor L(7155/7165:185mm/s,
026 M6 4
7255/7272:172.5mm/s), forward
Loop motor H(7155/7165:470mm/s,
5
7255/7272:402.7mm/s), backward
6 Loop motor L(320mm/s), backward(7155/7165 only)
Paper feed
0 7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s
032 M15
1 280mm/s
2 185mm/s(7155/7165 only)
034 *4 Shading correction
037 Write-securing shaft adjustment
038 LD alarm check
*Caution:When the START key is pressed, "Watch input?" YES and NO appears. When YES or
NO is selected for each code, the following operation is performed (7155/7165 only):
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 Classi- Multi Cannot be set or
fication Code Symbol mode Name changed in field
1 Original feed motor (forward)
M301 Original feed motor (backward)
2
3 Original conveyance motor (forward)
M302 Original conveyance motor (backward)
4
ADF
- 57
- 58 -
- 59 -
- 60 -
- 61 -
- 62 -
- 63 -
MC202 64 Conveyance MC /L
65 Tray up/down motor /L (move to the lower limit)
M202 Tray up/down motor /L (HP research)
66
SD202 67 Sheet feed SD /L
PI
- 68 -
- 69 -
- 70 -
- 71 -
M1/M6 72 Registration motor/Conveyance motor
M2 73 1st stopper motor
M3 74 2nd stopper motor
PZ
85
SD201 86 Sheet feed SD /U
M203 87 PI conveyance motor
Gate drive motor (HP search : sub tray direction) (FS-110/120
88
only)
Gate drive motor (switches the stacker direction) (FS-110/120
M712 89
only)
Gate drive motor (switches the main tray direction) (FS-110/
90
FNS
120 only)
M721 91 Sub-tray paper exit motor (FS-110/120 only)
92 Clincher rotation motor (HP search) (FS-110/120 only)
M704 Clincher rotation motor (skew shift) (FS-110/120 only)
93
94 Stapler rotation motor (HP search) (FS-110/120 only)
M706 Stapler rotation motor (skew shift) (FS-110/120 only)
95
SD706 96 Three folding SD (FS-110/120 only)
M4 97 Punch motor
FNS PZ
lowered.)
M702 4 Tray up/down motor (Lower limit is detected.)
5
6
7
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
Classi- Multi Cannot be set or
fication Code Symbol mode Name changed in field
1 Reverse gate SD
080 ADU lock SD
2
081 MC13 ADU conveyance MC
082 MC2 ADU conveyance MC
Second paper feed motor (in the case of the 7155/7165)
1 Second paper feed motor (345mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
083 M5 Second paper feed motor (280mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
2
3 Second paper feed motor (172.5mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
ADU reverse motor
1 Forward(7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s)
2 Forward(280mm/s)
3 Forward(7155/7165:185mm/s, 7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
Forward(600mm/s)
ADU
084 M9 4
5 Forward(700mm/s)
6 Backward(660mm/s)
7 Backward(7155/7165:577mm/s, 7255/7272:763mm/s)
8 Backward(7155/7165382mm/s, 7255/7272:619mm/s)
9 Backward(660mm/s) (7255/7272 only)
085 - - -
Reversed paper exit motor
1 Forward(7155/7165:320mm/s, 7255/7272:345mm/s)
2 Forward(280mm/s)
086 M8 3 Forward(7155/7165:185mm/s, 7255/7272:172.5mm/s)
4 Forward(600mm/s)
5 Forward(700mm/s)
6 Backward(660mm/s)
092 Process initial set (Prohibited in the field) ×
Adjustment process
093 -
094 Adjustment mode display mode
096 Finished process and shipment setting (Prohibited in the field) ×
097 DIMM capacity check for Electronics RDH
098 DIMM check for Electronics RDH
1 HDD total capacity check
099 HDD 2 HDD remaining capacity check
3 HDD bad sectors check and recovery
Blank page
1 ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
[1] Centring Adjustment 4 a. Adjustment method
Centre of paper
Screws
Screws 7272fs1052
Screws Screws
Screws
Screws
3
Center positioning
bracket
Right side
LT-402 LT-412 cover Screws
1-98
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4. Setting the LCT Rear Guide (LT-412 only)
Centre of paper
Rear guide
Screw
a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
1 Open the top cover.
Press SW100 (LT tray down switch) to
2
lower the up/down plate to the bottom.
Loosen two screws at the top of the rear
3
guide and one screw at the bottom.
Set paper on the up/down plate, align the
trailing edge of paper with the lower end
4
of the rear guide, then fasten the lower
screw.
Fasten the two upper screws temporarily
5 and move the up/down plate to the high-
est position.
Set paper on the up/down plate, align the
trailing edge of paper with the upper end
6
of the rear guide, then tighten the two
upper screws finally.
1-99
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[2] Skew adjustment (Main body) [3] Adjusting the LCT Paper Feed Roller
1. Tool Pressure (LT-412 only)
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Caution: This adjustment is required when no
2. Adjustment method paper feed occurs.
1. Tool
Screws • Screwdriver (Phillips)
Screws
2. Adjustment method
Screw Spring
Second paper
feed section
Piled plate
Mark
Step Operation
1 Open the top cover.
Step Operation
Make a copy to measure for skew. 2 Remove the spring.
1
Loosen the five screws securing the sec- Install a weight plate above the paper
2 3
ond paper feed unit. feed rollers using the two screws.
Rock the second paper feed unit to Make a copy to check whether paper is
3 4
adjust using the mark as a guide. fed properly.
Retighten the five screws. If paper is not fed properly, add another
4 5
weight plate and repeat steps 5 and 6.
Make adjustments by repeating steps 2
to 4 until the skew becomes within the 6 Install the spring.
5
specified range.
Caution: Four weight plates come standard
with the LCT, and can be installed up
Specified range:Paper skew ±5% or less to six.
(Paper skew in the paper
feed direction)
1-100
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[4] Paper up/down plate horizontal a. Adjustment method
adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 only) Step Operation
Caution: Up/down plate horizontal adjustment 1 Raise the up/down plate.
must be carried out when a paper feed 2 Open the top cover.
jam occurs frequently or after replace- Remove five screws to detach the side
ment of the up/down wires of a tray. cover (right).
1. Tool
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
2. LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment of LT- Screws
402
Screws
3
Side cover
Adjusting (right) Screws
screws
Open the jam access door, then remove
six screws to detach the front cover.
Up/down pulley
4
1-101
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Up/down plate
5
Screws
Up/down plate
6
a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
1 Lift the up/down plate up.
Screws Open the top cover.
2
Loosen the two screws and adjust the
Screws
Screws Rear cover position using an adjustment screw and
3 the mark so that the front and rear of the
Loosen two screws and adjust the posi- up/down plate are at same height.
tion for each up/down pulley using an
7 adjustment screw so that the front and 4 Fasten two screws securely
rear of the up/down plate are at the same
height.
Fasten two screws securely for each up/
8
down pulley to fix its position.
Install the rear cover, clutch replacement
9
cover, front cover, and side cover (right).
1-102
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[5] Skew adjustment (LT-402/LT-412 b. Adjustment method (when some printed sheets
only) are skewed irregularly)
Step Operation
Caution: Skew adjustment is required when the
paper supplied from the current tray is Print a test pattern (No.16) in the contin-
1
different from the paper supplied from uous copy mode to check for skew.
other trays in the way it is skewed. 2 Remove the side cover (right).
However, this adjustment has little Loosen the five screws securing the
effect because skew of paper supplied guide plates (front and rear) and the cen-
from all trays is corrected in the sec- tering positioning bracket temporarily.
ond paper feed unit. Press the guide plates (front and rear)
1. Tool against paper, then tighten the five
• Screwdriver (Phillips) screws.
2. LCT skew adjustment
a. Adjustment method (when all printed sheets are Guide plate (front) Guide plate (rear)
skewed)
Step Operation
Print a test pattern (No.16) in the contin-
1
uous copy mode to check for skew. Screws
Screws
Open the jam access door of the LCT
and adjust the installation position of the
positioning bracket on the bottom plate.
3
Positioning
bracket
Screws
LT-402 LT-412
Centering Centering
positioning bracket positioning bracket
1-103
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[6] Tray spring pressure adjustment Change the spring hooking position at
the bottom of paper feed unit.
Caution: Tray spring pressure adjustment must
Weak: Double feed is prevented.
be performed when no feed or double
Strong: No feed is prevented.
feed of paper occurs. Tray spring
Reference: Reference: The spring load
pressure may be affected by the type
changes about 10% each
of paper used or the operating envi-
time the spring is hooked in
ronment (under low temperature con-
the next slit.
ditions, no feed of paper tends to
occur. Under high temperature condi-
tions, double feed of paper tends to 3
occur). Excessive adjustment of tray
spring pressure may exacerbate the Spring
problem. Take care.
1. Tool
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Weak
2 Screw
Spring
Weak
Spring Strong
mounting hole
a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
1 Remove the by-pass tray.
Remove two screws and detach the bot-
2
tom plate assembly.
1-104
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Change the spring hooking position. 5. PI spring pressure adjustment
Weak: Double feed is prevented.
Strong: No feed is prevented.
Weak (standard) Strong
3 Reference: The spring load changes
about 15% each time the
spring is hooked in the next
slit.
4 Install the by-pass tray.
Spring
Strong
Weak
a. Adjustment method
Step Operation
Remove the following parts.
a. Adjustment method
• Top cover
Step Operation 1
• Paper feed roller unit
1 Remove the LCT from the main body. • Double feed prevention roller
Change the spring hooking position. When adjusting the spring pressure for
Weak: Double feed is prevented. the lower tray, open the upper unit and
Strong: No feed is prevented. 2 detach the following parts.
2 Reference: The spring load changes • Paper feed roller unit
about 10% each time the • Double feed prevention roller
spring is hooked in the next Using flat-nose pliers, change the spring
slit. hooking position through the hole at dou-
3 Re-install the LCT. ble feed prevention roller.
Weak: Double feed is prevented.
Strong: No feed is prevented.
Reference: Normally the spring hook-
3
ing position should be
changed when no feed
occurs. However, if the set-
ting for this position is too
strong, double feed may
occur for normal paper.
Install the parts, following the removal
4
steps in reverse.
1-105
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed
roller unit
Screws
Remove two stop rings to slide the two
bearings outward, then remove the
paper feed roller unit.
Paper feed roller unit
Bearing
Bearing
1-106
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
<When the heights are not within speci- [8] Pick-up release amount adjustment
fications> (LT-402/LT-412 only)
Adjust the position of the sensor mount-
Caution: Pick-up release amount adjustment
ing bracket vertically so that the distance
must be performed when a no-feed
between the top surfaces of the paper
jam occurs frequently. To perform this
feed guide and paper up/down plate is
adjustment, adjust the mounting posi-
within the specifications.
tion of the pick-up solenoid.
1. Tool
When raising the height of the paper up/
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
down plate:
• Scale
Lower the sensor mounting bracket.
2. LCT pick-up release amount adjustment
7
When lowering the height of the paper Up/down plate paper feed roller
up/down plate:
Raise the sensor mounting bracket.
1-107
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Top cover
Spring
Paper feed
roller unit
Step Operation
Open the RADF, remove two screws and
Pull the moving parts of the pick-up sole- 1
detach the top cover (left).
noid and check whether the distance
between the bottom surface of the paper 2 Close the RADF.
feed roller and the top surface of the up/ Check if both stopper pieces on the
5 RADF side touch the slit glass.
down plate is within specification.
Specification: 0.5 to 2.5mm
If the distance is out of spec, perform
steps 5 and later.
Loosen one screw and adjust the mount-
ing position for the pick-up solenoid. Stopper piece Stopper piece
6
Caution: Take a note to remember the 3
initial mounting position. Screws
Secure the pick-up solenoid by tighten-
7
ing the screw.
8 Install the spring.
9 Install the paper feed pick-up cover/B.
Top cover (left)
10 Close the top cover.
1-108
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
[10]
Registration
roller bracket
Step Operation
Make a copy in the single sided to single
sided copy mode, then check the skew
of the original. (Either pattern A or B)
Image
1
Copypaper
feed direction
Copy paper
Paper skew pattern A Paper skew pattern B
1 ADJUSTMENT
Move the registration roller bracket one 2. Back side of original paper skew adjustment
calibration in the direction below accord-
Jam access cover
ing to the paper skew pattern.
For skew in pattern A:
Move the registration roller bracket
4 downwards (direction down with orig-
inal feed flow).
For skew in pattern B:
Move the registration roller bracket
upwards (direction up towards original
feed flow).
R range adjustment plate
Repeat steps 2 to 4 unitl the original
5 skew is within specified range (0.5% or Screw
less).
Left side
1
Copypaper
feed direction
Copy paper
Paper skew pattern A Paper skew pattern B
1-111
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4
[12] FNS Adjusting the magnets on the by- b. Adjustment
pass conveyance guide plate Step Operation
(FS-110/210) Loosen the two screws securing the
1
1. Tool magnet.
• Screwdriver (Phillips) Adjust the by-pass conveyance guide
2. Adjustment method plate to the direction indicated by the
a. Preparation 2
arrow, and press it against the convey-
Step Operation ance guide plate /L.
1 Open the front door. Adhere the magnets to the front panel
When the magnet on the by-pass con- and retighten the magnet securing
veyance guide plate is stuck to the front screws.
panel, check whether the stopping piece By-pass conveyance guide plate
of the plate makes contact with the con-
veyance guide plate /L.
By-pass conveyance guide plate
Conveyance guide plate /L Magnet
Front panel
Magnet
3
Screws
Cushioning
rubber
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [13] FNS adjusting the by-pass gate Step Operation
(FS-110/210) When the by-pass gate (SD705) is OFF,
1. Tool check the gap between the by-pass gate
• Screwdriver (Phillips) and the by-pass conveyance plate is
• Scale within the standard value.
2. Adjustment method Specifications: A=3.2±0.5mm
a. Preparation By-pass gate
Step Operation
1 Open the front door.
2 Draw out the stacker unit.
Remove the 2 screws securing the rail 5
stopper, and pull out the stacker unit
even further. By-pass
mm conveyance plate
Caution: To prevent the finisher from 0.5
3.2
toppling over, place a board or A=
the like to support the pulled-
out unit.
By-pass gate
Stacker unit
Rail stopper
securing screw
Board to prevent the Finisher
from toppling over
2 4
Mark
FNS control board
(FNS CB)
Screw
Remove five screws and detach the FNS
control board (FNS CB) together with its By-pass gate SD (SD705)
bracket.
Reinstall the parts in the opposite
Screws 5
sequence to removal.
Bracket
FNS CB
(FNS control
board)
1-114
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [14] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position b. Adjustment
(FS-110/210) Step Operation
1. Tool Loosen the screw fastening the bracket
• Screwdriver (Phillips) for the roller shift HP PS (PS718), and
2. Adjustment method shift the bracket to adjust the amount of
a. Preparation discrepancy using the mark as a guide.
Step Operation
Remove the following parts.
1 • Top cover or option PI (if installed)
Shift HP PS (PS718)
• Top cover /2 Bracket
Power on the main body and drive the
2 roller shift (M702) using the 47 mode 1
(code 75-2/75-3).
At the both HP (home position) and shift
position, check whether the edge of the
actuator for the slide gear fits into the
notched hole of the slide stay.
Mark
Actuator Screw
Notch
Slide gear
When the position is confirmed, fasten
3 2
the screw securing the bracket.
Reassemble in the opposite sequence
3
to removal.
Slide stay
Shift unit
4
[15] FNS Adjusting the paper exit sole- b. Adjustment
noid Step Operation
(FS-110/210) Remove two screws securing the sole-
1. Tool noid bracket and remove the solenoid
• Screwdriver (Phillips) together with the bracket.
• Scale
2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation Screws
Step Operation
Remove the following parts.
1
• Top cover /1 or option PI (if installed)
1
• Top cover /2
• Rear cover
Power on the main body, and turn on the
2 paper exit solenoid (SD704) using the 47
mode (code 75-31).
With the paper exit solenoid (SD704) Solenoid bracket
ON, check whether the gap between the
plunger of solenoid and the stopper of Loosen the 2 screws holding the sole-
the bracket is within the spec value. noid, move the solenoid to adjust its
Spec value: A=6.5±0.5mm position, and retighten the screws.
Spec value:A=6.5±0.5mm
Paper exit nip SD Paper exit SD
(SD704)
(PS704)
3
A=6.5 0.5mm
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation 4 [16] FNS Adjusting the mount location of
Place the solenoid to its original position, the paper exit arm (FS-110/210)
and tighten the screw securing the sole- 1. Tool
noid bracket at the position where the • Screwdriver (Phillips)
paper exit guide makes contact with the 2. Adjustment method
cushioning rubber of the paper exit guide a. Preparation
stay. Step Operation
Caution: Make sure that the difference Open the front door and pull out the
1
in height between the paper stacker unit.
exit guide and the paper exit When aligning the actuator edge of the
guide stay is 1mm and belt detection gear with the notch of
greater. panel /rear, check whether the top sur-
Solenoid bracket face of paper exit belt arm is positioned
Screws
in the middle of the two marks.
3
Stopping
rubber Paper exit
guide stay
Notch of panel /rear
Actuator edge
Belt detection gear
1mm
Marks
Screw
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [18] FNS Adjusting the mount location of
4 Check whether the distances A for the the alignment plates / L (FS-210)
alignment plate /U are within specifica- 1. Tool
tion. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
+0 • Scale
Spec values: A=340.6 mm (within) 2. Adjustment method
- 1.5
A=340.6 0 mm a. Preparation
1.5
Step Operation
Make sure that "Adjusting the mount
Rear panel
4 1 location of the alignment plates / U" is
finished.
Power on the main body, drive the
motor(s) using the following codes in the
47 mode, and then power the machine
off.
Alignment HP /U • Code 75-8: Alignment /U (M705) HP
2
(PS708) search
Alignment plate /U 7272fs1048 • Code 75-21: Alignment /L (M716) HP
search
If they are out of spec, perform the fol- • Code 75-40: Stopper (M718) position-
5
lowing adjustment: ing shift (larger than 8.5x11R)
b. Adjustment Open the front door and pull out the
3
stacker unit.
Step Operation
After loosening two screws to position 4 Take off the stapler unit cover.
the rear side of the alignment plate /U to Check whether the actuators for the
the center of marking lines, adjust the alignment HP/ U (PS705) and the align-
location of its front side so that the ment HP/ L (PS724) are aligned with the
mounting location is within specification. home position.
Alignment plate /U
Screw
Screw
5
1
Alignment plate /L
Alignment HP PS/L
(PS724)
Alignment
plate /U
rear
Screw
+0
A=340.6 - 0.5 mm
Alignment plate /L
Parallel
1
Screw
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [20] FNS Adjusting the stapler vertical
Step Operation positioning (FS-110/210)
Open the front door and pull out the Caution: Do not use hands to move stapler unit
1
stacker unit. to horizontal direction.
2 Take off the stapler unit cover. (Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth
Loosen the adjustment screws for the skipping may occur.)
clincher /F and Clincher /R and perform 1. Tool
adjustment using marks as a guide. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
• Jig
2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Execute stapling and check for buckled
staple-needles or clinching failure.
Buckled
1 stapling
Clincher /R
Floating L
stapling L=1mm or less
Clincher /F Clincher /R
Mark
When any defect described above can
2 be seen, perform the following adjust-
Mark Adjustment screw
ment:
Execute stapling to confirm that the sta- b. Adjustment
4
pling is within the specification range.
Step Operation
Open the front door and pull out the
1
stacker unit.
2 Take off the stapler unit cover.
Cartridge
1 2 Staple sheet
3 5
Clincher /R
Clincher /F
Cover
Screws Screws
Jig
Cover
Hook
4 Cartridge
1
2 Plate
6
Hook holes
Hole Clincher
Jig
Guide pin
1-122
OTHER ADJUSTMENT
1 ADJUSTMENT
Step Operation [21] FNS Adjusting the stapling position
Rotate the stapler gears downward. (stitch-and-fold) (FS-210)
Adjust the clincher position so that the Caution: Do not use hands to move stapler unit
plate on the cartridge fits smoothly into to horizontal direction.
the groove on the jig. Rotate the stapler (Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth
gear further to fit the plate in the groove skipping may occur.)
in the jig and the jig in the clincher unit 1. Tool
completely. • Screwdriver (Phillips)
2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Execute stapling and check whether the
paper edge is parallel to the virtual line
connecting the two staples or whether
the amount of discrepancy is within
specification.
Spec value: within 1mm for the
7 amount of discrepancy
Gear
Staple
1
Groove
Plate
Parallel Within
1mm
Stapler
A= within 1mm
1
Mark Screws
4
Upper edge
Mark
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment [23] FNS Adjusting the folding force
Step Operation (FS-210)
Open the front door and pull out the 1. Tool
1
stacker unit. • Flat-nose pliers
2 Take off the stapler unit cover. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Loosen the five screws securing the fold-
ing stopper and adjust it using the mark Step Operation
as a guide. If necessary, change the force and pres-
1
sure of the folding rollers.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
1 Remove the rear cover.
3 Open the front cover and pull out the
2 stacker unit.
3 Remove the stacker unit cover.
4
Change the mounting places of the two
Do not pressure springs for each of the front
Screws Loosen and rear.
screw
Folding Caution: The four pressure springs
Mark
stopper should be hooked on the hole
with the same character.
C
B
4 A
C C
B B
A A
Rear view
7272fs1049
c
a
2
4
Folding Reference value Specifi-
positions A4R 8.5x11 cation
a 95 89 ±1
b 101 95 ±1
c 101 95 ±1
Unit:mm
If the three-holding positions are out of
3
spec, perform the following adjustment:
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment [25] PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole
Step Operation position (PK-110)
Power on the main body. Use "7: Three- 1. Tool
hold positions adjustment" from "6: Fin- • Screwdriver (Phillips)
1 isher adjustment" on the 36 Mode, • Scale
adjust the first folded line (reference 2. Adjustment method
value a), and perform three-holding. a. Preparation
4 When the first folded line becomes Step Operation
2 within the spec value, open the front Check the following items:
door and pull out the stacker unit. • The finisher is connected to the main
Open the three-holding guide plate, body.
1
loosen the two screws securing the • The main body is loaded with the
three-holding stoppers, and adjust the paper based on the punch specifica-
stopper positions using the mark as a tions.
guide. Check the skew of output paper in
advance.
• Slide the side guide plate and the rear
guide plate for the main body's feed
2
tray, and align the paper loaded on the
3
main body's tray.
Marks • Check the skew by using the platen
copy or adjustment mode.
To check the tilt of the punch hole posi-
3 tion, make a sample copy in the punch
Screw mode.
Three-folding stopper Make three copies each in single side
Screw Three-folding
guide plate 4 copy mode and double side copy mode
with the punch mode to check the skew.
After the adjustment, retighten the two
screws and execute three-holding to
4
check that the three-holding positions
are within the specification.
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment Step Operation
Step Operation Loosen the four adjustment screws of
4
Measure the position of the sampled PK.
punch holes to check the tilt of the posi- Using the mark scale as a guide, move
tion. the punch unit horizontally by the
A amount of tilt for the punch hole position.
1 scale: 0.5%
Adjustment screws
Adjust to the left or right
C
1
5
Screw
Adjustment screws
1 ADJUSTMENT
[26-1] Sensitivity adjustment for the PK Step Operation
paper edge sensor (PK-120) Turn the volume fully clockwise and then
1. Tool turn it back counterclockwise until the
• Screwdriver (Phillips) LED corresponding to each volume
• Clock driver (Phillips) lights up.
2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Step Operation Volumes
Check that the finisher is connected to
1
the main body.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
1 Open the front door of the finisher.
Remove the punch drive board cover by 4
removing one screw.
Punch drive board cover Punch drive board (PKDB)
LED
Power on the main body. Power off the main body after complet-
3 6
ing the adjustment.
7 Reinstall the punch drive board cover.
8 Close the front door of the finisher.
1. Tool
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
Loosen two adjustment screws securing
• Scale
the side guide plate (rear), and slide it by
2. Adjustment method
the twice the difference. (ie: If there is
a. Preparation
1.5mm difference in direction of rear
Step Operation side, slide by 3mm to rear side.)
Check that PK adjusting the punch hole 1 scale : 2mm
1
vertical position has been completed.
Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjust- Side guide plate (rear)
2 3
ment.
Feed the three sheets from PI with the
3
punch mode.
Check the position of each punch hole
4 Adjustment
on the three sheets. screws
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Fasten the two adjustment screws
Release the hook and remove the 4
securely to fix the side guide plate (rear).
adjustment cover of the side guide plate
In case of the lower tray, install the side
(rear). 5
guide plate (rear).
Adjustment cover
Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side
guide plate (rear) to the sheet to check
6
that the side guide plate (rear) is parallel
1 to the sheet.
Feed the three sheets from PI with the
7
punch mode.
Hook Check the position of each punch hole.
Side guide plate 8
(rear)
Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of
9
the holes is improved.
Install the adjustment cover to the side
10
guide plate (rear).
Set 8.5x11R size paper to the tray and
11 perform the cover sheet tray size adjust-
ment in 36 mode.
1 ADJUSTMENT
[27-1] Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK Step Operation
punch is used) (PK-110) Using the mark as a guide, move the
1. Tool guide plate laterally by the amount of tilt
• Screwdriver (Phillips) in the position of punch holes.
• Scale
2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Check the following items:
1 • PI is connected to FNS.
• The tray of PI is loaded with paper.
Check the tilt of output paper in advance.
• Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch 4
2
mode selected to check the tilt of
punch holes. Screw securing
the guide plate
Loosen one screw securing the guide
3
plate.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as Tilting toward Tilting toward
the right edge the left edge
illustrated below and find out in which of the sheet of the sheet
1 ADJUSTMENT
[28] FNS Stapler Driver Belt Position Step Operation
Adjustment (FS-110/210) Move the stapler/clincher to the center at
CAUTION: Stapler drive belt position adjust- the same time until it stops at the bear-
ment is only performed when the ing.
positions of drive belt and gear are 2 Caution: Make sure to move them at
misaligned when following other the same time, otherwise, the
adjustment procedures. flat-stapling stopper may frac-
1. Tool ture at the stapler plate.
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
Install the stapler PS jig to the stapler
• Stapler PS jig
and clincher/R, and adjust the horizontal
• Hexagonal wrench
position of the stapler and the clincher.
2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Step Operation
Groove
Remove the following parts:
1 • Rear cover Plate
• Stapler unit cover
2 Insert the stacker unit.
b. Adjustment
Step Operation 3
Loosen two M3 screws of the staple slide
pulley/B from the backside.
Stapler
4
[29] Adjusting the PZ Paper-Path Switch- Step Operation
ing Solenoid (PZ) Open the front door of FNS, remove the
1. Tool 1 front cover of PZ (three screws), and
• Screwdriver (Phillips) remove PZ from the main body.
2. Adjustment method Remove the AC cord and the rear cover
2
(four screws).
Pull out the z-folding/conveyance unit.
Remove the two screws from the rail and
further draw out the unit.
Screws
Front cover
Z-folding/conveyance unit 7272fs1002
mm
4
noid bracket.
Make sure that the gate solenoid/L
(SD1) is OFF, and adjust the position of
the solenoid bracket so that the gap
OFF 5 between the gate tip and the registration
guide plate is within the specification
Screw (for bracket)
Registration guide plate
range. Fasten the two screws.
Spec range: 3 to 5mm (viewing)
Gate SD/L (SD1) ON Loosen two screws securing the sole-
6
noid.
Screws (for solenoid)
ss
or le
mm
B=2
ON
7272fs1001
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [30] Adjusting the Tension of the PZ
Step Operation
Punch Shift Timing Belt (PZ)
Make sure that the gate solenoid/L
(SD1) is ON, and adjust the position of 1. Tool
the solenoid bracket so that the gap • Screwdriver (Phillips)
between the gate tip and the registration • Tension gauge or spring balance
guide plate is within the specification 2. Adjustment method
7
range. Fasten the two screws.
Spec range: 2 to 4.6mm
* The plunger must operate smoothly
when the solenoid is turned ON or OFF.
Reassemble in the opposite sequence
to removal.
8 A=4 0.4kg
Plate Screw
Punch shift motor (M5)
Punch shift timing belt
7272fs1004
Step Operation
1 Remove the PZ from the main body.
Remove the four screws to remove the
2 rear cover.
Rail
Loosen the two screws holding the
3 punch shift motor (M5).
7272fs1003
Use a tension gauge or a spring balance
to measure the tension at the A point.
When a specification value is observed,
tighten the screws.
4 Spec value: A = 4 ± 0.4kg
Note: The tension must be measured at
the root of the motor shaft. Oth-
erwise, the measuring operation
may cause the shaft to bend.
Reinstall the rear cover using four
5 screws.
4
[31] Adjusting the PZ 1st Folding Skew
Step Operation
(PZ)
Pull out the z-folding/conveyance unit.
1. Tool Remove two screws from the rail and fur-
• Screwdriver (Phillips) ther draw out the conveyance unit.
2. Adjustment method
Screws
Screw
Left Ticks Supporting point
Z-folding/conveyance unit 7272fs1007
Step Operation
5
1 Set 11x17 paper into the tray.
Set the original chart and make a copy of
it. Check the copy for a possible folding
skew.
Spec range: within 0.5mm Z-folding/conveyance unit Screws
7272fs1008
1st folding
0.5mm or less 0.5mm or less Loosen four screws securing the 1st
6
folding stopper assembly.
2 Make adjustments by moving the 1st
stopper assembly right or left using the
ticks for reference.
Skew pattern A Skew pattern B
7 Skew pattern A:Move the 1st stopper
7272fs1006
assembly to the left.
Skew pattern B:Move the 1st stopper
If the folding skew is outside the spec
assembly to the right.
range, adjust according to the instruc-
tions described in the following steps. Temporarily tighten four screws hold-ing
the 1st stopper assembly, and put the
3 Open the front door of the FNS.
8 conveyance unit into the basis position.
Make a copy of the adjustment chart to
check for 1st folding skew.
Repeat Steps 6 to 8 until the 1st folding
9 skew falls within the spec range (0.5mm
or less).
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [32] Adjusting the Position of the PZ 2nd
Step Operation
Folding Stopper (PZ)
Tighten firmly four screws on the 1st
10 Caution: This adjustment affects the 2nd fold-
stopper assembly.
ing skew. Therefore, first complete
Reassemble in the opposite sequence
this adjustment and then proceed to
to removal.
the [39] Adjusting the PZ 2nd Folding
Caution: The conveyance unit must be Skew section.
inserted so that the plate on 1. Tool
the conveyance unit (see the • Screwdriver (Phillips)
figure below) is positioned in • Hex wrench
side the rail on the enclosure. 2. Adjustment method
Pulley Pulley
11
Plate
Shaft
2nd folding
stopper 2nd folding
stopper
Rail
7272fs1009
Guide
plate
Paper stopper
Screw Screw
7272fs1011
Step Operation
1 Set A3 paper into the tray.
Set the original chart and make a copy of
it. Check the copy for a possible 2nd fold-
ing skew.
Spec range: within 2mm
2
2mm or less 2mm or less
Skew pattern A Skew pattern B
7272fs1012
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [34] FNS Adjusting the Magnets on Con-
Step Operation
veyance Guide Plate B (FS-111)
Loosen the four screws holding the 2nd
4 1. Tool
stopper assembly.
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
Make adjustments by moving the front or 2. Adjustment method
rear side of the 2nd stopper assembly a. Preparation
upward using the ticks for reference.
Step Operation
5 Skew pattern A: Move the rear side of
the 2nd stopper assembly upward. 1 Open the front cover.
Skew pattern B: Move the front side of Check whether conveyance guide plate
the 2nd stopper assembly upward. B makes contact with the cushioning
2
Temporarily tighten the four screws hold rubber when the magnets are stuck to
ing the 2nd stopper assembly, and put conveyance guide plate A.
6 the conveyance unit into the basis posi- If conveyance guide plate B does not
tion. Make a copy of the adjustment make contact with the cushioning rub-
3
chart to check for 2nd folding skew. ber, remove the rear cover and carry out
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 above until the 2nd adjustment as described below.
7 folding skew falls within the spec range
b. Adjustment
(2mm or less).
Step Operation
Tighten firmly the four screws on the 2nd
8 Detach all FNS CB (FNS control board)
stopper assembly. 1
connectors.
Remove the 2 set screws holding the
FNS CB in place. Remove the FNS CB
together with its bracket.
FNS CB (Finisher Control Board)
Bracket
Screws 7272fs1015
Screws 7272fs1017
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [36] FNS Adjusting the Sub-tray Paper
Step Operation
Exit Gate (FS-111)
Adhere the magnets to conveyance
guide plate A and retighten the screws. 1. Tool
• Screwdriver (Phillips)
Magnet • Scale
(rear) 2. Adjustment method
Magnet
(front) a. Preparation
Step Operation
4 Remove the 2 set screws holding the
FNS CB (FNS control board) in place.
Remove the FNS CB together with its
bracket.
FNS CB (Finisher Control Board)
Conveyance Bracket
Conveyance
Guide Plate D
Guide Plate C 7272fs1018
Screws 7272fs1019
7272fs1021
Screws
Solenoid 7272fs1022
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Step Operation
Remove the wirings from the clamps,
Loosen the 2 set screws holding the
and move the FNS CB together with its
solenoid in place, and move the solenoid
bracket.
Clamps
as necessary to adjust.
Clamps Clamps
Screws
3 1
With SD1 (gate) ON, measure the dis- 2 Retighten the screws.
tance between the long gate and the
Reassemble in the opposite sequence
guide plate, indicated by A in the illustra- 3
4 to removal.
tion.
Spec value for distance:
A = 7.6±0.5mm.
Again with SD1 ON, measure the gap
between the solenoid plunger and the
bracket stopper (indicated by B in the
illustration).
Spec value for gap: B = 5±0.5mm.
Gate
Guide
Plate
5
SD1
(Gate)
7272fs1025
4
[38] FNS Adjusting the By-pass Gate
Step Operation
(FS-111)
Remove the wirings from the clamps,
1. Tool and move the FNS CB together with its
• Screwdriver (Phillips) bracket.
• Scale
Clamps Clamps
2. Adjustment method Clamps
a. Preparation
Step Operation
1 Remove the rear cover.
4
Open the front cover and the guide plate.
Guide Plate
2 Clamps
Clamp Clamps
7272fs1029
Screws 7272fs1028
7272fs1030
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [39] FNS Adjusting the Shift Position
Step Operation (FS-111)
Loosen the 2 set screws holding the 1. Tool
solenoid in place, and move the solenoid • Screwdriver (Phillips)
as necessary to adjust. 2. Adjustment method
Solenoid a. Preparation
Step Operation
Remove the following parts.
1 • Rear cover
1 • Top cover
2 Switch the power OFF to ON to OFF.
With the M2 (roller shift) OFF (home
position), check that the actuator on
PS18 (roller shift HP) is correctly aligned
with the cutout on the shift-unit mounting
Screws
7272fs1031
plate.
Actuator
2 Retighten the screws.
Reassemble in the opposite sequence
3
to removal.
3
Bracket 7272fs1033
Bracket 7272fs1033
1 ADJUSTMENT
b. Adjustment 4 [41] FNS Adjusting the Paper Exit-Open-
Step Operation ing Solenoid (FS-111)
Loosen the set screw holding the PS12 1. Tool
(paper exit-opening detector) bracket in • Screwdriver (Phillips)
place, and adjust the bracket position as • Scale
necessary. 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation
Bracket
Step Operation
Remove the following parts.
1 • Rear cover
1
• Top cover
With SD4 (paper exit-opening solenoid)
ON, measure the gap between the sole-
noid plunger and the bracket stopper.
Spec value for gap: A = 6.0 ±0.5mm
Screw
SD4 (Exit Opening)
7272fs1035
7272fs1036
Screws 7272fs1038
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [43] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of
Step Operation
the Paper Exit Arm (FS-111)
Hold down the paper exit-opening lower
guide plate with your hand so that the 1. Tool
paper exit roller makes contact, and • Screwdriver (Phillips)
check that the remaining stroke for sole- 2. Adjustment method
noid SD4 (distance B) is within spec. a. Preparation
Spec value: B = 2.5±0.5mm Step Operation
PRemove the screw to remove the belt
B=2.5 0.5mm 1
detection gear.
SD4 (Paper
Exit Opening) When the stacker paper exit arm is at the
position shown below, secure the belt
3 detection gear with a screw with the
actuator end face of the belt detection
gear aligned with the bottom of the
square hole.
Paper Exit
Lower Actuator end face Screw
Guide Plate
7272fs1040
b. Adjustment
Step Operation
Loosen the 2 set screws holding the
solenoid bracket in place, and adjust the
position of the bracket so that distances
A and B are within spec.
Stacker paper exit arm
7272fs1042
Solenoid Bracket
Screws 7272fs1041
4
[44] FNS Adjusting the Mount Location of b. Adjustment
the Upper Alignment Plates (FS-111) Step Operation
1. Tool Move the upper alignment plates into
• Screwdriver (Phillips) home position. (Move so that the actua-
• Scale tor on the upper-alignment-plate drive
2. Adjustment method belt is at PS8 (upper-alignment-plate
a. Preparation HP).
Step Operation PS8 (Upper Alignment Plate HP)
Open the front cover and pull out the Actuator
1
stacker/stapler unit.
1
7272fs1043
1 ADJUSTMENT
4 [45] FNS Adjusting the Tension of the 4 [46] FNS Adjusting the Stapling Position
Upper Alignment Plate Drive Timing (Flat Stapling) (FS-111)
Belt (FS-111) 1. Tool
1. Tool • Screwdriver (Phillips)
• Screwdriver (Phillips) • Scale
2. Adjustment method 2. Adjustment method
a. Preparation a. Preparation
Step Operation Step Operation
If the upper alignment plate drive belt Check whether the virtual line running
tensioner has been loosened as a result between the stoppers is parallel to the
1 virtual line between the staplers.
of belt replacement or for some other
reason, adjust as described below. This illustration is for FS-211. FS-111
has 4 flat-stapling stoppers.
b. Adjustment method (when some printed sheets
are skewed irregularly) Staple Positions
Step Operation
Loosen the 2 set screws (see illustra-
1
tion). 1
Move the belt tensioner so that the end
is aligned with the center mark on the
scale, and retighten the screws.
Belt Tensioner Scale
Screws
7272fs1045
Adjust
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
Scale Scale Scale
7272fs1047
7272fs1050
Hold paper against the stoppers and
2 confirm that all three stoppers are in
alignment.
Execute stapling to confirm that the stop-
3
per line and stapler line are parallel.
1 ADJUSTMENT
2. Adjustment method 3. Each Test Mode Operation
a. Preparation a. Movement to tray lower limit sensor position
Step Operation SW100-4 :OFF
↓
Check that SF-101 is connected to the
1 ON
main body.
↓
Remove the cover/R. OFF
Caution: Keep the conveyance cover
2 The shift tray is moved down when
closed after removing the
cover/R. M702 (Tray up/down motor) is turned
ON.
b. Operation M702 is turned OFF when PS704
Step Operation (Toner lower limit sensor) is turned ON.
1 Turn ON the power of main body.
Set the DIP switches 2 and 3 in accor- b. M701 (Conveyance motor) driving (300msec)
dance with the testing operation. SW100-4 :OFF
↓
Testing Operation DIP switch ON
2 3 ↓
Movement to the tray OFF
lower limit sensor position OFF OFF
Blank page
2 ISW
2 ISW
Blank page
What's ISW?
WHAT'S ISW?
4
ISW (In-System Writer) is a process of updating the control programs stored in flash ROM mounted on var-
ious control boards in a digital copier without isolating the boards from the copier. Running ISW enables you
to upgrade control programs without replacing the boards and maintain the boards during their replacement.
Tool available for running ISW include ISW Trns (PC software), which connects a personal computer (PC)
to the digital copier.
This tool can be plugged into the ISW connector or USB connector (7255/7272) of the digital copier to directly
update the control programs in flash ROM assembled in the machine.
The copier can be directly connected to the internet without PC interface to update the control programs in
2 ISW
the flash ROM.
This chapter focuses on instructions to set up this machine to run ISW. For instruction on how to run ISW
Trns refer to the ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook.
Note: Only ISW Trns is enabled with ISW for this machine and the program cannot be updated via ISW Tool.
SETUP
4 [1] ISW-compatible boards
7155/7165/7255/7272 allows ROM data residing
on the following boards to be updated via ISW:
• Image control board
• Printer control board
• Finisher control board (Except for FS-111)
The ROMs of other boards than the above need
to be replaced.
2 ISW
Important Note:
The availability of the image control program is
prerequisite to updating on other boards.
[3] Prepare the copier to start an ISW
transfer
1. Transfer modes
The copier supports two transfer modes as
described below.
• Power-on mode
If the copier does not have the image control
program installed, the program can be sent
directly from a PC to the machine when the
main switch is turned on.
• 25 mode
The 25 mode will only work if the image control
program is installed.
2 ISW
Others Error code display 25 mode The copier has the image control
program installed.
• Upgrading
Normal startup display Writing method Condition
Image control Normal 25 mode The copier has all the programs
Others Normal installed.
3. Error Code
Error Code Description Action No.
01 There is an error in the command to ISW processing unit. a
1F A program error is detected. a
41 Input data format error. b
42 Invalid machine name input data. b
43 Invalid board name input data. b
81 Input device error such as input timeout. c
C1 Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to image control board) d
C2 Failed to write to flash ROM. (during ISW to image control board) d
C3 ROM checksum error. (during ISW to image control board) e
C4 Output device error such as output timeout. f
Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to printer control board and FNS
E1 control board) g
Failed to write to flash ROM. (during ISW to printer control board and FNS
E2 control board) g
(a) Program is not executing normally. Restart (d) There is an error in the flash ROM on the
from power ON and re-execute the ISW. image control board. Restart from ISW. If
(b) Check the ISW transfer data file. the error persists, the life of the image con-
(c) Check that the communication cable trol board flash ROM may have expired.
between input devices (PC or ISW tool) is Replace the image control board.
properly connected.
(e) The checksum result after program writing [4] Preparing the copier to transfer
does not match the ROM checksum data of Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put the
the ISW transfer data file. Restart from ISW. copier into ISW transfer wait state.
If the error persists, the ISW transfer data In normal case
file may not be created correctly. Step Procedure
(f) An error was detected in the ISW board tar-
1 Enter 25 mode.
geted at that time. Check the ISW board.
(g) There is an error in the flash ROM on the [Memory setting mode menu Screen]
2
2 ISW
2 ISW
TIMER
POWER SAVE
ON/OFF
Parallel
interface cable
Finisher
I/F cable assembly
(ISW)
2 ISW
PC
USB connector
Parallel (printer)
interface port
Ethernet
connector
USB cable USB connector
ISW connector
(36-pin)
Ethernet connector
(10BASE-T)
USB connector
(Small type)
RS232C
7272fs2001
4 INTERNET ISW
[1] What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or browser
to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own program.
With this Internet ISW, you can update copier’s programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword
described, without visiting customer’s office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer
site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
• To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.
• The copier is connected to a network where programs can be downloaded from the Internet using ftp or
http protocol. *1
• The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.
The main power is OFF.
The sub power is OFF.
The copier is shut OFF.
Note1: The Internet ISW does not function even of the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,
as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts if the above conditions are
released. However, the mails have period of validity.
Note2: The Internet ISW continues to function even if a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the low power mode.
2 ISW
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go to
the next setting.
Step 1: Select "Key operator menu" on the control panel.
Step 2: Select "[1] System initial setting".
Step 3: Select "[3] IP address setting".
Step 4: Enter [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]. *5
Step 5: Reboot the copier.
(Considerations)
In any setting item, space cannot be set.
If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error message
displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.
Web's layout may change without prior notice.
*5: Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.
For the details, please contact your system administrator.
*6: Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.
*7: If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).
For the details, please contact your system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer or
Netscape is recommended.
Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
Step 3: On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
2 ISW
Step 4: On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password and click Apply.
The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension for maintenance].
Step 5: On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password for mode change and click Apply.
The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet ISW].
2 ISW
Login window to Extension for maintenance Extension for maintenance screen
Type of proxy server *8 If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy
2 ISW
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-
sage in red.
Step 8: If you selected [Use http proxy] or [Use ftp proxy] in Step7, go to Step 8-A.
If you selected [no], go to Step8-B.
Program server address Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored.
Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter the
following address in the test box at the right.
2 ISW
In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.
Example: ftp://k-tsc2.sc2.ne.jp/7165/newest
Program server account Enter the account name of the program server.
Program server password Enter the program server password.
Reception timeout Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without
performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message
in red.
Program server account Enter the account name of the program server.
Program server password Enter the program server password.
Reception timeout Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)
If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated.
Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.
If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message
in red.
When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed
as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
2 ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be input
errors. Check the initial setting again.
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output
Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting cus-
tomer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
2 ISW
2. Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function works
during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does not dis-
appear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine operation
is as usual.
A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)
B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.
(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).
C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.
(1) Main power switch is OFF.
(2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*1 qpopper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine
to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".
*2 Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving server.
3. Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account
registration on mail server are necessary.
a. Procedure
1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.
2. Select [1. System initial setting].
3. Select [3. IP address setting].
4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*1 System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask sys-
tem administrator for details.
B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in order to
use Web browser.
Note1: No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the E-
mail address.
2 ISW
()<> ;:¥"[]
When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the
message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.
Note2: Web design is subject to change without notice.
*1 If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system
administrator for details. We recommend to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do
not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
2 ISW
4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].
Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
2 ISW
Time difference *1 The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.
Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (-12h00min) to
+1200 (+12h00min).
If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).
For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is input.
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 The IP address of SMTP sever.
Condition Informing Address *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
E-Mail Transmission *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2
You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
*1 The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and
Web.
*2 Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
a. Procedure
1. Set the reception setting.
In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change the
mode then click the initial setting.
Use the password for changing modes.
The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the
latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though
there are some restrictions.
2 ISW
E-Mail reception setting page
Enable E-mail notification Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.
Default is [No].
Interval between fetching mails Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier. The
interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min.
Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.
2 ISW
*1 Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.
*2 No echo back from the password.
*3 Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.
*4 Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software
is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].
2 ISW
Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.
Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
A. Function
CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.
CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.
In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.
The following table shows the command and options.
B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on the
mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not
all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above table *1. When
sending mail to the copier, please note followings.
Note:
• Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any differ-
2 ISW
ence.
• When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.
(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)
• As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128
and over (single-byte).
(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail
may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)
• Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.
• Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Other-
wise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.
Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is ignored.
• Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards
commands are ignored.
• Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.
• Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is
already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is
regarded as command and error mail may be returned.
• While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list
output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.
• The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If
the mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval
between fetching mails].
*1 Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.
*2 Return cannot be used.
Mail address
of the copier
CE Password
Command
Serial number
of copier
Mail address
of the sender
Nickname
of the copier
Requested
counter
list
2 ISW
d. To receive multiple data list
Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the same list
is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.
When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail are
returned.
[GetLog Counter]
[GetLog Management]
When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored and
only counter list (the first command) is returned.
[GetLog Counter Management]
Sending mail
[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]
Returned mail
[SE's Password was changed successfully.] → [New Password [Sitios]]
When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [Old-
Passwd], it is treated as illegal mail.
Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].
Sending mail
[ChPass Sitios]
Returned mail
[Violation on format by new password.] → [ChPass Sitios]
2 ISW
5. Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable E-
Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
1. Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier
automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.
The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail remote
notification system].
2 ISW
2. How to use
a. Going to Internet ISW page
The same as instructed in Chapter2, go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
*15: Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.
b. Performing ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download,
type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired
from the program server address set beforehand.
2 ISW
I2 bootI2.bin C2 bootC2.bin
I3 bootI3.bin C3 bootC3.bin
I4 bootI4.bin C4 bootC4.bin
I5 bootI5.bin C5 bootC5.bin
c. Starting ISW
When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item
according to the message in red.
This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.
ISW communicating
ISW rewriting
Successfully completed *16
Canceled due to communication error
Canceled due to communication timeout
Canceled due to writing error
e. Ending ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet ISW
main screen].
*16: Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Redraw] on the browser.
1. Function
It is possible for service technicians to download necessary program from the program server by the copier
operation panel to automatically rewrite the program.
The PC board for the program to be rewritten is the same for "Internet ISW by mail remote communication
system".
2 ISW
2. Operation
a. Procedure
Step Operation
1 Enter the 25 mode.
[Memory setting mode menu Screen]
2
Press " 11 ISW" key.
[ISW mode menu Screen]
Press "INTERNET ISW" key to select the program to execute the ISW.
3
Note: If "INTERNET ISW" key is not highlighted, the program will function as normal ISW.
The "Collective" key enables all the items displayed below the key to be rewritten.
[Internet ISW mode menu Screen]
Pressing "FILE NAME" key displays "File name entry Screen". Specify the name of the file
to be downloaded (Max. 20 characters) and press "OK" key to go back to "Internet ISW
4
mode menu Screen".
Pressing "File auto select" key displays "AUTO" in the file name entry column to accept pre-
determined file name.
Press "Start" key.
Internet ISW rewriting is started.
While the downloading is being executed, pressing "STOP" stops the downloading but does
not stop the rewriting operation. And, turning OFF SW2 (sub power supply) cannot be
5 accepted.
Note: Take care not to turn OFF SW1 (main power supply) of the copier while the internet
ISW rewriting is being performed.
If SW2 (sub power supply) is turned OFF while the rewriting is being executed, the
SW2 is turned to OFF status after the rewriting has been completed.
[Rewriting confirmation Screen]
6
Pressing "CONTINUE" key to display "ISW mode menu Screen".
3. Errors
* Error codes for FTP and HTTP are general protocol-specified errors.
2 ISW
2. If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and sub power switch are locked. However, if the
main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up, the same as
remote ISW. *18
This is only the problem on rewriting the image processing board. Even if errors occur on rewriting other
boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.
If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copierfs site and rewrite the program
using the ISW tool (ISWTrans).
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.
However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
Blank page
3 KRDS
KRDS
4 Refer to the "KRDS Setup Manual".
3 KRDS
Blank page
4
SERVICE
4 SERVICE
Main Precautions for Maintenance
1. Points to be confirmed before mainte- 4. After replacing the drum and developer,
nance refer to the List of Adjustments to deter-
Prior to maintenance, talk to the opera- mine the adjustments that must be
tor concerning the symptoms of the made following the replacement.
machine to help determine the correc-
tive maintenance action that must be 5. After completing maintenance work,
taken. reset the PM counter using the 25
mode.
2. Copy sample
Make copy samples at the start and 6. When replacing the fixing unit cleaning
end of maintenance to compare web, developer, and drum, reset the fix-
images. ing unit cleaning web counter using the
36 mode.
3. Drum
a) Never expose the drum to sunlight. Also 7. When replacing the toner cartridge,
avoid exposing the drum to indoor light wait until the toner supply LED on the
as much as possible. operation panel flashes before the
When the drum unit or drum is remove replacement.
from the machine, ensure that it is cov-
Caution:Turn the main power switch
ered with a drum cover.
(SW1) off and pull out the power
b) When replacing the drum, toner guide
cord from the wall outlet prior
roller, or cleaning blade, refer to the sec-
to maintenance.
tion that provides instruction for remov-
4 SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
4 [1] Service Schedule
4 SERVICE
Periodic check (III) Every 3,000,000 copies
PK
PK-110/120
Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
PZ Maintenance Every 250,000 copies zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
PZ-108/109
Periodic check (I) Every 3,000,000 copies z
*1 Periodic check (II) for FS-110/210 is applied for old type only.
Implementation classifica-
Number Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item of parts tion
replaced Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace used
ning ction -ation -ment
4 Transfer / sepa- (1) Transfer separation corona unit Blower brush/clean-
ration corona (front and rear block), guide ing pad/cotton swab/
drum cleaner
rail, separation bridge, z
entrance guide plate, lightning
protection sheet, back plate
(2) Discharge wire 56AA2609* 3 z
(3) Transfer cleaning assembly
56AA-264*
1 z
(4) Separation cleaning assem-
bly 56AA-267*
1 z
(5) Resin ring (φ2) 45AA2040* 2 z
(6) Transfer presser 55VA2615* 3 z
rubber (7155/7165)
4
56AA1783*
(7255/7272)
5 Toner supply (1) Cartridge holder member Cleaning pad
z
6 Conveyance unit (1) Conveyance section upper sur- Drum cleaner/clean-
face z ing pad
(2) Conveyance belt Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(3) TSL cover member Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
7 Registration (1) Paper dust removing brush Cleaning pad/blower
z brush
(2) 2nd paper feed roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z
4 SERVICE
ing pad
4 8 Drive section (1) Ozone filter K 55FA7301* 1 z
and filter (7155/7165)
(2) Ozone filter/M 56QA1059* 1 z
(7255/7272)
(3) Ozone filter/S 56QA1057* 1 z
(7255/7272)
(4) Developing 56AA-735* 1 z
suction filter (7155/7165)
56QA7320*
(7255/7272)
9 Paper exit unit (1) Sensor (one section) z Blower brush
(2) Roller (two sections) Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
Implementation classifica-
Number Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item of parts tion
replaced Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace used
ning ction -ation -ment
10 ADU (1) Roller cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(2) Reverse/exit roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(3) ADU reverse roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(4) ADU conveyance roller /1-4 Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(5) ADU registration roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(6) Sensors z Blower brush
(7) Gate sensor (two points) z Blower brush
(8) ADU horizontal conveyance Blower brush
sections (four points) z
(9) ADU reverse section (one Blower brush
point) z
(10) Gears z Plus guard No. 2
11 Paper feed sec- (1) Sensor (three points/tray) Blower brush
tion z
(2) Gears (double feed prevention Plus guard No.2
section) z
(3) Conveyance/driven roller Drum cleaner/clean-
(paper feed) z ing pad
(4) Feed roller/paper feed convey- Drum cleaner/clean-
ance roller z ing pad
(5) Double feed prevention roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
4 SERVICE
Implementation classifica-
Number Materials/tools
NO Classification Service item of parts tion
replaced Clea- Inspe- Lubric Replace used
ning ction -ation -ment
15 Fixing unit (1) Fixing upper roller Roller cleaner/
z cleaning pad
(2) Fixing lower roller Roller cleaner/
z cleaning pad
(3) Fixing claw (L) Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(4) Paper exit roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
(5) Paper exit conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
(right) and guide rib z ing pad
(6) Fixing unit entrance and exit Drum cleaner/clean-
guide plate z ing pad
(7) Fixing temperature sensor /2 z Blower brush/paper
(8) Decurler z Cleaning pad
(9) Fixing gear z Moly therm grease
(10) Fixing web unit (25 mode
counter resetting) 1 z
56AA-543*
(11) Fixing claw (U)
56AA5427*
6 z
(12) Heat insulating sleeve z Tri-flow
16 Vertical convey- (1) Horizontal conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
ance 2 z ing pad
(2) Sensor 5 z Blower brush
17 Final check (1) W.U.T. check z
(2) Peripheral and exterior clean- Drum cleaner/clean-
4 SERVICE
ing z ing pad
(3) Image and paper through
check z
(4) PM counter resetting (25 mode) z
1 ing pad
4 Paper exit sec- (1) Paper exit roller Drum cleaner/clean-
tion
1 z ing pad
5 Final check (1) Paper through check z
(2) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
4 SERVICE
4 SERVICE
(2) Paper feed conveyance roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z (z)
ing pad *1
(3) Double feed prevention roller Drum cleaner/clean-
z (z)
ing pad *1
3 Final check (1) Paper through check z
(2) Exterior cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it {Plus guard No.2}.
2 Punch dust col- (1) Punch dust box (for punch dust Drum cleaner/clean-
lection section dump) z ing pad
(2) Punch dust detection sensor Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
3 Final check (1) Paper through check z
(2) Internal cleaning Drum cleaner/clean-
z ing pad
4 SERVICE
unit pass feed) 54004056* count: 70 K feeds
(2) Double feed prevention roller
rubber (manual feed) 1 z
54004056*
56QA4603* 1
(7255/7272)
4 Developing unit (1) Developing 56AA-300*
4 (7155/7165)
unit
56QA-300* 1 z
(7255/7272)
5 Fixing unit (1) Upper roller error detection
sensor 56AA8804* 1 z
6 ADU (1) Registration shaft (L)
55GA7551* 2 z
(2) Registration shaft (U)
55GA7552* 2 z
(3) ADU registration roller (U)
56AA5111* 1 z
4 (4) ADU registra 56AA5112*
tion roller (L) (7155/7165)
56QA5112* 1 z
(7255/7272)
7 Conveyance unit (1) TSL cover assembly
56AA-387* 1 z
4 8 Paper feed unit (1) Paper feed roller rubber Periodical replace-
56AA-458*(7255/7272) 1 z ment count: 0.83 mil-
lion feed
4 [5] FNS [FS-110] (Old type only)/ [FS-210] (Old type only)
4 SERVICE
1 Drive unit (1) FNS up/down motor Actual replacement
13QE-115* 1 z count: 2.5 million
feeds
[8] PI [PI-110]
4 SERVICE
[9] PZ [PZ-108/109]
1. Main body
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Maintenance Charging control plate 56AA2503* 1 250,000 6
(Every 250,000 copies) Charging wire 56AA2509* 1 250,000 22
Charger cleaning base 56AA2540* 1 250,000
Charger slide block 56AA2538* 1 250,000
Charger cleaning block /U 56AA-253* 1 250,000 7
Resin ring (φ2) (charging corona) 45AA2040* 1 250,000
Charger cleaning block /L 56AA-254* 1 250,000 8
Toner guide roller (7155/7165) 56AA-213* 1 250,000 5
4 Toner guide roller (7255/7272) 56QA-213* 1 250,000 5
Cleaning blade 56AA2010* 1 250,000 4
Developer - 1 250,000 2
Discharge wire 56AA2609* 3 250,000 10
Transfer cleaning assembly 56AA-264* 1 250,000 11
Separation cleaning assembly 56AA-267* 1 250,000 21
Resin ring (φ2) (transfer/separation
45AA2040* 2 250,000
corona unit)
Ozone filter K (7155/7165) 55FA7301* 1 250,000 24
4 Ozone filter/M (7255/7272) 56QA1059* 1 250,000
Ozone filter/S (7255/7272) 56QA1057* 1 250,000
Developing suction filter (7155/7165) 56AA-735* 1 250,000
4 Developing suction filter (7255/7272) 56QA7320* 1 250,000
Fixing web unit 56AA-543* 1 250,000 1
Fixing claw /U 56AA5427* 6 250,000 14
Transfer presser rubber (7155/7165) 55VA2615* 3 250,000
4 SERVICE
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
4 3 Periodic check (II) Paper feed roller rubber/A
(Every 1,000,000 cop- (Tray 1 to 3) (7155/7165) 55FA-411* 3 800,000 29,34,39
ies) Paper feed rubber (by-pass feed) 55FA4233* 1 140,000 49
Fixing lamp/1 (7155/7165) 56A*8703* 1 1,000,000
Fixing lamp/1 (7255/7272) 56A*8303* 1 1,000,000
Fixing lamp/2 56A*8704* 1 1,000,000
Fixing lamp/3 56A*8705* 1 1,000,000
Bearing/1 07AA7509* 4 1,000,000
Fixing drive gear 25BA7726* 1 1,000,000
4 Periodic check (III) Drum separation claw solenoid 26NA8251* 1 2,000,000 103
(Every 2,000,000 cop- 2nd paper feed clutch 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 64
ies)
Transfer/separation corona unit 56AA-260* 1 2,000,000 20
4 Developing suction filter (7255/7272) 56QA7721* 1 2,000,000 1
4 5 Periodic check (IV) Toner control board unit 56AA-910* 1 2,500,000 19
(Every 2,500,000 cop- Charging unit (including PCL)
ies) (7155/7165) 56AA-250* 1 2,500,000 25
Charging unit (including PCL)
(7255/7272) 56QA-250* 1 2,500,000
TSL 56AA8703* 1 2,500,000
Paper feed slide shaft holder 26NA4082* 2 2,500,000
Registration roller /U (7155/7165) 56AA4603* 1 2,500,000
Registration roller /U (7255/7272) 56QA4603* 1 2,500,000
Developing unit (7155/7165) 56AA-300* 1 2,500,000 27
Developing unit (7255/7272) 56QA-300* 1 2,500,000
Upper roller error detection sensor 56AA8804* 1 2,500,000 23
Registration bearing /L 55GA7551* 2 2,500,000
Registration bearing /U 55GA7552* 2 2,500,000
ADU registration roller /U 56AA5111* 1 2,500,000
4 SERVICE
ADU registration roller /L (7155/7165) 56AA5112* 1 2,500,000
ADU registration roller /L (7255/7272) 56QA5112* 1 2,500,000
TSL cover assembly 56AA-387* 1 2,500,000 28
Paper feed roller rubber/A (Tray 1 to 3)
(7255/7272) 56AA-458* 1
4 2. DF-316/DF-322
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Periodic replacement (I) Feed roller rubber 13QA4127* 1 200,000 92
(Every 500,000 copies)
Paper feed roller 13QA4104* 1 200,000 93
Double feed prevention roller rubber 13QA4045* 1 200,000 94
2 Periodic replacement Double feed prevention roller
(II)
(Every 1,500,000 cop- 13QA4001* 1 600,000 95
ies)
4 3. FS-110/210
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Maintenance Paper exit roller/A (sponge roller) 122H4825* 10 250,000
(Every 250,000 copies)
Conveyance roller/4 (sponge roller) 13QE4531* 4 250,000
Staple cartridge 12QRK001* 2 5,000/each
2 Periodic check (II) FNS up/down motor (Old type only)
(Every 2,500,000 cop- 13QE-115* 1 2,500,000 69
ies)
4 4. FS-111
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Maintenance Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 12H4825* 10 250,000 52
Every 250,000 copies
Conveyance cleaning brush 13TR-272* 2 250,000 53
Staple needle 13TQK101* 2 5,000/each 53
2 Periodic check (I) FNS motor
(Every 2,500,000 cop- 129U-108* 2 2,500,000 54
ies)
5. LT-402/412
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Periodic check (I) Feed roller 55VA-484* 1 500,000 52
(Every 1,000,000 cop-
Paper feed conveyance roller 55VA-483* 1 500,000 53
ies)
Double feed prevention roller 55VA-483* 1 500,000 53
2 Periodic check (II) Paper feed clutch 56AA8201* 1 2,000,000 54
4 SERVICE
6. PI-110
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Periodic check (I) Feed roller assembly/B 50BA-575* 2 100,000 79
(Every 500,000 copies)
Double feed prevention roller assem-
bly 13QN-443* 2 100,000 80
7. PZ-108/109
No Classification Parts name Parts No. Qty Total count Actual count Parts count No.
1 Periodic check (I) Punch clutch 13NKK001* 1 1,000,000 88,89,90
(Every 3,000,000 cop-
2 Punch scraps conveyance motor 12GQ-417* 1 1,000,000 88,89,90
ies)
1. Main body
No Parts name Parts No. Qty Actual count Parts count No.
1 Vertical conveyance clutch/ 1, 2 56AA8201* 2 2,000,000 61, 62
2 Paper feed clutch (Tray 1 to 4) 56AA8201* 4 2,000,000 31, 36, 41, 46
3 Conveyance clutch (Tray 1 to 4) 56AA8201* 4 2,000,000 32, 37, 42, 47
4 Horizontal conveyance clutch/ L, R (7255/
7272) 56AA8201* 2 2,000,000 111, 112
2. FS-110/210
No Parts name Parts No. Qty Actual count Parts count No.
1 Stapler unit/F 13QE4241* 1 2,000,000 70
2 Stapler unit/R 13QE4241* 1 2,000,000 71
3. FS-111
No Parts name Parts No. Qty Actual count Parts count No.
1 Stapler unit/F 13TQ4250* 1 2,000,000 70
2 Stapler unit/R 13TQ4250* 1 2,000,000 71
4 SERVICE
Unit
No Parts name Parts No Qty
classification
1 Thermostat/U SP00-0020 1
Fixing unit
2 Thermostat/L SP00-0010 1
COPY MATERIALS
[1] Single unit supply
Name Durability/copies
Toner cartridge 43,000
Developer 250,000
Drum 500,000
1. 250,000 copies/kit
4 SERVICE
Separation cleaning assembly 56AA-267* 1
4 Transfer/Separation vibration proot rubber 55VA2615*(7155/7165)
3
56AA1783*(7255/7272)
Ozone filter K 55FA7301*(7155/7165) 1
4 Ozone filter M 56QA1059*(7255/7272)
4 Ozone filter S 56QA1057*(7255/7272)
4 Developing suction filter 56AA-735*(7155/7165)
1
56QA7320*(7255/7272)
Fixing web unit 56AA-543* 1
Fixing claw /U 56AA5427* 6
Cleaning pad (10 pcs) - 5
Polyethylene gloves - 1
Dust bag (rubber band) - 1
Developer collection sheet (rubber band) - 1
Hand case for collection - 1
Cotton swabs (4 pcs) - 2
200 ml
200 ml
25 g
25 g
For toner
00GR00200 Electricity lubricant
guide roller
25 g
25 g
10 pc
1 pack
CE TOOL LIST
Tool No. Tool Name Appearance Quantity Remarks
4 SERVICE
00M6-2-00 Door switch jig 2set 2PCS/set
4-23
CE TOOL LIST
00VE-1003 Tester 1
For DF-316
120A1052* PS shaft 2pc/set
positioning
For DF-316
4 SERVICE
For DF-316
120A9712* White chart 1
adjustment
For FS-110/
129XJG011 Stapler PS jig 1 FS-210
adjustment
4-24
5
ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
Blank page
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1. Read Section
PS61 PS51
Scanner HP PS APS timing PS
PS65
APS sensor/3
FM9
Scanner cooling fan
PS63
APS sensor/1
PS64
APS sensor/2
L1
Exposure lamp
L1 INVB
L1 converter ADB
A/D converter board
2. Operation Section
LCD OB INVB OB1
SW2 indicator board OB inverter Operation board/1
Sub power switch
PAKB
Panel key board
PCL
Pre-charging exposure lamp
M14
Charger cleaning motor
MC14
Toner recycle MC
SD1
Separation claw SD
TCSB
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
5-2
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
5. Tray 1, 2, 3 (7155/7165)
MC4/6/8 PS2/8/14
Pre-registration MC/1, /2, /3 Tray upper limit PS/1, /2, /3
MC3/5/7 PS3/9/15
Paper feed MC /1, /2, /3 No paper PS/1, /2, /3
PS1/7/13
Paper feed PS/1, /2, /3
PS4/10/16
Remaining paper
PS/1, /2, /3
VR1/2/3
PS6/12/18
Paper size VR/1, /2, /3
Paper size PS/2-1, /2-2, /2-3
PS5/11/17
Paper size PS/1-1, /1-2, /1-3
4 6. Tray 1, 2 (7255/7272)
MC4/6
Pre-registration MC/1, /2
MC3/5 PS3/9
Paper feed MC/1, /2 PS2/8 No paper PS/1, /2
PS1/7
PS4/10 Tray upper limit PS/1, /2 Paper feed PS/1, /2
Remaining paper PS/1, /2
7272fs5008
4 7. Tray 3, 4 (7255/7272)
MC8 PS14
Pre-registration MC/3 Tray upper limit PS/3
MC7 PS15
Paper feed MC/3 No paper PS/3
PS13
Paper feed PS/3
PS16
Remaining paper
PS/3
VR3
PS18
Paper size VR/3
Paper size PS/2-3
PS17
Paper size PS/1-3 7272fs5009
PS11
Horizontal conveyance set PS
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
PS25
PS12
Vertical conveyance PS/1
Vertical conveyance door
open/close PS/U (7255/7272)
MC11
PS26
Vertical conveyance MC/1
Vertical conveyance PS/2
MC12
Vertical conveyance MC/2 PS27
Vertical conveyance PS/3
PS29
Vertical conveyance door
open / close PS
PS28
Vertical conveyance PS/4
7272fs5018
PS34 PS32
Tray upper limit PS/BP Paper size PS/2-BP
PS31
Paper size PS/1-BP
M20
VR5
Up/down motor/BP
Paper size VR/BP
PS35
Tray lower limit PS/BP
PS36
Loop PS
PS43
Leading edge PS
PS70
Paper mis-centering PS
PS44
Registration PS
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
MC1
Registration MC
5-4
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
PS46
Reverse/exit PS2
FM3
M9 Conveyance suction fan
ADU reverse motor
M8 PS47
Reverse/exit motor3 ADU handle PS
PS42
PS53
Paper reverse PS
Transfer/separation PS/R
(7255/7272)
FM10
ADU reverse motor cooling fan
PS48
ADU conveyance PS/2
PS49
PS45 ADU deceleration PS
ADU paper
reverse PS PS50
ADU pre-registration PS
SD7
Reverse gate SD TSL
Transfer synchronization
MC13
Lamp
ADU conveyance MC
HTR3
ADU DB Drum Heater (as supply part)
SD9
ADU drive board
ADU lock SD
MC2 M5
ADU deceleration MC Conveyance motor
PS52 M10
Transfer/separation Transfer/Separation cleaning motor
PS/F
(7255/7272)
Transfer
synchronization lamp
(7255/7272)
PS48 TSL
ADU paper Transfer PS43
PS37
conveyance PS/2 synchronization Lamp Leading edge PS
Paper exit PS
PS46 (7155/7165)
Reverse/exit PS1
PS70
PS44
Registration PS
PS42
Paper reverse PS
PS50
PS45 PS49 ADU pre-registration PS
ADU paper reverse PS ADU deceleration PS
7272fs5011
TH2
Fixing temperature/2
TH1
Fixing temperature/1
TS1
Thermostat/U
L4
Fixing heater
lamp/3
L2
Fixing heater lamp/1
PS30
Fixing exit PS L3
Fixing heater lamp/2
TS2
Thermostat/L
M13
Toner bottle motor
TLD
Toner level detection sensor
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
M12
Toner supply motor
5-6
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
INDXSB
Index sensor board
LDB
Laser driver board
M15
Polygon motor
PMDB
Polygon driver board
SW1
Main power switch
FM2
Write section cooling fan
M7
Paper exit motor
PS37
Paper exit PS
FM7
Paper exit fan/R FM6
Paper exit fan/F
5-7
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
M3 MB
Developing motor Memory board M11
Scanner motor
C (K) SCDB
Key counter Scanner drive board
ICB
Image control board FM1
Main body cooling fan/1
M12
Toner supply motor M2
Drum motor
FM4
Developing suction fan FM8
Main cooling fan/2
M6
Loop roller motor M4
Fixing motor
M16 HV
Tray up drive motor/1 High voltage unit
M17
TRANSFORMER
Tray up drive motor/2
Transformer
PRCB
Printer control board NF
Noise filter
M18
Tray up drive motor/3 CBR1
Circuit breaker/1
M1
Paper feed motor CBR2
Circuit breaker/2
5-8
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
M3 MB
Developing motor Memory board M11
Scanner motor
C (K)
Key counter
SCDB
Scanner drive board
ICB
Image control board FM1
Main body cooling fan/1
M12
Toner supply motor M2
FM4 Drum motor
Developing suction fan
FM8
Main cooling fan/2
M6
Loop roller motor M4
M16 Fixing motor
Tray up drive motor/1 HV
High voltage unit
M17
Tray up drive motor/2 TRANSFORMER
Transformer
PRCB
Printer control board NF
Noise filter
M18
Tray up drive motor/3 CBR1
Circuit breaker/1
M1
Paper feed motor CBR2
Circuit breaker/2
SW3
HTR2 Heater switch
Heater/2 T1
L1 Heater transformer
Coil/1 DCPS
ACDB (Japan only) DC power supply unit
AC drive board
Blank page
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
PS303
Original exit PS
PS304
PS301
Original registration
Last original PS
PS/1
M301
PS310
Original feed motor
Original size PS/1
PS302
Original size PS/2 PS309
Original size PS/2
MC301
Original feed MC VR301
Original size VR
M302
Original conveyance
motor
FM301
Original feed MS301
motor cooling fan Cover open/close MS
SD303
PS308
Pressure roller release SD
Original skew PS/R
SD302
PS305 Exit gate SD
Original registration SD301
PS/2 Reverse gate SD
PS306 PS311
Original conveyance PS ADF open/close PS
PS307
Original skew PS/F
FRONT
5-9
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
SW100
LT tray down switch
PS108
MS101
LT no paper detection PS
LT upper cover interlock MS1
PS107 PS110
LT first paper feed PS LT jam door
open / close detection PS
MS102
LT upper cover interlock MS2 SD100
LT first paper feed SD
PS100
LT upper cover PS109
open / close detection PS LT upper limit detection PS
MC101 PS106
LT paper feed MC LT paper feed PS
MC102
M100 LT first original feed MC
LT UP/DOWN motor
PS102 M101
LT remaining paper LT paper feed motor
detection PS1
LTDB
PS103 LT drive board
LT remaining paper
detection PS2 HTR101
LT heater
PS104 PS101
LT remaining paper PS105
LT lower limit detection PS
detection PS3 LT remaining paper detection PS4
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
5-10
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
SD704
Paper exit opening SD
PS719
Sub-tray full PS PS701
Sub-tray paper exit PS
PS706
Main tray paper exit PS PS712
Paper exit
M702 opening HP
Shift motor
PS718
Shift HP PS
M713
Stacker entrance motor
PS709
Paper exit belt HP PS
PS708
Alignment HP/U PS
PS716
Gate HP
PS720
Stacker no paper PS PS704
(Only when A kit is FNS entrance PS
M711
installed)
Stapler movement motor
FM701
M718
Stacker fan
Folding stopper motor
(Only when A kit is
(Only for FS-210)
installed)
MS701
FNS interlock
M704
Clincher rotation motor
PS720 PS724
Stacker no paper PS Alignment HP/L PS
M716
Alignment/L motor
PS705 (Only for FS-210)
Stacker entrance PS
PS722
M705
Alignment motor/U
PS711
Stapler movement HP PS
M706
Stapler rotation motor
SD706
Three-folding gate SD
PS713 PS725
Stapler rotation HP PS Folding exit PS
PS729 LED729
Folding full PS Folding full LED
Stapler/R/F
SW702
Staple SW/R
SW704
Staple SW/F
SW701
Cartridge SW/R Clincher/R/F
SW703
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
Cartridge SW/F
PS730
Stapler HP PS/R
PS731
Stapler HP PS/F
5-12
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
4 M708
Paper exit motor
M707
M721 Paper exit roller motor
Sub-tray paper exit motor
PS707
Stapler paper exit upper limit PS
M701
FNS conveyance
motor
PS702
M712 Tray upper limit PS
Gate drive motor
FNS CB
PS715
FNS control board
Counter reset PS
RB SD705
Relay board By-pass gate SD
M720
Folding conveyance PS703
motor Tray lower limit PS
(FS-210 only)
M703
Tray up/down motor
M703
Tray up/down motor
FS-110 FS-210
7272fs5004
PIDB
PI driver board M203
PI conveyance motor
MC202
MC201 Conveyance MC/L
Conveyance MC/U
MC203
M201 Registration MC
Tray up/down motor/U PS202
No sheet PS/U
PS205 VR201
Tray lower limit PS/U Sheet size VR/U
PS201
PS210
PI passage PS/U
Tray lower limit PS/L
PS204
Tray upper limit PS/U
M202
Tray up/down motor/L PS206
PI passage PS/L
PIOB
PI operation
board
PS212 SD202
Sheet size PS/L Sheet feed SD/L
SD201
Sheet feed SD/U
MS201
PS203 PI interlock MS
Sheet set PS/U PS209
Tray upper limit PS/L
PS208 PS207
Sheet set PS/L No sheet PS/L
VR202
Sheet size VR/L FRONT
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
PS804
Punch scraps box set PS
(PK-120 only)
PKDB
Punch drive board
PS803
(PK-110 only)
Punch shift HP PS
(PK-120 only)
PKDB M802
Punch drive board Punch shift motor
(PK-120 only) (PK-120 only)
FRONT
M7 M5
Punch scraps Punch shift motor
conveyance motor
PS4
PS7 Puncher HP PS
Punch scraps full PS
PS6
Punch scraps box PS
DCPS
DC power unit
CBR
COIL Circuit breaker
Coil
NF
Noise filter RELAY
Power source relay Inlet
PS1 M2
Passage PS PS3
1st stopper motor
1st stopper HP PS
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
SD2
M6
Gate SD/U
Conveyance motor
PS8 PS9
Exit PS Conveyance encoder PS
SD1
Gate SD/L
M3
2nd stopper motor
M1
Registration motor
PS2
2nd stopper HP PS
FRONT 7272fs5032
PS207 M1
PS50 Paper exit-cover FNS conveyance motor
Sub-tray full PS open/close
PS1 M8
detection PS Paper exit-opening motor
Sub-tray paper
exit PS M7
M11
Paper exit-roller motor
Stapler-movement motor
SD1
PS4 Gate solenoid
FIN entrance passage PS
PS13 SD2
Entrance paper detection PS Sub-tray paper exit
solenoid
FM1
Cooling FAN 1 SD5
FM2 By-pass solenoid
Cooling FAN 2
M13
FM3 Stacker entrance motor
Cooling FAN 3
MS1
Interlock M4
Stapler rotation motor
M3
Tray up/down motor
7272fs5022
PS20
Stacker no-paper detection PS
PS8
Alignment-plate/
upper HP PS
M24
Stapler (F, R) Stapler motor/F
PS9 M22
Paper exit- Stapler motor/R
belt HP PS PS34
7272fs5023
SD4 PS12
Paper exit-opening solenoid Paper exit-opening PS
PS6
Paper exit-1 PS PS5
PS10 Stacker conveyance passage PS
Paper exit-2 PS
SD6
M2 Sub-tray deceleration solenoid
Roller-shift motor
PS18
Roller-shift HP PS
PS7
Staple paper exit
upper limit PS
PS2
Tray upper limit PS
PS15
Tray no-paper detection PS
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
PS3
Tray lower limit PS
7272fs5024
PS701 SW702
Conveyance PS Tray upper limit SW
SW701
Conveyance cover
PS703 SW
Tray upper limit PS
M701
(Conveyance motor)
PS702
Shift HP PS
M703
Shift motor
SFCB
SF control board
M702
(Tray up/down motor)
PS704
Tray lower limit PS
7272fs5005
206 (GY: 20pin) 211 (GY: 7pin) 35 (W: 5pin) 202 (W: 26pin)
240 (N.C.)
204 (W: 34pin) 37 (N.C.) 200 (W: 9pin)
235 (W: 11pin) 238 (N.C.) 239 (W: 4pin)
7272fs5013
119 (N.C.)
114 (168pin) MU-401/ 402
134 (36pin) ISW
128 (W: 20pin)
136 (W: 14pin)
111(8pin) LAN
129 (W: 40pin)
Blank page
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
14 (W: 4pin)
2 (W: 3pin)
1 (W: 5pin)
2 (W: 4pin)
10. OB inverter
51 (GY:5pin)
18
(W:2pin)
170 (W: 40pin) (7155/7165)
170 (W: 50pin) (7255/7272) 17
(W:2pin)
7272fs5033
7272fs5038
1. LT drive board
700
729 (W:4pin)
(W:6pin)
728
(W:8pin)
710
(GY:10pin)
1. PI drive board
53 56
(W:30pin) (W:6pin)
58
(GY:12pin)
52
(W:38pin)
54
(W:6pin)
57 55
(W:11pin) (BK:24pin)
2. PI operation board
1
(GY:12pin)
66 63
(W:9pin) (W:40pin)
65 64 67 66 63
(W:5pin) (W:2pin) (W:3pin) (GY:9pin) (GY:38pin)
1. PZ control board
9 3
(W:13pin) (W:8pin)
4
DIP switches
10 4
4
(W:12pin) (W:14pin)
3
12
5 ELECTRIC PARTS LIST
6
2
(B:14pin) (W:2pin)
ON
8
(W:6pin)
20
7
(N.C.) Example of switch settings
(W:12pin)
21 5 7075 7085 7165/7155 7255/7272
(N.C.) (W:24pin)
11
ON
(W:4pin)
2 1
(W:4pin) (W:3pin) 7272fs5035
1 25
(GY: 60PIN) 28 (GY: 24PIN)
CONNECTOR for FAN
(GY: 20PIN)
6 (W: 9PIN)
21
(GY: 6PIN) 8 (W: 12PIN) 27 (GY: 60PIN)
(W: 9PIN)
22
(GY: 16PIN)
26 (GY: 14PIN)
9 (GY: 24PIN)
4 (GY: 60PIN)
5 (GY: 16PIN) 2 (W: 2PIN)
3 (GY: 12PIN) 7272fs5026
7272fs5025
1. PI drive board
CN103 (W: 6pin) CN102 (W: 8pin)
DIP SW Function
SW100
1 No setting
OFF
1 2 3 4
2
Setting of test action
3
4 Starting up the test action
7272fs5003
ON. (7255/7272)
PS5 (horizontal conveyance /L) or
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R)
does not turn ON within the pre-
defined time after MC4 (pre-regis-
tration MC/1) has turned ON.
(7255/7272)
J11-3 PS25 (vertical conveyance /1) is Open the vertical
turned ON while in the idling sta- conveyance door on
tus. (7155/7165) the main body and
remove the jammed
paper. (7155/7165)
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R) is Pull out the horizon-
Stationary
5 FOR THE PAGE ADJUST-
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
Tray 2 J12-1 PS7 (paper feed /2) does not turn The machine stops Open the vertical
ON within the predefined time immediately after conveyance door on
after MC5 (paper feed MC/2) has paper ejection has the main body and
turned ON. completed when jam- remove the jammed
ming occurs while a job paper.
4 J12-2 PS7 (paper feed /2) is ON and is being processed . Pull out the tray and
Operating PS26 (vertical conveyance /2) is remove the jammed
OFF for the predefined time after paper.
MC6 (pre-registration MC/2) has
turned ON. (7155/7165)
PS7 (paper feed /2) is ON and
PS25 (vertical conveyance /1) is
OFF for the predefined time after
MC6 (pre-registration MC/2) has
turned ON. (7255/7272)
J12-3 PS26 (vertical conveyance /2) is Open the vertical
turned ON while in the idling sta- conveyance door on
tus. (7155/7165) the main body and
Stationary
Main body
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
4 Tray 4 J14-1 PS19 (paper feed 4) does not turn The machine stops Open the vertical
(7255/7272) ON within the predefined time immediately after conveyance door on
after MC9 (paper feed MC/4) has paper ejection has the main unit and
Operating
turned ON. completed when jam- remove the jammed
J14-2 PS19 (paper feed /4) does not turn paper.
ming occurs while a job
OFF, within the predefined time is being processed. Pull out the tray and
after MC10 (pre-registration MC/4) remove the jammed
Main body
Paper con- J17-2 PS36 (loop) does not turn ON ming occurs while a job jam processing sec-
Main body
Operating
4
veyance (tray within the predefined time after is being processed. tion and ADU exit
1) PS1 (paper feed PS/1) has turned guide plate, and
ON. (7155/7165) remove the jammed
PS36 (loop) does not turn ON paper.
within the predefined time after
PS6 (horizontal conveyance /R)
has turned ON. (7255/7272)
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
4 Paper J17-3 PS36 (loop) does not turn ON The machine stops Open the vertical
conveyance within the predefined time after immediately after conveyance door on
(7155/7165: PS26 (vertical conveyance /2) has paper ejection has the main body and
tray 2/3) turned ON. completed when jam- remove the jammed
(7255/7272: ming occurs while a job paper.
tray 3/4) is being processed.
4 Paper J17-4 PS26 (vertical conveyance /2)
conveyance does not turn ON within the pre-
(tray 2) defined time after PS7 (paper feed
/2) has turned ON.(7155/7165)
PS36 (loop) does not turn ON
within the predefined time after
MC6 (pre-registration MC/2) has
turned ON. (7255/7272)
Main body
Stationary
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
Vertical con- J19-1 The vertical conveyance door is The machine stops Open the vertical
Main body
Second J31-1 PS43 (leading edge) does not turn The machine stops Open the front door
paper feed ON within the predefined time immediately after and pull out the ADU
conveyance after MC1 (registration MC) has paper ejection has stand and remove
turned ON. completed when jam- the jammed paper.
J31-2 PS30 (fixing exit) does not turn ON ming occurs while a job
within the predefined time after is being processed
PS43 (leading edge) has turned
ON.
Fixing/paper J32-1 PS37 (paper exit) does not turn ON
exit within the predefined time after
Main body
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
Fixing/paper J32-9 PS30 (fixing exit) is turned ON Open the front door
Stationary
exit while in the idling status. and pull out the ADU
-
Main body
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
4 DF-316/322 J62-8 PS305 (original registration /2) RADF stops immedi- Open the open/close
does not turn OFF within the pre- ately. The machine cover and the paper
defined time since it has turned ON stops after paper ejec- feed unit to remove
when processing the reverse tion if copying/copied the jammed paper.
paper feed for copying the front paper is present.
side of the double-side original.
J62-9 PS306 (original conveyance) does
not turn ON within the predefined
time after re-feeding of the single-
side original has started.
J62-10 PS306 (original conveyance) does
not turn ON within the predefined
time since reverse paper feed of
the double-side copy has started.
J63-1 PS306 (original conveyance) does
not turn OFF within the predefined
time since it has turned ON when
feeding the paper for the single-
Operating
side copy.
J63-2 PS306 (original conveyance) does
not turn OFF within the predefined
time since it has turned ON when
RADF
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
4 DF-316/322 J65-8 PS305 (original registration /2) is Open the open/close
turned ON while in the idling sta- cover and the paper
Stationar
tus. feed unit to remove
RADF
4 Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
FS-110/210 J72-20 PS706 (main tray paper exit) does FNS/SF/main body Remove the jammed
not turn ON within the predefined stops immediately. paper from the FNS,
time after the paper ejection has SF, or the main body.
started. (Staple mode)
FS-111 PS6(paper exit 1) is not turned ON
within the specific time after the
paper exit operation is started (in
staple mode).
FS-110/210 J72-21 PS706 (main tray paper exit) does
not turn OFF within the predefined
time since it has turned ON. (Sta-
ple mode large-size paper)
FS-111 PS6(paper exit 1) is not turned
OFF within the specific time after it
turns ON after the paper exit oper-
ation is started (in staple mode).
FS-110/210 J72-22 PS701 (sub-tray paper exit) does
not turn ON within the predefined
time after PS704 (FNS entrance)
has turned ON. (Sub-tray paper
exit mode)
FS-111 PS1(subtray paper exit) is not
Operating
4 Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
FS-110/210/ J72-28 PS705 (stacker entrance) does not FNS/SF/main body Remove the jammed
111 turn OFF within the predefined stops immediately. paper from the FNS,
time since it has turned ON. SF, or the main body.
FS-110/210 J72-29 PS706 (main tray paper exit) does
not turn OFF within the predefined
time since it has turned ON. (non-
stapling mode)
FS-111 PS10(paper exit 2) is not turned OFF
within the specific time after it turns ON.
SF-101 Does not turn ON within the pre-
defined time after PS701 (convey-
ance) has turned ON.
FS-110/210 J72-30 PS706 (main tray paper exit) does
not turn OFF within the predefined
time since it has turned ON. (Sta-
ple mode small-size paper)
FS-111 PS6(paper exit 1) is not turned
OFF within the specific time after it
turns ON.
PI-110 J72-35 PS206 (PI passage /L) does not
turn ON within the predefined time
after MC202 (conveyance MC/L)
has turned ON.
FNS
PZ-108/109 J72-38 Leading/trailing/side edge PS on PZ/main body stops Remove any jammed
paper edge PS does not turn ON immediately. paper in the PZ/main
within the predefined time since body.
PS37 (main body paper exit) has
turned ON.
J72-39 Leading/trailing/side edge PS on
paper edge PS does not turn OFF
within the predefined time since it
has turned ON.
J72-40 PS1 (passage) does not turn ON
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
PK-110/120 J72-43 PS801 (punch HP) does not turn FNS/main body stops Remove the jammed
4 ON within the predefined time immediately. paper from the FNS
after M801 (punch) has turned ON. or the main body.
Or, leading/trailing/side edge PS
on paper edge PS does not turn
OFF within the predefined time
since M802 (Punch shift) has
turned ON.
PZ-108/109 J72-44 PS8 (exit) does not turn ON within PZ/main body stops Remove any jammed
the predefined time since leading/ immediately. paper in the PZ/main
trailing/side edge PS on paper body.
edge PS has turned ON.
J72-45 PS8 (exit) does not turn ON within
the predefined time since PS37
(main body paper exit) has turned
ON.
J72-46 PS8 (exit) does not turn OFF within
the predefined time since it has
Operating
turned ON.
FNS
Jam
4 Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
PZ-108/109 J72-60 Leading/trailing/side edge PS on PZ/main body stops Remove any jammed
paper edge PS does not turn OFF immediately. paper in the PZ/main
within the predefined time since paper body.
edge PS has turned ON. Or, side edge
PS corresponding to paper size on
paper edge PS does not turn ON within
the predefined time since leading/trail-
ing/side edge PS on paper edge PS
has turned OFF.
J72-61 PS1 (passage) does not turn ON
within the predefined time since
leading/trailing/side edge PS on
paper edge PS has turned ON.
J72-62 PS8 (exit) does not turn ON within
the predefined time since PS1
(passage) has turned ON.
J72-63 M6 (conveyance) lost synchro-
nism.
J72-64 PS5 (punch HP) does not turn ON
within the predefined time after
MC1 (punch) has turned ON.
FS-110/210 J72-81 PS731 (stapler HP /F) and PS733 FNS/main body stops Remove the jammed
Operating
4 Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
FS-111 J72-83 PS30(clincher HP/R), PS33 FNS/main body stops Remove the jammed
(clincher HP/F), PS31(stapler HP/ immediately. paper from the FNS
R) and PS34(stapler HP/F) are not or the main body.
turned ON within the specific time
after M21(clincher R),
Operating M23(clincher/ F), M22(stapler R)
and M24(stapler/ F) go ON.
FS-110/210 J72-90 FNS does not stop within the pre-
defined time since the stop signal
has been transmitted to FNS from
the main unit.
FS-111 FNS does not stop within the spe-
cific time after it receives start-
operation signal from the main
body.
FS-110/210 J73-1 PS706 (main tray paper exit) is
turned ON while in the idling sta-
tus.
FS-111 PS6(paper exit 1) is ON during
idling.
SF-101 PS701 (conveyance) has turned
ON while in the idling status.
FS-110/210 J73-2 PS705 (stacker entrance) is turned
FNS
Jam
Classification Cause Machine response Countermeasure
Code
PZ-108/109 J73-15 Any of the following sensors is ON Remove the jammed
during idling. paper from the FNS
• Leading/trailing PS on paper or the main body.
Stationary
edge PS
FNS
-
• PS1 (passage)
• PS8 (exit)
PI-110 J73-17 PS201 (PI passage /U) is turned
ON while in the idling status.
ADU J92-1 PS46 (reverse/exit) does not turn The machine stops Open the front door
ON within the predefined time immediately after and pull out the ADU
after PS42 (paper reverse) has paper ejection has unit and remove the
Operating
is being processed
tus.
-
J93-3 PS50 (ADU pre-registration) is
turned ON while in the idling sta-
tus.
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Drive F13-01 Error detection signal is detected con- The machine stops M1 (paper feed)
tinuously for one second when two immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
seconds have passed since M1 (paper OFF RL1 (main).
feed) has turned ON.
F13-02 Error detection signal is detected con- M101 (LT paper feed)
tinuously for one second when two LTDB (LT drive board)
seconds have passed since M101 (LT
paper feed) has turned ON.
Tray 1 F18-10 Error detection signal for M16 (tray up M16 (tray up drive /1)
drive /1) is detected while M16 is PRCB (printer control board)
turned ON. PS2 (tray upper limit/1)
4 F18-11 PS2 (tray upper limit/1) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds (7155/7165)/ 36 played on the operation
seconds (7255/7272) since the lifting panel. It is displayed
motion triggered by activating M16 only in data collection,
(tray up drive /1) has started while PS2 list output, and KRDS.
is turned OFF.
Tray 2 F18-20 Error detection signal for M17 (tray up The machine stops M17 (tray up drive /2)
drive /2) is detected while M17 is immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
turned ON. OFF RL1 (main). PS8 (tray upper limit/2)
Main body
4 F18-21 PS8 (tray upper limit/2) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds (7155/7165)/ 27 played on the operation
seconds (7255/7272)since the lifting panel. It is displayed
motion triggered by activating M17 only in data collection,
(tray up drive /2) has started while PS8 list output, and KRDS.
is turned OFF.
Tray 3 F18-30 Error detection signal for M18 (tray up The machine stops M18 (tray up drive /3)
drive /3) is detected while M18 is immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
turned ON. OFF RL1 (main). PS14 (tray upper limit/3)
5 FOR THE PAGE ADJUST-
F18-31 PS14 (tray upper limit/3) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds since the lifting played on the operation
motion triggered by activating M18 panel. It is displayed
(tray up drive /3) has started while only in data collection,
PS14 is turned OFF. list output, and KRDS.
4 Tray 4 F18-40 Error detection signal for M19 (tray up The machine stops M19 (tray up drive /4)
(7255/7272) drive /4) is detected while M19 is immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
turned ON. OFF RL1 (main). PS20 (tray upper limit/4)
F18-41 PS20 (tray upper limit/4) does not turn Error code is not dis-
ON within 20 seconds since the lifting played on the operation
motion triggered by activating M19 panel. It is displayed
(tray up drive /4) has started while only in data collection,
PS20 is turned OFF. list output, and KRDS.
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
LCT F18-50 Error detection signal for M100 (LT up/ The machine stops M100 (LT up/down)
down) is detected continuously for one immediately and turns LTDB (LT drive board)
second while M100 is turned ON. OFF RL1 (Main). PS101
F18-51 PS109 (LT upper limit detection) or Error code is not dis- (LT lower limit detec-
PS101 (LT lower limit detection) does played on the operation tion)
LCT
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Wire cleaning F21-07 The lock signal for M10 (transfer/sep- The machine stops M10 (transfer/sepa-
abnormality aration cleaning) is not detected when immediately and turns ration cleaning)
more than 25 seconds have passed OFF RL1 (main). ADUDB (ADU drive board)
since the return motion (back to front) PRCB (printer control board)
of M10 has started while re-try process
is in motion after lock detection.
Fan abnor- F22-01 An error for SFAN_EM signal is FM4 (developing suction)
mality detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
passed since FM4 (developing suc-
tion) has turned ON. The error does
not clear after 2 seconds from the
OFF/ON operation.
F22-02 An error for CLEAN_EM signal is FM5 (cleaner cooling)
detected when 2 seconds have ADUDB (ADU drive board)
passed since FM5 (cleaner cooling) PRCB (printer control board)
has turned ON. The error does not
clear after 2 seconds from the OFF/ON
operation.
Main body
turned ON.
F23-03 An error for DRUM_EM signal is M2 (drum)
detected when more than 3 seconds PRCB (printer control board)
have passed since M2 (drum) has
turned ON.
4 PCL connec- E23-04 Failure of PCL connection is detected. PCL
tion abnor- (7255/
mality 7272)
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
High-voltage F28-01 5 consecutive charging ON/OFF oper- The machine stops HV (high-voltage unit)
power error ations have been executed since the immediately and turns
charging error detection signal has OFF RL1 (main).
been detected while charging is turned
ON.
F28-02 5 consecutive transfer ON/OFF oper-
ations have been executed since the
transfer error detection signal has
been detected while transfer is turned
ON.
F28-03 5 consecutive separation ON/OFF
operations have been executed since
the separation error detection signal
has been detected while separation is
turned ON.
Process F29-01 Dirt correction failure of the Dmax sen- TSCB (toner control
abnormality sor during maximum density adjust- sensor board)
ment. If this error is detected 10 PRCB (printer control board)
successive times, the error code is dis-
Main Unit
played.
F29-03 Control patches are not output while TSCB (toner control
Dmax correction is in process. sensor board)
(No output from the Dmax sensor.) PRCB (printer control board)
F29-04 Dirt correction failure of the γ sensor
during γ adjustment. If this error is
detected 10 successive times, the
error code is displayed.
F29-05 Control patches are not output while γ No error code is dis-
correction is in process. played on the operation
(No output from the γ sensor.) panel. The code is reg-
F29-06 A recurrence error occurred when istered in data collec-
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Process F29-08 The dot diameter correction ended No error code is dis- TCSB (toner control
abnormality with error value. played on the opera- sensor board)
tion panel. The code is PRCB (printer control board)
registered in data col-
lection, list output and
KRDS. Main body con-
trol is performed using
previous data.
Fan abnor- F32-01 An error for SUC_EM signal is The machine stops FM3 (conveyance
mality detected when 2 seconds have immediately and turns suction)
passed since FM3 (conveyance suc- OFF RL1 (main). ADUDB (ADU drive board)
tion) has turned ON. The error does PRCB (printer control board)
not clear after 2 seconds from the
OFF/ON operation.
F32-02 An error for FIXFAN1_EM signal is FM8 (main cooling /2)
(7155/ detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
7165) passed since FM8 (main unit cooling /
2) has turned ON. The error does not
clear after 2 seconds from the OFF/ON
operation.
4 F32-02 An error for FIXFAN3_EM signal is FM6 (paper exit fan /F)
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Motor abnor- F33-01 Error detection signal is detected con- The machine stops M5 (conveyance)
mality tinuously for 1 second when 2 seconds immediately and turns PRCB (printer control board)
have passed since M5 (conveyance) OFF RL1 (main).
has turned ON.
High fixing F34-01 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) detects PRCB (printer control board)
temperature more than 220°C for five consecutive DCPS (DC power supply unit)
abnormality times in 1 second cycle. L2 (fixing heater lamp/1)
F34-02 The output voltage of TH1 (fixing tem- L3 (fixing heater lamp/2)
perature /1) and TH2 (fixing tempera- TH1 (fixing temperature /1)
ture /2) is detected as abnormally high TH2 (fixing temperature /2)
at the comparator circuit (more than
228°C). WARNING
Low fixing F35-01 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) has not • When F-34-∗∗, F35-
temperature reached the predefined temperature ∗∗ or F-36∗∗(Fixing
abnormality when the specified time has passed temperature
since the fixing ON control has been related abnormal-
processed after SW2 (sub power) is ity) occurs, be
turned on. sure to repair a
defective part
F35-02 TH1 (fixing temperature /1) detects
before setting the
less than 120°C for 5 consecutive
25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.
times in 1 second cycle while the fixing
If the 25 DIPSW 3-1
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Fan abnor- F42-01 An error for EM signal is detected The machine stops FM9 (scanner cooling)
mality when 2 seconds have passed since immediately and turns SCDB (scanner drive board)
FM9 (scanner cooling) has turned ON. OFF RL1 (main). PRCB (printer control board)
The error does not clear after 2 sec-
onds from the OFF/ON operation.
F42-02 An error for WRFAN1_EM signal is FM2 (write section cooling)
detected when 2 seconds have PRCB (printer control board)
passed since FM2 (write section cool-
ing) has turned ON. The error does not
clear after 2 seconds from the OFF/ON
operation.
Image control E46-01 During image write, APC cannot be If copy operation is Write section
abnormality performed for sub-scanning beam cor- being performed, the ICB (image control
rection. machine stops after board) power connector
The 12 VDC power for driving the laser paper ejection.
is not supplied. RL1 (main) is turned
The laser does not turn ON due to OFF.
defective laser, or MPC value is differ-
ent.
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Image control E46-13 During image read, image data com- If copy operation is PRCB (printer control board)
abnormality pression from the scanner to the mem- being performed, the ICB (image control board)
ory is not completed within the machine stops after
specified time. Image data decom- paper ejection.
pression from the scanner to the page RL1 (main) is turned
memory is not completed within the OFF.
specified time. SVV is not detected
within the specified time.
E46-14 During image read, image data
decompression from the memory to
the printer is not completed within the
specified time. Image data output from
the page memory to the printer is not
completed within the specified time.
PVV is not detected within the speci-
fied time.
E46-15 During image write, improper process- ICB (image control board)
ing was performed. For example, the ICB program
decompression device was accessed
although there was no resource.
E46-16 During image read, improper process-
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Image control E46-24 Shading correction error (GA error) If copy operation is ICB (image control board)
abnormality being performed, the ICB program
E46-25 AOC/AGC error machine stops after ADB (A/D conversion board)
• The light blocking cover and lens paper ejection. L1 (exposure lamp)
cover are removed from the scanner RL1 (main) is turned
section. OFF.
• The A/D converter board connector
is disconnected.
• The power cable of A/D converter
board is disconnected.
• The IC protector on the A/D con-
verter board is blown out.
• The exposure lamp intensity is
excessive.
• The exposure lamp does not light.
E46-26 Correction data saved on a resolution Error code is not dis- ICB (image control board)
basis is not found. played on the operation
E46-27 The density correction γ curve cannot panel. It is displayed
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Image control F46-40 Hard disk initialization abnormality The machine stops ICB (image control board)
abnormality Hard disk failure, or poor connection of immediately and RL1 ICB program
connectors (main) turns OFF. HDD (hard disk drive)
F46-41 Job information could not be stored on
the hard disk.
F46-42 A route could not be opened during
hard disk job automatic deletion.
F46-43 Hard disk access failure
Hard disk failure or poor connection of
connectors
F46-50 Communication error is detected dur- ICB (image control board)
ing the tandem operation. ICB program
F46-51 An error is detected during the data Around the tandem cable
transfer of tandem image.
F46-60 Adjustment of the sub-scan beam Error code is not dis- Write section
interval is not completed within the played on the operation
specified number of time for the follow- panel. It is displayed
ing reason: only in data collection,
• Defective index sensor list output, and KRDS.
• Abnormal 12 VDC power supply
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Image control E46-91 The header read address is illegal.
If copy operation is ICB (image control board)
abnormality E46-99 E-RDH memory initialization error being performed, the MU-401/402
E-RDH memory may not be connected machine stops after
properly. paper ejection.
RL1 (main) is turned
Communica- E49-01 IP-511 connection was confirmed, but IP-511 system board
OFF.
tion abnor- it does not operate normally.
mality E49-02 Transmission from IP-511 to ICB
(Image control board) failed.
E49-03 Direct Memory Access error
E49-04 IP-511 builtin HDD error. IP-511 HDD
E49-05 IP-511 cooling fan lock error. IP-511 cooling fan
motor
E50-01 Main body drive serial input error 1. The machine stops PRCB (printer control board)
Serial data is not received from the immediately. RL1
main body drive section within 0.5 sec- (main) is turned OFF.
ond after reception of power-on ACK.
E50-02 Main body drive serial input error 2.
Serial data is not received from the
main body drive section within 0.5 sec-
ond after reception of power-on ACK.
Main body
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Fan abnor- F52-01 FM13 (power supply cooling) EM sig- The machine stops FM13 (power supply cooling)
mality nal was abnormal 2 seconds after immediately. RL1 DCPS (DC power supply unit)
turning ON FM13. 2 seconds after (main) is turned OFF.
turning FM13 OFF and ON again, the
signal is still abnormal.
F52-02 The MAINFAN_EM signal was abnor- FM1 (main body cooling /1)
mal 2 seconds after turning ON FM1 PRCB (printer control board)
(main body cooling /1). 2 seconds after
Main body
seconds after turning ON FM301. 2 (main) is turned OFF. veyance motor cooling)
seconds after turning FM301 OFF and
ON again, an abnormal detection sig-
nal is detected.
FS-110/210 E70-1 Communication error The machine and the FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality E70-2 Start response error. finisher stop immedi- Connector
ately and RL1 (main) is
4 FS-110/210/ F77-1 After M702 (shift) starts operation, the FNSCB (FNS control board)
turned OFF.
111 (FS-110/ shift unit does not reach the shift posi- M702 (shift)
SF-101 210/111) tion or the HP within the specified time. PS718 (shift HP)
abnormality F77-1 PS702 (shift HP) does not turn ON The SF/main body SFCB (SF control board)
F77-2 After M703 (tray up/down) starts oper- OFF. FNSCB (FNS control board)
(FS-110/ ation, PS702 (tray upper limit) or M703 (tray up/down)
210/111) PS707 (stapler paper exit upper limit) PS702 (tray upper limit)
does not turn ON within the specified PS707 (stapler paper
time. exit upper limit)
F77-2 The machine and FNS stop immedi- SFCB (SF control board)
(SF-101) ately. RL (main) is turned OFF. M702 (tray up/down)
PS703 (tray upper limit)
PS704 (tray lower limit)
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
4 FS-110/210/ F77-3 After M705 (alignment /U) starts oper- The machine and the FNSCB (FNS control board)
111 ation, PS708 (alignment HP/U) does finisher stop immedi- RB (relay board)
abnormality not turn OFF within the specified time, ately and RL1 (main) is M705 (alignment /U)
or does not turns ON after OFF. turned OFF. PS708 (alignment HP/U)
F77-4 After M707 (paper feed roller) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, it does not reach the pre- M707 (paper exit roller)
scribed speed within the specified
time.
F77-5 After M708 (paper exit opening) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, its open/close operation M708 (paper exit opening)
does not finish within the specified PS712 (paper exit opening HP)
time.
PS712 (paper exit opening HP) does
not turn ON or OFF.
F77-6 After M711 (stapler movement) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
operation, PS711 (stapler movement RB (relay board)
HP) does not turn OFF, or does not M711 (stapler movement)
turn ON after OFF. PS711 (stapler move-
ment HP)
4 FS-110/210 F77-7 After M704 (clincher rotation) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality operation, PS714 (clincher rotation RB (relay board)
HP) does not turn OFF, or does not M704 (clincher rotation)
FNS
F77-11 After M714 (stapler /F) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
(FS-110/ tion, PS731 (stapler HP/F) does not RB (relay board)
210) turn ON within the specified time. M714 (stapler /F)
PS731 (stapler HP/F)
F77-11 After M724 (stapler /F) starts opera- FNS CB (FNS control board)
(FS-111) tion, PS734 (stapler HP/F) does not M724 (stapler /F)
turn ON within the predefined time. PS734 (stapler HP/F)
F77-12 After M709 (stapler /R) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
(FS-110/ tion, PS730 (stapler HP/R) does not RB (relay board)
210) turn ON within the specified time. M709 (stapler /R)
PS730 (stapler HP/R)
F77-12 After M722 (stapler /R) starts opera- FNS CB (FNS control board)
(FS-111) tion, PS731 (stapler HP/R) does not M722 (stapler /R)
turn ON within the predefined time. PS731 (stapler HP/R)
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
FS-110/210 F77-13 After M715 (clincher /F) starts opera- The machine and the FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality tion, PS733 (clincher HP/F) does not finisher stop immedi- RB (relay board)
turn ON within the specified time. ately and RL1 (main) is M715 (clincher /F)
turned OFF. PS733 (clincher HP/F)
F77-14 After M710 (clincher /R) starts opera- FNSCB (FNS control board)
tion, PS732 (clincher HP/R) does not M710 (clincher /R)
turn ON within the specified time. PS732 (clincher HP/R)
F-77-15 M1 (FNS conveyance) does not reach FNS CB (FNS control board)
the prescribed speed within the spec- M1(FNS conveyance)
ified time after the start of its operation.
4 FS-210 F77-21 After M718 (folding stopper) starts FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality operation, PS723 (folding stopper HP) RB (relay board)
does not turn ON within the specified M718 (folding stopper)
time. PS723 (folding stopper HP)
F77-22 After M716 (alignment /L) starts oper- FNSCB (FNS control board)
ation, PS724 (alignment HP/L) does RB (relay board)
not turn ON within the specified time. M716 (alignment /L)
PS724 (alignment /L)
F77-25 PS22(folding knife HP) does not go FNS CB (FNS control board)
ON within the specified time after M19 (folding knife)
M19(folding knife) starts operation of PS22 (folding knife HP)
HP detection.
FNS
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
4 PZ-108/109 F77-46 EM signal abnormality is detected The machine and the RB (relay board)
Akit abnor- within the specified time after FM701 finisher stop immedi- FNSCB (FNS control board)
mality (stacker fan) is turned ON. ately and RL1 (main) is FM701 (stacker fan)
FNS/PK-120 F77-47 Communication abnormality occurred turned OFF. RB (relay board)
abnormality between FNS and PK-120. Abnormal- FNSCB (FNS control board)
ity remains even when retry operation PKDB (PK drive board)
is executed four times.
PZ-108/109 F77-52 PS3 (1st stopper HP) does not turn PZCB (PZ control board)
abnormality ON within the specified time after M2 M2 (1st stopper)
(1st stopper) has searched the HP. PS3 (1st stopper HP)
F77-53 PS2 (2nd stopper HP) does not turn PZCB (PZ control board)
ON within the specified time after M3 M3 (2nd stopper)
(2nd stopper) has searched the HP. PS2 (2nd stopper HP)
PK-110/120 F77-54 After MC801 (punch) starts operation, FNSCB (FNS control board)
abnormality PS801 (punch HP) does not turn ON PKDB (PK drive board)
within the specified time. M801 (punch)
PS801 (punch HP)
PZ-108/109 F77-55 PS4 (punch shift HP) does not turn ON M5 (punch shift)
abnormality within the specified time after M5 PS4 (punch shift HP)
(punch shift) has started to search the PZCB (PZ control board)
HP.
F77-56 Abnormality is found in EM signal of M10 (conveyance motor fan)
FNS
Warning Estimated
Classification Cause Machine response
Code abnormal parts
Communica- E80-01 No response from PRCB (printer con- The machine stops PRCB (printer control board)
tion abnor- trol board) for 5 seconds after SW2 immediately and RL1
mality (sub power) is turned ON. (main) is turned OFF.
E80-02 Communication abnormality in PRCB PRCB (printer control board)
(printer control board).
E80-03 Communication abnormality in opera- OB1 (operation board /1)
tion unit.
ISW abnor- F80-11 When SW2 (sub power) was turned PRCB program
mality ON, an area which had not been writ-
ten by ISW was detected in the printer
control program.
F80-30 When data is transferred by ISW, nor- Printer cable
mal header information cannot be PC parallel port
received within the specified time.
F80-31 When data is transferred by ISW, a Printer cable
checksum error or header error was Program file error
detected in the downloaded data.
F80-32 When data is transferred by ISW, data Printer cable
cannot be written to the flash ROM Program transfer
properly. destination board
Main body
For the following abnormalities, the user can disconnect the faulty unit temporarily to continue using the
machine.
When an abnormality occurs, press the reset button following the LCD message, and turn the SW2 (sub
power) OFF/ON. This allows temporary use of machine until the SW2 (sub power) is turned OFF/ON next
time.
Warning code Cause Unit to be disconnected
F18-10 Tray 1 up drive motor abnormality
Tray 1
F18-11 Tray 1 up abnormality
F18-20 Tray 2 up drive motor abnormality
Tray 2
F18-21 Tray 2 up abnormality
F18-30 Tray 3 up drive motor abnormality
Tray 3
F18-31 Tray 3 up abnormality
4 F18-40 Tray 4 up drive motor abnormality
Tray 4 (7255/7272)
F18-41 Tray 4 up abnormalityj
F13-02 LCT paper feed motor abnormality
LCT
F18-50 LCT UP/DOWN motor abnormality
F46-40 to 43 HDD abnormality HDD
F62-01 DF motor cooling fan abnormality RADF
F77-22,25,26 Fold, stitch and fold, three-fold abnormality Fold, stitch and fold, three-fold
F71-41 to 43 PI abnormality PI
F77-46,52,53 Stacker fan, PZ folding abnormality Z-folding
F77-44,47,55 PK, PZ punch shift motor abnormality PK, PZ
5 FOR THE PAGE ADJUST-
M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
M5 Conveyance motor
H
M6 Loop roller motor
L
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
TIMING CHART
H
[1] 7165 Timing Chart (1)
Reverse/ L
M8 exit motor
F
R
H
L
M9 ADU reverse motor
F
R
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC2 ADU deceleration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1
5-48
MC4 Pre-registration MC/1
Charge
Transfer
Separation
A4, life size, 1-1 mode, Tray 1, reversed paper exit, non AE, 2 sets
HV
Developing bias
Paper guide plate
Toner guide roller
SD1 Separation claw SD
SD7 Reverse gate SD
H
Reverse paper L
M8 exit motor
F
R
H
A4, life size, 1-2 mode, Tray 1, 2 sets
L
M9 ADU reverse motor
F
R
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC2 ADU deceleration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1 Loop Loop
5-49
MC4 Pre-registration MC/1
Charge
Transfer
Separation
HV
Developing bias
Paper guide plate
Toner guide roller
SD1 Separation claw SD
SD7 Reverse gate SD
Stop print
TIMING CHART
4
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MODEL
Drum motor
TIMING CHART
M2
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
7155/7165/7255/7272
M5 Conveyance motor
H
M6 Loop roller motor
L
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
H
L
[3] 7272 Timing Chart (1)
M8 Reverse/exit motor
F
R
H
L
MANUAL
M9 ADU reverse motor
F
R
SERVICE MANUAL
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC2 ADU deceleration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1
MC4 Pre-registration MC/1
MC15 Horizontal conveyance MC/L
MC16 Horizontal conveyance MC/R
4
PCL Pre-charging exposure lamp
Charge
Transfer
Separation
HV
REVISED EDITION
Developing bias
A4, life size, 1-1 mode, Tray1, face-up paper exit, non AE, 2 sets
DATE
PS1 Paper feed PS/1
Dec. 2003
PS5 Horizontal conveyance PS/L
PS6 Horizontal conveyance PS/R
PS36 Loop PS
PS44 Registration PS
PS43 Leading edge PS
5-49-1
PAGE
PS30 Fixing exit PS
PS42 Paper reverse PS
PS46 Reversed/exit PS6
PS45 ADU paper reverse PS
PS48 ADU paper conveyance PS/2
PS49 ADU deceleration PS
PS50 ADU pre-registration PS
PS37 Paper exit PS
7272fs5019
METHOD
START button ON Stop print
ADDITION
4
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MODEL
M1 Paper feed motor
M2 Drum motor
M3 Developing motor
M4 Fixing motor
7155/7165/7255/7272
M5 Conveyance motor
H
M6 Loop roller motor
L
H
M7 Paper exit motor
L
H
[4] 7272 Timing Chart (2)
L
M8 Reverse/exit motor
F
R
H
MANUAL
L
M9 ADU reverse motor
A4, life size, 1-2 mode, Tray1, 2 sets
F
R
SERVICE MANUAL
F
M11 Scanner motor
R
MC1 Registration MC
MC2 ADU deceleration MC
MC3 Paper feed MC/1
MC4 Pre-registration MC/1
MC15 Horizontal conveyance MC/L
MC16 Horizontal conveyance MC/R
4
PCL Pre-charging exposure lamp
Charge
Transfer
REVISED EDITION
Separation
HV
Developing bias
Paper guide plate
Toner guide roller
SD1 Separation claw SD
SD7 Reverse gate SD
DATE
Dec. 2003
PS1 Paper feed PS/1
PS5 Horizontal conveyance PS/L
PS6 Horizontal conveyance PS/R
PS36 Loop PS
PS44 Registration PS
5-49-2
PAGE
PS43 Leading edge PS
PS30 Fixing exit PS
PS42 Paper reverse PS
PS46 Reversed/exit PS6
PS45 ADU paper reverse PS
PS48 ADU paper conveyance PS/2
PS49 ADU deceleration PS
PS50 ADU pre-registration PS
PS37 Paper exit PS
METHOD
ADDITION
7272fs5020
START button ON Stop print
TIMING CHART
MODEL
TIMING CHART
7155/7165/7255/7272
A4, 3 originals (single side)
MANUAL
PS304 Original registration PS/1
PS305 Original registration PS/2
SERVICE MANUAL
PS306 Original conveyance PS
[5] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (1)
640mm/s
F
320mm/s
M301 Original feed motor
320mm/s
4
R
400mm/s
640mm/s
M302 Original conveyance motor F
320mm/s
REVISED EDITION
SD301 Reverse gate SD
SD303 Pressure roller release SD
SD302 Exit gate SD
V-VALID signal
DATE
Last original ejected
Dec. 2003
START button Scanning the 3rd original
ON Scanning the 2nd original
Scanning the 1st original
5-50
PAGE
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
4
MODEL
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Items 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A4, 3 originals (double side)
MANUAL
PS305 Original registration PS/2
PS306 Original conveyance PS
SERVICE MANUAL
PS303 Original exit PS
[6] DF-316/DF-322 Timing Chart (2)
640mm/s
F
320mm/s
M301 Original feed moter
320mm/s
R
400mm/s
4
640mm/s
M302 Original conveyance motor F
320mm/s
SD301 Reverse gate SD
SD303 Pressure roller release SD
REVISED EDITION
SD302 Exit gate SD
V-VALID signal
START button ON Scanning the back side of Scanning the front side of Scanning the back side of Scanning the front side of Scanning the back side of Scanning the front Last original
DATE
the 1st original the 1st original the 2nd original the 2nd original the 3rd original side of the 3rd ejected
Dec. 2003
original
5-51
PAGE
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
TIMING CHART
Loop Loop
5-52
MC1 Registration MC
PS36 Loop PS
PS44 Registration PS
START button ON
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4
Symbol
Items
PS704 FNS entrance PS
670mm/s
M701 FNS conveyance
400mm/s
M702 Shift motor
PS718 Shift HP PS
A
SD704 Paper exit SD
253mm/s
M707 Paper exit roller motor
400mm/s
PS706 Main tray exit PS
Sort, A4, 2 originals (single side), 3 sets
[8] FS-110/FS-210 TIming Chart (1)
Start signal for FNS ON 1st paper of 1st set 2nd paper of 1st set 1st paper of 2nd set
5-53
5 6 7 8 Time (sec) Symbol
Items
FNS entrance PS PS704
670mm/s
FNS conveyance M701
400mm/s
Shift motor M702
Shift HP PS PS718
Paper exit SD SD704
253mm/s
A Paper exit roller motor M707
400mm/s
Main tray exit PS PS706
Tray upper limit PS PS702
UP
Tray up/down motor M703
DOWN
2nd paper of 2nd set 1st paper of 3rd set 2nd paper of 3rd set
TIMING CHART
Time (sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5
Symbol Items
PS704 FNS entrance PS
TIMING CHART
280mm/s
PS707 Stapler paper exit upper limit
UP
M703 Tray up/down motor
DOWN
Stat signal for FNS ON 1st paper of 1st set 2nd paper of 1st set 1st paper of 2nd set
5-54
6 7 8 9 10 11 Time (sec)
Items Symbol
FNS entrance PS PS704
670mm/s FNS conveyance M701
2 staples (flat), A4, 2 originals (single side), 6 sheets (single side)
Start signal for FNS ON 1st paper of 1st set 2nd paper of 1st set 3rd paper of 1st set
5-55
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Time (sec) Symbol
Items
FNS entrance PS PS704
FNS conveyance M701
Stacker entrance PS PS705
670mm/s
Stacker entrance motor M713
Stitch and fold, A4, 2 originals (single side), 6 sheets (single side)
500mm/s
Alignment HP PS/U PS708
CLOSE
Alignment motor/U M705
OPEN
Alignment HP PS/L PS724
CLOSE
Alignment motor/L M716
OPEN
A
Stapler,Clincher motor/F M714
M715
Stapler,Clincher motor/R M709
M710
Stopper HP PS PS723
DOWN
Folding stopper motor M718
UP
400mm/s
Folding conveyance motor M720
80mm/s
Folding exit PS PS725
Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP PS M722
Folding passage HP PS PS726
Paper exit HP PS PS712
Paper exit motor M708
1st paper of 2nd set 2nd paper of 2nd set 3rd paper of 2nd set
TIMING CHART
Time(sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Symbol Items
M707 Paper exit roller motor
PS709 Paper exit belt HP PS
PS704 FNS entrance PS
M712 Gate drive motor
MODEL
TIMING CHART
CLOSE
M705 Alignment motor/U
OPEN
CLOSE
M716 Alignment motor/L
OPEN
PS705 Stacker entrance PS
670 /s
M713 Stacker entrance motor
500 /s
PS726 Folding passage PS
M719 Folding knife motor
PS722 Folding knife HP PS
M701 FNS conveyance motor
MANUAL
DOWN
M718 Stopper motor
UP
[11] FS-110/FS-210 Timing Chart (4)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Time(sec)
Items Symbol
Paper exit roller motor M707
REVISED EDITION
Paper exit belt HP PS PS709
Three-folding/A4R/3 sheets of originals/2 sets setting/single side
DATE
CLOSE
Alignment motor/L M716
Nov. 2001
OPEN
Stacker entrance PS PS705
670 /s
Stacker entrance motor M713
500 /s
5-56
PS726
PAGE
Folding passage PS
Folding knife motor M719
Folding knife HP PS PS722
FNS conveyance motor M701
DOWN
Stopper motor M718
UP
Three-folding gate SD SD706
Folding conveyance motor M720
METHOD
Folding exit PS PS725
ADDITION
MODEL
[12] PI-110 Timing Chart
Time(sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Symbol Items
253mm/s
M203 PI conveyance MC/L
MANUAL
670mm/s
MC202 Conveyance MC/L
M202 Tray up/down motor/L
PS209 Tray upper limit/L
REVISED EDITION
M712 Gate drive motor
M701 FNS conveyance motor
M713 Stacker entrance motor
M707 Paper exit roller motor
PS709 Paper exit motor HP PS
DATE
May 2002
Start signal for FNS ON
PAGE
5-56-1
PI automatic paper feed (bottom) /2 staples (flat) /A4/2 sheets of original/2 sets setting/single side
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART
MODEL
TIMING CHART
Time(sec) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
[13] PK-110 Timing Chart
Symbol Items
PS37 Paper exit PS
M712 Gate drive motor PS
PS704 FNS entrance Ps
MANUAL
M801 Punch motor
PS801 Punch HP PS
REVISED EDITION
PS706 Main tray paper exit PS
DATE
Start signal for FNS ON
Nov. 2001
PAGE
5-56-2
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART
(GY:38pin)
(W:8pin)
63
68
(W:3pin) (GY:9pin)
(W:15pin)
66
70
67
(W:2pin)
64
(W:5pin)
69
65
MODEL
TIMING CHART
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time(sec)
Symbol 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Item
- Ejection signal from main body
68ms loop 68ms loop 68ms loop
MANUAL
- Paper edge sensor(leading and trailing edge)
[15] PZ-108/PZ-109 Timing Chart
SERVICE MANUAL
370mm/s
PS8 Exit PS
4
- FNS entrance PS
REVISED EDITION
MC1 Punch MC Punch Punch Punch
M7 Punch scraps conveyance motor
SD1 Gate SD/L
SD2 Gate SD/U
DATE
Dec. 2003
5-56-4
PAGE
7272fs5036
METHOD
ADDITION
4
MODEL
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MANUAL
PS18 Roller shift HP PS
M2 Roller shift motor
SERVICE MANUAL
SD4 Paper exit opening solenoid
PS6 Paper exit 1 PS
PS10 Paper exit 2 PS
PS7 Staple paper exit upper limit PS
PS2 Tray upper limit PS
UP
M3 Tray up-down motor
DOWN
SD5 By-pass solenoid
4
M5 Alignment plate/upper motor
M15 Alignment plate/kower motor
PS8 Alignment plate/upper HP PS
M21,22 Stapler/R
REVISED EDITION
M23,24 Stapler/F
M11 Stapler movement motor
M4 Stapler rotation motor
M13 Stacker entrance motor
PS5 Stacker conveyance passage PS
DATE
SD1 Gate solenoid
Dec. 2003
5-56-5
PAGE
7272fs5029
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART
MODEL
TIMING CHART
7155/7165/7255/7272
Time (sec) (sec)
Symbol Item 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MANUAL
PS18 Roller shift HP PS
M2 Roller shift motor
SERVICE MANUAL
SD4 Paper exit opening solenoid
PS6 Paper exit 1 PS
PS10 Paper exit 2 PS
PS7 Staple paper exit upper limit PS
PS2 Tray upper limit PS
UP
M3 Tray up-down motor
DOWN
SD5 By-pass solenoid
4
M5 Alignment plate/upper motor
M15 Alignment plate/kower motor
PS8 Alignment plate/upper HP PS
M21,22 Stapler/R
REVISED EDITION
M23,24 Stapler/F
M11 Stapler movement motor
M4 Stapler rotation motor
M13 Stacker entrance motor
PS5 Stacker conveyance passage PS
DATE
SD1 Gate solenoid
Dec. 2003
5-56-6
PAGE
7272fs5030
METHOD
ADDITION
4
MODEL
7155/7165/7255/7272
[18] SF-101 Timing Chart
????????
MANUAL
????????
PS701 Conveyance PS
SERVICE MANUAL
680mm/s
M701 Conveyance motor
200mm/s
UP
M702 Tray up/down motor
DOWN
4
PS703 Tray upper limit PS
PS702 Shift HP PS
REVISED EDITION
START button ON
DATE
Dec. 2003
5-56-7
PAGE
7272fs5021
METHOD
ADDITION
TIMING CHART
Blank page
4
CN661-5
CN200B-8 CN611-A1 (DF_M1_CLK) P CN614-A6 (24V)
CN661-2
CN200B-7 CN611-A2 (DF_M1_F/R) P CN614-A5 (24V)
CN661-4
CN200B-6 CN611-A3 (DF_M1_EN) H P CN614-A2 (A)
CN661-6 ORIGINAL FEED MOTOR
CN200B-2 CN611-A4 (DF_M1_M1) L P CN614-A3 (A)
M301
CN661-3
CN200B-4 CN611-A5 (DF_M1_M2) L P CN614-B11 (B)
CN661-1
CN200B-3 CN611-A6 (DF_M1_I1) P
P CN614-B10 (B)
CN200B-1 CN611-A7 (DF_M1_I2) P
CN660-5
CN200B-8 CN611-A8 (DF_M2_CLK) P CN614-A8 (24V)
CN660-2
CN200B-7 CN611-A9 (DF_M2_F/R) P CN614-A7 (24V)
CN660-4
CN200B-6 CN611-A10 (DF_M2_EN) H P CN614-B1 (A)
CN660-6 ORIGINAL CONVEYANCE MOTOR
CN200B-2 CN611-A11 (DF_M2_M1) L P CN614-A11 (A)
M302
CN660-3
CN200B-4 CN611-A12 (DF_M2_M2) L P CN614-A10 (B)
CN660-1
CN200B-3 CN611-A13 (DF_M2_I1) P P CN614-A9 (B)
CN200B-1 CN611-A14 (DF_M2_I2) P
[1] DF-316/DF-322 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN691-7 CN666-1
CN200B-8 CN611-A15 (DF_M2_MOI) H CN614-B3 (24V)
CN691-8 CN666-2 REVERSE GATE SOLENOID
CN200B-7 CN611-A16 (DF_FAN_CONT) H H CN614-B9 (DRIVE)
SD301
CN691-5 CN665-1
CN200B-2 CN611-A18 (DF_SD2_CONT) H CN614-B4 (24V)
CN691-6 CN665-2 EXIT GATE SOLENOID
SD302
CN691-2 CN663-1
CN200B-4 CN611-B6 (PS305_SIG) H CN614-A4 (P.G)
CN200B-3 CN611-B7 (PS306_SIG) H
CN662-2
CN200B-1 CN611-B8 (PS307_SIG) H CN614-B2 (24V)
CN662-1 ORIGINAL FEED CLUTCH
CN200B-8 CN611-B9 (PS308_SIG) H H CN614-B6 (DRIVE)
MC301
CN690-3 CN677-3
CN200B-4 CN611-B13 CN612-B7 (S.G)
CN200B-3 CN611-B14 (PS311_SIG) L
CN681-1
CN200B-1 CN611-B15 (DF_FAN_SC_SIG) H CN612-B12 (5V)
CN681-2 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR
CN200B-8 CN611-B16 (DF_M_RESET) H H CN612-B11(SIG)
PS302
CN681-3
CN200B-7 CN611-B17 (S.G) CN612-B10(S.G)
CN200B-6 CN611-B18 (3.3V)
CN682-1
CN200B-2 CN611-B19 (VR301_SIG) CN612-B15 (5V)
* CN682-2 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
CN200B-4 CN611-B20 (S.G2) H CN612-B14(SIG)
PS303
CN682-3
CN612-B13(S.G)
H CN615-1 (24V)
COVER OPEN/CLOSE MS
MS301
H CN615-2 (24V)
MODEL
CN672-1
CN613-7 (5V)
CN672-2
L CN613-6 (SIG) ADF OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
PS311
CN672-3
SCDB
7155/7165/7255/7272
CN613-5 (S.G)
CN693-2 CN679-1
CN613-2 (3.3V)
MAIN BODY
CN693-3 CN679-2
CN613-3 (SIG) ORIGINAL SIZE VR
VR301
CN693-1 CN679-3
(S.G)
* CN613-4
CN692-4 CN680-1
CN612-A3 (5V)
CN680-2
MANUAL
CN692-5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR/2
H CN612-A2 (SIG)
PS309
(1)
CN692-6 CN680-3
CN612-A1 (S.G)
SERVICE MANUAL
Crimp
CN692-1 CN678-1
CN612-A6 (5V)
CN692-2 CN678-2
H CN612-A5 (SIG) ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR/1
PS310
CN692-3 CN678-3
CN612-A4 (S.G)
[Symbol]
L Low level
H High level
Connector
[How to see the diagram]
50-1
P Pulse signal
CN694-1 CN670-1
4
CN612-A9 (5V)
the main switch turned ON.
CN694-3 CN670-3
CN612-A7 (S.G)
under normal idling conditions with
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
CN695-1 CN675-1
REVISED REVISION
1.The signals shown reflect levels present
CN612-A12 (5V)
Faston
CN695-2 CN675-2
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
CN695-3 CN675-3
CN612-A10(S.G)
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
DATE
CN674-1
Dec. 2003
CN612-A15 (5V)
CN674-2
H CN612-A14(SIG) ORIGINAL CONVEYANCE SENSOR
CB
PS306
CN674-3
CN612-A13(S.G)
Example)
(4) Signal flow
5-57
PAGE
SGND
PS1
5VDC
CN673-1
CN612-B3 (5V)
CN673-2
H CN612-B2 (SIG) ORIGINAL SKEW SENSOR/F
PS307
CN673-3
(3) RC is the flat cable.
CN612-B1 (S.G)
signal flow
Direction of
the connector symbols ( )
CN676-1
CN612-B6 (5V)
CN676-2
H CN612-B5 (SIG) ORIGINAL SKEW SENSOR/R
The solid black circle ( ) among
PS308
CN676-3
PS1
CN612-B4 (S.G)
METHOD
indicates the direction of signal flow.
REPLACEMENT
[2] LT-402/LT412 Overall Wiring Diagram
751-4 88-4
LT DB 700-2 P_GND
700-2 24V
751-1 88-1
13-17 PGND
13-4 24V
751-3 88-3 DCPS
745-1 700-2 P_GND 13-12 SGND
CN772-3 5V 751-2 88-2
LT LOWER LIMIT 745-2 700-2 5V 13-8 5V
DITECTION SENSOR
PS101 CN772-2 SIG L
745-3 CN772-1 S_GND
780-1 CN722-6 5V
LT RENAINING PAPER 780-2 PRDB
PS102
DITECTION SENSOR 1 780-3
CN772-5 SIG
*
CN772-4 S_GND 750-1-10
710-10 RXD 219-1 IO_DTXD P
750-2-9
781-1 710-9 5V 219-2 5V2
CN772-9 5V 750-3-8
LT RENAINING PAPER 781-2 710-8 CLK_DN 219-3 IO_DCLK P
PS103 CN772-8 SIG
DITECTION SENSOR 2 781-3 *
CN772-7 S_GND
710-7 S_GND
750-4-7
750-5-6
219-4 S_GND
710-6 LATCH_DN 219-5 LCT_LATCH P
750-6-5
782-1 P 710-5 CLK_UP 219-6 IO_UCLK
CN772-12 5V 750-7-4
LT RENAINING PAPER 782-2 710-4 ERR 219-7 ERR_OUT4 P
PS104
DITECTION SENSOR 3 782-3
CN772-11 SIG
*
CN772-10 S_GND
P 710-3 TXD
750-8-3
750-9-2
219-8 IO_URXD
710-2 ACK 219-9 ACK4 P
750-10-1
783-1 P 710-1 REQ 219-10 REQ4
CN772-15 5V
LT RENAINING PAPER 783-2
PS105 CN772-14SIG
DITECTION SENSOR 4 783-3 *
CN772-13 S_GND
740-3 773-8-3
CN721-1 5V
PS106 740-2 773-7-4
LT FEED SENSOR CN721-2 CONV_PS H
740-1 773-1-10
CN721-8 S_GND
PI INTERLOCK MS
MS201
CN200-1
CN57-1 5V
CN57-2 NC
CN200-3
H CN57-3 M203 P/S
CN200-4
P CN57-4 M203 CLK
CN200-5
CN231-A19 CN231-A1 H CN57-5 M203 F/R
CN52-1 24V CN52-A1 24V CN200-6
CN231-A18 CN231-A2 H CN57-6 M203 LD M203 PI CONVEYANCE MOTOR
CN52-2 24V CN52-A2 24V
CN231-A17 CN231-A3 CN57-7 NC
[3] PI-110 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN231-B19 CN231-B1
FNS CB
CN51-B1 MPI_S_IN1_1 CN52-B1 MPI_S_IN1_1 CN251-1
CN231-B18 CN231-B2 CN55-A1 PS201 5V
CN51-B2 MPI_S_IN1_2 CN52-B2 MPI_S_IN1_2 CN203-2
CN231-B17 CN231-B3 L CN55-A9 PS201 IN PS201 PI PASSAGE SENSOR/U
CN51-B3 MPI_S_IN2_1 CN52-B3 MPI_S_IN2_1 CN251-3
CN231-B16 CN231-B4 CN55-B5 PS201 SG
CN51-B4 MPI_S_IN2_2 CN52-B4 MPI_S_IN2_2
CN51-B5 MPI_S_OUT1_1 CN231-B15 CN231-B5
CN52-B5 MPI_S_OUT1_1
CN51-B6 MPI S_OUT1_2 CN231-B14 CN231-B6 CN235-1 CN235-15 CN252-1
CN52-B6 MPI_S_OUT1_2 CN55-A2 PS202 5V
CN51-B7 MPI_S_OUT2_1 CN231-B13 CN231-B7 CN235-6 CN235-10 CN252-2
** CN52-B7 MPI_S_OUT2_1 H CN55-A10 PS202 IN
CN231-B12 CN231-B8 CN235-11 CN235-5 CN252-3
PS202 NO SHEET SENSOR/U
CN51-B8 MPI_S_OUT2_2 CN52-B8 MPI_S_OUT2_2 CN55-B6 PS202 SG
CN51-B9 MPI_OBOUT1_1 CN231-B11 CN231-B9
CN52-B9 MPI_OBOUT1_1
**
CN51-B10 MPI_OBOUT1_2 CN231-B10 CN231-B10 CN235-2 CN235-14 CN253-1
CN52-B10 MPI_OBOUT1_2 CN55-A3 PS203 5V
CN51-B11 SUB OUT 2 CN231-B9 CN231-B11 CN235-7 CN235-9 CN253-2
CN52-B11 MC203 DRV H CN55-A11 PS203 IN PS203 SHEET SET SENSOR/U
CN51-B12 PS201 IN CN231-B8 CN231-B12 CN235-12 CN235-4 CN253-3
CN52-B12 PS201 IN CN55-B7 PS203 SG
CN51-B13 PS206 IN CN231-B7 CN231-B13
CN52-B13 PS206 IN
CN51-B14 VR201 IN CN231-B6 CN231-B14 CN235-3 CN235-13 CN254-1
CN52-B14 VR201 IN CN55-A4 PS205 5V
CN51-B15 VR202 IN CN231-B5 CN231-B15 CN235-8 CN235-8 CN254-2
CN52-B15 VR202 IN H CN55-A12 PS205 IN PS205 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR/U
CN51-B16 NC CN52-B16 NC CN55-B8 PS205 SG CN235-13 CN235-3 CN254-3
CN52-B17 NC 2
CN52-B18 NC CN235-4 CN235-12 CN255-1
CN55-A5 PS204 5V
CN52-B19 NC CN235-9 CN235-7 CN255-2
L CN55-B1 PS204 IN PS204 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/U
CN235-14 CN235-2 CN255-3
CN55-B9 PS204 SG
CN55-A6 NC
CN55-B2 NC
CN55-B10 NC
CN235-5 CN235-11 CN291-1
CN55-A7 VR201 5V
CN235-10 CN235-6 CN291-2
CN55-B3 VR201 IN VR201 SHEET SIZE VR/U
CN235-15 CN235-1 CN291-3
CN55-B11 VR201 SG
*
CN55-B2 NC
CN55-B4 NC
CN55-B12 NC
MODEL
L CN56-2 M202 DRV1 CN206-1
L CN56-1 M202 DRV2 CN206-2 M202 TRAY UP/DOWN MOTOR/L
CN256-1
CN53-A1 PS206 5V
CN256-2
L CN53-A11 PS206 IN PS206 PI PASSAGE SENSOR/L
CN256-3
CN53-B 6 PS206 SG
CN237-1 CN237-3 CN259-1
CN53-A4 PS209 5V
CN237-2 CN237-2 CN259-2
H CN53-A14 PS209 IN PS209 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/L
CN237-3 CN237-1 CN259-3
CN53-B9 PS209 SG
(1)
MANUAL
L CN53-A15 PS210 IN PS210 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR/L
CN236-3 CN236-1 CN260-3
CN53-B10 PS210 SG
Crimp
L Low level
CN53-A3 PS208 5V
Connector
[How to see the diagram]
P Pulse signal
CN53-A6 PS211 NC
CN53-B1 PS211 NC
2
CN53-B11 PS211 NC
under normal idling conditions with
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
CN53-B12 PS212 SG
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
CN53-A8 PS213 NC
REVISED REVISION
CN53-B3 PS213 NC
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
CN53-B13 PS213 NC
*
CB
May 2002
CN53-A10 NC
Example)
CN53-B5 NC
(4) Signal flow
CN53-B15 NC
SGND
PS1
5VDC
CN232-1 CN299-1
CN58-1 5V
5-59
CN232-2 CN299-2
PAGE
CN58-2 LED1
(3) RC is the flat cable.
CN232-3 CN299-3
CN58-3 LED2
CN232-4 CN299-4
CN58-4 LED3
CN232-5 CN299-5
signal flow
CN58-5 LED4
Direction of
CN232-6 CN299-6
CN58-6 LED5
the connector symbols ( )
CN232-7 CN299-7
CN58-7 LED6
PIOB
CN232-8 CN299-8
CN58-8 LED7
CN232-9 CN299-9
H CN58-9 SW201 IN
The solid black circle ( ) among
CN232-10 CN299-10
H CN58-10 SW202 IN
CN232-11 CN299-11
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
H CN58-11 SW203 IN
CN232-12 CN299-12
CN58-12 SG
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
[4] PK-110 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN62-A1 5V CN63-A1 5V
CN62-A2 5V CN63-A2 5V
CN62-A3 NC CN63-A3 NC
L CN65-1 M801 DRV1 CN551-1
CN62-A4 NC CN63-A4 NC
L CN65-2 M801 DRV2 CN551-2 M801 PUNCH MOTOR
CN62-A5 NC CN63-A5 NC
CN62-A6 NC CN63-A6 NC
CN62-A7 NC CN63-A7 NC
CN62-A8 NC CN63-A8 NC
CN501-1
CN62-A9 NC CN63-A9 NC CN65-3 PS801 5V
CN501-2
CN62-A10 NC CN63-A10 NC L CN65-4 PS801 IN PS801 PUNCH HP SENSOR
CN501-3
CN62-A11 NC CN63-A11 NC CN65-5 PS801 SG
CN62-A12 NC CN63-A12 NC
CN62-A13 NC CN63-A13 NC
CN62-A14 PS801 IN CN63-A14 PS801 IN L
CN62-A15 NC CN63-A15 NC
CN62-A16 NC CN63-A16 NC CN531-1 CN531-6 CN502-1
CN66-1 PS802 5V
CN62-A17 PS802 IN CN63-A17 PS802 IN H CN531-3 CN531-4 CN502-2 PUNCH SCRAPS
H CN66-4 PS802 IN PS802
CN62-A18 PS804 IN CN63-A18 PS804 IN H
CN66-7 PS802 SG CN531-5 CN531-2 CN502-3 FULL SENSOR
CN62-A19 SUBIN1 CN63-A19 SUBIN1
CN62-A20 NC CN63-A20 NC CN531-2 CN531-5 CN504-1
CN66-2 PS804 5V
CN62-B1 NC CN63-B1 NC
H CN66-5 PS804 IN CN531-4 CN531-3 CN504-2
PS804 PUNCH SCRAPS
CN62-B2 NC CN63-B2 NC CN531-6 CN531-1 CN504-3 BOX SET SENSOR
CN66-8 PS804 SG
CN62-B3 NC CN63-B3 NC
CN62-B4 PKSET CN63-B4 PKSET L
CN62-B5 NC CN63-B5 NC
CN62-B6 NC CN63-B6 NC
CN66-3 NC
CN62-B7 NC CN63-B7 NC
CN66-6 NC
CN62-B8 NC CN63-B8 NC
CN66-9 NC
CN62-B9 NC CN63-B9 NC
CN62-B10 NC CN63-B10 NC
CN62-B11 NC CN63-B11 NC
CN62-B12 NC CN63-B12 NC
CN62-B13 NC CN63-B13 NC
CN62-B14 NC CN63-B14 NC
[How to see the diagram]
H CN62-B15 M801 CONT CN63-B15 M801 CONT 1.The signals shown reflect levels present (3) RC is the flat cable.
L CN62-B16 M801 F/R CN63-B16 M801 F/R under normal idling conditions with (4) Signal flow
CN62-B17 NC CN63-B17 NC
CN62-B18 NC CN63-B18 NC the main switch turned ON. The solid black circle ( ) among
CN62-B19 SG CN63-B19 SG 2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. the connector symbols ( )
CN62-B20 SG CN63-B20 SG
(1) [Symbol] indicates the direction of signal flow.
50-1 Example)
CN61-1 24V CN64-1 24V
CN61-2 PG CN64-2 PG Direction of
CB signal flow
5VDC
Connector Faston
PS1 PS1
FNSCB PKDB Crimp Relay connector SGND
(2) Signal types are as follows:
H High level
L Low level
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
P Pulse signal
5-60
2
[5] PK-120 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN62-A 1 5V CN63-A 1 5V
CN62-A 2 5V CN63-A 2 5V
CN62-A 3 CN63-A 3 OUT-1 P
CN62-A 4 CN63-A 4 OUT-2 P
CN62-A 5 CN63-A 5 OUT-3 P
CN62-A 6 CN63-A 6 OUT-4 P
CN62-A 7 CN63-A 7 OUT-5 P CN551-1
CN65-1 M801 DRV1
CN62-A 8 CN63-A 8 OUT-6 P CN551-2 M801 PUNCH MOTOR
CN65-2 M801 DRV2
CN62-A 9 CN63-A 9 OUT-7 P
CN62-A10 CN63-A10 OUT-8 P
CN62-A11 CN63-A11 OUT-9 P
CN62-A12 CN63-A12 OUT-10 P
CN62-A13 N.C. CN63-A13 N.C.
CN62-A14 CN63-A14 PS801 L
CN62-A15 N.C. CN63-A15 N.C.
CN62-A16 N.C. CN63-A16 N.C.
CN62-A17 CN63-A17 PS802 IN H
CN62-A18 CN63-A18 PS804 IN H
CN62-A19 N.C. CN63-A19 N.C.
CN62-A20 N.C. CN63-A20 N.C.
CN62-B 1 N.C. CN63-B 1 N.C.
CN62-B 2 N.C. CN63-B 2 N.C.
CN62-B 3 PKSET2 CN63-B 3 PKSET2 L
CN62-B 4 PKSET CN63-B 4 PKSET L
P CN62-B 5 SIG_1 CN63-B 5
P CN62-B 6 SIG_2 CN63-B 6 CN501-1
CN65-3 PS801 5V
FNS CB
P CN62-B 7 SIG_3 CN63-B 7 CN501-2
H CN65-4 PS801 IN PS801 PUNCH HP SENSOR
P CN62-B 8 SIG_4 CN63-B 8 CN501-3
CN65-5 PS801 SG
P CN62-B 9 SIG_5 CN63-B 9
P CN62-B10 SIG_6 CN63-B10
P CN62-B11 SIG_7 CN63-B11
P CN62-B12 SIG_8 CN63-B12
P CN62-B13 SIG_9 CN63-B13
P CN62-B14 SIG_10 CN63-B14
CN62-B15 M801CONT CN63-B15
CN62-B16 M801F/R CN63-B16
CN62-B17 N.C. CN63-B17 N.C.
CN62-B18 N.C. CN63-B18 N.C.
CN62-B19 SG CN63-B19 SG
CN62-B20 SG CN63-B20 SG
CN504-1
CN66-2 PS804 5V PUNCH SCRAPS
CN504-2
H CN66-5 PS804 IN PS804
CN504-3 BOX SET SENSOR
CN66-8 PS804 SG
MODEL
CN66-3 5V NC
CN66-6 IN NC
CN66-9 SG NC
CN531-3 CN531-1 CN502-1
CN66-1 PS802 5V PUNCH SCRAPS
CN531-2 CN531-2 CN502-2 PS802
H CN66-4 PS802 IN CN531-1 CN531-3 CN502-3
CN66-7 PS802 SG FULL SENSOR
PKDB
(1)
MANUAL
Crimp
L Low level
CN158-3
H High level
CN69-1 24V
Connector
CN158-9
[How to see the diagram]
CN69-2 24V
50-1
P Pulse signal
CN158-1
P CN69-3 M802 DRVA
the main switch turned ON.
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
1.The signals shown reflect levels present
Faston
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
REVISED REVISION
CN505-1
CN67-1 PS803 5V
CN505-2
H CN67-2 PS803 IN PS803 PUNCH SHIFT HP SENSOR
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
CN505-3
CN67-3 PS803 SG
DATE
CB
May 2002
Example)
(4) Signal flow
SGND
PS1
5VDC
5-61
PAGE
(3) RC is the flat cable.
signal flow
Direction of
the connector symbols ( )
The solid black circle ( ) among
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
ADDITION
METHOD
4
(1)
Crimp
CN53- 3/1
CN 7- 9 M10-24V O O
CN53- 1/3 CONVEYANCE MOTOR COOLING FAN
H CN 7- 10 M10-DRV BK BK
M10
CN53- 2/2
H CN 3- 8 M10-EM Y
[Symbol]
CN 7- 11 24VDRV
CN 7- 12 DRVSPR
Connector
[How to see the diagram]
50-1
INLET
FT2
FT3
FT1
P CN 5- B3 M2 A B BN
CN32-13 CN42- 2 1ST STOPPER MOTOR
M2
CN 5- B4 M2 24V R R
CN32-14 CN42- 5
P CN 5- B5 M2 B O O
Relay connector
CN32-15 CN42- 3
P CN 5- B6 M2 B Y Y
W
BK
Y/GN
CN32- 7 CN74- 1/13 CN43- 5
CN 5- B7 M3 24V W
Faston
P CN 5- B8 M3 A R
CN32- 9 CN74- 3/11 CN43- 6
P CN 5- B9 M3 A Y
RT1
2ND STOPPER MOTOR
M3
BK
FT5
FT4
CN 5-B10 M3 24V
CN32-17 CN74- 5/9 CN43- 3
P CN 5-B11 M3 B B
CN32-18 CN74- 6/8 CN43- 1
P CN 6-B12 M3 B O
CN30- 1 CN46- 5
CN 8- 1 M6 24V W W
CBR
CN30- 2 CN46- 4
CBR
P CN 5- 6 M6 B O O
[6] PZ-108 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN30- 3 CN46- 6
P CN 8- 5 M6 B B B
CN30- 4 CN46- 2 CONVEYANCE MOTOR
M6
CN 8- 4 M6 24V BK BK
FT7
FT6
CN30- 5 CN46- 3
P CN 8- 3 M6 A R R
CN30- 6 CN46- 1
P CN 8- 2 M6 A Y Y
W
BK
CN32- 1 CN41- 1
CN 5- A7 M1 24V W W
CN32- 2 CN41- 3
P CN 5-A12 M1 B B B
CN32- 3 CN41- 4
P CN 5-A11 M1 B O O
FT9
FT8
CN32-10 CN41- 2 REGISTRATION MOTOR
M1
CN 5-A10 M1 24V BK BK
CN32-11 CN41- 5
P CN 5- A9 M1 A R R
4
3
CN32-12 CN41- 6
L Low level
P CN 5- A8 M1 A Y Y
H High level
P Pulse signal
NF2
1
FT11
FT10
CN45- 5
CN 5- A1 M5 24V W
CN45- 4
P CN 5- A2 M5 A B
CN45- 6
P CN 5- A3 M5 A O
CN45- 2
W
BK
PUNCH SHIFT MOTOR
M5
CN 5- A4 M5 24V BK
RELAY
CN39- 9/6 CN52- 2
FT13
FT12
CN 7- 5 MC1-24V O B
CN 8- 1 RL5V CN39-10/5 CN52- 1 PUNCH CLUTCH
FT17 FT16 H CN 7- 6 MC1-DRV BK O
MC1
R R
A
C
B
D
CN39-11/4 CN44- 2
FT15
FT14
CN11- 1 M4-24V O B
CN39-12/3 CN44- 1 PUNCH MOTOR
M4
H CN11- 4 M4-DRV BK R
W
BK
CN47- 1 PUNCH SCRAPS
CN 7- 7 M7-24V O O
CN47- 2
CB
M7
H CN 7- 8 M7-DRV BK BK
CONVEYANCE MOTOR
FT22
FT21
Example)
(4) Signal flow
RT5
RT4 B
MS1
SGND
PS1
5VDC
FT24
FT23
CN36-13/1 CN50- 1 GATE
CN 7- 1 SD1-DRV1 O O
CN36-12/2 CN50- 2 SD1
H CN 7- 2 SD1-DRV2 BK B SOLENOID/L
signal flow
Direction of
CN36-11/3 CN51- 1 GATE
CN 7- 3 SD2-DRV1 O O
CN36-10/4 CN51- 2
CN78- 1
PS1
CN39- 1/14
COIL
L CN 3- 2 PSS-IN1 CN39- 2/13
CN25- 2 PSS-IN1
L CN 3- 3 PSS-IN2 CN39- 3/12
CN25- 3 PSS-IN2
CN 3- 4 PSS-IN3 CN39- 4/11
L CN25- 4 PSS-IN3
CN 3- 5 PSS-IN4 CN39- 5/10
L CN25- 5 PSS-IN4
CN78- 2
CN 3- 6 PSS-IN5 CN39- 6/9
L CN25- 6 PSS-IN5
CN 3- 7 GND CN39- 7/8
B B B CN25- 7 GND
SENSOR
PGC8
CN 3- 8 SPR2
PAPER EDGE
BK
CN65- 1
R PUNCH HP
H CN 4- 8 P-HP2-IN CN39- 8/7 CN65- 2
RT2
CN65- 3
PS5
B SENSOR
B
W
BK
N
FG
RT7
RT6
RT8
MODEL
CN62- 1
R
+V:24V CN 4- 5 S-HP1-IN CN36- 4/10 CN62- 2
CN 2- 1 24V1
L PS3 1ST STOPPER HP SENSOR
RT10 O CN62- 3
B
7155/7165/7255/7272
+V:24V
RT13 O CN 2- 2 24V2
CN74-10/4 CN63- 1
-V:P.G R 2ND STOPPER
BK CN 2- 3 P.G L CN 4- 6 S-HP2-IN CN36- 5/9 CN74-11/3 CN63- 2
RT11 PS2
CN74-12/2 CN63- 3
DCPS
B HP SENSOR
-V:P.G
RT12 BK CN 2- 4 P.G
PGC5 PGC9
CN 4- 3 5V CN36- 7/7 CN74- 9/5 CN61- 1
R R PASSAGE
CN 4- 4 PSS-IN CN36- 6/8 CN74- 8/6 CN61- 2
H PS1
CN 4- 14 GND CN36- 2/12 CN74- 7/7 CN61- 3
B B SENSOR
PGC6 PGC10
CN68- 1
CN36-1/13 CN74-13/1 CN68- 2
EXIT
L CN 4- 11 EXT-PS PS8
MANUAL
CN68- 3
SENSOR
SERVICE MANUAL
P CN 4- 12 M6 EN PS9
CN36- 3/11 CN68- 3
B B SENSOR
CN67- 3
R PUNCH SCRAPS
H CN 4- 9 P-FULL-IN CN67- 2
CN67- 1 PS7
B FULL SENSOR
3
R CN 1- 1 5V PGC3
CN 4- 1 5V CN66- 1
R R PUNCH SCRAPS BOX
CN 4- 10 BOX-IN CN66- 2
H
4
PGC4
CN64- 1
R PUNCH SHIFT HP
CN 4- 7 P-HP1-IN CN64- 2
H PS4
CN64- 3
B SENSOR
REVISED REVISION
P CN 9- 7 F-TXD-OUT CN90-12
CN 9- 2 SGND CN90-11
P CN 9- 9 P-REQ-OUT CN90-10
DATE
CN 9- 4 SGND CN90- 9
CN 9- 11 F-ACK-IN CN90- 8
Dec. 2003
P
CN 9- 6 SGND CN90- 7
P CN 9- 1 F-RXD-IN CN90- 6
CN 9- 8 SGND CN90- 5
P CN 9- 3 F-REQ-IN CN90- 4
CN 9- 10 SGND CN90- 3
P CN 9- 5 P-ACK-OUT CN90- 2
CN 9- 12 SGND CN90- 1
CN95- 1 CN10- 1 M-RXD-IN P CN 9- 13
5-62
PAGE
MAIN BODY
A
STAPLER/R
5V H CN1-A30 IN PS1
STAPLER CN170-1 CN170-3 CN121-3
PS41 IN CN1-A21 GND EXIT SENSOR
READY PS41 GND UL1007#22
SENSOR/R CN1-A13 5V
CN357-1 PAPER EXIT COVER
CN357-2
STAPLER M24 DRV F L CN1-B18 IN CN357-3
PS207 OPEN/CLOSE DETECTION
M24 M24 DRV R UL1007#22 CN1-A22 GND
MOTOR/F SENSOR
5V CN170- 3 CN5-3 STR_F_DRV1 CN102-2
STAPLER CN203-1 24V CN1-A 2 24V
PS34 IN CN170- 4 CN5-4 STR_F_DRV2 * CN102-1 M2 ROLLER SHIFT MOTOR
PS34 CN203-2 DRV
HP SENSOR/F GND * L CN1-B29 DRV
STAPLER/F
5V CN1-B 6 5V
CN101-2 NC
STAPLER PS38 IN CN101-3
PS38 GND H CN1-B 2 CONT
READY CN1-B 3 CLK
CN101-4
P
SENSOR/F CN101-5
L CN1-B 5 F/R FNS CONVEYANCE
CN101-6
H CN1-B 4 LD M1
CN101-7 MOTOR
L CN1-B 1 H/L
CN101-8
CN1-B13 PGND
CN101-9
CN1-B14 PGND
CN101-10
STACKER CN1-B19 24V
CN140-1 CN162-3 CN162- 4 CN172-9 CN172-1 CN4-A15 5V CN101-11
CN1-B20 24V
NO PAPER CN140-2 CN162-2 CN162- 5 CN172-8 CN172-2 CN4-A16 IN H
PS20 CN140-3 CN162-1 CN162- 6 CN172-7 CN172-3
DETECTION CN4-A17 SGND
SENSOR CN107-1
CN1-B 7 5V
CN107-2 NC
CN107-3
H CN1-B 8 P/S
CN107-4
CN128-1 CN162-6 CN162- 1 CN172-6 CN172-4 P CN1-B 9 CLK
ALIGNMENT CN4-A27 5V CN107-5
CN128-2 CN162-5 CN162- 2 CN172-5 CN172-5 L CN1-B10 H/L PAPER EXIT ROLLER
PS 8 CN4-A28 IN L CN107-6
PLATE/UPPER CN128-3 CN162-4 CN162- 3 CN172-4 CN172-6 H CN1-B11 LD M7
CN4-A29 SGND CN107-7 NC MOTOR
HP SENSOR CN107-8
CN1-B16 PGND
CN107-9
CN1-B17 PGND
CN107-10
CN1-B21 24V
CN107-11
CN1-B22 24V
CN107-12
L CN1-B12 F/R
CN129-1 CN172-3 CN172-7 CN4-A24 5V
PAPER EXIT CN129-2 CN172-2 CN172-8 CN4-A25 IN L CN1-B15 PGND
PS 9 CN129-3 CN172-1 CN172-9
BELT HP SENSOR CN4-A26 SGND
CN124-1
CN1-A11 5V FNS ENTRANCE
CN124-2
H CN1-A29 IN PS 4
CN124-3
CN4-A30 DPSW0 CN1-A20 GND PASSAGE SENSOR
CN4-B30 NC
CN125-1
CN1-A10 5V
CN125-2 STACKER CONVEYANCE
H CN1-A28 IN PS 5
CN125-3
CN1-A19 GND PASSAGE SENSOR
CN105-1 CN173-12 CN173-1 CN4-B3 24V
CN105-2 CN173-11 CN173-2 CN4-B4 24V
ALIGNMENT CN105-3 CN173-10 CN173-3 CN126-1
CN4-B5 DRV A P CN1-A 9 5V
PLATE/UPPER M5 CN105-4 CN173-9 CN173-4 CN126-2
CN4-B6 DRV A P H CN1-A27 IN PS 6 PAPER EXIT1 SENSOR
CN105-5 CN173-8 CN173-5 CN126-3
MOTOR CN4-B7 DRV B P CN1-A18 GND
CN105-6 CN173-7 CN173-6 CN4-B8 DRV B P
CN130-1
CN1-A 8 5V
CN113-5 CN173-6 CN173-7 CN130-2
CN4-B15 24V H CN1-A26 IN PS10 PAPER EXIT2 SENSOR
CN113-4 CN173-5 CN173-8 CN130-3
CN4-B17 DRV A P CN1-A17 GND
STACKER CN113-6 CN173-4 CN173-9 CN4-B18 DRV A P
M13 CN113-3 CN173-3 CN173-10 CN132-1
ENTRANCE CN4-B19 DRV B P CN1-A 7 5V
CN113-1 CN173-2 CN173-11 CN132-2 PAPER EXIT OPENING
CN4-B20 DRV B P H CN1-A25 IN PS12
MOTOR CN113-2 CN173-1 CN173-12 CN1-A16 GND
CN132-3
CN4-B16 24V SENSOR
CN133-1
CN1-A 6 5V ENTRANCE PAPER
CN133-2
H CN1-A24 IN PS13
CN133-3 DETECTION SENSOR
STAPLER CN1-A15 GND
ROTATION CN104-1 CN175-5 CN175-1 CN174-14 CN174-1 CN4-B1 24V
M4 CN104-2 CN175-4 CN175-2 CN174-13 CN174-2 CN4-B2 M4 DRV H
MOTOR
CN138-1
CN1-A 5 5V
CN138-2
CN111-1 CN174-12 CN174-3 L CN1-A23 IN PS18 ROLLER SHIFT HP SENSOR
CN4-B9 24V CN138-3
STAPLER- CN111-2 CN174-11 CN174-4 CN1-A14 GND
CN4-B10 24V
MOVEMENT CN111-3 CN174-10 CN174-5 CN4-B11 DRV A P
M11 CN111-4 CN174-9 CN174-6 CN4-B12 DRV A P
MOTOR CN111-5 CN174-8 CN174-7 CN4-B13 DRV B P
CN111-6 CN174-7 CN174-8 CN4-B14 DRV B P
CN103-1
CN2-1 DRV-F TRAY UP-DOWN
* CN103-2 M3
CN2-2 DRV-R MOTOR
MODEL
*
STAPLER CN134-1 CN175-3 CN175-3 CN174-6 CN174-9 CN4-A18 5V
CN134-2 CN175-2 CN175-4 CN174-5 CN174-10 CN122-1
CN4-A19 IN L CN3-B6 5V TRAY UPPER
ROTATION HP PS14 CN134-3 CN175-1 CN175-5 CN174-4 CN174-11 CN122-2
CN4-A20 SGND H CN3-A1 IN PS 2
TRAY UNIT
SENSOR CN122-3
CN3-A5 GND LIMIT SENSOR
7155/7165/7255/7272
CN123-1
CN3-B5 5V
STAPLER CN131-1 CN174-3 CN174-12 CN4-A21 5V CN123-2 TRAY LOWER
H CN3-A2 IN PS 3
CN131-2 CN174-2 CN174-13 CN4-A22 IN L CN123-3
MOVEMENT PS11 CN3-A6 GND LIMIT SENSOR
CN131-3 CN174-1 CN174-14 CN4-A23 SGND
HP SENSOR
CN127-1 STAPLE PAPER
CN3-B4 5V
CN127-2
H CN3-A3 IN PS 7 EXIT UPPER LIMIT
CN127-3
CN3-B2 GND
SENSOR
MANUAL
CN4-B26 PGND
CN1-B24 DRV H
SD2 CN152-1 CN1-B28 24V
EXIT SOLENOID
4
L Low level
CN151-2
H High level
CN1-B26 DRV H
Connector
50-1
P Pulse signal
the main switch turned ON.
CN29-1
under normal idling conditions with
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
CN753-2
Faston
CN56-5 5V CN6-3 5V
CN56-10 S.GND CN753-3 CN6-4 SGND
DATE
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
CN40-6 NC CN753-6
CN6-2 N.C
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
P
CN106-12 SGND CN752-1 CN752-12 CN7-12 SGND
(4) Signal flow
SGND
PS1
5VDC
(3) RC is the flat cable.
signal flow
Direction of
ADDITION
METHOD
the connector symbols ( )
The solid black circle ( ) among
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
4 [8] SF-101 Overall Wiring Diagram
CN104-1 24V
CN104-2 24V
CN102-1 GND
SW701 CONVEYANCE COVER SW
CN102-2 COVER SW
CN103-1 GND
L CN103-2 PS701 IN PS701 CONVEYANCE SENSOR
CN103-3 5V
CN102-6 GND
H CN102-7 PS703 IN PS703 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
CN102-8 5V [How to see the diagram]
1.The signals shown reflect levels present
CN107-1 GND under normal idling conditions with
L CN107-2 PS701 IN PS704 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR the main switch turned ON.
CN107-3 5V 2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
(1) [Symbol]
CN208-2 CN208-1 50-1
CN105-3 M703 DRV
CN208-1 CN208-2 M703 SHIFT MOTOR
CN104-5 M703 24V
Connector Faston
Crimp Relay connector
CN103-4 GND
(2) Signal types are as follows:
H CN103-5 PS702 IN PS702 SHIFT HP SENSOR
CN103-6 5V H High level
L Low level
CN100-2 24V IN
CN200-1
CN1-1 24V
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
CN1-2 5V P Pulse signal
CN1-3 SGND
CN200-4 (3) RC is the flat cable.
CN100-6 GND CN1-4 PGND
CN200-5 (4) Signal flow
CN100-9 GND CN1-5 PGND
CN200-6 The solid black circle ( ) among
CN1-6 FGND
CN201-1
the connector symbols ( )
CN101-5 RXD CN106-1 MTXD
CN201-2
indicates the direction of signal flow.
CN101-1 GND CN106-2 SGND
CN201-3
Example)
CN101-6 RTS CN106-3 MCTS Direction of
CN101-7 TXD
CN201-4
CN106-4 MRXD CB signal flow
5VDC
CN201-5 PS1 PS1
CN101-2 GND CN106-5 SGND
CN201-6 SGND
CN101-8 CTS CN106-6 MRTS1
AC100V
H 216-1 FIXHT1_CONT
H 216-2 FIXHT2_CONT
90-2
90-1
POWER PLUG
H 216-3 FIXHT3_CONT
216-4 MAINRL_CONT
216-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
216-6 PSFAN_EM
POWER PLUG
9006/1061#22
FT33
812-2 CN200-2 12V/2
FT34
237-B12 T1RISEM_D
M16
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/1 H CN200-3 5V/2
FT35
FT36
FT11
CN200-4 5V/2 FT10
FT1
810-2-1 814-4-10 800B-7-10 237-A7 T1FEEDMC_DRV H CN200-5 S-GND
G/Y
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1 810-1-2 814-3-11 -6-11 237-A6 MC24V_1 CN200-6 S-GND
MC3
CN200-7 S-GND EUROPE ONLY
CN200-8 P-GND
811-2-1 814-2-12 -5-12 237-A5 T1PREMC_DRV
FT2
FT1
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/1 811-1-2 814-1-13 -4-13 237-A4 MC24V_1
MC4
TRAY1
817-1 237-A19 NC
F/G
CBR2
817-2
27
CN
237-A18 NC CN201-1 24V_INT
F/G
817-3 CBR1
DUMMY
28
237-A17 NC CN201-2 PGND
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram
FT4
91-1
HTR1 L 208-15 SCAN_F/R 610-2 SCAN_F/R 612-A2 SIZE_PS_L FT3
91-2 612-A3 5V
P 208-14 SCAN_MGN 610-3 SCAN_MGN(ENBL)
208-13 SCAN_CUR1 610-4 SCAN_CUR1 612-A4 S.GND
614-A8 24V4
614-A7 24V4
614-A6 24V4
614-A5 24V4
HEATER/1 P
614-A4 P.GND
P 208-12 SCAN_CUR2 610-5 SCAN_CUR2 612-A5 SIZE_PS_S
614-B1 DF_M2_A
614-A9 DF_M2_B
614-A3 DF_M1_A
614-A2 DF_M1_A
832-1 612-A6 5V
614-B11 DF_M1_B
614-B10 DF_M1_B
614-A11 DF_M2_A
614-A10 DF_M2_B
236-B13 T2RISEM_24V H P 208-11 SCAN_CUR3 610-6 SCAN_CUR3
FT5
FT6
832-2 610-7 MODE1 612-A7 S.GND
614-B6 DF_CL_DRIVE
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/2 236-B12 T2RISEM_D H P 208-10 MODE1
M17
614-B9 DF_SD1_DRIVE
614-B8 DF_SD3_DRIVE
614-B7 DF_SD2_DRIVE
614-A1 DF_FAN_DRIVE
610-8 MODE2 612-A8 RES_PS(SIDE1)
614-B2 DF_24V_OUT(CL)
P 208-9 MODE2
SCANNER I/F
NF
614-B5 DF_24V_OUT(SD3)
614-B4 DF_24V_OUT(SD2)
614-B3 DF_24V_OUT(SD1)
SNSOR
H 208-8 MODE3 610-9 MODE3 612-A9 5V
10-2
10-1
7-2
7-1
830-2-1 834-4-10 820B-7-10 236-A7 T2FEEDMC_DRV H H 208-7 EXP_CONT 610-10 EXP_CONT 612-A10 S.GND
HUMIDITY
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2 830-1-2 834-3-11 -6-11 612-A11 RES_PS(SIDE2)
FT8
208-6 SCANFAN_CONT-18 610-11 SCANFAN_CONT-18
FT7
236-A6 MC24V_1
MC5
208-5 SCANFAN_EM 610-12 SCANFAN_EM L 612-A12 5V
610-13 SCANHP_PS 612-A13 S.GND EUROPE ONLY
831-2-1 834-2-12 -5-12 208-4 SCANHP_PS L
236-A5 T2PREMC_DRV H 610-14 SCN_DET(SGND) 612-A14 READ_PS
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/2 831-1-2 834-1-13 -4-13 208-3 SCN_DET
236-A4 MC24V_1
MC6
610-15 S.G 612-A15 5V
FT10
208-2 SGND
FT9
TRAY2
F/G
882-1
6-4
6-1
9-4
9-1
612-B2 SKEW_PS_F
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
DF-316
236-A18 NC
F/G
CN
882-2 236-A17 NC 612-B3 5V
DUMMY
611-A1 DF_M1_CLK
COIL2
234-A20 DF_M1_CLK
234-A19 DF_M1_F/R 611-A2 DF_M1_F/R 612-B4 S.GND
FT12
612-B5 SKEW_PS_R
FT11
DF_M1=FEED M
234-A15 DF_M1_I1 611-A6 DF_M1_I1 612-B8 LAST_PS
HEATER/2 612-B9 5V
234-A14 DF_M1_I2 611-A7 DF_M1_I2
8-2
8-1
M18
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3 H 234-A12 DF_M2_F/R 611-A9 DF_M2_F/R
234-A11 DF_M2_EN 611-A10 DF_M2_EN 612-B12 5V
234-A10 DF_M2_M1 611-A11 DF_M2_M1 612-B13 S.GND
850-2-1 854-4-10 840B-7-10 235-A7 T3FEEDMC_DRV H 612-B14 EXIT_PS
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3 850-1-2 854-3-11 -6-11 234-A9 DF_M2_M2 611-A12 DF_M2_M2 F/G
DF_M2=REV M
235-A6 MC24V_1 612-B15 5V
MC7
FT37
50-1
EUROPE
MC8
613-3 SIZE_ANA
TRAY3
611-A17 DF_SD1_CONT
MAIN POWER
234-A4 DF_REVSD_CONT
51-1
FT38
613-4 A.GND
F/G
611-A18 DF_SD2_CONT
UNIT
234-A3 DF_SEPSD_CONT
F/G
FIXING
613-5 S.GND
F/G
234-A2 DF_EXITSD_CONT 611-A19 DF_SD3_CONT
DF I/F
SCDB
611-A20 DF_M1_RETURN 613-6 ADF_OPEN_PS
234-A1 DF_M1_RETURN
51-2
FT17
TS1
1-6 ACIN(N)
1-5 ACIN(N)
TS2
FT14
872-2
FT15 180 C
M19
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/4 H 234-B16 REG_PS(SIZE1)
234-B15 REG_PS(SIDE2) 611-B6 RES_PS(SIDE2)
234-B14 READ_PS 611-B7 READ_PS
870-2-1 874-4-10 860B-7-10
110 C
FT16
THARMOSTAT/U
MC9
THARMOSTAT/D
203-A5 T4PREMC_DRV H
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/4 871-1-2 874-1-13 -4-13 203-A4 MC24V_1 234-B9 EXIT_PS 611-B12 EXIT_PS
ONLY)
MC10
TRAY4
234-B8 OPEN_PS 611-B13 COVER_OPEN_PS
(JAPAN
234-B7 ADF_OPEN_PS 611-B14 ADF_OPEN_PS 3-1 JH_DRIVE
F/G
234-B6 FAN_LD 611-B15 FAN_LD
FT22
FT19
F/G
234-B5 RESET_OUT 611-B16 RESET_OUT 600-5 24V1 3-2 JH1_DRIVE
234-B4 S.GND 611-B17 S.GND 600-6 24V1
234-B3 3.3V 611-B18 3.3V 600-7 24V1
FT28
FT24
RL2
M20
H 5 6
L4
L3
L2
BY-PASS
H PAPER FEED SENSOR/1 600-9 P.G
PS01
-3-14 814-3-11 -3 15-12 TEST PIN1 24V 40-1
237-A14 SGND
600-10 L.PG
L
237-A13 5V3 -4-13 814-4-10 803-1
881-1-2 (Xe_LAMP)
FT29
FT27
FT25
PS02
236-B15 VFMC1_DRV H -6-11 814-6-8 -3
NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN
237-A11 SGND
P
P
P
FT26 FIXING HEATER LAMP/2
882-1-2
624-3 5V
L 623-5 EM
237-A10 5V3
FT21
FT20
625-4 NC
624-15 5V
FT23
236-B16 MC24V_2
624-14 SIG
882-2-1 -8-9 814-8-6 -2
H 624-8 APS.2
L 624-5 APS.1
VERTICL CONVEYANCE CLUTCH /2 237-A9 T1_0PS
FEED
625-1 S.GND
624-9 S.GND
624-6 S.GND
624-1 S.GND
623-6 P.GND
H NO PAPER SENSOR/1
H 624-11 APS.3
236-B17 VFMC2_DRV H
PAPER
MC11 MC12
624-12 S.GND
624-13 S.GND
624-7 APS_5V
624-4 APS_5V
PS03
-9-8 814-9-5 -3
H 624-2 APS_TIM
624-10 APS_5V
237-A8 SGND
H 625-5 APS.3_SIG
H 625-6 APS.2_SIG
H 625-7 APS.1_SIG
625-2 APS_CONT
L 625-3 COVER_SIG
-14-3 804-1
VERTICAL
L 623-3 LAMP.PG
623-2 CONT
623-1 24V
620-3 W
620-2 V
620-1 U
237-A3 5V3
237-A2 T1RM_PS -15-2 -2
L REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/1
PS04
50-3
51-4
51-3
639-1-3
639-2-2
639-3-1
LD 302-6
PAPER FEED MOTOR 237-B19 FEEDM_EM H 800A-4-11 815-1-6 808-1
M1
302-7 237-B10 5V3
TRAY1
F/G
PS05
631-1-3
631-2-2
631-3-1
20 20
637-3
637-2
637-1
P.G.
302-10 307-2 -7-8 815-4-3 807-1
24V 237-B7 5V3
FT(PS)30
FT(PS)32
FT(PS)31
L1_CONT
LP_DRIVE
19 19
L 237-B6 T1SIZE_L_PS
636-1
636-2
636-3
635-1
635-2
635-3
634-1
634-2
634-3
633-1
633-2
633-3
632-1
632-2
632-3
SCANNER UNIT
PS06
-9-6 815-6-1 -3
2-2 L2_DRIVE
2-3 L3_DRIVE
237-B5 SGND
4-3 L1_CONT'
4-1 L1_DRIVE'
4-2 LP_DRIVE'
-10-5 809-1
L1
237-B4 3.3V2
F/G
FM9
PS65
PS64
PS63
PS51
PS61
-11-4 -2
237-B3 T1SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/1
630-3
630-2
630-1
VR1
-12-3 -3
DCPS
* 237-B2 AGND
TRC3
TONER CONTROL LED(JAM) 206- 8 DJLED_CONT *H H 236-A15 T2PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/2
PS07
-6 -B7-B6 -3-14 834-3-11 -3
APS SENSOR/3
APS SENSOR/2
APS SENSOR/1
TCSB
JAM SIG 206- 5 DRUM_JSIG_EX L 236-A12 T2UP_PS -5-12 834-5-9 -2
APS TIMING SENSOR
PS08
LED( ) 206- 4 LED_CONT -6-11 834-6-8 -3
SCANNER HP SENSOR
*H 236-A11 SGND
SCANNER COOLING FAN
PS09
206- 1 3.3V2 * -9-8 834-9-5 -3
363-1-2 360-A1-A10 236-A8 SGND 15-6 PSFAN_EM
206-13 MC24V_2 * -14-3 824-1 15-7 SGND
EXPOSURE LAMP
SD1
SEPARATION CRAW SOLENOID 206-14 SPSD_DRV H L 236-A2 T2RM_PS -15-2 -2
REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/2
PS10
-16-1 -3
236-A1 SGND
DRUM
366-1-2 -A3-A8
206-15 MC24V_2 820A-3-12
366-2-1 -A4-A7 236-B11 T2_SET_P
TONER RECYCLE CLUTCH 206-16 TRCMC_DRV
MC14
-13-2
236-B1 5V3 12-1 24V1 PRCB
-1-14
12-4 12V2 PRCB
364-1-2 -A5-A6 -2-13
TRAY2
PRE-CHARGING EXPOSURE 206-17 MC_24V2 12-9 5V2 PRCB
364-2-1 -A6-A5 820A-4-11 835-1-6 828-1
PCL
LAMP 206-18 PCL CONT H 236-B10 5V3 12-10 5V2 PRCB
-5-10 835-2-5 -2 12-15 S_GND PRCB
365-1-2 H 236-B9 T2SIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-2
PS11
-A7-A4 -6-9 835-3-4 -3
PRCB
M14
206-20 CHGM_A L -7-8 835-4-3 827-1 12-17 S_GND PRCB
-A9-A2 236-B7 5V3
12-18 P_GND PRCB
SCANNER
PS12
-9-6 835-6-1 -3
236-B5 SGND
-10-5 829-1
236-B4 3.3V2
137-4
-11-4 -2
236-B3 T2SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/2 13-1 24V1 SCDB
VR2
* -12-3 -3
236-B2 AGND 13-2 24V1 SCDB
137-7 S.GND
210-1 TNSM24V
137-6 APS_CONT
137-5 COVER_SIG
M12
210-4 TNSM_AB 235-A16 5V3
SCDB/DF
PS13
210-6 TNSM_BB 235-A14 S.GND -3-14 854-3-11 -3
P 13-15 P.GND SCDB
235-A13 5V3 -4-13 854-4-10 843-1
-5-12 854-5-9 -2
13-16 P.GND DF
TONOR LEVEL 333-3 330-7-3 L 235-A12 T3UP_PS
210-7 S.GND TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/3
PS14
-6-11 854-6-8 -3
F/G
TLD
DETECTION SENSOR/R 210-8 TONER_SIG H
333-1 330-9-1 -7-10 854-7-7 845-1
210-9 T_SENSE_CONT L 235-A10 5V3
-8-9 854-8-6 -2 78-1
H 235-A9 T3_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/3 12-7 5V2 OB
PS15
235-A8 SGND -9-8 854-9-5 -3 78-2
TONER SUPPLY
12-8 5V2 OB
-14-3 844-1 78-3
235-A3 5V3 12-13 S_GND OB
OB
-15-2 -2 78-4
L 235-A2 T3RM_PS REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/3 12-14 S_GND OB
78-5
PS16
-1-14
PS38
324-1 94-3-13 95-3-13 14-3 S_GND ICB
SENSOR /R 213-3 5V2 -2-13
14-4 S_GND ICB
235-B10 5V3 840A-4-11 855-1-6 848-1
311-3 94-4-12 95-4-12 -5-10 855-2-5 -2
24V 415-2 213-4 S.GND H 235-B9 T3SIZE_S_PS
PS17
403-1 24V FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 311-2 94-5-11 95-5-11 235-B8 SGND -6-9 855-3-4 -3 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-3
24V 415-5 213-5 FDOORL_PS
403-2 24V
PS39
311-1 94-6-10 95-6-10 -7-8 855-4-3 847-1 11-1 5V1 ICB
A 415-1 SENSOR /L 213-6 5V2 235-B7 5V3
ICB
M8
REVERSE EXIT MOTOR 403-4 /A P PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-3 11-3 5V1 IP
PS18
PS40
325-1 94-9-7 95-9-7 11-6 12V1 IP
VR3
24V 416-2 417-1-6 OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR 213-9 5V2 * -12-3 -3 PAPER SIZE VR/3 CN132-2 SGND -2
403-7 24V 235-B2 AGND -3-3
24V 416-5 417-2-5 P CN132-3 /IND -3 11-7 12V1 HDD
403-8 24V 235-B17 NC -4-2 L 31-1 FAN1
A 416-4 417-3-4 CN132-4 SGND -4 11-8 S_GND ICB
403-9 A 235-A17 NC -5-1 11-9 P_GND ICB L 31-2 FAN2
ADU REVERSE MOTOR A 416-6 417-4-3
P 341-1-4 94-10-6 95-10-6
L CN132-5 INDPR -5
INDX SB
M9
403-10 /A P 213-10 CLNFAN_D L 235-B16 NC 11-10 S_GND IP
B 416-3 417-5-2 341-2-3 94-11-5 95-11-5
403-11 B P 213-11 CLFAN_EM L 235-B15 NC 11-11 S_GND IP 31-3 FAN3
B 416-1 417-6-1 CLEANER COOLING 341-3-2 94-12-4 95-12-4
FM5
403-12 /B P 213-12 CLFAN_HL L 235-B14 NC 11-12 S_GND IP
FAN 341-4-1 94-13-3 95-13-3 185-1-11 180-A1
213-13 P_GND CN130-A1 GND 11-13 S_GNDHDD
-2-10 -A2
ONLY FOR OLD TYPE 860B-1-16 874-1-13 861-1 P -A2 VIDEO2 11-14 S_GND HDD
203-A16 5V3 - 3-9
FM13
2
TC
ADU CONVEYANCE SENSOR/1 404-5 REV_PS H TOTAL COUNTER 213-15 TC_DRV H -A5 LPR5V 13-5 24V1 FNS
PS41
432-3 H 203-A13 5V3 -4-13 874-4-10 863-1 - 6-6 -A6
404-4 S_GND -A6 LD5V 13-9 5V2 FNS
L 203-A12 T4UP_PS -5-12 874-5-9 -2 - 7-5 -A7
FNS
PS42
430-3 H 203-A9 T4_0PS P -A10 /VIDEO1
404-1 S_GND NO PAPER SENSOR/4 -11-1
PS21
REVERSE GATE SOLENOID 303-3 203-A1 SGND -16-1 -3 P -B2 /S/H1 12-11 -5V1 ADUDB
475-3 212-A3 DEVM_CONT H - 3-9
SD7
407-2 GATE_DR CONT -B3
L 303-4 H -B3 /ALM1 12-12 S_GND ADUDB
CLK 212-A4 DEVM_CLK P 860A- 3-12 - 4-8
ADUDB
M3
427-1-2 303-7 P -B6 /S/H2 -B6
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH 405-1 MC24V MOTOR (H/L) 212-A7 DEVM_GAIN L - 2-13 - 7-5 -B7
427-2-1 303-8 313-4 H -B7 /ALM2
405-2 ADUCR_MC L - 8-4
MC13
P.G. 860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 -B8
303-9 313-3 -B8 GND
860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 - 9-3 13-6 26V1 LCT
303-10 313-2
PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-4 P -B9 GND -B8
- 10-2 13-8 5V2 LCT
PS23
16 16 16 16
LCT
MC2
405-4 ADUDN_MC L PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-4
- 9-6 875-6-1 -3
TRAY4 (JAPAN ONLY)
FM4
337-3-1 -10-5 869-1
425-1 420-16-1 FAN 212-A10 P.GND 203-B4 3.3V2
425-1 VIDEO 405-20 DEF_VIDEO -11-4 -2
425-2 420-15-2 203-B3 T4SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/4
VR4
425-2 GND
420-14-3
405-19 GND * * 203-B2 AGND -12-3 -3
425-3 +5V
425-3 405-18 5V2 CN103-1 5V2
425-4 420-13-4 203-B16 NC
PAPER MIS-CENTERING 425-4 -5V 405-17 -5V CN103-2 12V2
425-5 420-12-5 203-B15 NC
425-5 GND 405-16 GND CN103-3 GND
SENSOR 425-6 420-11-6
P 301-1 203-B14 NC CN103-4 GND 83-1 93-1
425-6 SI 405-15 DEF_SI 5V 212-B1 5V 21-1 24V2
PS70
425-7 420-10-7 301-2 83-2 93-2
425-7 GND 405-14 GND S.G. 212-B2 P.GND 21-2 24V2
425-8 420-9-8 P 301-3
425-8 CLK 405-13 DEF_CLK CONT 212-B3 DRUM_CONT H
425-9 420-8-9 301-4 880-1-15 884-1 21-3 P.GND
425-9 GLED 405-12 DEF_LED P CLK 212-B4 DRUM_CLK P 205-15 5V3 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 154-14 LCD_ADJ
425-10 420-7-10 301-5 880-2-14 884-2 LCD_ADJ 21-4 P.GND
FT40
425-10 VLED 405-11 24V1 CW/CCW 212-B5 CW/CCW H L 205-14 T1PASS_PS 154-13 24V 12-2 24V1 HV
PS25
DRUM MOTOR LD 212-B6 DRUM_EM H 154-12 LCD_D3 LD3 12-19 P.GND H/V
M2
424-3 420-6-11 301-7 164-A13-2
405-10 5V2 SGND 880-4-12 885-1 P 140- 1 S_OUT2 150- 1 S_IN2 154-11 LCD_D2
420-5-12 301-8 316-4 205-12 5V3 164-A12-3 LD2
LEADING EDGE SENSOR 424-2 405-9 EDGE_PS P.G. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 140- 2 S_IN2 150- 2 S_OUT2 P
H 880-5-11 885-2 164-A11-4 154-10 LCD_D1 LD1
PS43
424-1 420-4-13 301-9 316-3 L 205-11 T2PASS_PS 150- 3 CTS
P.G. P 140- 3 /RTS2
PS26
405-8 S_GND
18 18
REGISTRATION
420-2-15 24V 301-11 316-1 880-7-9 886-1 150- 5 DSR P
P 140- 5 /DTR2
17 17
PS44
423-3 420-1-16 140- 6 /DSR2 154- 6 5V 5V
INTER LOCK
LCD
5V 331-1 334-11-1 880-9-7 886-3 SENSOR/3 140- 7 SHUT 150- 7 SHUT 154- 5 CP 32-1 24V1
212-B7 5V 205-7 S.GND 164-A6-9 CP
331-2 334-10-2 140- 8 SW_SIG 150- 8 SW_SIG 154- 4 LP 32-2 P.GND
S.G. 212-B8 P.GND 880-10-6 887-1 164-A5-10 LP
331-3 334-9-3 205-6 5V3 140- 9 WT_LED_ON 150- 9 WT_LED_ON 154- 3 FLM
SPARE
REGISTRATION CLUTCH 422-2-1 331-5 334-7-5 205-T4PASS SENSOR/4(JAPAN ONLY) 140-11 5V1 150-11 5V1 154- 1 DSP_OFF
MC1
408-13 2ND_MC H CW/CCW 212-B11 TONERM_CW/CCW H 164-A2-13 DSP_OFF
TONER BOTTLE LD 331-6 334-6-6 205-10 S.GND
212-B12 TONERM_EM L 880-13-3 888-1 164-A1-14
M13
880-15-1 888-3
S.G 421-2 331-9 334-3-9 322-3 205-1 S_GND DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
408-10 PGND P.G.
24 24
LD 408-6 LD L 164-B10-5
M5
CONVEYANCE MOTOR 421-7 136- 5 GND 151- 5 GND
OB1
421-10
MAIN BODY 227-B2 MAINFAN_EM L 50-A2-A3 55-3 164-B7-8 153- 1 PWM 165- 1 PWM
15-9 N.C.
15-8 N.C.
COOLING FAN/1 227-B3 MAINFAN_HL_20 L 50-A1-A4 164-B6-9 153- 2 GND 165- 2 GND
421-11 207-1 2 S_GND 151- 9 GND
15-11 REM/3
15-10 REM/2
COOLING FAN 227-B7 WRFAN_HL L 51-A2-A9 52-1 FIXING TEMPERTURE 136-13 5V2 151-13 5V2
CONVEYANCE 338-4-1 207- 7 TH1+ TH1 164-B1-14
461-2-2 227-B8 P-GND 51-A3-A8 52-2 SENSOR/1 136-14 5V2 151-14 5V2
FM3
SUCTION FAN 461-3-1
402-B14 SUC_EM L * 207- 6 TH1-
402-B15 P_GND 304-1 *
FIXING
FIXING TEMPERTURE
93-6
93-5
93-3
M10
402-B17 SEP_CLR_M A L 227-B12 MAINM_CLK P 207- 3 TH3+
CLEANING MOTOR CW/CCW 304-5
227-B13 MAINM_F/R L * 51-A7-A4
304-6 207- 2 TH3-
FIXING MOTOR LD 227-B14 MAINM_EM H
M4
402-B18 MC24V
82-2
82-1
83-3
CN152-1 24V1
TSL
P.G.
SUB POWER SWITCH
402-B19 TSL_DR H
CN152-4 S_GND
CN152-3 S_GND
402-B20 NC
LAMP 24V 304-10 314-2
439-1-2 460-3-5 414- 1 NC 24V 304-11 314-1 890-A1-12 899-1-9 897-1
13 13
PAPER CONVEYANCE
414- 5 NC 350-1 214-A9 5V3
188-7-1 890-A5-8 899-5-5 896-2
414- 6 NC -2 189-1 211-7 24V1 L 214-A8 BPSIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-BP
188-6-2
PS31
ICB
413- 1 NC 899-9-1
PS32
MOTOR 188-4-6:TEST
214-A4 SGND 890-A9-4 895-3
413- 2 NC -7 -6 211-2 N.C. 106-1 FOR IP
188-3-7:TEST 106-2
413- 3 NC -8 -7 211-1 N.C. 890-B1-12 893-1 106-3
214-B12 5V3 106-4
24
24
23
23
413- 4 NC -9
LAN I/F
890-B2-11 893-2
-10 L 214-B11 BP_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
PS33
413- 6 NC
453-3-1 436-1-3 318-2 890-B4-9 892-1
406- 1 ADU FAN/1 H 24V 215-1 24V 214-B9 5V3
ADU REVERSE 890-B5-8 892-2 TRAY UPPLY LIMIT
BY-PASS
890-B6-7 892-3
FM10
FAN A
HD-105
PS35
24V
PS36
A
PS46
452-3 230-4 /A P
SENSOR 402-A15 S_GND B 305-3 315-5-2
230-5 B P
305-1 315-6-1
IP-511
B 230-6 /B P
453-1
402-A14 5V2
ADU HANDLE 453-2 699- 4 699-A5
HDD I/F
35- 2 KEYC_SET H
35
447-12-1 24V/2
2
447-11-2 24V/2
ADU
447-10-3 PGND
FT44
454-2
38
447-2-11 36-7 CVDUP_SIG H 227-A12 TGR.CONT TGR.CONT TONER GUIDE ROLLER L 138- 2 REM/2
402-B11 REG_PS ***-** ***-** 320-4
COIN VENDOR
443-12-1
CN400-4 5V/2
217-12 IO_DTXD P
CN400-6 SGND
CN400-5 SGND
CN401-2 PGND
217-11 IO_DCLK P 202-A18 S_GND 135-A1 S_OUT1 -A9 /TCK -A9 /TCK
443-10-3
217-10 ADU_LATCH P 202-A10 S_GND 135-A2 S_GND -A10 GND -A10 GND
443-9-4
217- 9 IO_UCLK 202-A18 S_GND 135-A3 S_IN1 -A11 RCK -A11 RCK
443-8-5
217- 8 REQ1 202-A8 S_GND 135-A4 S.GND -A12 /RCK -A12 /RCK
443-7-6
217- 7 IO_URXD 202-A7 /CTS1 135-A5 /RTS1 -A13 GND -A13 GND
443-6-7
217- 6 ACK1 202-A6 /RTS1 135-A6 /CTS1 -A14 LCLKI -A14 LCLKI
443-5-8
DIMM
217- 4 S.GND P 202-A4 /DTR1 135-A8 /DSR1 -A16 GND -A16 GND
443-3-10
217- 3 2NDM_CLK P 202-A3 ERR_R 135-A9 ERR_R -A17 SCLK -A17 SCLK
443-2-11
217- 2 REG_PS 202-A2 S_GND 135-A10 S_GND -A18 /SEN -A18 /SEN
443-1-12
217-1 S-GND 202-A1 S_GND 135-A11 S_GND -A19 SDI
445-9
445-8
445-7
445-6
445-5
445-4
445-3
445-2
445-1
446-2
446-1
-A19 SDI
202-B11 /PVV 135-B1 PVV -A20 SDO -A20 SDO
202-B10 /TONVV 135-B2 TONVV CN110-B1 TG CN170-B1 TG
ADB
-B9 D1
71-1
71-2
344-7-3 310-1
71-5
A
-B16 /LCLKO
MEMORY BOARD
L 229- 5 FIXFAN3_EM
FM6
344-6-4 342-3-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F -B17 GND -B17 GND
751-6 88-6 L 229- 6 FIXFAN_D -B18 5V2 -B18 5V2
-B19 5V2 -B19 5V2
EXIT
134-A3 DFD1
750-7-4
(1)
345-1-3
139-22 RI
139- 9 NC
139- 1 NC
139-25 NC
139-24 NC
139-23 NC
139-21 NC
139-19 NC
139-18 NC
139-17 NC
139-16 NC
139-15 NC
139-14 NC
139-13 NC
139-12 NC
139-11 NC
139-10 NC
FOR KRDS
38
37
36
35
L 229-11 FIXFAN1_EM
139- 6 DSR IN
139- 3 RXD IN
750-9-2
139- 8 DCD IN
FM8
219-9 ACK4
LAN I/F
FAN/2
16
16
15
15
HV
134-A9 DFD7
134-A10 PCLK
134-B1 PBUSY
134-B2 ADREQ
58-2-1 134-B3 XFLAG
(OPTION)
FOR ISW 36PINS
229-13 MC24V_2
20
20
19
19
MODEL
134-B4 HBUSY
DRUM MOTOR
134-B6 /INT
L Low level
H High level
Connector
FIXING MOTOR
134-B7 AC1284
ANPHENOL CONECTOR
134-B8 GND
50-1
P Pulse signal
LT-402/LT-412
134-B9 GND
751-4 88-4
the main switch turned ON.
134-B10 GND
751-1 88-1
DEVELOPING MOTOR
218-4 SIN
751-3 88-3
218-6 RTS
218-3 CTS
218-1 SOUT
218-2 SGND
218-5 S-GND
751-2 88-2
under normal idling conditions with
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
PAPER FEED MOTOR
MODEM
RS232C I/F
Faston
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
100-4 SG
100-3 SG
104-2 5V2
104-1 5V2
100-2 5V1
100-1 5V1
255-1-6
255-2-5
255-3-4
255-4-3
255-5-2
255-6-1
104-3 12V1
105-3 SGND
105-2 SGND
105-1 SGND
324-1 MTXD
MANUAL
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
324-2 SGND
324-3 MCTS
324-4 MRXD
(OPTION)
324-5 SGND
7155/7165 SERVICE HANDBOOK
324-6 MRTS
CB
FS-110/FS-210
Example)
(4) Signal flow
85-1
SGND
PS1
5VDC
CN1-1 24V2
85-2
CN1-2 5V2
2
85-3
CN1-3 SG
85-4
CN1-4 PG
85-5
(3) RC is the flat cable.
CN1-5 PG
85-6
A-1
CN1-6 FG
signal flow
Direction of
the connector symbols ( )
REVISED REVISION
The solid black circle ( ) among
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
DATE
May.2002
A-1
PAGE
METHOD
REPLACEMENT
APPENDIX
2 [1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram 1/4
AC220V TO 240V : INLET
MAIN POWER
POWER PLUG SWITCH
FT10
AC100V FT11 SW1
FT37 FT38
SERIES
40-1
40-2
FT35 FT1 CBR1 FT11
FT5 FT7
1-2 ACIN(L)
3-2 JH1_DRIVE
3-1 JH_DRIVE
L 31-1 FAN1
L 31-2 FAN2
31-3 FAN3
FT33 FT3 FT9 8-1 1-3 ACIN(L) MAIN
DRV
1-1 ACIN(L) POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN
24V
RELAY FM13
POWER PLUG FT13 RL2
FT101
NF COIL2 COIL1 COIL
EUROPE ONLY
FNS ADUDB
EUROPE ONLY
6
MRL
11-13 S_GNDHDD
11-10 S_GND IP
11-11 S_GND IP
11-12 S_GND IP
12-1 24V1 PRCB
12-4 12V2 PRCB
13-16 P.GND DF
FT100
INLET TYPE ONLY
12-8 5V2 OB
11-6 12V1 IP
12-7 5V2 OB
13-7 5V2 DF
CBR2
11-3 5V1 IP
11-4 5V1 IP
5-2
5-1
FT34
FT10 1-5 ACIN(N)
FT1 8-2 HEATER RELAY
1-6 ACIN(N)
FT2 1-4 N.C.
FT36 FT4 FT6 FT8
FT12
EUROPE ONLY TS1 FT(PS)31
51-1 51-2 FIXING HEATER LAMP/1 L1_DRIVE
THARMOSTAT/U FT19 FT24 FT25 FT20
F/G
51-3 4-1 L1_DRIVE'
L2 TRC1
6-1 FT15 180 C FT16 4-2 LP_DRIVE'
4-3 L1_CONT'
FT26 FIXING HEATER LAMP/2 FT(PS)32
7-1 L1_CONT
7-2 6-4 FT27 FT21
51-4
L3
TRANSFORMER 2-2 L2_DRIVE 40
50-2 TS2 41
FIXING HEATER LAMP/3 42
THARMOSTAT/L 2-3 L3_DRIVE TRC3 TRC2
43
15-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
F/G FT17 FT23 45
15-4 MAINRL_CONT
110 C FT18 FT22 FT28 FT29
46
15-6 PSFAN_EM
FIXING
10-1 NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN
10-2
9-4 UNIT
F/G NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN 2-1 L_DRIVE 47
TRANSFORMER
15-7 SGND
FT(PS)30 48
LP_DRIVE 49
78-1
78-2
78-3
78-4
78-5
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
DF-316 70
69
71
72
P 620-1 U
WRITING
600-10 L.PG
600-5 24V1
600-6 24V1
600-7 24V1
(Xe_LAMP)
600-1 5V2 M11 SCANNER MOTOR
600-2 5V2
600-3 S.G
600-4 S.G
600-8 P.G
600-9 P.G
P 620-2 V
613-6 ADF_OPEN_PS
612-A11 RES_PS(SIDE2)
613-2 3.3V(SIZE_VR)
612-A8 RES_PS(SIDE1)
612-B11 ORG_SET_PS
P
615-2 I/L_24V2
620-3 W
612-B5 SKEW_PS_R
612-B2 SKEW_PS_F
613-3 SIZE_ANA
612-A5 SIZE_PS_S
612-A2 SIZE_PS_L
612-A14 READ_PS
615-1 24V2
613-1 FAN_LD
637-1 630-1
612-B14 EXIT_PS
612-B8 LAST_PS
623-1 24V
613-4 A.GND
613-5 S.GND
612-A10 S.GND
612-A13 S.GND
612-B10 S.GND
612-B13 S.GND
LDB
612-A1 S.GND
612-A4 S.GND
612-A7 S.GND
612-B1 S.GND
612-B4 S.GND
612-B7 S.GND
INDX SB
637-2 630-2
623-2 CONT L1 INVB
613-7 5V
H
612-A12 5V
612-A15 5V
612-B12 5V
612-B15 5V
612-A3 5V
612-A6 5V
612-A9 5V
612-B3 5V
612-B6 5V
612-B9 5V
637-3 630-3
L 623-3 LAMP.PG
637-4 L1
180-A1
-A10
-A11
51-1
-A2
-A3
-A4
-A5
-A6
-A7
-A8
-A9
-B1
-B2
-B3
-B4
-B5
-B6
-B7
-B8
-B8
-B8
-B8
-2
-3
-4
-5
EXPOSURE LAMP
SCANNER UNIT L1
614-A1 DF_FAN_DRIVE F/G F/G
614-A2 DF_M1_A 631-3-1
H 623-4 24V DRV
614-A3 DF_M1_A
614-A4 P.GND
L 623-5 EM 631-2-2
FM9 SCANNER COOLING FAN
623-6 P.GND 631-1-3
614-A5 24V4
614-A6 24V4
614-A7 24V4
614-A8 24V4
632-3 SCANNER
186- 1-11
185-1-11
614-A9 DF_M2_B 624-13 S.GND
187-1-5
- 2-10
- 10-2
- 11-1
-2-10
-10-2
-11-1
- 3-9
- 4-8
- 5-7
- 6-6
- 7-5
- 8-4
- 9-3
- 3-9
- 4-8
- 5-7
- 6-6
- 7-5
- 8-4
- 9-3
632-2 SCANNER HP SENSOR
-2-4
-3-3
-4-2
-5-1
614-A10 DF_M2_B L 624-14 SIG
632-1 PS61
614-A11 DF_M2_A 624-15 5V
614-B1 DF_M2_A
SCDB 1/2
639-3-1 633-3
614-B2 DF_24V_OUT(CL) 624-1 S.GND
639-2-2 633-2
614-B3 DF_24V_OUT(SD1) H 624-2 APS_TIM 639-1-3 633-1 PS51 APS TIMING SENSOR
614-B4 DF_24V_OUT(SD2) 624-3 5V
-B10 GND
-B11 GND
634-3
CN132-1 5V
CN132-2 SGND
CN132-3 /IND
CN132-4 SGND
L CN132-5 INDPR
CN130-A1 GND
-A2 VIDEO2
-A3 /VIDEO2
-A4 GND
-A5 LPR5V
-A6 LD5V
-A7 LD5V
-A8 GND
-A9 VIDEO1
-A10 /VIDEO1
-A11 GND
P CN130-B1 /ENB1
-B2 /S/H1
-B3 /ALM1
-B4 GND
-B5 /ENB2
-B6 /S/H2
-B7 /ALM2
-B8 GND
-B9 GND
614-B5 DF_24V_OUT(SD3) 624-4 APS_5V
634-2
614-B6 DF_CL_DRIVE L 624-5 APS.1 634-1 PS63 APS SENSOR/1
614-B7 DF_SD2_DRIVE 624-6 S.GND
635-3
614-B8 DF_SD3_DRIVE 624-7 APS_5V
635-2
614-B9 DF_SD1_DRIVE H 624-8 APS.2 PS64 APS SENSOR/2
635-1
614-B10 DF_M1_B 624-9 S.GND
H
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
614-B11 DF_M1_B 636-3
624-10 APS_5V
636-2
APS SENSOR/3
H 624-11 APS.3 636-1 PS65
624-12 S.GND
H 625-7 APS.1_SIG
H 625-6 APS.2_SIG
137-1 APS.1_SIG
137-2 APS.2_SIG ICB 1/2
H 625-5 APS.3_SIG 137-3 APS.3_SIG
625-4 NC 137-4
L 625-3 COVER_SIG 137-5 COVER_SIG
89 625-2 APS_CONT 137-6 APS_CONT
81 88 625-1 S.GND 137-7 S.GND
80 87
79 86
78 85
77 84
74 76 83
73 75 82
2
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
13-6 26V1 LCT
64
13-8 5V2 LCT
13-12 S-GND LCT
63
LCT
13-17 P-GND LCT
62
APPENDIX
61
60
59
58
CN103-1 5V2
57
CN103-2 12V2
56
CN103-3 GND
83-1 93-1
55
CN103-4 GND 21-1 24V2
83-2 93-2
54
21-2 24V2
53
21-3 P.GND
154-14 LCD_ADJ LCD_ADJ 21-4 P.GND
52
FT40
51
HV
164-A13-2 154-12 LCD_D3 LD3 12-19 P.GND H/V
P 140- 1 S_OUT2 150- 1 S_IN2 154-11 LCD_D2
164-A12-3 LD2
140- 2 S_IN2 150- 2 S_OUT2 P 154-10 LCD_D1
164-A11-4 LD1
P 140- 3 /RTS2 150- 3 CTS 154- 9 LCD_D0
164-A10-5 LD0
140- 4 /CTS2 150- 4 RTS P 154- 8 24V
MS1
164-A9-6 LCD_24V
MS/R
LCD
164-A7-8
140- 7 SHUT 150- 7 SHUT 154- 5 CP 32-1 24V1
164-A6-9 CP
140- 8 SW_SIG 150- 8 SW_SIG 154- 4 LP 32-2 P.GND
164-A5-10 LP
140- 9 WT_LED_ON 150- 9 WT_LED_ON 154- 3 FLM
SPARE
164-A4-14 FLM
140-10 SHUT_LED_ON 150-10 SHUT_LED_ON 154- 2 NC
164-A3-12 NC
FT41
151- 2 LCD_D2
MS/L
136- 2 LCD_D2
164-B12-3 151- 3 LCD_D1 155- 3 X1_CONT Y2CONT
136- 3 LCD_D1
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram 2/4
PAKB
164-B10-5
136- 5 GND 151- 5 GND
OB1
164-B9-6
136- 6 CP 151- 6 CP
164-B8-7
136- 7 GND 151- 7 GND
164-B7-8 153- 1 PWM 165- 1 PWM
15-9 N.C.
15-8 N.C.
136- 8 LP 151- 8 LP
164-B6-9 153- 2 GND 165- 2 GND
151- 9 GND
15-11 REM/3
15-10 REM/2
136- 9 GND
15-14 NMI ICB
OB INVB
164-B2-13
136-13 5V2 151-13 5V2
164-B1-14
136-14 5V2 151-14 5V2
93-6
93-5
93-3
161-2-1 162-2-1
158- 1 SW_SIG
161-1-2 162-1-2
158- 2 GND
SW2
CN152-2 5V2
82-2
82-1
83-3
CN152-1 24V1
SUB POWER SWITCH
CN152-4 S_GND
CN152-3 S_GND
163-4-1
163-3-2
163-2-3
163-1-4
ICB 2/2
106-1 FOR IP
106-2
106-3
106-4
24
24
23
23
LAN I/F
PARALLEL
HD-105
(OPTION)
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
IP-511
HDD I/F
(OPTION)
(OPTION)
CN113
CN113
CN112
CN112
138- 1 NC
L 138- 2 REM/2
L 138- 3 REM/3
L 138- 4 NC
90
135-A1 S_OUT1 -A9 /TCK -A9 /TCK
91
135-A2 S_GND -A10 GND -A10 GND
92
135-A3 S_IN1 -A11 RCK -A11 RCK
93
135-A4 S.GND -A12 /RCK -A12 /RCK
94
135-A5 /RTS1 -A13 GND -A13 GND
95
135-A6 /CTS1 -A14 LCLKI -A14 LCLKI
DIMM
96
135-A7 /DTR1
MU-402
MU-401
97
135-A8 /DSR1 -A16 GND -A16 GND
98
135-A9 ERR_R -A17 SCLK -A17 SCLK
99
135-A10 S_GND -A18 /SEN -A18 /SEN
135-A11 S_GND
100
-A19 SDI -A19 SDI
135-B1 PVV
101
-A20 SDO -A20 SDO
135-B2 TONVV
102
CN110-B1 TG CN170-B1 TG
ADB
135-B3 B_VV
103
-B2 CLAMP -B2 CLAMP
135-B4 S_VV
104
-B3 ACLAMP -B3 ACLAMP
135-B5 T_SIG
105
-B4 BCLAMP -B4 BCLAMP
106 135-B6 EE_VV -B5 GND -B5 GND
135-B7 RESET
107
-B6 DO -B6 DO
135-B8 RES CONT
108
-B7 /DO -B7 /DO
109 135-B9 NC -B8 GND -B8 GND
135-B10 DDF_VV
110
-B9 D1 -B9 D1
135-B11 S_GND
111
CN110-B1 TG
134-A1 HCLK -B2 CLAMP
134-A2 DFD0 -B3 ACLAMP
B
A
134-A3 DFD1
134-A4 DFD2 -B4 BCLAMP
18
18
17
17
139-22 RI
139- 9 NC
139- 1 NC
139-25 NC
139-24 NC
139-23 NC
139-21 NC
139-19 NC
139-18 NC
139-17 NC
139-16 NC
139-15 NC
139-14 NC
139-13 NC
139-12 NC
139-11 NC
139-10 NC
134-A5 DFD3
139-20 DTR
FOR KRDS
38
37
36
35
134-A6 DFD4
139- 7 S.GND
139- 5 CTS IN
139- 6 DSR IN
139- 3 RXD IN
139- 8 DCD IN
LAN I/F
134-A7 DFD5
139- 4 RTS OUT
139- 2 TXD OUT
14
14
13
13
16
16
15
15
134-A8 DFD6
ADUDB
HV
134-A9 DFD7
134-A10 PCLK
134-B1 PBUSY
134-B2 ADREQ
134-B3 XFLAG
FOR ISW 36PINS
20
20
19
19
134-B4 HBUSY
DRUM MOTOR
134-B5 DAVIL
134-B6 /INT
FIXING MOTOR
134-B7 AC1284
ANPHENOL CONECTOR
134-B8 GND
134-B9 GND
134-B10 GND
DEVELOPING MOTOR
MODEM
RS232C I/F
100-4 SG
100-3 SG
104-2 5V2
104-1 5V2
100-2 5V1
100-1 5V1
104-3 12V1
105-3 SGND
105-2 SGND
105-1 SGND
112
113
114
115
116
117
2
73
74
75
H 216-1 FIXHT1_CONT
76
H 216-2 FIXHT2_CONT
90-2
90-1
77
H 216-3 FIXHT3_CONT
78
216-4 MAINRL_CONT
79
216-5 PSFAN_CONT-17
80
9006/1061#22 216-6 PSFAN_EM
81
216-7 SGND
82
812-1 H CN200-1 24V/1
237-B13 T1RISEM_24V
83
812-2 CN200-2 12V/2
237-B12 T1RISEM_D
APPENDIX
M16
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/1 H
84
CN200-3 5V/2
85
CN200-4 5V/2
86
810-2-1 814-4-10 800B-7-10 237-A7 T1FEEDMC_DRV H CN200-5 S-GND
87
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/1 810-1-2 814-3-11 -6-11 237-A6 MC24V_1 CN200-6 S-GND
MC3
88
CN200-7 S-GND
CN200-8 P-GND
89
811-2-1 814-2-12 -5-12 237-A5 T1PREMC_DRV
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/1 811-1-2 814-1-13 -4-13 237-A4 MC24V_1
MC4
TRAY1
817-1 237-A19 NC
F/G
817-2
27
CN
237-A18 NC CN201-1 24V_INT
F/G
817-3
DUMMY
28
237-A17 NC CN201-2 PGND
P 208-16 SCAN_CLK 610-1 SCAN_CLK
91-1
HTR1 L 208-15 SCAN_F/R 610-2 SCAN_F/R
91-2
P 208-14 SCAN_MGN 610-3 SCAN_MGN(ENBL)
HEATER/1 P 208-13 SCAN_CUR1 610-4 SCAN_CUR1
P 208-12 SCAN_CUR2 610-5 SCAN_CUR2
832-1 236-B13 T2RISEM_24V P 208-11 SCAN_CUR3 610-6 SCAN_CUR3
H
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/2 832-2 236-B12 T2RISEM_D H P 208-10 MODE1 610-7 MODE1
M17
P 208-9 MODE2 610-8 MODE2
SCANNER I/F
SNSOR
H 208-8 MODE3 610-9 MODE3
830-2-1 834-4-10 820B-7-10 236-A7 T2FEEDMC_DRV H H 208-7 EXP_CONT 610-10 EXP_CONT
HUMIDITY
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/2 830-1-2 834-3-11 -6-11 208-6 SCANFAN_CONT-18 610-11 SCANFAN_CONT-18
236-A6 MC24V_1
MC5
208-5 SCANFAN_EM 610-12 SCANFAN_EM L
831-2-1 834-2-12 -5-12 208-4 SCANHP_PS 610-13 SCANHP_PS L
236-A5 T2PREMC_DRV H 610-14 SCN_DET(SGND)
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/2 831-1-2 834-1-13 -4-13 208-3 SCN_DET
236-A4 MC24V_1
MC6
208-2 SGND 610-15 S.G
208-1 APS_TIMING 610-16 APS_TIMING
TRAY2
F/G
882-1
236-A18 NC
F/G
CN
882-2 236-A17 NC
DUMMY
234-A20 DF_M1_CLK 611-A1 DF_M1_CLK
234-A19 DF_M1_F/R 611-A2 DF_M1_F/R
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram 3/4
DF_M1=FEED M
HEATER/2 234-A15 DF_M1_I1 611-A6 DF_M1_I1
852-1 234-A14 DF_M1_I2 611-A7 DF_M1_I2
235-B13 T3RISEM_24V H 234-A13 DF_M2_CLK 611-A8 DF_M2_CLK
852-2 235-B12 T3RISEM_D
M18
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3 H 234-A12 DF_M2_F/R 611-A9 DF_M2_F/R
234-A11 DF_M2_EN 611-A10 DF_M2_EN
850-2-1 854-4-10 840B-7-10 234-A10 DF_M2_M1 611-A11 DF_M2_M1
235-A7 T3FEEDMC_DRV H 234-A9 DF_M2_M2 611-A12 DF_M2_M2
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/3 850-1-2 854-3-11 -6-11
DF_M2=REV M
235-A6 MC24V_1
MC7
234-A8 DF_M2_I1 611-A13 DF_M2_I1
SCDB 2/2
MC8
TRAY3
234-A4 DF_REVSD_CONT 611-A17 DF_SD1_CONT
234-A3 DF_SEPSD_CONT 611-A18 DF_SD2_CONT
F/G
F/G
234-A2 DF_EXITSD_CONT 611-A19 DF_SD3_CONT
DF I/F
M19
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/4 H 234-B16 REG_PS(SIZE1)
234-B15 REG_PS(SIDE2) 611-B6 RES_PS(SIDE2)
234-B14 READ_PS 611-B7 READ_PS
870-2-1 874-4-10 860B-7-10 203-A7 T4FEEDMC_DRV H 234-B13 SKEW_PS_F 611-B8 SKEW_PS_F
PAPER FEED CLUTCH/4 870-1-2 874-3-11 -6-11 203-A6 MC24V_1 234-B12 SKEW_PS_R 611-B9 SKEW_PS_R
MC9
234-B11 LAST_PS 611-B10 LAST_PS
871-2-1 874-2-12 -5-12 203-A5 T4PREMC_DRV H 234-B10 SET_PS 611-B11 ORG_SET_PS
PRE-REGISTRATION CLUTCH/4 871-1-2 874-1-13 -4-13 203-A4 MC24V_1 234-B9 EXIT_PS 611-B12 EXIT_PS
ONLY)
MC10
TRAY4
234-B8 OPEN_PS 611-B13 COVER_OPEN_PS
(JAPAN
234-B7 ADF_OPEN_PS 611-B14 ADF_OPEN_PS
F/G
234-B6 FAN_LD 611-B15 FAN_LD
F/G
234-B5 RESET_OUT 611-B16 RESET_OUT
234-B4 S.GND 611-B17 S.GND
234-B3 3.3V 611-B18 3.3V
890A-1-12 214-A1 NC 234-B2 SIZE_ANA 611-B19 SIZE_ANA
898-1-2 890A-2-11 214-A2 BPUDM_A 234-B1 A.GND 611-B20 A.GND
H
UP/DOWN MOTOR/BP 898-2-1 890A-3-10 214-A3 BPUDM_B
M20
H
237-A16 5V3 800B-1-16 814-1-13 801-1
-2-15 814-2-12 -2
BY-PASS
H 237-A15 T1PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/1
PS01
FEED
236-B17 VFMC2_DRV H H 237-A9 T1_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/1
PAPER
MC11 MC12
PS03
VERTICAL
237-A3 5V3
-15-2 -2
L 237-A2 T1RM_PS REMAINING PAPER SENSOR/1
PS04
P.G.
302-10 307-2 -7-8 815-4-3 807-1
24V 237-B7 5V3
302-11 307-1 -8-7 815-5-2 -2
19 19
-9-6 815-6-1 -3
237-B5 SGND
-10-5 809-1
237-B4 3.3V2
-11-4 -2
237-B3 T1SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/1
VR1
* -12-3 -3
237-B2 AGND
362-1(MINI CT) 360-B12-B1
206-12 G_SIG_EX
121
SIG
-2 -B11-B2 *
12V 206-11 12V
120
-3 -B10-B3
LED(Dmax) 206-10 DMLED_CONT H
-4 -B9-B4 820B-1-16 834-1-13 821-1
119
DmaxMONI 206- 9 DM_MONI_EX 236-A16 5V3
-5 -B8-B5 -2-15 834-2-12 -2
118
TONER CONTROL LED(JAM) 206- 8 DJLED_CONT *H H 236-A15 T2PRE_PS PAPER FEED SENSOR/2
PS07
-16-1 -3
236-A1 SGND
DRUM
366-1-2 -A3-A8
206-15 MC24V_2 820A-3-12
366-2-1 -A4-A7 236-B11 T2_SET_P
TONER RECYCLE CLUTCH 206-16 TRCMC_DRV
MC14
-13-2
236-B1 5V3
-1-14
364-1-2 -A5-A6 -2-13
TRAY2
-9-6 835-6-1 -3
236-B5 SGND
-10-5 829-1
236-B4 3.3V2
-11-4 -2
236-B3 T2SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/2
VR2
* -12-3 -3
236-B2 AGND
332-1-6 330-1-9 236-B18 NC
210-1 TNSM24V
332-2-5 330-2-8
210-2 TNSM24V
332-3-4 330-3-7
210-3 TNSM_A
TONNER SUPPLY MOTOR 332-4-3 330-4-6 P 840B-1-16 854-1-13 841-1
M12
-1-14
PS38
403-1 24V FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 311-2 94-5-11 95-5-11 235-B8 SGND -6-9 855-3-4 -3 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-3
24V 415-5 213-5 FDOORL_PS
403-2 24V
PS39
24V 416-2 417-1-6 OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR 213-9 5V2 * 235-B2 AGND -12-3 -3 PAPER SIZE VR/3
403-7 24V
24V 416-5 417-2-5 235-B17 NC
403-8 24V
A 416-4 417-3-4
ADU REVERSE MOTOR 403-9 A P 235-A17 NC
A 416-6 417-4-3 341-1-4 94-10-6 95-10-6
M9
407-2 GATE_DR L
203-B11 T4_SET_P 860A- 3-12
203-B1 5V3 -13-2
- 1-14
- 2-13
860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1
203-B10 5V3
203-B9 T4SIZE_S_PS 860A- 4-11 875-1-6 868-1 PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-4
PS23
203-B6 T4SIZE_L_PS
PS24
- 9-6 875-6-1 -3
203-B5 SGND
-10-5 869-1
203-B4 3.3V2
-11-4 -2
203-B3 T4SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/4
VR4
* -12-3 -3
203-B2 AGND
203-B16 NC
203-B15 NC
203-B14 NC
2
303-1
5V 212-A1 5V
303-2
S.G. 212-A2 P.GND
427-1-2 303-3
405-1 MC24V CONT 212-A3 DEVM_CONT H
ADU CONVEYANCE CLUTCH 427-2-1 303-4
405-2 ADUCR_MC L CLK 212-A4 DEVM_CLK P
MC13
303-5
CW/CCW 212-A5 DEVM_CW/CCW H
APPENDIX
DEVELOPPING 303-6
LD 212-A6 DEVM_EM H
M3
303-7
426-1-2 MOTOR (H/L) 212-A7 DEVM_GAIN L
405-3 MC24V 303-8 313-4
ADU DECELERATION CLUTCH 426-2-1 P.G.
MC2
405-4 ADUDN_MC L 303-9 313-3
303-10 313-2
303-11 313-1
16 16 16 16
425-1 420-16-1
425-1 VIDEO 405-20 DEF_VIDEO
425-2 420-15-2 *
425-2 GND 405-19 GND 212-A8 SUCTFAN_D H
425-3 420-14-3 337-2-2
425-3 +5V 405-18 5V2 DEVELOPING SUCTION 212-A9 SFAN_EM L
420-13-4
FM4
425-4 -5V
425-4 405-17 -5V 337-3-1
PAPER MIS-CENTERING 425-5 420-12-5 FAN 212-A10 P.GND
425-5 GND 405-16 GND
SENSOR 425-6 420-11-6
P 301-1
425-6 SI 405-15 DEF_SI 5V 212-B1 5V
PS70
425-7 420-10-7 301-2
425-7 GND 405-14 GND S.G. 212-B2 P.GND
425-8 420-9-8 P 301-3
425-8 CLK 405-13 DEF_CLK CONT 212-B3 DRUM_CONT H
425-9 420-8-9 301-4 880-1-15 884-1
425-9 GLED 405-12 DEF_LED P CLK 212-B4 DRUM_CLK P 205-15 5V3 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
425-10 420-7-10 301-5 880-2-14 884-2
425-10 VLED 405-11 24V1 CW/CCW 212-B5 CW/CCW H L 205-14 T1PASS_PS
PS25
M2
424-3 420-6-11 301-7
405-10 5V2 SGND 880-4-12 885-1
424-2 420-5-12 301-8 316-4 205-12 5V3
LEADING EDGE SENSOR 405-9 EDGE_PS H P.G. 880-5-11 885-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
PS43
424-1 420-4-13 301-9 316-3 L 205-11 T2PASS_PS
P.G.
PS26
405-8 S_GND
18 18
880-6-10 885-3 SENSOR/2
301-10 316-2 205-10 S.GND
423-1 420-3-14 24V
405-7 5V2
REGISTRATION
420-2-15 24V 301-11 316-1 880-7-9 886-1
17 17
423-2 205-9 5V3
REGISTRATION SENSOR 405-6 2ND_PS H 880-8-8 886-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
PS44
423-3 420-1-16 L 205-8 T3PASS_PS
405-5 S_GND
PS27
MC1
408-13 2ND_MC H CW/CCW 212-B11 TONERM_CW/CCW H
TONER BOTTLE LD 331-6 334-6-6 205-10 S.GND
212-B12 TONERM_EM L 880-13-3 888-1
M13
331-7 205-3 5V3
MOTOR SGND 880-14-2 888-2 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
5V 421-1 331-8 334-4-8 322-4 H 205-2 VF_DOOR_PS
408-11 +5V P.G.
PS29
880-15-1 888-3
[1] 7155/7165 Overall Wiring Diagram 4/4
S.G 421-2 331-9 334-3-9 322-3 205-1 S_GND DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR
408-10 PGND P.G.
24 24
421-3 331-10 334-2-10 322-2
VERTICAL PAPER FEED
23 23
P
CW/CCW 421-5
408-7 CW/CCW H
LD 421-6
408-6 LD L
M5
CONVEYANCE MOTOR 421-7
(H/L) 408-5 H/L H 50-A4-A1 55-1
P.G. 421-8 336-1 207- 9 5V2
408-4 PGND 227-B1 MAINFAN_D L 50-A3-A2 55-2
P.G. 421-9 336-2 H 207-10 FIXEXIT_PS FIXING EXIT SENSOR
408-3 PGND
PS30
421-10
MAIN BODY 227-B2 MAINFAN_EM L 50-A2-A3 55-3
24V 408-2 +24V 336-3 207-1 1 S_GND
FM1
COOLING FAN/1 227-B3 MAINFAN_HL_20 L 50-A1-A4
24V 421-11 336-4 207-1 2 S_GND
408-1 +24V
227-B4 P.GND
338-1-4 51-A1-A10
WRITTING SECTION 227-B5 WRFAN1_D L 207- 8 S_GND
338-2-3 51-A10-A1
461-1-3 227-B6 WRFAN1_EM L 207- 1 FIX_SET_N
402-B13 SUC_FAN H 338-3-2
FM2
CONVEYANCE COOLING FAN 227-B7 WRFAN_HL L 51-A2-A9 52-1 FIXING TEMPERTURE
ADU DB 2/2
338-4-1 207- 7 TH1+ TH1
461-2-2 227-B8 P-GND 51-A3-A8 52-2 SENSOR/1
FM3
SUCTION FAN 461-3-1
402-B14 SUC_EM L * 207- 6 TH1-
402-B15 P_GND 304-1 *
FIXING
M10
402-B17 SEP_CLR_M A L 227-B12 MAINM_CLK P 207- 3 TH3+
CLEANING MOTOR CW/CCW 304-5
227-B13 MAINM_F/R L 51-A7-A4
2
LD 304-6
* 207- 2 TH3-
FIXING MOTOR 227-B14 MAINM_EM H
M4
TRNSFER 463-1-2 460-6-2 S.G. 304-7 *
402-B18 MC24V
463-2-1 460-7-1 304-8 314-4
TSL
SYNCHRONIZATION 402-B19 TSL_DR H P.G.
P.G. 304-9 314-3
14 14
402-B20 NC
LAMP 24V 304-10 314-2
439-1-2 460-3-5 414- 1 NC 24V 304-11 314-1 890-A1-12 899-1-9 897-1
13 13
HTR3 214-A12 5VA
439-2-1 460-2-6 414- 2 NC 890-A2-11 899-2-8 897-2
214-A11 BPSIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/BP
VR5
PAPER CONVEYANCE
414- 5 NC 350-1 214-A9 5V3
188-7-1 890-A5-8 899-5-5 896-2
414- 6 NC -2 189-1 211-7 24V1 L 214-A8 BPSIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/1-BP
188-6-2
PS31
M15
-6 -5 211-3 POLM_LOCK H L 214-A5 BPSIZE_L_PS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/2-BP
PMDB
413- 1 NC 899-9-1
PS32
MOTOR 188-4-6:TEST
214-A4 SGND 890-A9-4 895-3
413- 2 NC -7 -6 211-2 N.C.
188-3-7:TEST
413- 3 NC -8 -7 211-1 N.C. 890-B1-12 893-1
-9 214-B12 5V3
413- 4 NC 890-B2-11 893-2
-10 L 214-B11 BP_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
PS33
890-B6-7 892-3
FM10
MOTOR COOLING 453-1-3 436-3-1 A 318-1 214-B7 SGND SENSOR/BP
406- 3 P_GND LOOP ROLLER MOTOR 215-3 A P
318-3
M6
PS45
REVERSE SENSOR 450-3 451-1-3
402-A18 S_GND 890-B10-3 894-1
SENSOR 24V 305-2 315-1-6 214-B3 5V3
230-1 24V 890-B11-2 894-2
24V 305-5 315-2-5 L 214-B2 LOOP_PS LOOP SENSOR
PS36
PS46
452-3 230-4 /A P
SENSOR 402-A15 S_GND B 305-3 315-5-2
230-5 B P
B 305-1 315-6-1
230-6 /B P
453-1
402-A14 5V2
ADU HANDLE 453-2
L 699- 4 699-A5
402-A13 HD_PS 35- 1 MC24V_3
PS47
SENSOR 453-3 699- 2 699-A1 321- 1
402-A12 S_GND 35- 2 KEYC_SET H
35
447-12-1 24V/2
2
447-11-2 24V/2
ADU
402-B2 IO_DCLK 699- 3 699-A6 321- 3
(OPTION)
447-10-3 PGND
FT44
454-2
38
PS48
CONVEYANCE 454-3 447-8-5 36-1 CVM1_SIG NC
402-A9 S_GND 402-B5 IO_UREQ ***-** ***-** 321- 6
P 447-7-6 36-2 CVFEED_SIG PGND
SENSOR/2 P 402-B6 IO_UTXD ***-** ***-** 321- 7
447-6-7 36-3 CV_SIZE0 24V/1
455-1 402-B7 IO_UACK1 ***-** ***-**
36-4 CV_SIZE1
FT45
PS49
FT48
PS50
PRE-REGISTRATION 456-3 36-10 P-GND H 227-A9 GP.CONT GP.CONT
402-A3 S_GND 320-7
FT47
SD9
402-A2 LOCK_SD L 37-2 NC
FT47
443-12-1
CN400-4 5V/2
202-A18 S_GND
CN400-1 24V/1
217-12 IO_DTXD P
CN400-6 SGND
CN400-5 SGND
CN401-2 PGND
443-11-2
CN400-3 P_GND
CN401-1 24V-INT
90
121
92
120
93
119
217- 7 IO_URXD 202-A7 /CTS1
443-6-7
95
118
443-5-8
96
445-9
445-8
445-7
445-6
445-5
445-4
445-3
445-2
445-1
446-2
446-1
202-B11 /PVV
101
202-B10 /TONVV
102
202-B9 /B_VV
103
202-B8 /SVV
104
89-2
89-1
202-B7 BPSIZE_VR_0
105
202-B6 EE_VV
106
202-B5 RESET
107
202-B4 RES_CONT
108
202-B3 S.GND
109
202-B2 DDF_VV
110
72-1
72-2
71-1
202-B1 S_GND
111
71-2
344-9-1 310-3
71-3
202-1 S__GND
344-8-2 310-2
71-4
344-7-3 310-1
71-5
A
229- 3 5V
71-6
B
344-4-6 342-1-3
229- 4 P.GND
71-7
344-6-4 342-3-1
PAPER EXIT FAN/F
751-6 88-6 L 229- 6 FIXFAN_D
(1)
EXIT
Crimp
Connector
P Pulse signal
219-10 REQ4
the main switch turned ON.
58-2-1
(OPTION)
229-13 MC24V_2
58-1-2 WEB SOLENOID
SD2
H 229-14 WEBSD_DRV
under normal idling conditions with
Relay connector
(2) Signal types are as follows:
LT-402/LT-412
Faston
751-4 88-4
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
751-1 88-1
218-4 SIN
751-3 88-3
218-6 RTS
218-3 CTS
218-1 SOUT
218-2 SGND
218-5 S-GND
751-2 88-2
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
(OPTION)
CB
255-1-6
255-2-5
255-3-4
255-4-3
255-5-2
255-6-1
324-1 MTXD
Example)
324-2 SGND
(4) Signal flow
324-3 MCTS
FS-110/FS-210
SGND
PS1
5VDC
324-4 MRXD
324-5 SGND
324-6 MRTS 85-1
50
CN1-1 24V2
85-2
49
CN1-2 5V2
(3) RC is the flat cable.
85-3
48
CN1-3 SG
85-4
47
CN1-4 PG
signal flow
85-5
Direction of
CN1-5 PG
46
85-6
the connector symbols ( )
CN1-6 FG
45
112
44
113
43
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
41
40
114
115
116
117
4
AC100V
H 216-10 FIXHT1_CONT
AC120/127V
90-2
90-1
H 216-9 FIXHT2_CONT
810-2-1 814-4-10 800B-7-10
PAPER FEED 203-A7 T1FEEDMC_DRV H 216-8 FIXHT3_CONT
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
H
MC3
CLUTCH/1 203-A6 MC24V_1 216-7 MAINRL_CONT
APPENDIX
216-6 PSFAN_CONT-17
811-2-1 814-2-12 -5-12 216-5 PSFAN_EM
PRE-REGISTRATION 203-A5 T1PREMC_DRV H
LT1000
811-1-2 814-1-13 -4-13 216-4 S.GND
203-A4 MC24V_1
MC4
CLUTCH/1 216-3 REM/2
TRAY1
216-2 REM/3
FT36
FT35
F/G
216-1 AC_OFF
F/G
800A-14-1
25
CN200-1 24V/3
830-2-1 834-4-10 820B-7-10 203-B7 T2FEEDMC_DRV H CN200-2 24V/1
PAPER FEED
830-1-2 834-3-11 -6-11 CN200-3 12V/2
203-B6 MC24V_1
MC5
CLUTCH/2 CN200-4 5V/2
G/Y
G/Y
831-2-1 834-2-12 -5-12 CN200-5 5V/2
FT2
FT1
PRE-REGISTRATION 203-B5 T2PREMC_DRV H CN200-6 S.GND
LT1500
831-1-2 834-1-13 -4-13
203-B4 MC24V_1
MC6
CLUTCH/2 CN200-7 S.GND
FT2
FT2
FT1
FT1
CN200-8 S.GND
TRAY2
CN200-9 S.GND
F/G
F/G
820A-14-1
27
CN201-1 24V_INT
CBR2
CBR1
28
CN201-2 S.GND
FT4
FT3
850-2-1 854-4-10 840B-7-10
X1
PAPER FEED 204-A7 T3FEEDMC_DRV H CN209-2 LP_CONT
850-1-2 854-3-11 -6-11
X2
204-A6 MC24V_1 CN209-1 5V3
MC7
CLUTCH/3
851-2-1 854-2-12 -5-12 204-A5 T3PREMC_DRV
PRE-REGISTRATION H
851-1-2 854-1-13 -4-13
204-A4 MC24V_1
MC8
CLUTCH/3 P 208-16 SCAN_CLK 610-1 SCAN_CLK
FT6
FT5
[2] 7255/7272 Overall Wiring Diagram
TRAY3
L 208-15 SCAN_FR 610-2 SCAN_FR
F/G
F/G
P 208-14 SCAN_MGN 610-3 SCAN_MGN (ENBL)
SNSOR
840A-14-1
NF
HUMIDITY
P 208-13 SCAN_CUR1 610-4 SCAN_CUR1
10-2
10-1
7-2
7-1
P 208-12 SCAN_CUR2 610-5 SCAN_CUR2
FT8
FT7
FT8
870-1-2 874-3-11 -6-11 P 208-9 MODE2 610-8 MODE2 612-A3 5V
614-A8 24V4
614-A7 24V4
614-A6 24V4
614-A5 24V4
204-B6 MC24V_1
MC9
CLUTCH/4 208-8 MODE3 610-9 MODE3 612-A4 S.GND
614-A4 P. GND
FT10
H
FT9
SCANNER I/F
614-B1 DF_M2_A
614-A9 DF_M2_B
614-A3 DF_M1_A
614-A2 DF_M1_A
208-7 EXP_CONT 610-10 EXP_CONT 612-A5 SIZE_PS_S
614-B11 DF_M1_B
614-B10 DF_M1_B
614-A11 DF_M2_A
614-A10 DF_M2_B
871-2-1 874-2-12 -5-12 H
PRE-REGISTRATION 204-B5 T4PREMC_DRV H 612-A6 5V
208-6 SCANFAN_CONT-18 610-11 SCANFAN_CONT-18
614-B6 DF_CL_DRIVE
871-1-2 874-1-13 -4-13
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
614-B9 DF_SD1_DRIVE
614-B8 DF_SD3_DRIVE
614-B7 DF_SD2_DRIVE
614-A1 DF_FAN_DRIVE
204-B4 MC24V_1
MC10
6-4
6-1
9-4
9-1
CLUTCH/4 208-5 SCANFAN_EM 610-12 SCANFAN_EM L 612-A7 S.GND
TRAY4
208-4 SCANHP_PS 610-13 SCANHP_PS L 612-A8 RES_PS (SIDE1)
ACDB
F/G
208-3 SCN_DET 610-14 SCN_DET (S.GND) 612-A9 5V
F/G
FT12
FT11
612-A12 5V
8-2
8-1
18-1 5V3
612-A13 S.GND
17-2 AC_IN
612-A14 READ_PS
18-2 LP_CONT
DF-322
92-1 234-A17 DF_M1_M1 611-A4 DF_M1_M1
HTR2 611-A5 DF_M1_M2 612-B2 SKEW_PS_F
92-2 234-A16 DF_M1_M2
611-A6 DF_M1_I1 612-B3 5V
234-A15 DF_M1_I1
DF_M1=FEED M
x1
x2
M16
234-A11 DF_M2_EN 611-A10 DF_M2_EN 5(16)-1
5-1
COIL
612-B8 LAST_PS
ONLY
611-A11 DF_M2_M1
COIL1
M17
234-A8 DF_M2_I1 611-A13 DF_M2_I1
DF_M2=FEED M
611-A14 DF_M2_I2 612-B11 ORG_SET_PS
852-2 234-A7 DF_M2_I2
237-B5 T3RISEM_D
FT37
H 612-B12 5V
TRAY UP DRIVE MOTOR/3 852-1 234-A6 DF_M2_MOI 611-A15 DF_M2_MOI
237-B6 T3RISEM_24V H 612-B13 S.GND
50-2
611-A16 DF_FAN_CONT
50-1
234-A5 DF_FAN_OCNT
612-B14 EXIT_PS
SW1
872-1
MAIN POWER
51-1
M18 M19
234-A2 DF_EXITSD_CONT 611-A19 DF_SD3_CONT
F/G
SCDB
613-3 SIZE_ANA
51-2
DF I/F
VERTICL CONVEYANCE 237-B9 MC24V_2 234-B19 DF_CL_CONT 611-B2 DF_CL_CONT
881-2-1 613-4 A.GND
237-B10 VFMC1_DRV H 234-B18 SIZE_PS_L 611-B3 SIZE_PS_L
1-4 N.C.
FT17
FEED
MRL
PAPER
237-B12 VFMC2_DRV 234-B15 REG_PS (SIDE2) 611-B6 RES_PS (SIZE2) 96-2
MC11 MC12
TS2
CLUTCH /2
SW3
237-B13 NC
FT15
VERTICAL
TS1
615-1 24V2
FIXING UNIT
FT13
FT14
615-2 I/L_24V2
110 C
HEATER SWITCH
MAIN
THARMOSTAT/D
FT16
898-1-2 890A-2-11
214-A2 BPUDM_A H 234-B9 EXIT_PS 611-B12 EXIT_PS
FT18
BY-
214-A3 BPUDM_B
M20
H 600-5 24V1
PASS
234-B7 ADF_OPEN_PS 611-B14 ADF_OPEN_PS 600-6 24V1
234-B6 FAN_LD 611-B15 FAN_LD 600-7 24V1 3-1 JH_DRIVE
234-B5 RESET_OUT 611-B16 RESET_OUT 600-1 5V2
FT22
FT19
FT26
M1
302-7 905-1 (Xe_LAMP)
L4
L3
L2
yance
*
set PS
307-3 L 237-A12 HFSET_PS
302-9 -3
20 20
P.G. 237-A11 S.GND
302-10 307-2 904-1-6 907-1
24V
302-11 307-1 237-A10 5V3
904-2-5 -2
19 19
24V
FT27
FT25
FT29
PS/L
yance
H 237-A9 HFPS_L
904-3-4 -3
H
H
H
NOT EXIST WITH JAPAN
237-A8 S.GND
904-4-3 906-1
FIXING HEATER LAMP/3
FIXING HEATER LAMP/2
FIXING HEATER LAMP/1
FT20
FT23
FT21
237-A7 5V3
904-5-2 -2
PS/R
yance
H 237-A6 HFPS_R P 620-2 V
P 620-1 U
904-6-1 -3 P 620-3 W
624-3 5V
625-4 NC
L 623-5 EM
237-A5 S.GND
624-15 5V
623-1 24V
L 624-14 SIG
624-8 APS.2
624-5 APS.1
H 623-2 CONT
625-1 S.GND
624-9 S.GND
624-6 S.GND
624-1 S.GND
623-6 P.GND
903-1-2
624-11 APS.3
624-12 S.GND
624-13 S.GND
624-7 APS_5V
624-4 APS_5V
237-A4 24V3
624-2 APS_TIM
55-1 50-A1-A4
624-10 APS_5V
L 623-3 LAMP.PG
903-2-1
yance
MC/L
H 625-5 APS.3_SIG
H 625-6 APS.2_SIG
H 625-7 APS.1_SIG
207-11 5V2
625-2 APS_CONT
H 237-A3 HFMC_L
L 625-3 COVER_SIG
FIXING EXIT 55-2 50-A2-A3
51-3
50-3
51-4
UNIT
207-12 FIXEXIT_PS
55-3 50-A3-A2 902-1-2
PS30
SENSOR 207-13 S.GND
Horizontal conveyance
50-A4-A1
237-A2 24V3
LOWER
902-2-1
207-14 S.GND H 237-A1 HFMC_R
639-1-3
639-2-2
639-3-1
203-A16 5V3
-2-15 814-2-12 -2 PAPER FEED
52-2-1 51-A9-A2 H 203-A15 T1PRE_PS
FIXING TEMPERTURE TS1 207-9 TH1+ -3-14 814-3-11 -3
F/G
203-A13 5V3
637-4
637-3
637-2
637-1
UPPER UNIT
L 203-A12 T1UP_PS
FIXING UNIT
53-3-1 51-A7-A4
2-1 L_DRIVE
2-3 L3 DRIVE
-6-11 814-6-8 -3
2-2 L2_DRIVE
FIXING TEMPERTURE
4-3 L1_CONT'
636-1
636-2
636-3
635-1
635-2
635-3
634-1
634-2
634-3
633-1
633-2
633-3
632-1
632-2
632-3
4-1 L1_DRIVE'
4-2 LP_DRIVE'
51-A3-A8
630-3
630-2
630-1
-14-3 804-1
207-3 S.GND 203-A3 5V3
L1_CONT
FT (PS) 32
TRAY1 (LT1500)
51-A2-A9 -15-2 -2 REMAINING
207-2 L 203-A2 T1RM_PS
-16-1 -3
800A-3-12
FT (PS) 31
L1_DRIVE
235-2 T1_SET_P
362-1 (MINI CT) 360-B12-B1 -13-2
PS63 APS SENSOR/1
L1 INVB
-1-14 FT (PS) 30
M11 SCANNER MOTOR
-2 -B11-B2 *
12V
2-4:LV
2-1:HV
-5 -B8-B5
DRUM
LED (JAM) 206-8 DJLED_CONT
*H 15-3 FIXHT3_CONT LAMP
TONER CONTROL -6 -B7-B6 820B-1-16 834-1-13 821-1
Dmax SIG
SCANNER
-8 -3-14 834-3-11 -3
EXPOSURE
-B5-B8 SENSOR/2
LAMP
TCSB
-9 -B4-B9 -4-13 834-4-10 823-1
LED ( ) 206-4 LED_CONT
*H 203-B13 5V3 15-7 S.GND
-10 -B3-B10 -5-12 834-5-9 -2 TRAY UPPER
Vref 206-3 TNLED_REF L 203-B12 T2UP_PS 15-8 5V1
-11 -B2-B11 -6-11 834-6-8 -3
TH+ 206-2 TEMP
* 203-B11 S.GND LIMIT SENSOR/2 15-9 S.GND
TH- -12 -B1-B12
206-1 3.3V2
* -7-10 834-7-7 825-1 15-10 REM/2 (24V1/12V2/5V2/-5V)
363-1-2 360-A1-A10 203-B10 5V3
206-13 MC24V_2 * -8-9 834-8-6 -2 NO PAPER 15-11 REM/3 (24V/2)
SEPARATION CRAW 363-2-1 -A2-A9 H 203-B9 T2_0PS 40-1
206-14 SPSD_DRV H -9-8 834-9-5 -3 SENSOR/2 15-12 MRL_TEST24V
SD1
203-B8 S.GND 40-2
SOLENOID -14-3 824-1 15-13 MRL_TEST_CONT
366-1-2 203-B3 5V3
-A3-A8 -15-2 -2 REMAINING 15-14 AC_OFF
TRAY2 (LT1000)
TONER RECYCLE 206-15 MC24V_2 L 203-B2 T2RM_PS
366-2-1 -A4-A7 -16-1 -3
MC14
203-B1 S.GND
CLUTCH
820A-3-12
235-4 T2_SET_P
PRE-CHARGING 364-1-2 -A5-A6 -13-2
206-17 MC24V_2 235-3 5V3
364-2-1 -A6-A5 -1-14
EXPOSURE LAMP 12-1 24V1 PRCB
PCL
206-18 PCL_CONT H
-2-13
12-4 12V2 PRCB
365-1-2 -A7-A4 -4-11
206-19 CHGM_B L 12-9 5V2 PRCB
CHRGE CLEANING 365-2-1 -A8-A3 12-10 5V2 PRCB
M14
206-20 CHGM_A L
MOTOR -A9-A2 840B-1-16 854-1-13 841-1 12-15 S.GND PRCB
204-A16 5V3
PRCB
L 204-A12 T3UP_PS
-6-11 854-6-8 -3 LIMIT SENSOR/3
332-1-6 330-1-11 204-A11 S.GND
210-1 TNSM24V -7-10 854-7-7 845-1 13-1 24V1 SCDB
332-2-5 330-2-10 210-2 TNSM24V 204-A10 5V3 13-2 24V1 SCDB
-8-9 854-8-6 -2 NO PAPER
332-3-4 330-3-9 H 204-A9 T3_0PS 13-3 24V1 DF
TONNER SUPPLY 210-3 TNSM_A P -9-8 854-9-5 -3 SENSOR/3
332-4-3 330-4-8 204-A8 S.GND 13-6 5V2 SCDB
210-4 TNSM_AB
M12
MOTOR P -14-3 844-1
332-5-2 330-5-7 204-A3 5V3 13-7 5V2 DF
210-5 TNSM_B P -15-2 -2 REMAINING
332-6-1 330-6-6 L 204-A2 T3RM_PS 13-10 S.GND SCDB
210-6 TNSM_BB P -16-1 -3
PS13 PS14 PS15 PS16
TLD
333-1 330-9-3
137-4 IN
TONER SUPPLY
137-7 S.GND
137-6 APS_CONT
-5-10 855-2-5 -2
137-5 COVER_SIG
H 236-A9 T3SIZE_S_PS
PAPER SIZE
-6-9 855-3-4 -3 SENSOR/1-3
324-3 94-1-15 95-1-15 236-A8 S.GND
FRONT DOOR 213-1 S.GND -7-8 855-4-3 847-1
324-2 94-2-14 95-2-14 236-A7 5V3
OPEN/CLOSE 213-2 FDOORR_PS L -8-7 855-5-2 -2 PAPER SIZE
324-1 94-3-13 95-3-13 236-A6 T3SIZE_L_PS
PS38
213-3 5V2 L
SENSOR /R -9-6 855-6-1 -3 SENSOR/2-3
236-A5 S.GND 187-1-5
-10-5 849-1 L CN132-5 5V 51-1
236-A4 3.3V2 -2-4
311-3 94-4-12 95-4-12 -11-4 -2 CN132-4 S.GND 51-2
FRONT DOOR 213-4 S.GND 236-A3 T3SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/3 -3-3
P CN132-3 IND 51-3
PS17 PS18 VR3
PS39
SENSOR /L 213-6 5V2 CN132-1 INDPR 51-5 L 31-2 FAN2
INDX SB
PRCB
860B-1-16 874-1-13 861-1
WRITING
PS40
OPEN/CLOSE SENSOR 213-9 5V2 -4-13 874-4-10 863-1 P -A2 ALM1 180-A11
204-B13 5V3 185-A10-3
-5-12 874-5-9 -2 -A3 S/HB1 180-A10
FM11
TRAY UPPER P
TRAY4
FM5
REVERSE EXIT A 415-3 341-4-1 94-13-3 95-13-3
204-B8 S.GND -A8 LPR5V 180-A5 12-22 24V1 OB
M8
403-4 /A P FAN 213-13 S.GND -14-3 864-1 185-A4-9
MOTOR B 415-4 204-B3 5V3 P -A9 GND 180-A4
403-5 B P -15-2 -2 REMAINING 185-A3-10 14-1 12V2 ICB
B 415-6 L 204-B2 T4RM_PS P -A10 -VIDEO2 180-A3
403-6 /B P -16-1 -3 185-A2-11
PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22
204-B1 S.GND PAPER SENSOR/4 -A11 +VIDEO2 180-A2 14-2 5V2 ICB
185-A1-12
ICB
TC
24V 213-15 TC_DRV H -13-2 P CN130-B1 LOAD 180-B12 14-4 S.GND ICB
416-5 417-2-5
403-8 24V 236-B1 5V3 185-B11-2
A 416-4 417-3-4 -1-14 P -B2 DACLK 180-B11 11-1 5V1 ICB
ADU REVERSE 403-9 A P 303-1 313-7-1 185-B10-3
A 416-6 417-4-3 5V 212-A7 5V -2-13 H -B3 DI 180-B10 11-2 5V1 ICB
M9
403-10 /A P 303-2 313-6-2 185-B9-4
MOTOR B 416-3 417-5-2 S.G. 212-A6 S.GND 860A-4-11 875-1-6 868-1 -B4 GND 180-B9 11-3 5V1 IP
403-11 B P 303-3 313-5-3 236-B10 5V3 185-B8-5
B 416-1 417-6-1 CONT 212-A5 DEVM_CONT H -5-10 875-2-5 -2 -B5 ALM2 180-B8 11-4 5V1 IP
403-12 /B P 303-4 313-4-4 H 236-B9 T4SIZE_S_PS
PAPER SIZE 185-B7-6
CLK 212-A4 DEVM_CLK P P -B6 S/HB2 180-B7
ICB
M3
MOTOR 303-7 313-1-7 -8-7 875-5-2 -2 PAPER SIZE 185-B4-9
(H/L) 212-A1 DEVM_GAIN L L 236-B6 T4SIZE_L_PS P -B9 GND 180-B4 11-8 S.GND ICB
303-8 -9-6 875-6-1 -3 185-B3-10
PS23 PS24
430-1 404-3 5V2 P.G. 236-B5 S.GND SENSOR/2-4 P -B10 -VIDEO1 180-B3 11-9 S.GND ICB
PAPER REVERSE 303-9 212-A8 DVFAN_D -10-5 869-1 185-B2-11
16 16
430-2 404-2 DECUR_PS H P.G. 236-B4 3.3V2 P -B11 +VIDEO1 180-B2 11-10 S.GND IP
303-10 212-A9 DVFAN_EM -11-4 -2 185-B1-12
SENSOR 430-3 24V
PS42
404-1 S.GND 212-A10 DVFAN_HL 236-B3 T4SIZE_VR PAPER SIZE VR/4 -B12 GND 180-B1 11-11 S.GND IP
303-11 -12-3 -3
VR4
15 15
SD7
407-2 GATE_DR L
25
FM4
FAN 212-A10 S.GND
25
MC13
DEVELOPER COOLING 212-A12 BINFF_EM L
PS25
ADU DECELERATION CLUTCH 426-2-1 301-1 316-7-1 L 205-14 T2PASS_PS CONVEYANCE 155-1 X2_CONT Y1CONT 13-18 P.GND FNS 21-4 P.GND
405-4 ADUDN_MC L 5V
MC2
212-B7 5V 880 -6-13 885-3
PS26
425-3 +5V 405-18 5V2 S.GND 212-B1 NC 205-9 5V3 164-A9-5 150-5 DSR 154-14 LCD_ADJ 12-11 -5V1 ADUDB
425-4 420-13-4 880 -11-8 887-2 P 140-5 /DTR2 P
88-1B
PAPER 425-4 -5V 405-17 -5V P.G. L 205-8 T4PASS_PS 140-6 /DSR2 150-6 DTR
INTER LOCK
425-5 GND 405-16 GND P.G. 205-7 S.GND 140-7 SHUT 150-7 SHUT
MIS-CENTERING 425-6 420-11-6 301-10 164-A6-8 154-11 LCD_D2 12-21 P.GND ADUDB
PS70
425-6 SI 405-15 DEF_SI P 24V 880 -13-6 888-1 140-8 SW_SIG 150-8 SW_SIG
SENSOR 425-7 420-10-7 301-11 205-6 5V3 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 164-A5-9 154-10 LCD_D1
17 17
425-7 GND 405-14 GND 24V 880 -14-5 888-2 140-9 WT_LED_ON 150-9 WT_LED_ON
425-8 420-9-8 H 205-5 VF_DRBPS DOOR OPEN/CLOSE 164-A4-10 154-9 LCD_D0
425-8 CLK 405-13 DEF_CLK P 880 -15-4 888-3 140-10 SHUT_LED _ON 150-10 SHUT_LED_ON
PS29
331-3 334-9-3
H 880 -17-2 889-2 150-13 SW_SIG 154-6 5V 88-2
420-6-11 CONT 212-B12 TONERM_CONT 13-8 5V2 LCT
LCD
424-1 331-4 334-8-4 322-4-4 H 205-2 VF_DRTPS CONVEYANCE DOOR 154-5 CP 88-3
LCT
PS43
405-8 5V2 331-6 334-6-6 322-2-6 164-B14-1 154-3 FLM
ADU DB TONER BOTTLE
MS2
LD 212-B9 TONERM_EM L
MS/L
P.G. 890 -A2-11 899 -2-8 897-2 136-3 LCD_D1 151-3 LCD_D1 12-2 24V1 HV
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION SENSOR 405-6 2ND_PS H 214-A11 BPSIZE_VR 164-B11-4
423-3 420-1-16 331-9 334-3-9 PAPER SIZE VR/BP
PS44
890 -A3-10 899 -3-7 897-3 12-19 P.GND HV
OB1
P.G.
VR5
MC1
L 214-A8 BPSIZE_S_PS PAPER SIZE 136-7 GND 151-7 GND
890 -A6-7 899 -6-4 896-3 164-B7-8
PS31
SENSOR/1-BP 164-B6-9
421-1 136-9 GND 151-9 GND
5V 410-11 +5V2 890 -A7-6 899 -7-3 895-1 164-B5-10
421-2 214-A6 5V3 136-10 FLM 151-10 FLM
S.G 410-10 P.GND 890 -A8-5 899 -8-2 895-2 164-B4-11
165-6 NC
166-2 NC
899 -9-1
166-4 GND
M5
421-7 MAIN BODY 227-B3 MAINFAN_EM L L 214-B11 BP_0PS NO PAPER SENSOR/BP
MOTOR (H/L) 405-5 H/L H 336-3 890 -B3-10 893-3 153-1 PWM 165-1 PWM
PS33
421-8
93-6
93-5
93-3
COOLING FAN/1
162-1-2
162-2-1
SW2
CN152-1 24V1
214-B5 BPDN_PS
82-2
82-1
83-3
304-7 314-1-7
H/L 227-B5 MAINM_HL 890 -B10-3 894-1
304-8 214-B3 5V3
P.G. 890 -B11-2 894-2
414-1 S.GND 304-9 L 214-B2 LOOP_PS LOOP SENSOR
14 14
464-1 24V
SWITCH
414-6 VPP
163-1-4
465-1 467-6-1 414-7 MD 350-1
406-6 5V2 188-7-1 202-A13 S_IN1 135-A1 S_OUT1
TRANSFER/ 465-2 467-5-2 414-8 S.GND -2 351-1 211-7 24V1
406-5 HP_PS_R H 188-6-2 202-A12 GND 135-A2 S.GND
SEPARATION PS/R 465-3 467-4-3 -3 -2 211-6 GND
PS53
-5 211-3 POLM_LOCK
PMDB
LAMP -9
202-A5 SHUTDOWN 135-A9 ERR_R 106-4
462-1-2 460-4-4 -10 202-A4 GND 135-A10 S.GND
MOTOR
HTR2
HD-105
M6
135-B6 EE_VV
H2
230-2 24V2
A 305-4 315-3-4 135-B8 AC_OFF
ICB
CONVEYANCE 461-2-2 PAPER EXIT MOTOR 230-4 /A P 202-B5 SW_SIG 135-B9 SW_SIG
408-2 ASUC_EM L B 305-3 315-5-2
202-B4 DDF_VV 135-B10 DDF_VV
461-3-1 230-5 B P
FM3
SUCTION FAN
IP-511
(OPTION)
402-A16 ADUCFAN_D H
ADU
FAN
24V2
PGND
***-** ***-**
CN113
CN113
CN112
CN112
450-1 436-3-4
36-1 CVM1_SIG
ADU PAPER 402-A15 5V2 ***-** ***-**
450-2 436-2-5
36-2 CVFEED_SIG CN110-1 GND CN170-50 GND
402-A14 ADUREV_PS H ***-** ***-**
REVERSE SENSOR 450-3 436-1-6
36-3 CV_SIZE0 CN110-2 AD_TG1 CN170-49 AD_TG1
PS45
***-** ***-**
PGND
CV
402-B17 5V2
(OPTION)
402-B16 REV_PS 36-8 CPF0 L 229-4 FIXFAN_D CN110-7 GND CN170-44 GND
SENSOR 452-3 342-2-2
PS46
402-B12 S.GND ***-** ***-** L 229-8 FIXFAN2_EM CN110-12 +RCK CN170-39 +RCK
MU-402
MU-401
343-1-3
FM7
***-** ***-**
37-4 OP_SIN CN110-14 GND CN170-37 GND
ADU PAPER 454-1 ***-** ***-**
402-B11 5V2 37-5 OP_DSR CN110-15 +TCK CN170-36 +TCK
454-2 ***-** ***-** 345-3-1
(OPTION)
New CV
402-B6 S.GND 447-10-3 433-10-3 L 229-14 WRFAN_EM WRITTING SECTION CN110-21 SDI CN170-30 SDI
SENSOR 402-A3 ADU_LATCH 217-10 ADU_LATCH P 338-2-3
B
A
38
37
36
35
14
14
13
13
H 229-15 WRFAN_HL
18
18
17
17
20
20
19
19
16
16
15
15
ADU LOCK 402-B2 LOCK_SD L 217-3 2NDM_CLK P CN110-28 +AD_D1 CN170-23 +AD_D1
457-1-2 402-A10 2NDM_CLK
447-2-11 433-2-11
DRUM MOTOR
402-B1 MC24V
FIXING MOTOR
35
USB
CN400-8 -5V
CN400-3 12V
CN400-5 5V/2
321-3 BIAS
CN400-2 24V/1
CN400-1 24V/3
37
321-4
38
445-2-9
445-1-10
320-4
TGR
320-10
227-A5 B.CONT B.CONT GUID PLATE 134-B9 GND
320-11 FT47 134-B10 GND
227-A4 5V2 5V2
89-1-2
89-2-1
320-12 CN110-B1 TG
227-A3 TXD TXD
320-13 -B2 CLAMP
227-A2 CLK CLK
7155/7165/7255/7272
104-2 5V1
104-1 5V1
100-2 5V1
100-1 5V1
LAN I/F
139-8 CTS
139-7 RTS
139-3 TXD
139-4 DTR
104-3 12V1
139-6 DSR
139-2 RXD
SEPARATION
139-1 DCD
71-1-8
71-2-7
71-3-6
71-4-5
71-5-4
71-6-3
71-7-2
71-8-1
72-2
72-1
105-3 S.GND
105-1 S.GND
105-2 S.GND
FOR KRDS
139-5 S.GND
25
A
MANUAL
(1)
SERVICE MANUAL
Crimp
MODEM
(OPTION)
RS232C I/F
750-1-10
219-1 IO_DTXD
750-2-9
[Symbol]
219-2 5V2
L Low level
750-3-8
H High level
4
Connector
FS-111/SF-101
FS-110/FS-210
219-3 IO_DCLK
[How to see the diagram]
750-4-7
50-1
P Pulse signal
Relay connector
Faston
751-1
2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.
239-2 5V2
LT-402/LT-412
751-3
Dec. 2003
239-3 GND
751-4
Analog signal/Unspecified signal
239-4 GND
751-5 88-1
751-6 88-2
A-2
PAGE
CB
Example)
(4) Signal flow
SGND
PS1
5VDC
(3) RC is the flat cable.
ADDITION
METHOD
signal flow
Direction of
the connector symbols ( )
The solid black circle ( ) among
PS1
indicates the direction of signal flow.
4
29
30
AC100V
31
AC120/127V
32
33
220 240V : INLET
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
POWER PLUG
34
APPENDIX
35
36
37
38
39